regent park central energy plant buildout installation · 2019-05-14 · regent park energy inc....

REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS

RFP19-5-RPB

for

Regent Park Central Energy Plant Buildout Installation

to

Oshawa PUC Energy Service Inc.

May 14, 2019

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 00 01 10 252 Buildout Table of Contents Project No. 218225 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 00 : PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 21 13 Request for Proposal ............................................................................. 24 DIVISION 01 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section Title No. of pages 01 00 10 General Instructions .............................................................................. 6 01 11 00 Summary of Work ................................................................................ 8 01 14 00 Work Restrictions ................................................................................. 3 01 21 00 Allowances .......................................................................................... 2 01 32 16.07 Construction Progress Schedules – Bar (GANTT) Chart ..................... 3 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ............................................................................ 5 01 35 29.06 Health and Safety Requirements .......................................................... 4 01 35 43 Environmental Procedures .................................................................... 5 01 45 00 Quality Control ..................................................................................... 3 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities .............................................................................. 3 01 52 00 Construction Facilities .......................................................................... 4 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures ..................................................... 3 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements ........................................................... 4 01 74 11 Cleaning ................................................................................................ 4 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ............................................................................. 2 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals .............................................................................. 13 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training ................................................................. 3 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements ................................................ 10 01 91 31 Commissioning Plan ............................................................................. 11 01 91 33 Commissioning Forms .......................................................................... 3+6 DIVISION 02 : EXISTING CONDITIONS Section Title No. of pages 02 41 99 Demolition ............................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 03 : CONCRETE Section Title No. of pages DIVISION 07 : THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section Title No. of pages 07 84 00 Firestopping .......................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 09 : FINISHES Section Title No. of pages 09 91 23 Interior Painting .................................................................................... 10


DIVISION 21 : FIRE SUPPRESSION Section Title No. of pages 21 05 01 Common Work Results for Mechanical ............................................... 19 21 05 03 Mechanical Demonstration & Training ................................................ 3 DIVISION 22 : PLUMBING Section Title No. of pages 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing .................................................. 7 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping ......................................................................... 9 22 13 17 Drainage Pipe Cast Iron ........................................................................ 3 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialties ............................................................................ 11 22 42 16 Commercial Sink .................................................................................. 3

DIVISION 23 : HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section Title No. of pages 23 05 00 Common Work for HVAC ................................................................... 6 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework........................................................................ 6 23 05 17 Pipe Welding ........................................................................................ 9 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges – Piping Systems ........................ 4 23 05 29 Hangers & Supports For HVAC Piping and Equipment ...................... 11 23 05 48 Vibration & Seismic Controls .............................................................. 11 23 05 52 Painting and Surface Preparation ......................................................... 3 23 05 53.01 Mechanical Identification ..................................................................... 13 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC....................................... 5 23 07 14 Thermal Insulation for Equipment ....................................................... 11 23 07 15 Thermal Insulation for Piping ............................................................... 14 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems ........................ 4 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems ......................... 6 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping ............................................................................... 9 23 20 13 Process Hot Water Piping Systems ...................................................... 24 23 20 15 Process Chilled Water Piping Systems ................................................. 19 23 21 14 Hydronic Specialties ............................................................................. 6 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps ................................................................................... 5 23 51 00 Breeching, Chimneys and Stacks ......................................................... 4 23 52 00 Heating Boiler ...................................................................................... 8 23 73 10 Air Handling – Built Up ....................................................................... 5 DIVISION 25 : INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Section Title No. of pages 25 01 11 EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning .............................. 6 25 05 01 EMCS: General Requirements ............................................................. 8 25 05 02 EMCS: Submittals and Review Process ............................................... 4 25 05 54 EMCS: Identification ............................................................................ 2 25 05 60 EMCS: Field Installation ...................................................................... 8


25 10 01 EMCS: Local Area Network (LAN)..................................................... 3 25 30 01 EMCS: Building Controllers ................................................................ 9 25 30 02 EMCS: Field Control Devices .............................................................. 16 25 90 01 EMCS: Site Requirements & Systems Sequences of Operation .......... 7 DIVISION 26 : ELECTRICAL Section Title No. of pages 26 05 00 Common Work Results - Electrical ...................................................... 11 26 05 14 Power Cable and Overhead Conductors (1001 V) ............................... 2 26 05 20 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000V) ................................................... 2 26 05 21 Wires and Cables (0-1000V) ................................................................ 3 26 05 28 Grounding - Secondary ......................................................................... 3 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ....................................... 2 26 05 32 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings ........................................... 4 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems ...................................................... 2 26 28 16.02 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers ............................................................ 2 26 28 23 Disconnect Switches – Fused and Non Fused ...................................... 2 26 29 03 Control Devices .................................................................................... 3 40 92 49 Variable Frequency Drives ................................................................... 5 APPENDIX A: OWNER SUPPLIED SHOP DRAWINGS Title No. of pages Johnson Controls York YK Max E Chiller – 1100 tons .............................................................. 28

• Chiller 13.8 to 4.16 KV Transformer Shop Drawings • IMM-pow Power Tranformer Installation IOM • 160.76-01Chiller IOM

Simoneau Sterling 500 BHP Packaged Hot Water Boilers ...................................................... 30 • ... Boiler Pre-StartUp Check List and Confirmation

HTS Engineering – Bell & Gossett Pumps, Suctions Guides, TDV, VFD’s .............................. 45 • Inertia Bases • Pump Checklist IOM

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 00 21 13

252 Buildout Request for Proposal

Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 INVITATION

.1 Request for Proposal:

.1 Ensure offers are signed under seal, executed, and dated and one (1) email pdf

copy of the proposal is received by Owner’s representative at or before 3:00 PM

EST (local time), on the Submission Deadline.

Proposal submission are to be addressed to:

Attention: Scott Rutherford, Procurement Manager

Reference: RFP#: RFP19-5-RPB

Oshawa PUC Networks Inc.

21 Bagot Street

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 1M9

E-mail: [email protected]

Facsimile: 905 579 8359

Telephone: 905 723 4626 x 5279

Any requests for clarification or questions regarding the content of this Proposal

should be made in writing and directed to the Procurement Manager.

RFP SCHEDULE

Issue RFP May 14, 2019

Site Visit May 21, 2019

Deadline for Submission of Questions May 23, 2019

Submission Deadline May 30, 2019

Date of Selection of Successful Respondent(s) June 5, 2019

Date for Issue of Purchase Order /Execution of the Contract June 7, 2019

.2 Offers submitted after above time may be returned to Bidder unopened.

.3 Offers will be opened privately immediately after time for receipt.

1.2 INTENT

.1 Intent of this call is to obtain an offer to perform Work to complete general installation of

3 x 500 BHP Hot Water Boiler + 1 x 1100 Ton Chiller and associated works located at

252 Sackville for Stipulated Price, in accordance with Contract Documents. The Owner

will retain a holdback valued at 10% of each Contractor invoice.

.2 Initiate Work within 2 weeks (or less) of receipt of notice of contract award.



Page 2

.3 The Contractor shall acknowledge, it is understood this is a fixed price contract and

no change orders will be awarded for any work outlined in the original scope. The

Contractor having visited the site are aware of site conditions and issues that may

reasonable be foreseen and have made allowance in their bid.

.4 Schedule: Contractor shall confirm completion date i.e. completion by December 31,

2019.

.5 The Contractor shall commit to completing the scope of work within the timeline

specified in the Contract. The Contract will be subject will liquidated damages in

the amount of $600 per day for 30 days. Beyond 30 days, if the work has not been

substantial completed, the Contractor agrees to provide overtime and/or additional

resources to complete the work else, RPEI, has the right to stop work and use

remaining contract funds to pursue an alternate Contractor to complete scope.

1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Contract Documents are identified as 252 Buildout, Project number 218225 as prepared

by the Consultant.

1.4 CONTRACT/BID DOCUMENTS

.1 Agreement Form.

.2 Definitions:

.1 Contract Document: defined in CCDC 2 Stipulated Price or CCDC 3 Cost Plus

(to upset limit).

.2 Bid Document: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders,

Bid Form.

.3 Queries/Addenda:

.1 Direct all tender questions to the Owner: Scott Rutherford, Purchasing Manager

in writing by email at [email protected].

.2 Questions will be received in writing by 11:00 AM Monday May 23, 2019.

.3 Addenda may be issued during RFP period. Addenda will become part of

Contract Documents. Include costs in Price.

.4 Verbal answers are only binding when confirmed by written addenda.

.5 Clarifications requested by Bidders must be in writing not less than three days

before date set for receipt of Bids. Reply will be in form of an addendum. Copy

of addendum will be forwarded to known Bidders no later than 1 working day(s)

before receipt of Bids.

.4 Product/System Options:

.1 Where Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be

considered by Owner Representative.

.2 When request to substitute product is made, Owner Representative may approve

substitution and will issue Addendum to known Bidders.

.3 In submission of substitutions to products specified, Bidders are to include in

their Bid, changes required in Work to accommodate such substitutions. Later



Page 3

claim by Bidder for addition to Contract Price a result of changes in Work

necessitated by use of substitutions will not be considered.

.4 Substituted products will be considered if submitted as an attachment to Bid

Form.

.5 Ensure submission provides sufficient information to enable Owner

Representative to determine acceptability of such products.

.6 Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to

accommodate each substitution, dollar amount of additions to or reductions from

Price, including revisions to other work.

.7 Provide specified products unless substitutions are submitted as noted and

subsequently accepted.

.8 Approval to submit substitutions prior to submission of Bids is not required.

1.5 SITE ASSESSMENT

.1 Site Examination:

.1 Visit project site and surrounding area before submitting Price/Proposal.

.2 A mandatory site visit is scheduled for Tuesday May 21, 2019 beginning at

10:00 AM to allow Bidders to review existing site conditions and provisions

as they pertain to work indicated on or in Documents. Failure to attend site

visit may result in Bid being ruled informal, at the discretion of the Owner.

.3 It is highly recommended for Bidders to visit and familiarize themselves with the

Place of Work and surrounding area prior to submitting a Bid, to ensure they are

familiar with the conditions on site and the extent of the work that is required.

Bidders are to make themselves aware of all existing conditions and difficulties

that may affect the execution of the Work. Bidders are welcome to schedule

addition site visits at their convenience prior to tender closing. General contractor

and major subtrade bidders are welcome.

.4 Claims by the Bidder will not be considered or allowed for conditions that could

be determined by careful and diligent examination of the Bid Documents, the

Place of the Work or both.

.2 Bidders Briefing:

.1 Not Applicable.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Prequalification:

.1 Not Applicable.

.2 Subcontractors:

.1 Owner reserves right to reject proposed subcontractor for reasonable cause.

1.7 BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS

.1 Security Deposit (Not Required)

.2 WSIB Clearance Certificate



Page 4

.3 Consent of Surety

.1 Submit with the Bid Form, a Consent of Surety/Agreement to Bond, stating that

the surety is willing to supply the Performance Bond specified.

.4 Performance Assurance

.1 Provide a Performance Bond in the amount of 50% of the Contract Value. The

bond shall remain in force and in effect throughout the period of date of award

until the date which is twelve (12) months after the date of final Acceptance.

.2 Include the cost of bonds as an alternative/optional price as indicated in the bid

form.

.5 Insurance:

.1 Provide signed "Undertaking of Insurance" on standard form provided by

insurance company stating intention to provide insurance to in accordance with

insurance requirements of Contract Documents.

.2 The liability and all-risk insurance must be issued jointly and name the following

parties:

.1 Regent Park Energy Inc.

.2 Toronto Community Housing

.3 Oshawa PUC Energy Services

.4 FVB Energy Inc.

.5 Dillon Consulting Inc.

.6 Bid Signing

.1 Bid Form shall be signed under seal by Bidder.

.2 Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who

will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal.

.3 Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also

sign. Insert the word partner under each signature. Affix seal to each signature.

.4 Corporation: Signature of duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal

signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under

each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the Bid is signed by officials other

than the President and Secretary of the company, or the President Secretary

Treasurer of the company, a copy of the by law or resolution of the Board of

Directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid in the

bid envelope.

.5 Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid under their

respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar

to the requirements of a Partnership.

.6 The Bidder, or the person or persons duly authorized to sign on the Bidder's

behalf, must initial and date each and every correction, change, erasure or

alteration contained in the completed Bid Form.

.7 Bid Requirements: Bidders are required to fill out ALL of the appendices/tables

mentioned below (as a minimum):

.1 CCDC 10 - Bid Stipulated Price Bid and copy of Bid Breakdown Form



Page 5

.2 State in Bid Form, time required to complete Work. Completion date in

Agreement must be completion time added to commencement date.

.3 Bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts time period stated in Contract documents

for performing Work. Completion date in Agreement is completion time added to

commencement date.

.4 Bidder, in submitting an offer, agrees to complete Work by date indicated in

Contract Documents, but may propose a revision to contract time with

adjustment to price.

.5 Consideration will be given to time of completion when reviewing Bids

submitted.

.8 Fees for Changes in Work:

.1 Include in Bid Form, percentage markup for overhead and profit applicable for

changes in Work, whether additions to or deductions from Work on which Bid

price is based.

.2 Include in Bid Form, fees proposed for subcontract work for changes (both

additions and deductions) in Work. Contractor may apply markup as noted, to

subcontractor's gross (net plus markup) costs on additional work.

1.8 OFFER ACCEPTANCE/ REJECTION

.1 Duration of Offer:

.1 Bids to remain open to acceptance, and irrevocable for 30 days after closing date.

.2 Acceptance of Offer:

.1 Owner reserves right to accept or reject any or all offers.

.2 After acceptance by Owner will issue to successful Bidder, written Bid

acceptance.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION



Page 6

Part 4 Supplementary Conditions

Contract, CCDC 2 – 2008 are hereby amended as follows:

GC 1.1 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Amend paragraph 1.1.7 with the following:

1.1.7 If there is a conflict within Contract Documents:

.1 The order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be

the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor,

the Definitions,

Supplementary Conditions,

the General Conditions,

Division 1 of the specifications,

Division 2 through 16 of the specifications,

material and finishing schedules,

The Drawings.

GC 5.2 – APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT:

Add paragraph 5.2.8:

5.2.8 After the first application for payment, the Contractor shall submit with all applications for

payment, a sworn statement in the form of a statutory declaration that all accounts for

labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment and other

indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor, and for which the Owner

might in any way be held responsible, have been paid in full, except for amount, properly

retained as holdback.


5.2.9 After the first application for payment, with each subsequent application for payment, the

Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with worker’s compensation legislation at

the Place of Work, including payments due there under.

GC 5.3 – PROGRESS PAYMENT:

Delete paragraph 5.3.1.3 and replace with the following:

5.3.1.3 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5

of the Agreement – PAYMENT no later than 30 days after the date of a certificate for

payment issued by the Consultant.

GC 5.5 – PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF WORK:

Delete paragraph 5.5.3.

GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT

Amend paragraph 5.7.4 with the following:

5.7.4 Delete reference to ‘no later than 5 days’ and Replace with ’no later than 30 days’.



Page 7

GC 6.2 – CHANGE ORDER


6.2.3 In the case of changes in the Work, Contractor and Subcontractor overhead and profit shall

be limited to and calculated as follows:

1. For Work provided by the Contractor, the Contractor is entitled to 10%

overhead plus 5% profit for a total mark-up of 15%.

2. For Work provided by the Subcontractor the Contractor is entitled to 5%

overhead plus 5% profit for a total mark-up of 10%.

GC 9.4 – CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:


9.4.2 The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the Ontario Occupational Health

and Safety Act.

GC 10.2 – LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, and FEES

Add paragraph 10.2.8

10.2.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for filing a ‘Notice of Project’

pursuant to GC 9.4.2.

GC 12.3 - WARRANTY

Add the following to the end of paragraph 12.3.4:

12.3.4 If interruption or shutdown of the Work is unavoidable then the Contractor is to allow for

Work to be performed after normal working hours.

ADD GC 12.4 – CONFIDENTIALITY


12.4.1 Drawings, blueprints, designs, specifications, and any information relating to the work

shall be treated by the Contractor and his Subcontractor(s) as confidential and may not be

divulged without the Owner’s written permission except for the purposes of executing the

Work.”

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 00 21 13 252 Buildout Request for Proposal Project No. 218225 Page 8 Part 5 APPENDIX A – SUBMISSION FORM – CCDC 10

Standard Construction Document - CCDC 10 - 1994

City: Province: Postal Code:

CCDC 10 � 1994 File 00412This contract is protected by copyright. Use of a CCDC 10 document not containing a CCDC 10 copyright seal constitutes aninfringement of copyright.

7

Appendix "E" to Stipulated Price Bid

Project Number:

Project:

Bidder:

SEPARATE PRICES

The following are our Separate Prices for the work listed hereunder. Such work and amounts are NOTincluded in our Bid Price. These Separate Prices do NOT include Value Added Taxes.

Description of Separate Price Work Separate Price

Amount ($)

(If Appendix "E" is not used, put "Not Applicable" and initial the bottom of the page)

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 00 21 13 252 Buildout Request for Proposal Project No. 218225 Page 9 Part 6 APPENDIX B – BID FORM

1 Mobilization, Administration, Safety and Construction Sequence Planning.

2 Cleaning, temporary utilities, barriers, 3rd party X-ray testing, etc.

3 Bonding

4 Sub-Total (1)* $

5

Demolition/Removals and

RelocationAs required to permit the installation of B-201, B-205N, and B-206N and CH-303, including but not limited to hangers and

supports, FCU-501 unit & piping/electrical, FCU-502 piping, pump disconnects/VFD's, CH-304 transformer, etc.

6 Sub-Total (2)* $

7Installation of 3 x 500 BHP Hot Water Boilers and associated pump including but not limited to connection of interlock

controls for combusion air dampers.

8 Installation of 1 x 1100 Ton Chiller, pumps and Transformer

9 Sub-Total (3)* $

10TAB - entire hot water boiler system and chiller system testing, ajusting and balancing including balancing valve, pump

settings and final report.

11Commissioning and start-up support, completion of pre-start checklist, and coordination with Owner supplied equipment

vendors.

12 Sub-Total (4)* $

13 900.1 Provide and install P-704 make up water pump and tie-in connection.

14900.2 Provide and install one (1) 2-way modulating make up water control valve for hot water system (CV-710). Provide

and install two (2) 2-way modulating make up water control valves for cooling tower makeup water system (CV-401 & CV-

15 900.3 Provide utility air connections on CHP mezzanine floor for pneumatic tools.

16900.4 Remove fencing around T1 Transformer in CHP room, reinstate 150 mm high curb at P3 Level equipment access

shaft to prevent water ingress.

17900.5 Provide and install three (3) cast iron floor drains on CHP mezzanine level. Connect and tie into existing CHP drainage

system.

18900.6 Install Owner Supplied Condenser Water Side Stream Filter in P3 Level and Owner Supplied Basin Heater in CT-401

on Roof Level.

19900.7 Provide and install VFD drive for P-401, control wire to BAS. Reconfigure power/control wiring to existing P-202, P-

203, P-204 boiler circulation pumps, starters, VFD's.

20 900.8 Painting - Stairwells from Ground to P3, P1 Electrical Room, P3 Electrical Room, Touch-up Paint

21 900.9 Provide and install stainless steel utility sink including DCW, DHW, and drain connections.

22900.10 Complete installation of 80 Ton Chiller including provision of heating coils, piping, insulation, pumping for AHU-501

and AHU-502 (Only the 80 Ton Chiller is provided by Owner all other components by Contractor).

23 900.11 Install Owner Supplied HW Distribution Pump P-104

24900.12 Provide and install new delta-wye 13.8 kV to 4160 V transformer for CH-301. Disconnect and remove existing

transformer.

25 Sub-Total (5)* $

26 Sub-Total (1)* + (2)* + (3)* + (4)*: $

27 HST (13%): $

28 TOTAL COST (incl HST)*: $

29

30 Schedule: Start Date and Completion Date:

31 Acknowledgement of Liquidated Damages:

32 OH&P/Markup Percentages for Extra Work:

33 Provide qualifications of the company:

34 Provide qualifications of Proposed Key Personnel including PM and welders:

35 Provide at least 3 district energy projects references:

Optional Scope Items

Other Criteria

____________________________________

Testing, Adjusting, Balancing

Commissioning

Installation

Sub-Category Bid Price (CDN $)

General Conditions

Regent Park Energy Inc.

252 Buildout - Bid Form

Item No. Major Category

Company Name

____________________________________

Signature, (Authorized Signing Agent)

____________________________________

Print Name & Date

Page 1 of 1

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 00 21 13 252 Buildout Request for Proposal Project No. 218225 Page 10 Part 7 APPENDIX C – OPUC STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Date: February 7th, 2011

OSHAWA PUC NETWORKS INC. STANDARD TERMS & CONDITIONS

1. DEFINITIONS OPUCNI - The Oshawa PUC Networks Inc., its successors and

assigns. Bidder - The person, firm or corporation submitting a quotation

to the OPUCNI. Company - The person, firm or corporation to whom the

OPUCNI awards a Contract, its successors and assigns. Contract - The purchase order authorizing the Company to do

the work, the quotation, the bonds or security (if any), the Company's quotation and change notices, appendices, and addenda (if any).

Subcontractor - A person, firm or corporation having a Contract

with the Company for any part of the work. Quotation Document - The documents issued by the OPUCNI

in response to which quotations are invited for the performance of Work or supply of equipment.

Work - All labour, materials, products, articles, equipment,

fixtures, services, supplies, acts required, furnished or performed by the Company, which is subject of the Contract.

2. SUBMISSION OF QUOTATION Bidders must submit quotations on the forms and in the

envelopes supplied by the OPUCNI. The Bidders designated signing officer must sign the quotation

form. The signature submitted on any joint bid is on behalf of each of

the Bidders. If the Bidder is not a limited company, he must submit a copy of

the most recent business or partnership registration form filed by the Bidder with the Ministry of Consumer and Commercial Relations.

Quotations must be legible, written in ink, or typewritten and the

Bidder's authorized signing officer must initial erasures, over-writings or strikeouts.

Failure to return the quotation form on invitation may result in

the removal of the Bidder from the OPUCNI's Bidder's list. The OPUCNI will not consider any quotations received after the

closing time.

Should a dispute arise from the terms and conditions of the quotation form, regarding meaning, intent or ambiguity, the decision of the OPUCNI shall be final.

3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND ORDER OF

PROCEDURE The contract documents shall consist of, the purchase order, the

Quotation Document, and the Company's quotation. The order in which the documents and portions thereof, named

above, take precedence, notwithstanding their issued or executed chronological order.

Amendments to the Contract, in the form of purchase order

alterations, shall take precedence over the documents or portions thereof amended thereby. Purchase order alterations, appendices and addenda to any contract document become part of that document.

The intent of the contract is that the Company supply Work that

is fit and suitable for the OPUCNI's intended use and complete for a particular purpose.

None of the conditions contained in the Bidder's standard or

general conditions of sale have any effect unless explicitly agreed to by the OPUCNI and specifically referred to in the purchase order.

The laws of the Province of Ontario govern the interpretation of

the contract. 4. CLARIFICATION OF QUOTATION DOCUMENTS It is a requirement of the Bidder, prior to submission of its

quotation, to forward all requests for any clarification of Quotation Documents to the appropriate designate calling the quotation.

No officer, agent or employee of the OPUCNI can orally

authorize an alteration to any portion of the documents. Every notice, advice or other communications pertaining thereto

are as follows:

(a) Prior to completion closing time, in the form of a written addendum;

(b) After the OPUCNI's acceptance of a quotation, in writing,

signed by an authorized officer of the Company, and accepted by the OPUCNI.


5. PROOF OF ABILITY

The OPUCNI reserves the right to request evidence of the Bidders ability, as well as any Subcontractor, in terms of experience and facilities, to perform the Work by the specified delivery date. The OPUCNI reserves the right to approve or disapprove the use of any of the company's equipment.

6. DELIVERY The Company is responsible for delivering or completing the

Work specified or called for in or under the quotation as soon as possible within the period specified, unless otherwise stated, after receipt of a purchase order.

Each delivery must include a detailed delivery ticket or piece

tally, showing the exact quantity of goods, materials, articles, or equipment. The OPUCNI is not bound to accept the particulars of the delivery ticket or piece tally signed by Forman's, Stockkeeper's or other receiver's receipts.

Unless otherwise stated, all work pursuant to a purchase order

based on the quotation, is subject to inspection by the OPUCNI at the point of unloading, or the site of work or service.

The Company is responsible for arranging completion of the

Work as specified in the Contract. 7. PRICING REQUIREMENTS Quote each item separately, in Canadian Funds, F.O.B.

destination. Prices bid must include all incidental costs and the Company

deemed satisfied as to the full requirements of the quotation. The OPUCNI will not accept claims for extra work and any additional work needs written authorization before commencement. Should the Company require more information or clarification, they must do so before the submission of the quotation.

Payment is full compensation for all costs related to the Work,

including operating and overhead costs to provide work to the satisfaction of the OPUCNI.

All prices quoted shall include applicable customs duty, excise

tax, freight, insurance and all charges of any kind attributable to the work. Goods and Services Tax and Provincial Sales Tax are extra and not shown, unless otherwise specified herein.

If the Bidder intends to manufacture or fabricate any part of the

Work outside Canada, it shall arrange its shipping procedures so that its agent or representative in Canada is the importer of record for custom purposes.

Should any additional or variation in tax or duty be imposed by

the Government of Canada or the Province of Ontario that are directly applicable to the Work specified or called for in the quotation by the Bidder and before the delivery or the Work and pursuant to a purchase order issued, by the OPUCNI, the appropriate increase or decrease in the price of the Work changes as of the effective date.

8. TERMS OF PAYMENT

The OPUCNI reserves the right to hold back, where required by the Construction Lien Act, appropriate moneys until 45 days after the completion of Work.

8. TERMS OF PAYMENT (cont’d)

Payments made thereunder, including final payment, shall not relieve the Company from its obligations or liabilities under the Contract. Acceptance by the Company of the final payment, shall constitute a waiver of claims by the company against the OPUCNI, except those previously made in writing in accordance with the Contract and still unsettled. The OPUCNI shall have the right to withhold from any sum otherwise payable to the Company such amount as may be sufficient to remedy any defect or deficiency in the Work, pending correction of it.

9. PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Company shall, at its expense, defend all claims, actions or proceedings against the OPUCNI based on any allegations that the Work or any part of the Work constitutes an infringement of any patent, copyright or other proprietary right, and shall pay to the OPUCNI all costs, damages, charges and expenses, including its lawyers' fees on a solicitor and his own client basis occasioned to the OPUCNI by reason thereof. The Company shall pay all royalties and patent license fees required for the Work. If the Work or any part thereof is in any action or proceeding held to constitute an infringement, the Company shall forthwith either secure for the OPUCNI the right to continue using the Work or shall at the Company's expense, replace the infringing Work with non-infringing Work or modify it so that the Work no longer infringes.

10. ALTERNATIVES AND EQUIVALENTS

The OPUCNI may consider equivalents or alternatives where the mark or brand (if applicable) accompanies the quotation, unless otherwise stated. The OPUCNI reserves the right to determine the equivalency of all alternatives and its decision shall be final.

11. ASSIGNMENT The Company shall not assign the Contract or any portion

thereof without the prior written consent of the OPUCNI. 12. LAWS AND REGULATIONS The Company shall comply with relevant Federal, Provincial and

Municipal statutes and by-laws pertaining to the Work and its performance. The Company shall be responsible for ensuring similar compliance by its suppliers and Subcontractors.


The laws of the Province of Ontario govern the interpretation of

the contract. 13. CORRECTION OF DEFECTS If at any time prior to one year after the actual delivery date or

completion of the Work, (or specified warranty or guarantee period if longer than one year) any part of the Work becomes defective or is deficient or fails to meet the requirements of the Contract, the Company, upon request, shall make good every such defect, deficiency or failure without cost to the OPUCNI. The Company shall pay all transportation costs for Work both ways between the Company's factory and repair depot and the point of use.

14. BID ACCEPTANCE The OPUCNI reserves the right to award by item, or part thereof,

groups of items, or parts thereof, or all items of the quotations, and to award contracts to one or more Bidders submitting identical quotations as to price; to accept or reject any quotations in whole or in part; to waive irregularities and omissions, if in so doing, it serves the best interests of the OPUCNI. No liability shall accrue to the OPUCNI for any decision in this regard.

Quotations shall be irrevocable for 60 days after the official

closing time. The placing in mail or delivery to the Bidder's shown address,

given in the notice of award to a Bidder, by the OPUCNI, shall constitute notice of acceptance of the Contract, by the OPUCNI, to the extent described in the notice of award.

15. DEFAULT BY COMPANY (a) If the Company commits any act of bankruptcy or if a receiver is

appointed on account of its insolvency or in respect of any of its property, or if the Company makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; then, in any such case, the OPUCNI may, without notice, terminate the Contract.

(b) The OPUCNI reserves the right to terminate the contract upon

expiration of ten days from the date of written notice to the Company if the Company:

i) Fails to comply with any request, instruction or order of the

OPUCNI; ii) fails to pay its accounts; iii) fails to comply with or persistently disregards statues,

regulations, by-laws or directives of relevant authorities relating to the Work;

iv) fails to prosecute the Work with skill and diligence, or

assigns or sublets the Contract or any portion thereof; without the OPUCNI's prior written consent;

v) refuses to correct defective work; or is otherwise in default in carrying out its part of any of the terms, conditions and obligations of the Contract.

(c) Any termination of the Contract by the OPUCNI, as per section

15 (b), shall be without prejudice to any other rights or 15. DEFAULT BY COMPANY (cont’d)

remedies the OPUCNI may have and without incurring any liability whatsoever in respect thereto.

(d) If the OPUCNI terminates the Contract, it is entitled to:

i) take possession of all Work in progress, materials and construction equipment then at the project site (at no additional charge for retention or use of the construction equipment), and finish the Work by whatever means the OPUCNI may deem appropriate under the circumstances;

ii) withhold any further payments to the Company until

completion of the work and the expiry of all obligations under the Correction of Defects section;

iii) recover from the Company loss, damage and expense

incurred by the OPUCNI by reason of the Company's default (which may be deducted from any moneys due or becoming due to the Company, any balance to be paid by the Company to the OPUCNI).

16. CONTRACT CANCELLATION If the OPUCNI deems it necessary, it reserves the right to

immediately cancel any uncompleted or unperformed portion of the Work or part thereof. In the event of such a cancellation the OPUCNI and the Company may negotiate a settlement.

The OPUCNI shall not be liable to the Company for loss of

anticipated profit on the cancelled portion or portions of the Work.

17. QUANTITIES Where approximate quantities exist, no guarantee of accuracy

exists and the numbers given are without any liability on behalf of the OPUCNI. Quantities given are for comparison purposes only.

The OPUCNI accepts only payment by the unit, complete at the

quoted rate, on actual acceptable quantities. 18. SAMPLES Upon request, samples submitted are strictly in accordance with

instructions. The request for samples, subsequent to the opening of quotations, requires that delivery must follow within (3) working days after the request, unless the OPUCNI grants additional time. Samples submitted are free of charge and returned at the Bidder's expense, if so requested, provided tests do not destroy the product, or providing they are not a requirement for comparison purposes.


The acceptance of the samples by the OPUCNI shall be at its

sole discretion and any such acceptance in no way implies relief of the Company from its obligations under the Contract.

Current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must accompany

all samples submitted, when applicable. 19. SURETY The Company shall, if the OPUCNI in its absolute discretion so

desires, satisfy surety requirements by providing a deposit in the form of a certified cheque, bank draft or money order or other form of surety, in an amount determined by the OPUCNI. The OPUCNI may hold this surety until 60 days after the day on which all Work covered by the Contract is complete and accepted. The OPUCNI may return the surety before the 60 days provided satisfactory evidence indicating that all liabilities incurred by the Company in carrying out the Work have expired or satisfied, discharged or provided for and the receipt of a clearance certificate from the Workers' Compensation Board issued.

Failure to furnish the surety within two weeks from date of

request thereof by the OPUCNI shall make the award of the contract by the OPUCNI subject to withdrawal.

20. WORKPLACE SAFETY AND INSURANCE BOARD

All of the Company's personnel must be covered by the insurance plan under the Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. Upon request by the Group, an original Letter of Good Standing from the Workplace Safety and Insurance Board shall be provided prior to the commencement of Work indicating all payments by the Company to the Board have been made. Prior to final payment, a Certificate of Clearance must be issued indicating all payments by the Company to the Board in conjunction with the subject Contract have been made and that the Group will not be liable to the Board for future payments in connection with the Company's fulfillment of the contract. Further Certificates of Clearance or other types of certificates shall be provided upon request.

21. INSURANCE

Upon request by the OPUCNI, the Company shall shall, during the term of the Contract, and at its own expense, maintain and keep in full force and effect:

i) commercial general liability insurance on an occurrence basis having a minimum inclusive coverage limit, including personal injury and property damage, of not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000.00) per occurrence, which shall be extended to cover contractual liability, products and completed operations liability, owners/contractors protective liability and must also contain a cross liability clause naming OPUCN as additional insured and a severability of interest clause; and

ii) automobile liability insurance on all owned and non-owned vehicles used in connection with the Contract and such insurance coverage shall have a limit of not less than two

million dollars ($2,000,000.00) per vehicle, in respect of bodily injury (including passenger hazard) and property damage inclusive of any one accident and mandatory accident benefits.

A certified copy of such policy or certificate shall be provided to OPUCNI prior to commencement of the Work. Further certified copies shall be provided upon request.

22. LIABILITY The Company agrees to defend, at all times, fully indemnify and

save harmless the OPUCNI from all actions, suits, claims and demands, losses, costs, charges and expenses arising by reason of injury or death to any person(s) or any property or charges brought or made against or incurred by the OPUCNI from or relating to the Work performed or not yet performed herein.

23. PROJECT SITE WORKING CONDITIONS The onus shall be upon the Bidder to investigate the project site

and inform itself, before bidding, of all the physical and working conditions and administrative practices.

24. SAFETY The Company shall be responsible for being aware of all

governing regulations including any established by the OPUCNI related to employee health and safety. The Company shall keep its employees and Subcontractors informed of such regulations.

25. UNPAID ACCOUNTS The Company shall indemnify the OPUCNI from all claims

arising out of the unpaid accounts relating to the Work. The OPUCNI shall have the right at any time to require satisfactory evidence that the Work in respect of which any payment made or not yet made by the OPUCNI is free and clear of liens, attachments, claims, demands, charges or other encumbrances.

26. SUSPENSION OF WORK The OPUCNI may without invalidating the Contract, suspend

Work by the Company, from time to time, in part or in whole for such reasonable period of time as the OPUCNI may determine.

The resumption and completion of Work after the suspension

shall be governed by the schedule established by the OPUCNI. 27. CHANGES IN THE WORK The OPUCNI may, without invalidating the Contract, direct the

Company to make changes to the Work. When a change causes an increase or decrease in the Work, the Contract price increases or decreases by the application of unit prices as per the quantum of such increases or decreases, or in absence of applicable unit prices, by an amount to be agreed upon between the OPUCNI and the Company. All such changes shall be in writing and approved by the OPUCNI.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DEFINITIONS

.1 “Provide” shall mean supply, install and connect.

1.2 TAXES

.1 Pay all taxes properly levied by law (including Federal, Provincial and Municipal).

1.3 FEES, PERMITS and CERTIFICATES

.1 Pay all fees and obtain all permits. Provide authorities with plans and information for acceptance certificates. Provide inspection certificates as evidence that work conforms to requirements of Authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Building permit from the City of Toronto and Registration for P# with Technical Standards and Safety Authority (TSSA) have been obtained by the Owner. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all necessary inspections to compile with and closeout Building permit and/or TSSA requirements.

.3 Submit work permits for specific areas of work as per the approved detailed construction schedule.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

.1 The Consultant has prepared a draft schedule which has been included in the tender documents. The Contractor must review this schedule and submit their bid price based on adhering to the schedule or an improved version of the schedule as agreed to by the Owner, Consultant and Contractor.

.2 Schedule and execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to the normal use of premises.

.3 Refer to Section 01 32 16.07 Construction Progress Schedule Bar (GANTT) Chart for scheduling details.

.4 Refer to Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions for description of work hours.

1.5 SITE ASSESSMENT

.1 Site Examination

.1 Visit and become familiar with the Place of Work and surrounding area prior to submitting a Bid to become familiar with the conditions on site and the extent of the work that is required. Become aware of all existing conditions and difficulties that may affect the execution of the Work.

.2 Claims by the Bidder will not be considered or allowed for conditions that could be determined by careful and diligent examination of the Bid Documents, the Place of the Work or both.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

.1 Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures for details. Submit photographs of surrounding properties, objects and structures liable to be damaged or be the subject of subsequent claims.

.2 Provide photographs of the space on first day of work before commencing demolition or construction work, highlighting any existing damage. Provide photographs on last day of work demonstrating building condition at completion.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 References and Codes:

.1 Materials shall be new and work shall conform to the minimum applicable standards of the “References” indicated in the specification sections, the National Building Code of Canada 2010 (NBC) and all applicable Provincial and Municipal codes. In the case of conflict or discrepancy the most stringent requirement shall apply.

.2 Building Smoking Environment:

.1 Smoking is not permitted in the Building. Obey smoking restrictions on building property.

.3 Hazardous Material Discovery:

.1 Stop work immediately when material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos, Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB), mould or other designated substance is encountered during demolition work. .1 Take preventative measure and promptly notify Consultant. .2 Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from

Consultant.

1.8 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with both the National Building Code of Canada 2010 and the National Fire Code of Canada 2010 for safety of persons in buildings in the event of a fire and the protection of buildings from the effects of fire, as follows;

.1 The National Building Code (NBC): for fire safety and fire protection features that are required to be incorporated in a building during construction.

.2 The National Fire Code (NFC): .1 The on-going maintenance and use of the fire safety and fire protection

features incorporated in buildings. .2 The conduct of activities that might cause fire hazards in and around

buildings. .3 Limitations on hazardous contents in and around buildings. .4 The establishment of fire safety plans. .5 Fire safety at construction and demolition sites.

.2 Welding and cutting:

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 3

.1 Contractor to adhere to the work restrictions developed by the Consultant to minimize the access requirements of the Work. Coordinate with Consultant for access to areas not identified in the guidelines.

.2 At least 48 hours prior to commencing cutting, welding or soldering procedure, provide to Consultant: .1 Notice of intent, indicating devices affected, time and duration of

isolation or bypass. .2 Prepare and submit Hot Work Permit requests in accordance with the

Real Property Service Provider requirements and protocols. .3 Return hot work permit to Consultant immediately upon completion of

procedures for which permit was issued. .3 A fire watcher as described in NFC shall be assigned when welding or cutting

operations are carried out in areas where combustible materials within 15m may be ignited by conduction or radiation.

.3 Where work requires interruption or cause activation of fire alarms or fire suppression, extinguishing or protection systems:

.1 Provide “Watchman Service”; In general, watchman service is defined as an individual conversant with “Fire Emergency Procedures”, performing fire picket duty within an unprotected and unoccupied (no workers) area once per hour.

.2 Retain services of manufacturer for fire protection systems on daily basis or as approved by Consultant, to isolate, monitor, and protect all devices relating to: .1 Modification of fire alarms, fire suppression, extinguishing or protection

systems; and/or .2 Cutting, welding, soldering or other construction activities that might

activate fire protection systems. .3 Immediately upon completion of work, restore fire protection systems to normal

operation and verify that all devices are fully operational. .4 Inform fire alarm system monitoring agency and local Fire Department

immediately prior to isolation and immediately upon restoration of normal operation.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Refer to Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control for details.

1.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

.1 Refer to Section 02 81 01 – Hazardous Materials for details.

.2 Comply with the requirements of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and regarding labelling and the provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.3 For work in occupied buildings, give the Consultant 48 hours notice for work involving hazardous substances (Canada Labour Code Part II Section 10), and before painting, caulking, installing carpet or using adhesives and other materials, that cause off gassing.

1.11 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

.1 Refer to Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities for details.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 4 1.12 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

.1 Refer to Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities for details.

1.13 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

.1 See Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures for details.

1.14 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

.1 See Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements for details.

1.15 EXAMINATION and PREPARATION

.1 Mandatory examination of the site is required prior to tender submittal.

.2 Examine site and conditions likely to affect work and be familiar and conversant with existing conditions.

.3 Before commencing work, establish location and extent of services lines in area of work and notify Consultant of findings.

.4 Contractor may propose as a value added service, to create three-dimensional computer model complete with photographic overlay of the complete mechanical rooms where construction occurs. The model shall be generated using three-dimensional spatial scanning equipment for existing services equipment combined with Building Information Modeling (BIM) software for new as-built equipment.

1.16 EXECUTION

.1 Cut, Patch and Make Good:

.1 Cut existing surfaces as required to accommodate new work.

.2 Remove all items so shown or specified.

.3 Patch and make good surfaces cut, damaged or disturbed, to Consultant’s approval. Match existing material, colour, finish and texture.

.2 Firestop and smoke seal systems: see Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping.

.3 Sleeves, Hangers and Inserts: co-ordinate setting and packing of sleeves and supply and installation of hangers and inserts. Obtain Consultant’s approval before cutting into structure.

.4 Unless otherwise specified, materials for removal become the Contractor's property and shall be taken from site.

1.17 WASTE MANAGEMENT

.1 See Section 01 74 21 - Construction/demolition Waste Management and Disposal for details.

1.18 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for details.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 5 1.19 CLEANING

.1 See Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning for details.

1.20 SECURITY CHECK

.1 All personnel employed on this project will be subject to a security check. Obtain requisite clearance of Reliability or higher, as instructed, for each individual required to enter the premises.

.2 Personnel will be checked daily at start of work shift and given a pass, which must be worn at all times. Pass must be returned at end of work shift and personnel checked out.

1.21 NOTIFICATION TIMES

.1 Work Notices: 10 work days.

.2 Building Closure Notices: minimum 15 work days.

.3 System Shut Down Notices: minimum 15 work days.

1.22 COST BREAKDOWN

.1 Before submitting first progress claim, submit breakdown of Contract Amount in detail as directed by Consultant and aggregating the Contract Amount. After approval by Consultant cost breakdown will be used as the basis of progress payments.

1.23 PRECEDENCE

.1 The specification document shall take precedence over the “Issue for Tender” drawings.

.2 Dalhousie University General Requirements document, Rev 01 Jan. 2014, takes precedence over Division 01 Sections:

.1 01 14 00 Work Restrictions

.2 01 29 00 Payment Procedure

.3 01 35 00 Health, Safety and Environmental for Construction

.4 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities

.5 01 52 00 Construction Facilities

.6 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

.7 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

.8 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 00 10 252 Buildout GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 6 Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 11 00 252 Buildout SUMMARY OF WORK Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 The specifications, together with the drawings, are intended to provide complete information for the complete installation and commissioning of the District Energy Centre boiler and chiller and other additions. The installations shall be complete with all details and material for a first class installation even though every miscellaneous item may not be mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings.

.2 The Contractor shall carefully examine the plans and specifications for the works and visit the site of the work and make himself fully familiar with all aspects of the work involved, general and local conditions, all federal, provincial and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and all other pertinent items.

.3 Work under this contract generally includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

.1 The relocation of fan coil FCU-501 units, tanks, VFD drives, conduits, power supply, hangers, lighting, etc. to permit the installation of new equipment.

.2 The general construction and installation of: .1 3 x 500 BHP packaged hot water heating boilers with associated pumps

P-201N, P-205N, and P-206 .2 1 x 1100 ton chiller with associated pumps P-303 and P-403 .3 The reconfiguration of the EAST hot water and chilled distribution lines

such that the most easterly line is RETURN to the plant and the westerly line is SUPPLY from the plant. (Refer to M-8225-903).

.4 Provision and/or expansion of controls and programming for six (6) boilers and associated pumps and five (5) chiller sequence on the existing Tridium Niagara AX plant control system.

.5 Hot water, chilled water, and condenser water system flow testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) including documentation of final settings and report.

.3 Provide as addition cost/scope items; the general construction and installation of: .1 [Owner Supplied] Hot water distribution pump P-104, including inertia

base and VFD. .2 [Owner Supplied] Condenser water sidestream filtration system SSF-400 .3 Contractor Supplied Softened make up water pump P-704 and

valved/control valve tie into penthouse condensing boiler loop including wiring and controls.

.4 Replacement of make up water solenoid valves with new control valves including wiring and controls.

.5 Extension and provision of utility air in the CHP mezzanine room from the P3 level chiller room compressed air system.

.6 Provision of three (3) new floor drains in the CHP mezzanine room floor and tie-into drainage system on the CHP engine room floor.

.7 Removal of fencing around Transformer #1 in the CHP engine room and reinstatement of 150 mm floor curb at P3 Level equipment access shaft.


.8 Provision of P2 Level service sink.

.9 Paint floor and walls to height of 3.0 m (10 ft) in: .1 Access/egress stairways from plant: ground floor to P2 level and

P3 level .2 P1 High Voltage Electrical Room .3 P3 Medium Voltage Electrical Room

.10 Provision Cash Allowance: Commissioning Agent (Owner’s Discretion).

.4 General work applicable for all buildings:

.1 Mechanical .1 Coordinate all work with Owner’s Representative. .2 Obtain all necessary permits and authorizations. .3 Submit project schedule and update schedule on a weekly basis. .4 Provide notice for mechanical, electrical, structural inspections. .5 Offload, stage and inspect all Owner Supplied equipment with Owner’s

Representative. .6 Submit all shop drawings and submittals required. .7 Coordinate piping tie-in location at wall penetration with Owner’s

Representative. .8 Mechanical installation as indicated on drawings. .9 Restore floor, walls and ceiling to new condition that have been

damaged. .10 Pressure test, flush and clean all piping .11 Commissioning and Start-Up. .12 Test, Adjust, and Balance .13 Provide closeout documents, as-built drawings, and warranty.

.2 Electrical .1 Supply and install power wiring to all new devices indicated on the

electrical drawings. .3 Controls

.1 The Controls Contractor will be responsible for the low voltage electrical installation of all the controls and metering equipment and commissioning of the controls and metering equipment. All mechanical installation of the controls and instrumentation shall be by the Contractor.

.2 Wire and integrate all new devices and equipment to existing plant control system as per control architecture drawings.

1.2 CONTRACT METHOD

.1 Construct Work under single stipulated price undertaken with a CCDC 2 Contract.


1.3 WORK BY OTHERS

.1 Co-operate with other Contractors in carrying out their respective works and carry out instructions from [Consultant].

.2 Co-ordinate work with that of other Contractors. If any part of work under this Contract depends for its proper execution or result upon work of another Contractor, report promptly to Consultant, in writing, any defects which may interfere with proper execution of Work.

.3 Work of Project executed prior to start of and/or during Work of this Contract, and which is specifically excluded from this Contract:

.1 The delivery, offloading, and setting in place of boilers and chiller + transformer.

1.4 FUTURE WORK

.1 Not Applicable

1.5 WORK SEQUENCE

.1 Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's [continued] [intermittent] use of premises during construction.

.2 Construct Work in stages to provide for continuous public usage. Do not close off public usage of facilities until use of one stage of Work will provide alternate usage.

.3 Required stages:

.1 Obtain all permits and licenses required to allow construction to commence. Fees to be borne by Contractor.

.2 Coordinate, receive, offload, and inspect all equipment with Owner’s Representative.

.3 Construction of the interior piping and ETS equipment, including: welding, controls, control cable, fittings, supports, and wiring

.4 Hydrostatically test all joints (while exposed) to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.5 Insulate, prime/paint, label & tag all piping and valves.

.6 Flush and clean all pipes.

.7 Commissioning and demonstration including testing, adjusting, and balancing.

.8 Maintain fire access/control.

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

.1 Co-ordinate use of premises under direction of Owner.

.2 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.

.3 Remove or alter existing work to prevent injury or damage to portions of existing work which remain.

.4 Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as directed by Owner’s Representative and/or Consultant.


.5 At completion of operations condition of existing work: equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.

1.7 OWNER OCCUPANCY

.1 Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period for execution of normal operations.

.2 Co-operate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner usage.

1.8 OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS

.1 Owner has placed orders with suppliers for specific products, to expedite Work and for other purposes in Owner's interests.

.2 Contractor responsibility for purchase, handling, and installation for Owner Furnished or Pre-Purchased items is same as for other Contractor-furnished products with the exception of payment.

.3 Owner reserves the right to delay delivery of Owner-furnished items by up to thirty (30) days at no extra cost to the Owner.

.4 Owner Responsibilities:

.1 Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's instructions, and certificates to Contractor.

.2 Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor.

.3 Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance with Progress Schedule.

.4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor.

.5 Submit claims for transportation damage.

.6 Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missing items.

.7 Arrange for manufacturer's field services; arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to Contractor.

.5 Contractor Responsibilities:

.1 Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in progress schedule.

.2 Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to Consultant notification of observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non-conformance with Contract Documents.

.3 Receive and unload products at site.

.4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner; record shortages, and damaged or defective items.

.5 Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage.

.6 Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements.

.7 Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products.

.8 Provide installation inspections required by public authorities.

.9 Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor or subcontractor on site under his control.

.6 Schedule of Owner furnished items:


.1 1 x 1100 ton York Chiller + transformer, estimated value $500,000.

.2 3 x 500 BHP Boilers, estimated value $1,000,000

.3 Hydronic Pumps: P-104, P-201, P-205, P-206, P-303, P-403, estimated value $80,000

1.9 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED ITEMS

.1 Contractor Responsibilities:

.1 Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in progress schedule.

.2 Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to Consultant notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non-conformance with Contract Documents.

.3 Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals to Consultant for review.

.4 Receive and unload products at site.

.5 Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage.

.6 Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements.

.7 Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products.

.8 Provide installation inspections required by public authorities.

.9 Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor or Subcontractor on site or under his control.

.10 Arrange for manufacturers training sessions as required.

1.10 ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING BUILDING

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to building operations and normal use of premises. Arrange with Owner to facilitate execution of work.

.2 Use only elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors, escalators existing in building for moving workers and material.

.1 Protect walls of passenger elevators, to approval of Owner prior to use.

.2 Accept liability for damage, safety of equipment and overloading of existing equipment.

1.11 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify Consultant, Owner and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Owner 48 hours notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Minimize duration of interruptions. Carry out work at times as directed by governing authorities with minimum disturbance to tenant operations.

.3 Provide alternative routes for personnel.

.4 Establish location and extent of service lines in area of work before starting Work. Notify Owner and Consultant of findings.


.5 Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut-down or closure of active service or facility including power and communications services. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

.6 Provide temporary services to maintain critical building and tenant systems.

.7 Provide adequate bridging over trenches which cross sidewalks or roads to permit normal traffic.

.8 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise [Consultant] and confirm findings in writing.

.9 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

.10 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines.

.11 Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.12 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each document as follows:

.1 Contract Drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed Shop Drawings.

.5 List of Outstanding Shop Drawings.

.6 Change Orders.

.7 Other Modifications to Contract.

.8 Field Test Reports.

.9 Copy of Approved Work Schedule.

.10 Health and Safety Plan and Other Safety Related Documents.

.11 Other documents as specified.

1.13 FEES AND PERMITS

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and paying for, all permits, fees, licenses, etc. as described within and required by regulatory authorities .

.2 Organizing and obtaining all necessary permits and approvals from the Local, Regional and Provincial Authorities prior to commencement of work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

.3 The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining, paying for and arranging for all other inspection, fees and approvals including but not limited to: Technical Standard Safety Authority (TSSA), Electrical Safety Authority (ESA), Fire Marshall, Building/Plumbing Inspector, and equipment Vendors/Manufacturers as indicated.

.4 The Owner will be responsible for obtaining and paying for the building permit. Contractor shall be responsible for fulfilling the requirements of the building permit, including arranging for and obtaining inspections and sign-off on the building inspections as required.


.5 Filing the “Notice of Project” pursuant to the Occupational Health & Safety Act will be the “Contractors” responsibility.

1.14 DAMAGE

.1 Contractor will be held responsible for all damage caused by himself, his employees, or any sub-contractors including damage to the Owner or Other properties, pavement, sidewalks, curbs, buildings, or vehicles, in the general area of the work of through any cause relating to the work carried out under this contract.

.2 Contractor will be required to make good all such damage at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Owner.

.3 Contractor must manage the work in such a manner as to promote good public relations.

.4 If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor receive complaints or enquires to which the Contractor is not qualified to respond, the name of the complainant or the person making the enquiry shall be recorded along with their name, address, and telephone number. A report of the incident must be sent to the Owner’s Representative immediately on occurrence.

1.15 VIOLATIONS RESULTING IN REMOVAL FROM WORK SITE

.1 The following are prohibited at all times on project and work site and will result in immediate dismissal with no exceptions:

.1 Any employee, supervisor or manager that exposes themselves, the public, or other employees to imminent loss of life.

.2 Any employee, supervisor or manager that openly exhibits disregard or defiance for project safety.

.3 Any employee whom knowingly falsifies any investigation document or testimony.

.4 Possession, consumption or being under the influence of intoxicating liquors or illegal drugs and narcotics while on the work site at any time.

.5 Possession or carrying of firearms, knives, clubs or other weapons on Owner property or worksite including but not limited to such weapons being stored or carried in vehicles owned by anyone working on or at the work site at any time.

.6 Insubordination, horseplay, practical jokes, solicitation and gambling.

.7 Fighting, violence, threatening or abusive language on the work site or place or site where work is being performed in connection with the project.

.8 Theft, destruction of property and vandalism.

.9 Damaging, disabling or interfering with safety, fire fighting or first aid equipment.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.


Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 14 00 252 Buildout WORK RESTRICTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 All Sections.

1.2 ACCESS AND EGRESS

.1 Design, construct and maintain temporary "access to" and "egress from" work areas, including stairs, runways, ramps or ladders and scaffolding, independent of finished surfaces and in accordance with relevant municipal, provincial and other regulations.

1.3 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises. Make arrangements with Owner and Consultant to facilitate work as stated.

.2 Maintain existing services to building and provide for personnel and vehicle access.

.3 Where security is reduced by work provide temporary means to maintain security.

.4 Owner’s Representative will assign sanitary facilities for use by Contractor's personnel. Keep facilities clean, pay for cleaners if required.

.5 Use only elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors, and escalators existing in building for moving workers and material.

.1 Protect walls of passenger elevators, to approval of Owner’s Representative.

.2 Accept liability for damage, safety of equipment and overloading of existing equipment.

.6 Closures: protect work temporarily until permanent enclosures are completed.

.7 Dust Control: be responsible for controlling dust nuisances resulting from the work under this contract both within the work limits and elsewhere. Contractor shall clean site broom clean/sweep site daily.

1.4 ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING BUILDING

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to building operations, occupants, public and normal use of premises. Arrange with Owner’s Representative and Consultant to facilitate execution of work.

1.5 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify Owner’s Representative, Consultant and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Owner’s Representative three (3) weeks of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions to a minimum.

.3 Provide for personnel, pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 14 00 252 Buildout WORK RESTRICTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 2

.4 Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Any work that disturbs service to tenants, in terms of service, noise, vibration or air quality, shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative.

.2 Daytime Hours is from Monday to Friday, 06:00 to 18:00 hours. Hours outside these times is considered After Hours.

.3 Coordinate installation with Contractors to avoid work space conflicts. The installation Contractor and other Contractors shall not work in the same work space at the same time.

.4 Work that must be executed After Hours includes the following:

.1 Paint public or occupied areas Monday to Friday from 18:00 to 06:00 hours only and on Saturdays, Sundays, and statutory holidays.

.5 Carry out noise and vibration generating Work Monday to Friday from 08:00 to 18:00 hours, unless written authorization is obtained. This includes all demolition work and hammer drilling.

.6 All work affecting operation of air handling equipment shall be coordinated with building operators.

.7 Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart.

.8 Ensure Contractor's personnel employed on site become familiar with and obey regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations.

.9 Keep within limits of work and avenues of ingress and egress.

.10 Ingress and egress of Contractor vehicles at site is limited to hours of work agreed upon with Consultant.

.11 Tools and equipment may be stored in contractor supplied lock boxes within mechanical rooms. Coordinate with building operators.

.12 Use of the access hatch must be coordinated. Contractor shall advise the building operator of scheduled use, providing 10 business days’ notice.

.13 All spaces outside of Mechanical Rooms must be cleaned prior to 18:00 on Monday to Friday.

1.7 SECURITY

.1 Where security has been reduced by Work of Contract, provide temporary means to maintain security.

.2 Security clearances:

.1 Not Applicable

.3 Security escort:

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 14 00 252 Buildout WORK RESTRICTIONS Project No. 218225 Page 3 1.8 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions. Smoking is not permitted.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 21 00 252 Buildout ALLOWANCES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC)

.1 CCDC 2, Stipulated Price Contract.

.2 Project Supplementary Conditions

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 Refer to CCDC 2, GC 4.1.

.2 Include in Contract Price specified cash allowances.

.3 Cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to Contractor of services, products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing Work.

.4 Contract Price, and not cash allowance, includes Contractor's overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowance.

.5 Contract Price will be adjusted by written order to provide for excess or deficit to each cash allowance.

.6 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed amount of allowance, Contractor will be compensated for excess incurred and substantiated plus allowance for overhead and profit as set out in Contract Documents.

.7 Include progress payments on accounts of work authorized under cash allowances in Consultant's monthly certificate for payment.

.8 Prepare schedule jointly with Consultant and Contractor to show when items called for under cash allowances must be authorized by Consultant for ordering purposes so that progress of Work will not be delayed.

.9 Amount of each allowance, for Work specified in respective specification Sections is as follows:

.1 Mechanical Work: .1 Section 23 05 17 – Pipe Welding include an allowance of $10,000 for X-

ray testing of pipe welds. .2 Controls & Metering Devices, Wiring, and Integration

.1 Section 25 30 02 – EMCS: Field Control Devices include an allowance of $N/A for the controls and metering equipment.

1.3 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

.1 Include in Contract Price contingency allowance of $ N/A.

.2 Do not include in Contract Price, additional contingency allowances for products, installation, overhead or profit.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 21 00 252 Buildout ALLOWANCES Project No. 218225 Page 2

.3 Expenditures under contingency allowance will be authorized in accordance with procedures provided in CCDC 2, GC 6.1 - Changes CCDC 2, 6.2 Change Order and CCDC 2, 6.3 Change Directive.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 32 16.07 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE – BAR (GANTT) CHART Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can be subdivided into tasks.

.2 Bar Chart (GANTT Chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars. Generally Bar Chart should be derived from commercially available computerized project management system.

.3 Baseline: original approved plan (for project, work package, or activity), plus or minus approved scope changes.

.4 Construction Work Week: Monday to Friday, inclusive, will provide five day work week and define schedule calendar working days as part of Bar (GANTT) Chart submission. Work on weekends is to be included as required.

.5 Duration: number of work periods (not including holidays or other nonworking periods) required to complete activity or other project element. Usually expressed as workdays or workweeks.

.6 Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones.

.7 Milestone: significant event in project, usually completion of major deliverable.

.8 Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and the planned dates for meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be accomplished to satisfy Project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves using Project Schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for decision making throughout project life cycle.

.9 Project Planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall system operated by Owner’s Representative to enable monitoring of project work in relation to established milestones.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS

.1 Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedules are practical and remain within specified Contract duration.

.2 Plan to complete Work in accordance with prescribed milestones and time frame.

.3 Limit activity durations to maximum of approximately 10 working days, to allow for progress reporting.

.4 Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress, Interim Certificate and Final Certificate as defined times of completion are of essence of this contract.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 32 16.07 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE – BAR (GANTT) CHART Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit a preliminary construction schedule with the tender.

.3 Submit to Project Manager within 5 working days of Award of detailed Contract Bar (GANTT) Chart as Master Plan for planning, monitoring and reporting of project progress.

.4 Submit Project Schedule to Project Manager within 5 working days of receipt of acceptance of Master Plan.

1.5 PROJECT MILESTONES

.1 Project milestones are indicated in the attached schedule.

.2 This proposed schedule is subject to change.

1.6 MASTER PLAN

.1 Structure schedule to allow orderly planning, organizing and execution of Work as Bar Chart (GANTT).

.2 Project Manager/Consultant will review and return revised schedules within 5 working days.

.3 Revise impractical schedule and resubmit within 5 working days.

.4 Accepted revised schedule will become Master Plan and be used as baseline for updates.

1.7 PROJECT SCHEDULE

.1 Develop detailed Project Schedule derived from Master Plan.

.2 Ensure detailed Project Schedule includes as minimum milestone and activity types as follows:

.1 Award.

.2 Shop Drawings, Samples.

.3 Permits.

.4 Mobilization.

.5 Plumbing.

.6 Electrical.

.7 Piping.

.8 Controls.

.9 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.

.10 Testing and Commissioning.

.11 Supplied equipment long delivery items.

.12 Consultant required dates.

1.8 PROJECT SCHEDULE REPORTING

.1 Update Project Schedule on weekly basis reflecting activity changes and completions, as well as activities in progress.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 32 16.07 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE – BAR (GANTT) CHART Project No. 218225 Page 3

.2 Include as part of Project Schedule, narrative report identifying Work status to date, comparing current progress to baseline, presenting current forecasts, defining problem areas, anticipated delays and impact with possible mitigation.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

.1 Discuss Project Schedule at regular site meetings, identify activities that are behind schedule and provide measures to regain slippage. Activities considered behind schedule are those with projected start or completion dates later than current approved dates shown on baseline schedule.

.2 Weather related delays with their remedial measures will be discussed and negotiated.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 33 00 252 Buildout SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 Submit to Project Manager/Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.1 Submittals shall be provided within: .1 30 days from the award of contract for product information and shop

drawings, and .2 10 days from the award on contract for all other submittals.

.2 Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete.

.3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units.

.4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are acceptable.

.5 Review submittals prior to submission. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected.

.6 Notify Project Manager/Consultant, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.

.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated.

.8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittals.

.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant’s review.

.10 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer licensed and registered in the Province of Ontario.

.3 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion


of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.4 Submit 3D spool drawings prior to construction, showing these details as well as code of construction, design temperatures and pressures, complete bill of materials, heat numbers, CRN numbers, and welding numbers.

.5 Allow 7 calendar days for review of each submission.

.6 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Project Manager/Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.7 Make changes in shop drawings as Owner’s Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Owner’s Representative in writing of revisions other than those requested.

.8 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

.1 Date.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Contractor's name and address.

.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.

.5 Other pertinent data.

.9 Submissions include:

.1 Date and revision dates.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer.

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and

clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams.


.10 Relationship to adjacent work.

.10 After review, distribute copies.

.11 Submit electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Departmental Representative may reasonably request.

.12 Submit electronic copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested, where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.13 Submit electronic copies of test reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested.

.1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements.

.2 Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.

.14 Submit electronic copies of certificates for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested.

.1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements.

.2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project name.

.15 Submit electronic copies of manufacturers’ instructions for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested.

.1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

.16 Submit electronic copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested.

.17 Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.

.18 Submit electronic copies of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by.

.19 Delete information not applicable to project.

.20 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.21 If upon review by Departmental Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, electronic copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

.22 The review of shop drawings by the Owner is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept.


.1 This review shall not mean that the Owner approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of construction and Contract Documents.

.2 Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use.

.2 Deliver samples prepaid to Owner Representative's business address.

.3 Notify Project Manager/Consultant in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

.5 Adjustments made on samples by Departmental Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which Departmental Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents.

.7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.

1.5 MOCK-UPS

.1 Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.6 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

.1 Submit electronic copy of colour digital photography in jpg format, fine resolution monthly with progress statement as directed by Owner Representative.

.2 Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated.

.3 Number of viewpoints: 4 locations.

.1 Viewpoints and their location as determined by Owner Representative.

.4 Frequency of photographic documentation: weekly as directed by Departmental Representative.

.1 Upon completion of: mechanical services before concealment, of Work.

.2 Provide photographs of the space on first day of work before commencing demolition or construction work, highlighting any existing damage. Provide photographs on last day of work demonstrating building condition at completion.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 33 00 252 Buildout SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 218225 Page 5 1.7 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

.1 Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Compensation Board status.

.2 Submit transcript of insurance immediately after award of Contract.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 35 29.06 252 Buildout HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canada Labour Code, Part 2, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations

.2 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.3 Province of Ontario

.1 Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects, R.S.O. 1990, c.0.1, as amended and O. Reg. 213/91 as amended – current edition.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA Group)

.1 CSA Z195-14, Protective Footwear.

.2 CSA Z460-13, Control of Hazardous Energy

.3 CSA Z462-15, Workplace Electrical Safety

.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)

.1 ASTM F2413-11, Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective (Safety) Toe Cap Footwear

1.3 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit general corporate safety program with bid and brief summary of site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

.3 Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include:

.1 Results of site specific safety hazard assessment.

.2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation found in work plan.

.4 Submit electronic copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety inspection reports weekly to Owner Representative.

.5 The Contractor shall advise the Owner Representative of any visit to the site by Federal and Provincial authorities, or health and safety inspectors, and Submit copies of reports or directions issued by such authorities within 24 hours or as soon as practicable after the visit.

.6 The Contractor shall advise the Owner Representative of any incident, accident, injury, near-miss, fire, explosion or chemical spill occurring at the work site, and submit copies of incident and accident reports within 24 hours or as soon as practicable after the event.


.7 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01 - Hazardous Materials.

.8 Owner Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 7 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Owner Representative within 7 days after receipt of comment.

.9 Owner Representative’s review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety.

.10 Medical Surveillance: where prescribed by legislation, regulation or safety program, submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel prior to commencement of Work, and submit additional certifications for any new site personnel to Owner Representative.

.11 On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: address standard operating procedures to be implemented during emergency situations.

1.4 FILING OF NOTICE

.1 File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to beginning of Work.

.2 Contractor shall agree to install proper site separation and identification in order to maintain time and space at all times throughout life of project, where applicable.

1.5 SAFETY ASSESSMENT

.1 Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.

1.6 MEETINGS

.1 Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Owner Representative prior to commencement of Work.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Work at site will involve contact with:

.1 High pressure hot water piping, and other hot surfaces.

1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.

.2 Owner Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns.

1.9 RESPONSIBILITY

.1 Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work.


.2 Contractor will be responsible and assume the role Constructor as described in the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects.

.3 Comply with and enforce compliance of all persons granted access to site with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.10 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. 0.1 and Ontario Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91.

.2 Comply with CSA Z460-13, Control of Hazardous Energy

.3 Comply with CSA Z462-15, Workplace Electrical Safety

1.11 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

.1 CSA footwear required in all mechanical rooms.

.2 Additional requirements are site specific based on the site safety assessment performed.

1.12 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS

.1 When unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition occur during performance of Work, follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction and advise Owner Representative verbally and in writing.

.2 When unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition occur during performance of Work, advise the site supervisor and follow procedures in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction and advise Owner Representative verbally and in writing.

1.13 HEALTH AND SAFETY SUPERVISOR

.1 Employ and assign to Work, a competent and authorized representative as the Supervisor to be on site during execution of work, and enforce safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Supervisor must:

.1 Have site-related working experience specific to activities associated with retrofitting an existing, and occupied building.

.2 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.

.3 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions and ensure that personnel having not successfully completed required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work.

.4 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.

.5 Be on site during execution of Work.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 35 29.06 252 Buildout HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 4 1.14 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction, and in consultation with Owner Representative.

1.15 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

.1 Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Owner Representative.

.2 Provide Owner Representative with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified.

.3 Owner Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.

1.16 BLASTING

.1 Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.

1.17 POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES

.1 Use powder actuated devices only after receipt of written permission from Owner Representative.

1.18 WORK STOPPAGE

.1 Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.

1.19 FIRE ALARMS

.1 Observe alarm system: requires the evacuation of the entire building.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 35 43 252 Buildout ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Definitions:

.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence of chemical, physical, biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humans; or degrade environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.

.2 Environmental Protection: prevention/control of pollution and habitat or environment disruption during construction.

.2 Reference Standards:

.1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/Office of Water .1 EPA 832/R-92-005-92, Storm Water Management for Construction

Activities, Chapter 3. .2 EPA General Construction Permit (GCP) 2012.

.2 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards .1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, Architectural Coatings. .2 SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

.3 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS) .1 GS-11-2013, Edition 3.1, Paints and Coatings. .2 GS-36-13, Edition 2.1, Commercial Adhesives.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for environmental protection materials and equipment and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.2 Submit electronic copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.

.3 Before commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval.

.4 Environmental Protection Plan must include comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues to be addressed during construction.


.5 Address topics at level of detail commensurate with environmental issue and required construction tasks.

.6 Include in Environmental Protection Plan:

.1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence to Environmental Protection Plan.

.2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from site.

.3 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for training site personnel.

.4 Descriptions of environmental protection personnel training program.

.5 Drawings indicating locations of proposed temporary material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site.

.6 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portion of area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use. .1 Plan to include measures for marking limits of use areas and methods for

protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas. .7 Spill Control Plan to include procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in

event of unforeseen spill of regulated substance. .8 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for

solid waste disposal including clearing debris. .9 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris,

materials, and trash, are contained on project site. .10 Contaminant Prevention Plan identifying potentially hazardous substances to be

used on job site; intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, or ground; and detailing provisions for compliance with Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials.

.11 Waste Water Management Plan identifying methods and procedures for management and discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines.

.12 Historical plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, resources.

1.4 FIRES

.1 Fires and burning of rubbish on site is not permitted.

1.5 DRAINAGE

.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free of water.

.2 Ensure pumped water into waterways, sewer or drainage systems is free of suspended materials. Protect existing drains and catch basins from silt and debris, waste and volatile materials.


.3 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements.

1.6 SITE CLEARING AND PLANT PROTECTION

.1 Obtain all necessary permits and approvals from the Local Authority prior to commencement of work in vicinity of trees, plants, shrubs, grass, etc. in advance of start of work in the area.

.2 Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties as indicated. Wrap in burlap, trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work

.3 Protect trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work, storage areas and trucking lanes, and encase with protective wood framework from grade level to height of 2 m minimum.

.4 Protect roots of designated trees to dripline during excavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage by wrapping roots in a reflective thermal blanket and keeping roots hydrated. Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage of materials over root zones.

.5 Minimize disturbance and stripping of topsoil and vegetation

.6 Restrict tree removal to areas indicated or designated by Consultant. Any trees removed due to construction must be displaced and replaced, unless otherwise directed by the Consultant, in the general proximity but not directly over the piping or other utilities. The size (minimum of 50mm diameter), type and location of trees to be used as replacement shall be approved by the Consultant and the Local Authority.

1.7 WASTE DISPOSAL

.1 Obtain disposal permits as required.

.2 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site. All rubbish and waste materials shall be removed from site and disposed of at an approved facility.

.3 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into the ground, waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.

.4 Dispose of Hydro-test fluids and pipe flushing water in accordance with the requirements and procedures of the Local and/or Regional Authorities.

.5 Provide suitable containers for garbage disposal and waste materials.

1.8 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS

.1 Do not operate construction equipment in waterways.

.2 Do not use waterway beds to borrow material without Consultant’s approval.

.3 Do not dump excavated fill waste material or debris in waterways or adjacent thereto.

.4 Design and construct temporary crossings to minimize erosion to waterways.

.5 Do not skid logs or construction materials across waterways.

.6 Avoid spawning beds when constructing temporary crossings of waterways.

.7 Do not blast under water or within 100m of indicated spawning beds.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 35 43 252 Buildout ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 218225 Page 4 1.9 POLLUTION CONTROL

.1 Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this Contract.

.2 Control emissions from equipment in accordance with local authorities' emission requirements.

.3 Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air and waterways beyond application area.

.1 Provide temporary enclosures where directed by Owner Representative.

.4 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.

.5 Provide a flush and sweep of all affected streets with a pressure street flusher and street sweeper as conditions require, a minimum of once per week, or as required by the Consultant and Local Authority.

1.10 HISTORICAL/ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONTROL

.1 Provide historical plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical resources known to be on project site: and identifies procedures to be followed if historical resources, not previously known to be onsite or in area are discovered during construction.

.2 Plan: include methods to assure protection of known or discovered resources and identify lines of communication between Contractor personnel and Departmental Representative.

1.11 NOTIFICATION

.1 Owner Representative will notify Contractor in writing of observed noncompliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipal environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of Contractor's Environmental Protection plan.

.2 Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform Owner Representative of proposed corrective action and take such action for approval by Owner Representative.

.1 Take action only after receipt of written approval by Owner Representative

.3 Departmental Representative will issue stop order of work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.

.4 No time extensions granted or equitable adjustments allowed to Contractor for such suspensions.

Part 2 Products

.1 Low emitting materials

.1 Adhesives and sealants, paints and coatings, used in the building comply with VOC and chemical component limits or restriction requirements. .1 These materials shall comply with the following standards:

SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, and SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005. .2 Submit listing of adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings with

documentation that demonstrates the overall low VOC performance has been attained.


.1 Acceptable third party certification showing compliance with the Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS) include: GS-11-2013 and GS-36-13.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: Leave Work area clean at end of each day.

.2 Ensure public waterways, storm and sanitary sewers remain free of waste and volatile materials disposal.

.3 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

.4 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 45 00 252 Buildout QUALITY CONTROL Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

.1 Submit copy of Contractor’s TSSA certified quality assurance and quality control program to be implemented for the project with the tender as well as valid TSSA Certificate of Authorization. The Quality Assurance and Quality Control Program must be registered with TSSA in the Prime Contractor’s corporate name and cannot be carried by a subcontractor employed by the prime contractor.

1.3 BACKGROUND

.1 Contractor team must have previously constructed, tested, and commissioned interior ASME B31.1 pressure piping systems registered with TSSA.

.2 Contractor team must be proficient working with 3D CAD drawings. Submit 3D spool drawings as a submittal prior to construction.

1.4 INSPECTION

.1 Allow Owner Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or law of Place of Work.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.4 Owner Representative will order part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Carry out Work using qualified licensed workers or apprentices in accordance with Provincial Act respecting manpower.

1.6 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1 Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Departmental Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by the Contractor via Allowances.

.2 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 45 00 252 Buildout QUALITY CONTROL Project No. 218225 Page 2

.3 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.4 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Owner Representative at no cost to Owner. Pay costs for retesting and re-inspection.

1.7 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

1.8 PROCEDURES

.1 Notify appropriate agency, Departmental Representative in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence to not cause delays in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.9 REJECTED WORK

.1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Owner Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.

.3 If in opinion of Owner Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative will deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which will be determined by.

1.10 REPORTS

.1 Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports.

.2 Provide copies to subcontractor of work being inspected or tested and manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

1.11 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as requested.

.2 Cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work will be appraised by Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 45 00 252 Buildout QUALITY CONTROL Project No. 218225 Page 3 1.12 MOCK-UPS

.1 Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of Sections required to provide mock-ups.

.2 Construct in locations acceptable to Owner Representative.

.3 Prepare mock-ups for Owner Representative’s review with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence, to not cause delays in Work.

.4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.5 If requested, Owner Representative will assist in preparing schedule fixing dates for preparation.

.6 Remove mock-up at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Departmental Representative.

1.13 MILL TESTS

.1 Submit mill test certificates as required of specification Sections.

1.14 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems.

.2 Refer to Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC for definitive requirements.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 51 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY UTILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water

.1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for Construction Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices.



1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1 Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance, maintenance, and fuel.

.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.

.3 Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:

.1 Facilitate progress of Work.

.2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold.

.3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.

.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials.

.5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.

.4 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10 degrees C in areas where construction is in progress.

.5 Ventilating:

.1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction.

.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.

.3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

.4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 51 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY UTILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 2

.5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.

.6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.

.6 Permanent heating system of building to be used when available. Be responsible for damage to heating system if use is permitted.

.7 On completion of Work for which permanent heating system is used, replace filters and clean strainers.

.8 Pay costs for maintaining temporary heat.

.9 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to:

.1 Conform with applicable codes and standards.

.2 Enforce safe practices.

.3 Prevent abuse of services.

.4 Prevent damage to finishes.

.5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.

.10 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1 Arrange with Owner Representative for temporary power during construction for temporary lighting and operating of power tools, to a maximum supply of 230 volts 30 amps.

.2 Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal.

.3 Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of above is responsibility of Contractor.

.4 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx.

.5 Maximum power supply of existing buildings will be provided for construction use at no cost . Connect to existing power supply in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code.

.6 Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for construction requirements only with prior approval of Departmental Representative provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.

1.7 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

.1 Provide and pay for temporary data hook up, lines and equipment necessary for own use and use of Owner Representative.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 51 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY UTILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 3 1.8 FIRE PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work required by insurance companies having jurisdiction, governing codes, regulations and bylaws.

.2 Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.

1.9 WATER & CHEMICAL

.1 Provide and pay for water, chemical cleanser, and water treatment chemicals required for flushing, testing, and cleaning. Make arrangements for safe discharge of this water.

.2 Coordinate with Owner’s Representative and their water treatment provider.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 52 00 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB 1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood.

.2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.2 Canadian Standards Association Group (CSA Group)

.1 CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

.2 CSA-O121-08 (R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.

.3 CAN/CSA-S269.2-M87(R2003), Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes.

.4 CAN/CSA-Z321-96(R2006), Signs and Symbols for the Workplace.

.3 Public Works Government Services Canada (PWGSC) Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC)-ID: R0202D, Title: General Conditions 'C', In Effect as of: May 14, 2004.

.4 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water

.1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for Construction Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices.




.1 Coordinate with Owner Representative for access to areas.

.2 Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced area and details of fence installation.

.3 Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent tracking of mud, if applicable.

.4 Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area, generally only in mechanical rooms.

.5 Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.


1.5 SCAFFOLDING

.1 Install scaffolding in accordance with construction regulations.

.2 Design, install and inspect scaffolds and work platforms required for work in accordance with relevant municipal, provincial and other regulations.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 52 00 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 2

.3 Provide design drawings, signed and sealed by qualified Professional engineer licensed on the Province of Ontario when prescribed or requested by Departmental Representative.

.4 Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms, and temporary stairs as required to complete work.

1.6 HOISTING

.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists and cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for their use of hoists.

.2 Hoists and cranes to be operated by qualified operator.

1.7 ELEVATORS

.1 Designated existing elevators to be used by construction personnel and transporting of materials. Co-ordinate use with Owner Representative.

.2 Provide protective coverings for finish surfaces of cars and entrances.

1.8 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Confine work and operations of employees by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products.

.2 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with weight or force that will endanger Work.

.3 Coordinate laydown area with Owner Representative.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1 Parking will be permitted on site provided it does not disrupt normal operations of the buildings. There is paid parking in designated areas.

.2 Provide and maintain adequate access to project site. DO NOT park in laneway.

1.10 SECURITY (NOT REQUIRED)

.1 Provide and pay for responsible security personnel to guard site and contents of site after working hours and during holidays.

1.11 OFFICES

.1 Provide office heated to 22 degrees C, lighted to 750 lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table.

.2 Provide marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location.

.3 Subcontractors to provide their own offices as necessary. Refer to Owner Representative for location of these offices.

.4 Owner Representative's or Consultant's Site office is not required.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 52 00 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 3 1.12 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in manner to cause least interference with work activities.

1.13 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances.

.2 Post notices and take precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

1.14 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE

.1 Refer to Section 01 56 00 for construction signage details.

1.15 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

.1 Comply with Ministry of Transportation (MTO) Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7: Temporary Conditions, most recent edition, for traffic control and traffic management.

.2 Provide access as necessary to maintain traffic.

.3 Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by Departmental Representative.

.4 Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs.

.5 Protect travelling public from damage to person and property.

.6 Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as little as possible with public traffic.

.7 Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations.

.8 Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement of traffic.

.9 Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times.

.10 Provide snow removal during period of Work.

1.16 CLEAN-UP

.1 Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily.

.2 Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways.

.3 Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable.

.4 Stack stored new or salvaged material not in construction facilities.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 52 00 252 Buildout CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Project No. 218225 Page 4 Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

.3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 56 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.2 CAN/CGSB 1.189-00, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)

.1 CSA-O121-08 (R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.

.3 Public Works Government Services Canada (PWGSC) Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC)-ID: R0202D, Title: General Conditions 'C', In Effect as Of: May 14, 2004.

1.3 WORK ZONE LOCATIONS AND IDENTIFICATION

.1 Work zone locations are as indicated in the Access and Work Areas reference drawings.

.2 The contractor shall agree to install proper site separation and identification in order to maintain "Time and Space" at all times throughout the life of the project and when PSPC Building Operations staff requires access to equipment in order to operate the building, proper coordination and communication must exist between all parties involved.


.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.


1.5 HOARDING

.1 Erect temporary site enclosures using new modular hoarding 2.4 m high fence panels with screening.

.2 Provide one lockable truck entrance gate and at least one pedestrian door as directed and conforming to applicable traffic restrictions on adjacent streets. Equip gates with locks and keys.

.3 Erect and maintain pedestrian walkways including roof and side covers, complete with signs and electrical lighting as required by law.

.4 Protect trees and plants from damage by equipment and construction procedures.

1.6 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs.

.2 Provide as required by governing authorities.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 56 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.7 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs.

.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat.

.3 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.

1.8 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.

1.9 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.

1.10 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW

.1 Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect public.

1.11 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.12 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.13 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.

.3 Confirm with Owner Representative locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation.

.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.

1.14 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 56 00 252 Buildout TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Project No. 218225 Page 3 Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 61 00 252 Buildout COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC) Manual and PWGSC Supply Manual.

.2 Within text of each specifications section, reference may be made to reference standards.

.3 Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications.

.4 If there is question as to whether products or systems are in conformance with applicable standards, Owner Representative reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance.

.5 Cost for such testing will be borne by Owner in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.

1.3 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.2 Procurement policy is to acquire, in cost effective manner, items containing highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining satisfactory levels of competition. Make reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered materials and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in execution of work.

.3 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.4 Should disputes arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.5 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building.

.6 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

1.4 AVAILABILITY

.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable,


notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.

.2 In event of failure to notify Consultant at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.5 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.

.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.

.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.

.6 Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture.

.7 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.8 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.

.9 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental Representative's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.

1.6 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

.2 Transportation cost of products supplied by Owner will be paid for by Departmental Representative. Unload, handle and store such products.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Departmental Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental Representative will establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Departmental Representative to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 61 00 252 Buildout COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 3 1.8 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Owner Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Owner Representative reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Owner Representative, whose decision is final.

1.9 CO-ORDINATION

.1 Ensure co-operation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.10 CONCEALMENT

.1 In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation inform Departmental Representative if there is interference. Install as directed by Departmental Representative.

1.11 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Co-ordinate adjacent affected Work as required.

.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

1.12 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate.

.2 Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.13 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.

.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section.

.4 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable.


.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.

.6 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

1.14 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service.

.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304 stainless steel for exterior areas.

.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.

.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.

1.15 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Prevent overloading of parts of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental Representative.

1.16 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, and building occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 74 11 252 Buildout CLEANING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 Section 21 05 01 Common Work Results for Mechanical.

.2 Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Standard Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC) Manual and PWGSC Supply Manual.

1.3 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.2 The Contractor shall perform Daily Cleaning and Weekly Tidying of the Site where Construction is occurring in mechanical rooms including access stairwells, hallways, elevators and public spaces.

.3 “Daily Cleaning” shall include:

.1 Cleaning and tidying up after work of tools, equipment, unused materials, storage areas and common areas such as passageways, daily removal of waste materials from works areas, removal of any rubbish and debris;

.2 Maintenance of passageways, common accesses and public areas free of obstruction;

.3 Proper storage and stacking of materials;

.4 Proper placement and storage of tools and equipment after work;

.5 Proper sorting, storage and /or disposal of waste materials in accordance with the Waste Management Plan;

.6 Proper securing of hoarding, barriers, guarding, lighting and signing of works.

.7 Prevention and removal of water ponds, stagnant water and flooding;

.8 Conditions of cleanliness and tidiness of Site including Public Cleaning Areas in the perspective of the general public; and

.9 Other cleaning requirements as instructed by the Engineer’s Representative

.4 “Weekly Tidying” shall include:

.1 The cleansing and tidying up of the common areas and accesses, cleaning and/or re-conditioning of hoardings, barriers, guarding, lighting, signage and/or traffic cones, cleansing of external covers for plant and equipment, hoardings, as well as Site as a whole, are clean and tidy

.2 Clean and/or provide the services of a cleaner to maintain Contractor washroom(s).

.3 Thorough cleansing of passageways, common accesses and public areas;

.4 Re-organizing of the storage materials for better utilization of storage spaces if appropriate;


.5 Maintenance of re-conditioning of tools and equipment; iv. Cleansing of external covers for plant and equipment;

.6 Collection and removal of disposed waste materials off site in accordance with the waste management plan;

.7 Cleansing, re-conditioning and/or replacement of hoarding, barriers, guarding, lighting, and signage of works to good working condition;

.8 Clearing of drains and channels to prevent flooding; and

.9 Other cleansing requirements as instructed by the Engineer’s Representative from the perspective of the general public.

.5 Remove waste materials from site at daily regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Owner Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.6 Work in occupied and public areas must be completed off hours and area cleaned by 06:00 Monday to Friday. An air test must be performed after work is complete and area is cleaned to verify air cleanliness by 06:00 Monday to Friday.

.7 Clear snow and ice from access to temporary site, bank/pile snow in designated areas only or remove from site.

.8 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.9 Provide on-site dump containers for collection of waste materials and debris.

.10 Provide and use marked separate bins for waste, reuse and recycling. Refer to Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.11 Dispose of waste materials and debris off site.

.12 Clean interior areas prior to start of finishing work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.13 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.14 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.

.15 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

.16 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

1.4 FINAL CLEANING

.1 When Work is Substantially Performed remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.2 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.3 Prior to final review remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.


.4 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by Owner Representative or other Contractors.

.5 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Owner Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.6 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.7 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.8 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, and floors.

.9 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.10 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.11 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.

.12 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

.13 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

.14 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.15 Dust and wipe clean equipment surfaces and walls.

.16 Sweep and wash clean paved and mechanical floor areas.

.17 Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.

.18 Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed spaces.


.1 Separate waste materials for waste, reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.


END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 78 00 252 Sackville Buildout CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All Sections.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Pre-warranty Meeting:

.1 Convene meeting one week prior to contract completion with contractor's representative and Owner Representative, to: .1 Verify Project requirements. .2 Review manufacturer's installation instructions.

.2 Owner Representative to establish communication procedures for: .1 Notifying construction warranty defects. .2 Determine priorities for type of defects. .3 Determine reasonable response time.

.3 Contact information for bonded and licensed company for warranty work action: provide name, telephone number and address of company authorized for construction warranty work action.

.4 Ensure contact is located within local service area of warranted construction, is continuously available, and is responsive to inquiries for warranty work action.



.2 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Owner Representative, four final copies of operating and maintenance manuals in English and French.

.3 Provide One full size printed copy and electronic copy of all Record Drawings Electronic copies of Record Drawings shall be provided.

.4 Provide spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.

.5 Provide evidence, if requested, for type, source and quality of products supplied.

1.4 FORMAT

.1 Organize data as instructional manual.

.2 Provide electronic copy as well as hard copy.

.3 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets, 76 mm maximum, clearly labeled on the spine.

.4 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

.1 Identify contents of each binder on spine.

.2 Provide a title page and table of contents for each binder.


.5 Cover: identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.6 Material shall be submitted in PDF format for each of Specification Division. Format shall be such that the file is searchable (has no scanned pages) and has a Table of Contents in which each line is hyper linked to the corresponding section in the document, for ease of navigation.

.1 For example, the following are the Mechanical and Electrical Divisional Breakdowns which shall contain the contents prescribed above .1 Division 21 Fire suppression O&M

Division 22 Plumbing O&M Division 23 HVAC O&M Division 25 Integrated Automation O&M Division 26 Electrical O&M

.2 PDF file names are to include “Division XX - <Description>”

.7 Arrange content by Building and systems, under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents. Provide a separate chapter for each applicable system, i.e.:

.1 Chillers

.2 Cooling towers

.3 Boilers

.4 Pumps

.5 Air handling units

.6 Exhaust fans

.7 Supply air fans (excluding air handling units)

.8 Plumbing and drainage systems/equipment

.9 Emergency generator systems

.10 UPS

.11 Fire protection systems

.12 Fire alarm system

.13 Valves and pipe specialties (include valve identification chart)

.14 Variable frequency drives (VFD)

.15 Smoke control systems

.16 Water treatment system

.17 Elevator systems

.18 Lighting systems and controls (interior, exterior and airfield)

.19 Switchgear, transformers, panelboards, motor control centers and motor starters

.20 Lightning protection and surge suppression systems

.21 Public address, closed circuit TV, communication and telephone systems

.22 Security system

.23 Building Management/Temperature Control System

.24 Fuel system

.25 Doors and hardware


.26 Power monitoring systems

.27 HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing

.28 Other systems as detailed in the drawings and technical specifications

.8 Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. Provide Equipment ID tag sub-tab for each piece of major equipment (or group, if small or numerous). Each equipment ID tag sub-tab shall be similar to the system chapter tab but of a different color.

.9 Text: manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

.10 Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab.

.1 Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

.2 Provide 1:1 scaled CAD files in dwg format on flash drive.

1.5 CONTENTS - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Table of Contents for Each Volume: provide title of project;

.1 Date of submission; names.

.2 Addresses, and telephone numbers of Consultant and Contractor with name of responsible parties.

.3 Schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.

.2 For each product or system:

.1 List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

.3 Product Data: mark each sheet to identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.

.4 Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

.5 Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data.

.1 Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.6 Training: refer to Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.

1.6 OWNER’S MANUAL (GENERALLY REFERRED TO AS THE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL)

.1 The Owner’s Manual is a project document that represents the as turned over or as built condition of the project and how to maintain the systems/assemblies over time. This manual does not change over time.

.2 The Owner’s Manual should contain, as a minimum, the following sections, by “Specification Division”.

.3 Contact Information


.1 A list of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers involved with the system/assemblies and their contact information (names, addresses, telephone numbers, email address).

.4 Approved Shop Drawing submittals.

.1 A copy of the approved submittals for the components associated with the system/ assembly with all field modifications and accessories clearly marked. In addition, the comments from the review of the original submittals shall be included.

.5 As-Built Drawings

.6 As-Built Riser Diagrams

.7 Operations and Maintenance Manuals

.1 The manufacturer’s printed operations and maintenance manuals for the specific equipment/components provided for the system/assembly.

.2 A parts list, a troubleshooting guide for common situations, and one-line diagrams for each applicable system.

.8 Maintenance procedures, schedules, and recommendations

.1 The manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance procedures and frequency when maintenance should be performed as well as maintenance parts required and necessary documentation.

.9 Recommended Spare Parts

.1 Source(s) and availability information for replacement parts shall be provided.

.2 Recommendations for spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials based upon a risk assessment, complexity of the “System/Assembly” and availability (time necessary to obtain) of each.

.10 Applicable Testing and Verification Forms

.1 Meggar/hi-pot test Reports

.2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Report

.3 Flushing and cleaning report and water treatment report

.4 Pressure test logs and report

.5 Mill test Reports (i.e. piping and misc. fittings and components)

.6 Welding Procedures & Tickets Weld map (i.e. Each weld is identified by welder, leak detection resistance if applicable, location of NDT, etc)

.7 Visual and NDT weld inspection reports including NDT films. .1 NDT Film (i.e. Place films in a folder within the manual)

.11 Applicable Certification Forms

.12 Registration and Applications (i.e. Ministry of Labour, Building Permit, Piping registration, ESA inspection, etc.)

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 78 00 252 Sackville Buildout CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project No. 218225 Page 5 1.7 AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

.1 Maintain, in addition to requirements in General Conditions, at site for Owner Representative, one record copy of:

.1 Contract Drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Change Orders and other modifications to Contract.

.5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

.6 Field test records.

.7 Inspection certificates.

.8 Manufacturer's certificates.

.2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart fs documents used for construction.

.1 Provide files, racks, and secure storage.

.3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual.

.1 Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.

.4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition.

.1 Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

.5 Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Owner Representative.

1.8 RECORDING INFORMATION ON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Record information on set of blue line or black line opaque drawings, provided by Owner Representative.

.2 Use felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress.

.1 Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.4 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.5 Changes made by change orders.

.6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

.7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.


.5 Specifications: mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.

.2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.

.6 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

.7 Provide digital photos, if requested, for site records.

.8 Recording Actual Site Conditions

.1 After award of Contract, Owner will provide a set of clean drawing prints for the purpose of maintaining record drawings. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by Consultant.

.2 Record information on a separate set of Issue for Construction drawings, provided by Consultant.

.3 Use felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information.

.4 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.5 For all exterior work: .1 Record exact location and elevations of “As Installed” work on a daily

basis. .2 Failure to properly record As-Built work will result in the work being re-

exposed by Contractor for records to be taken at no cost to the Owner. .6 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual

construction, including: .1 Record exact location, X, Y location with references, of all welds, X-

rays, valves, vents, elbows and all other fittings. Provide horizontal measurement from the centerline of pipe to two permanent structures (i.e. manhole, corner of building, light standard, etc.) in order to record the exact locations of welds, elbows, X-rays, etc.

.2 Record locations of concealed components of mechanical and electrical services.

.3 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

.4 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

.5 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.6 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.7 Changes made by change orders.

.8 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

.9 References to related shop drawings and modifications.


.10 Identify drawings as "Project Record Copy". Maintain in new condition and make available for inspection on site by Consultant.

.11 On completion of Work and prior to final inspection, submit record documents to Owner.

.7 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, and field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

.8 Digital media copies of Construction pictures.

1.9 FINAL SURVEY – NOT APPLICABLE

.1 Submit final site survey certificate, certifying that elevations and locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.

1.10 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 For each item of equipment and each system include description of unit or system, and component parts.

.2 Behind each equipment ID tag sub-tab shall be the following sections, in the given order, divided by a double weight colored sheet labeled with the title of the section.

.1 Contractor. The first page behind the equipment tab shall contain the name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer and installing contractor and the 24-hour number for emergency service for all equipment in this section, identified by equipment.

.2 Submittal and Product Data. This section shall include all approved submittal data, cut sheets, data base sheets and appropriate shop drawings. If submittal was not required for approval, descriptive product data shall be included.

.3 Operation and Maintenance Instructions. These shall be the written manufacturer's data with the model and features of this installation clearly marked and edited to omit reference to products or data not applicable to this installation. This section shall include data on the following: .1 Model number, serial number and nameplate data and location for each

piece of equipment and any subcomponent. .2 Installation, startup and break-in instructions. .3 All starting, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, manual operation

and normal and emergency operating procedures and data, including any special limitations and seasonal operating instructions. .1 Step-by-step procedure for system start-up, including a pre-start

checklist. Refer to controls and indicators by nomenclature consistent with that used on panels and in control diagrams.

.2 Sequence of Operation, with detailed instruction in proper sequence, for each mode of operation (i.e., day-night; staging of equipment).

.3 Emergency Operation: If some functions of the equipment can be operated while other functions are disabled, give instructions for operations under these conditions. Include here only those alternate methods of operations (from normal) which the


operator can follow when there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of components, or other unusual condition.

.4 Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in that order.

.4 O&M and installation instructions, system schematics, and one-line diagrams that were shipped with the unit.

.5 Preventative and corrective maintenance, with service procedures and schedules: .1 Provide a schedule for preventive maintenance in a printed

format and an electronic format compatible with Owner's system. State, preferably in tabular form, the recommended frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task, cleaning, inspection and scheduled overhauls or reconditioning.

.2 Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning and inspection with recommended lubricants.

.3 Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning or other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria for: motors; controls; filters and any other maintenance items.

.4 Provide instructions for minor repairs or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines. Identify test points and give values for each. Include sensor calibration requirements and methods by sensor type.

.5 Corrective maintenance instructions shall be predicated upon a logical effect-to-cause troubleshooting philosophy and a rapid replacement procedure to minimize equipment downtime.

.6 Troubleshooting: Troubleshooting tables, charts, or diagrams shall be used to present specified procedures. A guide to this type shall be a three-column chart. The columns shall be titled: Malfunction, Probable Cause and Recommended Action.

.7 Repair and Replacement: Indicate repair and replacement procedures most likely to be required in the maintenance of the equipment.

.6 Safety Precautions: This subsection shall comprise a listing of safety precautions and instructions to be followed before, during and after making repairs, adjustments or routine maintenance.

.7 Manufacturers' brochures (including controls): Manufacturers' descriptive literature covering devices and equipment used in the system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Manufacturers' standard brochures and parts list shall be edited so that information applying to the actual installed equipment is clearly defined.

.8 Supply any special tools required to service or maintain the equipment.

.9 Performance data, ratings and curves.


.10 Warranty and Guarantee, which clearly lists conditions to be maintained to keep warranty in effect and conditions that would affect the validity of the warranty.

.11 Any service contracts issued. .4 Supplemental Data. Prepare written text and/or special drawings to provide

necessary information where manufacturer's standard printed data is not available and information is necessary for a proper understanding and operation and maintenance of equipment or systems, or where it is necessary to provide additional information to supplement data included in the manual or project documents.

.5 Control Diagrams/Drawings. Include the as-built control diagrams/drawings for the piece of equipment and its components, including full points list, full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system, and copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not commissioning tests).

.6 Specifications. This section is comprised of the component or system specification section copied and inserted complete with all addenda.

.7 System Description. This section shall include the individual equipment portion of the overall system Basis of Design document.

.3 Give function, normal operation characteristics and limiting conditions.

.4 Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.5 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

.6 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.7 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

.8 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.10 Provide Contractor's co-ordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.11 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.12 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.13 Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.14 Additional requirements: as specified in individual specification sections.

.15 Complete Operations and Maintenance Manual Checklist as attached to verify compliance with the requirements.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 78 00 252 Sackville Buildout CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project No. 218225 Page 10 1.11 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building products, applied materials, and finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations.

.1 Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.3 Moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Additional requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Spare Parts:

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to location as directed; place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue items. .1 Submit inventory listing to Owner Representative. .2 Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.2 Extra Stock Materials:

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.



.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.3 Special Tools:

.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.

.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.



1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration.


.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and for review by Owner Representative.

1.14 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

.1 Provide Letter of Warranty

.2 Develop warranty management plan to contain information relevant to Warranties.

.3 Submit warranty management plan, 30 days before planned pre-warranty conference, to Owner Representative approval.

.4 Warranty management plan to include required actions and documents to assure that Owner Representative receives warranties to which it is entitled.

.5 Provide plan in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to make it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel.

.6 Submit, warranty information made available during construction phase, to Owner Representative for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.

.7 Assemble approved information in binder, submit upon acceptance of work and organize binder as follows:

.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work.

.4 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

.5 Co-execute submittals when required.

.6 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

.8 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Performance is determined.

.9 Conduct joint 11 month warranty inspection, measured from time of acceptance, with Owner Representative.

.10 Include information contained in warranty management plan as follows:

.1 Roles and responsibilities of personnel associated with warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.

.2 Listing and status of delivery of Certificates of Warranty for extended warranty items, to include HVAC balancing, pumps, motors, and commissioned systems.

.3 Provide list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or system indicating:


.1 Name of item.

.2 Model and serial numbers.

.3 Location where installed.

.4 Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.

.5 Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.

.6 Warranties and terms of warranty: include one-year overall warranty of construction. Indicate items that have extended warranties and show separate warranty expiration dates.

.7 Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.

.8 Starting point and duration of warranty period.

.9 Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue warranty in force.

.10 Cross-Reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance manuals.

.11 Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service.

.12 Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted equipment.

.4 Contractor's plans for attendance at 11 month post-construction warranty inspection.

.5 Procedure and status of tagging of equipment covered by extended warranties.

.6 Post copies of instructions near selected pieces of equipment where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.

.11 Respond in timely manner to oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work.

.12 Written verification to follow oral instructions.

.1 Failure to respond will be cause for the Owner Representative to proceed with action against Contractor.

1.15 WARRANTY TAGS

.1 Tag, at time of installation, each warranted item. Provide durable, oil and water resistant tag approved by Owner Representative.

.2 Attach tags with copper wire and spray with waterproof silicone coating.

.3 Leave date of acceptance until project is accepted for occupancy.

.4 Indicate following information on tag:

.1 Type of product/material.

.2 Model number.

.3 Serial number.

.4 Contract number.

.5 Warranty period.

.6 Inspector's signature.


.7 Construction Contractor.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 79 00 252 Buildout DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 25 05 01 EMCS: General Requirements.



.1 Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

.2 Owner: provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and co-ordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.

.3 Preparation:

.1 Verify conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements.

.2 Verify designated personnel are present.

.3 Ensure equipment has been inspected and put into operation in accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems and Section 25 01 11 EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.

.4 Ensure testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements and equipment and systems are fully operational.

.4 Demonstration and Instructions:

.1 Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and maintenance of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at the equipment location.

.2 Instruct personnel in phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction.

.3 Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspects of operation and maintenance.

.4 Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when needed during instructions.

.5 Time Allocated for Instructions: ensure amount of time required for instruction of each item of equipment or system as follows:

.1 Division 23 - Heating System: 4 hours of instruction.

.2 Division 23 - Cooling System: 2 hours of instruction.

.3 Division 25 - Control System: 2 hours of instruction.

.4 Division 22 - Plumbing System: 1 hour of instruction.

.5 Division 26 - Electrical System: 1 hour of instruction.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 79 00 252 Buildout DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.3 PREREQUISITES FOR ANY TRAINING DELIVERY

.1 O&M manual(s) been reviewed and approved by the Consultant.

.2 For the system/assembly that training will occur on:

.1 TAB has been 100% completed, with no remaining deficiencies, and reports submitted to Owner.

.2 Contractor Testing and Verification has been 100% completed, with no remaining deficiencies.

.3 Cx Functional Performance Testing has been 100% completed, with no remaining deficiencies, or items on the Commissioning Issues Log.

.3 Two weeks in advance of the scheduled training date, the following has been provided:

.1 An Agenda

.2 A Trainer’s bio

.3 Training materials specific to the Agenda have been provided in electronic form

.4 Should any deficiencies be discovered during training, the session will be re-scheduled. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Trainer, or modify the Agenda, if either are found to be unacceptable.



.2 Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of each item of equipment and each system two weeks prior to designated dates, for Owner Representative's approval.

.3 Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed.

.4 Give time and date of each demonstration, with list of persons present.

.5 Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 When specified in individual Sections requiring manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems:

.1 Instruct Owner's personnel.

.2 Provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 79 00 252 Buildout DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Project No. 218225 Page 3 Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 91 13 252 Buildout GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Related Requirements


.2 Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.3 Section 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems.

.4 Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

.5 Section 25 01 11 EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning



.2 Acronyms:

.1 BMM - Building Management Manual.

.2 Cx - Commissioning.

.3 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems.

.4 O M - Operation and Maintenance.

.5 PI - Product Information.

.6 PV - Performance Verification.

.7 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.2 GENERAL

.1 Cx is a planned program of tests, procedures and checks carried out systematically on systems and integrated systems of the finished Project. Cx is performed after systems and integrated systems are completely installed, functional and Contractor's Performance Verification responsibilities have been completed and approved. Objectives:

.1 Verify installed equipment, systems and integrated systems operate in accordance with contract documents and design criteria and intent.

.2 Ensure appropriate documentation is compiled into the BMM.

.3 Effectively train O & M staff.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for the services of a Third-Party Cx Authority.

.3 Contractor assists in Cx process, operating equipment and systems, troubleshooting and making adjustments as required.

.1 Systems to be operated at full capacity under various modes to determine if they function correctly and consistently at peak efficiency. Systems to be operated interactively with each other as intended in accordance with Contract Documents and design criteria.

.2 During these checks, adjustments to be made to enhance performance to meet environmental or user requirements.


.4 Design Criteria: as per client's requirements or determined by designer. To meet Project functional and operational requirements.

1.3 COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

.1 Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan.For Cx responsibilities refer to Section 01 91 31 - Commissioning (Cx) Plan.Cx to be a line item of Contractor's cost breakdown.

.2 Cx activities supplement field quality and testing procedures described in relevant technical sections.

.3 Cx is conducted in concert with activities performed during stage of project delivery. Cx identifies issues in Planning and Design stages which are addressed during Construction and Cx stages to ensure the systems are constructed and proven to operate satisfactorily under environmental and occupancy conditions to meet functional and operational requirements. Cx activities includes transfer of critical knowledge to facility operational personnel.

.4 Departmental Representative will issue Interim Acceptance Certificate when:

.1 Completed Cx documentation has been received, reviewed for suitability and approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 Equipment, components and systems have been commissioned.

.3 O M training has been completed.

1.4 NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Should equipment, system components, and associated controls be incorrectly installed or malfunction during Cx, correct deficiencies, re-verify equipment and components within the unfunctional system, including related systems as deemed required by Departmental Representative, to ensure effective performance.

.2 Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, to determine acceptability and proper performance of such items to be borne by Contractor. Above costs to be in form of progress payment reductions or hold-back assessments.

1.5 PRE-CX REVIEW

.1 Before Construction:

.1 Review contract documents, confirm by writing to Departmental Representative. .1 Adequacy of provisions for Cx. .2 Aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of Cx.

.2 During Construction:

.1 Co-ordinate provision, location and installation of provisions for Cx.

.3 Before start of Cx:

.1 Have completed Cx Plan up-to-date.

.2 Ensure installation of related components, equipment, sub-systems, and systems is complete.

.3 Fully understand Cx requirements and procedures.


.4 Have Cx documentation shelf-ready.

.5 Understand completely design criteria and intent and special features.

.6 Submit complete start-up documentation to Departmental Representative.

.7 Have Cx schedules up-to-date.

.8 Ensure systems have been cleaned thoroughly.

.9 Complete TAB procedures on systems, submit TAB reports to Departmental Representative for review and approval.

.10 Ensure "As-Built" system schematics are available.

.4 Inform Departmental Representative in writing of discrepancies and deficiencies on finished works.

1.6 CONFLICTS

.1 Report conflicts between requirements of this section and other sections to Departmental Representative before start-up and obtain clarification.

.2 Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification will result in application of most stringent requirement.


.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Submit no later than 4 weeks after award of Contract: .1 Name of Contractor's Cx agent. .2 Draft Cx documentation. .3 Preliminary Cx schedule.

.2 Request in writing to Owner Representative for changes to submittals and obtain written approval at least 8 weeks prior to start of Cx.

.3 Submit proposed Cx procedures to Owner Representative where not specified and obtain written approval at least 8 weeks prior to start of Cx.

.4 Provide additional documentation relating to Cx process required by Owner Representative.

1.8 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms: Installation Check Lists and Product Information (PI) / Performance Verification (PV) Forms for requirements and instructions for use.

.2 Owner Representative to review and approve Cx documentation.

.3 Provide completed and approved Cx documentation to Owner Representative.

1.9 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

.1 Provide detailed Cx schedule as part of construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart.

.2 Provide adequate time for Cx activities prescribed in technical sections and commissioning sections including:


.1 Approval of Cx reports.

.2 Verification of reported results.

.3 Repairs, retesting, re-commissioning, re-verification.

.4 Training.

1.10 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

.1 Convene Cx meetings following project meetings: Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart and as specified herein.

.2 Purpose: to resolve issues, monitor progress, identify deficiencies, relating to Cx.

.3 Continue Cx meetings on regular basis until commissioning deliverables have been addressed.

.4 At 60% construction completion stage. Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedules - Bar (GANTT) Chart. Owner Representative to call a separate Cx scope meeting to review progress, discuss schedule of equipment start-up activities and prepare for Cx. Issues at meeting to include:

.1 Review duties and responsibilities of Contractor and subcontractors, addressing delays and potential problems.

.2 Determine the degree of involvement of trades and manufacturer's representatives in the commissioning process.

.5 Thereafter Cx meetings to be held until project completion and as required during equipment start-up and functional testing period.

.6 Meeting will be chaired by Owner Representative, who will record and distribute minutes.

.7 Ensure subcontractors and relevant manufacturer representatives are present at 60% and subsequent Cx meetings and as required.

1.11 STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections. Including disassembly and re-assembly after approval, starting, testing and adjusting, including supply of testing equipment.

1.12 WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Provide 14 days notice prior to commencement.

.2 Owner Representative to witness of start-up and testing.

.3 Contractor's Cx Agent to be present at tests performed and documented by sub-trades, suppliers and equipment manufacturers.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT

.1 Factory testing: manufacturer to:

.1 Coordinate time and location of testing.

.2 Provide testing documentation for approval by Owner Representative.

.3 Arrange for Owner Representative to witness tests.


.4 Obtain written approval of test results and documentation from Owner Representative before delivery to site.

.2 Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of components, equipment and systems and review with Owner Representative

.1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record discrepancies, and review with manufacturer.

.2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with manufacturer before start-up.

.3 Integrity of warranties:

.1 Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other divisions or required to maintain integrity of warranty.

.2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties.

.4 Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:

.1 Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems.

.2 Ability to interpret test results accurately.

.3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.

1.14 PROCEDURES

.1 Verify that equipment and systems are complete, clean, and operating in normal and safe manner prior to conducting start-up, testing and Cx.

.2 Conduct start-up and testing in following distinct phases:

.1 Included in delivery and installation: .1 Verification of conformity to specification, approved shop drawings and

completion of PI report forms. .2 Visual inspection of quality of installation.

.2 Start-up: follow accepted start-up procedures.

.3 Operational testing: document equipment performance.

.4 System PV: include repetition of tests after correcting deficiencies.

.5 Post-substantial performance verification: to include fine-tuning.

.3 Correct deficiencies and obtain approval from Owner Representative after distinct phases have been completed and before commencing next phase.

.4 Document require tests on approved PV forms.

.5 Failure to follow accepted start-up procedures will result in re-evaluation of equipment by an independent testing agency selected by Owner Representative. If results reveal that equipment start-up was not in accordance with requirements, and resulted in damage to equipment, implement following:

.1 Minor equipment/systems: implement corrective measures approved by Owner Representative.

.2 Major equipment/systems: if evaluation report concludes that damage is minor, implement corrective measures approved by Owner Representative.


.3 If evaluation report concludes that major damage has occurred, Owner Representative shall reject equipment. .1 Rejected equipment to be remove from site and replace with new. .2 Subject new equipment/systems to specified start-up procedures.

1.15 START-UP DOCUMENTATION

.1 Assemble start-up documentation and submit to Owner Representative for approval before commencement of commissioning.

.2 Start-up documentation to include:

.1 Factory and on-site test certificates for specified equipment.

.2 Pre-start-up inspection reports.

.3 Signed installation/start-up check lists.

.4 Start-up reports,

.5 Step-by-step description of complete start-up procedures, to permit Owner Representative to repeat start-up at any time.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 After start-up, operate and maintain equipment and systems as directed by equipment/system manufacturer.

.2 With assistance of manufacturer develop written maintenance program and submit Owner Representative for approval before implementation.

.3 Operate and maintain systems for length of time required for commissioning to be completed.

.4 After completion of commissioning, operate and maintain systems until issuance of certificate of interim acceptance.

1.17 TEST RESULTS

.1 If start-up, testing and/or PV produce unacceptable results, repair, replace or repeat specified starting and/or PV procedures until acceptable results are achieved.

.2 Provide manpower and materials, assume costs for re-commissioning.

1.18 START OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Notify Owner Representative at least 21 days prior to start of Cx.

.2 Start Cx after elements of building affecting start-up and performance verification of systems have been completed.

1.19 INSTRUMENTS / EQUIPMENT

.1 Submit to Owner Representative for review and approval:

.1 Complete list of instruments proposed to be used.

.2 Listed data including, serial number, current calibration certificate, calibration date, calibration expiry date and calibration accuracy.

.2 Provide the following equipment as required:


.1 2-way radios.

.2 Ladders.

.3 Equipment as required to complete work.

1.20 COMMISSIONING PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Carry out Cx:

.1 Under accepted simulated operating conditions, over entire operating range, in all modes.

.2 On independent systems and interacting systems.

.2 Cx procedures to be repeatable and reported results are to be verifiable.

.3 Follow equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

.4 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification.

1.21 WITNESSING COMMISSIONING

.1 Owner Representative to witness activities and verify results.

1.22 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

.1 Where specified start-up, testing or commissioning procedures duplicate verification requirements of authority having jurisdiction, arrange for authority to witness procedures so as to avoid duplication of tests and to facilitate expedient acceptance of facility.

.2 Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with rules and regulation of authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Provide copies to Owner Representative within 5 days of test and with Cx report.

1.23 COMMISSIONING CONSTRAINTS

.1 Access into secure or sensitive areas is very difficult in occupied buildings. It is necessary to complete Cx of occupancy, weather, and seasonal sensitive equipment using, if necessary, simulated thermal loads.

1.24 EXTRAPOLATION OF RESULTS

.1 Where Cx of weather, occupancy, or seasonal-sensitive equipment or systems cannot be conducted under near-rated or near-design conditions, extrapolate part-load results to design conditions when approved by Owner Representative in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's data, with manufacturer's assistance and using approved formulae.

1.25 EXTENT OF VERIFICATION

.1 Laboratory areas: Not Applicable

.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 100 % of reported results.

.2 Elsewhere:


.1 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30 % of reported results, unless specified otherwise in other sections.

.3 Number and location to be at discretion of Owner Representative.

.4 Conduct tests repeated during verification under same conditions as original tests, using same test equipment, instrumentation.

.5 Review and repeat commissioning of systems if inconsistencies found in more than 20% of reported results.

.6 Perform additional commissioning until results are acceptable to Owner Representative.

1.26 REPEAT VERIFICATIONS

.1 Assume costs incurred by Owner Representative for third and subsequent verifications where:

.1 Verification of reported results fail to receive Owner Representative's approval.

.2 Repetition of second verification again fails to receive approval.

.3 Owner Representative deems Contractor's request for second verification was premature.

1.27 SUNDRY CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

.1 Make adjustments and changes which become apparent as Cx proceeds.

.2 Perform static and operational checks as applicable and as required.

1.28 DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS

.1 Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Cx to satisfaction of Owner Representative.

.2 Report problems, faults or defects affecting Cx to Owner Representative in writing. Stop Cx until problems are rectified. Proceed with written approval from Owner Representative.

1.29 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of Cx leave systems in normal operating mode.

.2 Except for warranty and seasonal verification activities specified in Cx specifications, complete Cx prior to issuance of Interim Certificate of Completion.

.3 Cx to be considered complete when contract Cx deliverables have been submitted and accepted by Owner Representative.

1.30 ACTIVITIES UPON COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 When changes are made to baseline components or system settings established during Cx process, provide updated Cx form for affected item.

1.31 TRAINING

.1 In accordance with Section 01 79 00 - –Demonstration and Training.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 91 13 252 Buildout GENERAL COMMISSIONING (CX) REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 9 1.32 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spare parts, and special tools as specified in contract.

1.33 OCCUPANCY

.1 Cooperate fully with Owner Representative during stages of acceptance and occupancy of facility.

1.34 INSTALLED INSTRUMENTATION

.1 Use instruments installed under Contract for TAB and PV if:

.1 Accuracy complies with these specifications.

.2 Calibration certificates have been deposited with Owner Representative.

.2 Calibrated EMCS sensors may be used to obtain performance data provided that sensor calibration has been completed and accepted.

1.35 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Application tolerances:

.1 Specified range of acceptable deviations of measured values from specified values or specified design criteria. Except for special areas, to be within +/- 10% of specified values.

.2 Instrument accuracy tolerances:

.1 To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.

.3 Measurement tolerances during verification:

.1 Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within +/- 2 % of recorded values.

1.36 OWNER'S PERFORMANCE TESTING

.1 Performance testing of equipment or system by Owner Representative will not relieve Contractor from compliance with specified start-up and testing procedures.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 91 31 252 Buildout COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY





.4 Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Water Works Association (AWWA)

.2 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES

.1 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2013.

.3 CSA Group

.1 CSA Z320-11, Building Commissioning Standard & Check Sheets.

.4 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

1.3 GENERAL

.1 Objectives of Commissioning: Provide a fully functional hot water boiler heating plant, chilled water cooling system and auxiliary systems:

.1 Systems, equipment and components meet user's functional requirements before date of acceptance, and operate consistently at peak efficiencies and within specified energy budgets under normal loads.

.2 O& M personnel have been fully trained in aspects of installed systems.

.3 Optimized life cycle costs.

.4 Complete documentation relating to installed equipment and systems.

.2 Term "Cx" in this section means "Commissioning".

.3 Importance of the Cx Plan

.1 Cx Plan is the master planning, management and communications tool for Cx.

.2 Outlines organization, scheduling, allocation of resources, documentation, pertaining to implementation of Cx.

.3 Communicates responsibilities of team members involved in Cx Scheduling, documentation requirements, and verification procedures.

.4 Sets out deliverables relating to O&M, process and administration of Cx.

.5 Describes process of verification of how built works meet the design requirements.


.6 Produces a complete functional system prior to issuance of Certificate of Occupancy.

.7 Management tool that sets out scope, standards, roles and responsibilities, expectations, deliverables, and provides: .1 Overview of Cx. .2 General description of elements that make up Cx Plan. .3 Process and methodology for successful Cx.

.4 Acronyms:

.1 Cx - Commissioning.

.2 BMM - Building Management Manual.

.3 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems.

.4 MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.5 PI - Product Information.

.6 PV - Performance Verification.

.7 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

.8 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.

.5 Commissioning terms used in this Section:

.1 Bumping: short term start-up to prove ability to start and prove correct rotation.

.2 Deferred Cx - Cx activities delayed for reasons beyond Contractor's control due to lack of occupancy, weather conditions, need for heating/cooling loads.

1.4 DEVELOPMENT OF 100% CX PLAN

.1 Cx Plan to be 75% completed within 8 weeks of award of contract to take into account:

.1 Approved shop drawings and product data.

.2 Approved changes to contract.

.3 Contractor's project schedule.

.4 Cx schedule.

.5 Contractor's, sub-contractor's, suppliers' requirements.

.6 Project construction team's and Cx team's requirements.

.2 Submit completed Cx Plan to Owner Representative and revise and obtain written comments.

1.5 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN

.1 During construction phase, revise, refine and update Cx Plan to include:

.1 Changes resulting from Client program modifications.

.2 Approved design and construction changes.

.2 Revise, refine and update every 3 months during construction phase. At each revision, indicate revision number and date.

.3 Submit each revised Cx Plan to Owner Representative for review and obtain written approval.


.4 Include testing parameters at full range of operating conditions and check responses of equipment and systems.

1.6 COMPOSITION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TEAM

.1 Owner Representative is referred to as the Project Manager, is to maintain overall responsibility for project and is sole point of contact between members of commissioning team.

.2 Owner Representative will select Cx Team consisting of following members:

.1 Design Quality Review Team: during construction, will conduct periodic site reviews to observe general progress.

.2 Contractor Commissioning Oversight: ensures Cx activities are carried out to ensure delivery of a fully operational project including: .1 Review of Cx documentation from operational perspective. .2 Review for performance, reliability, durability of operation, accessibility,

maintainability, operational efficiency under conditions of operation. .3 Protection of health, safety and comfort of occupants and O&M

personnel. .4 Monitoring of Cx activities, training, development of Cx documentation. .5 Work closely with members of Cx Team.

.3 Owner Representative is responsible for: .1 Organizing Cx. .2 Monitoring operations Cx activities. .3 Witnessing, certifying accuracy of reported results. .4 Witnessing and certifying TAB and other tests. .5 Developing BMM. .6 Ensuring implementation of final Cx Plan. .7 Performing verification of performance of installed systems and

equipment. .8 Implementation of Training Plan.

.4 Consultant is also referred to as the Designer in the Owner Commissioning Guidelines. The Consultant is responsible for: .1 Designing the system to meet the functional and operational

requirements. .2 Preparing working documents. .3 Verifying installations, reports and tests. .4 Witnessing Cx.

.5 Construction Team: contractor, sub-contractors, suppliers and support disciplines, is responsible for construction/installation in accordance with contract documents, including: .1 Testing. .2 TAB. .3 Performance of Cx activities.


.4 Delivery of training and Cx documentation.

.5 Assigning one person as point of contact with Consultant and BGIS Cx Oversight for administrative and coordination purposes.

.6 Contractor's Cx Authority implements specified Cx activities including: .1 Demonstrations. .2 Training. .3 Testing. .4 Preparation, submission of test reports.

.7 Operator/Property Manager: represents lead role in Operation Phase and onwards and is responsible for: .1 Receiving hot water heating and chilled water systems including

subsystems and auxiliaries. .2 Day-To-Day operation and maintenance of systems.

1.7 CX PARTICIPANTS

.1 Employ the following Cx participants to verify performance of equipment and systems:

.1 Installation contractor/subcontractor: .1 Equipment and systems except as noted.

.2 Equipment manufacturer: equipment specified to be installed and started by manufacturer.

.1 To include performance verification.

.3 Specialist subcontractor: equipment and systems supplied and installed by specialist subcontractor.

.1 EMCS

.4 Specialist Cx agency:

.1 Possessing specialist qualifications and installations providing environments essential to client's program but are outside scope or expertise of Cx specialists on this project.

.2 TAB Agency

.5 Ensure that Cx participant:

.1 Could complete work within scheduled time frame.

.2 Available for emergency and troubleshooting service during first year of occupancy by user for adjustments and modifications outside responsibility of O M personnel, including: .1 Modify ventilation rates to meet changes in off-gassing. .2 Changes to heating or cooling loads beyond scope of EMCS. .3 Changes to EMCS control strategies beyond level of training provided to

O&M personnel. .4 Redistribution of electrical services.


.6 Provide names of participants to Departmental Representative and details of instruments and procedures to be followed for Cx 3 months prior to starting date of Cx for review and approval.

1.8 RISK ASSESSMENT

.1 Identification of Critical Systems

.1 Brooke Claxton Building: Critical Systems – none identified.

.2 R. H. Coats: Critical Systems – none identified.

.2 Performance of all systems is to be verified before building systems are accepted by Property Manager.

1.9 EXTENT OF CX

.1 Commission mechanical systems and associated equipment:

.1 Hot Water Boiler System

.2 Chilled Water System

.3 Plumbing systems: .1 Domestic, CWS, DHWS and DHWR.

.4 HVAC systems: .1 HVAC systems: Building Steam, Hot Water, and Chilled Water.

.5 Noise and vibration control systems for mechanical systems. .1 Pumps.

.6 Seismic restraint and control measures. .1 Hot water and chilled water equipment and piping systems.

.7 EMCS: .1 New field devices with controllers and integration into BAS.

.8 Energy metering systems for hot water and chilled water.

.2 Commission electrical systems and equipment:

.1 Low voltage below 750 V: .1 Low voltage equipment.

.1 Humidifiers.

.2 Electric Domestic Hot Water Heater. .2 Medium voltage below 4160 V:

.1 Medium voltage equipment. .1 Chillers .2 Pumps

1.10 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO O&M PERSPECTIVES

.1 General requirements:

.1 Compile English and French documentation.


.2 Documentation to be computer-compatible format ready for inputting for data management.

.2 Provide deliverables:

.1 Warranties.

.2 Project record documentation.

.3 Inventory of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.

.4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identification system used.

.5 WHMIS information.

.6 MSDS data sheets.

.7 Building Management Manuals: updated Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) Manuals. This is to be done primarily by the Property Facility Manager. Consultant to provide only new sections for the SOP with support by the Contractor.

.8 Electrical Panel inventory containing detailed inventory of electrical circuitry for each panel board. Duplicate of inventory inside each panel.

.9 “As-built Drawings and Specifications – Contractor to maintain and provide up-to-date project record drawings with all changes marked thereon.

1.11 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS

.1 General:

.1 Start-up, testing and Cx requirements, conditions for acceptance and specifications form part of relevant technical sections of these specifications.

.2 Definitions:

.1 Cx as used in this section includes: .1 Cx of components, equipment, systems, subsystems, and integrated

systems. .2 Factory inspections and performance verification tests.

.3 Deliverables: provide:

.1 Cx Specifications.

.2 Pre-startup, Startup, pre-Cx activities and documentation for systems, and equipment: including pressure tests and flushing tests.

.3 Completed installation checklists (ICL).

.4 Completed product information (PI) report forms.

.5 Completed performance verification (PV) report forms.

.6 Results of Performance Verification Tests and Inspections including TAB report.

.7 Description of Cx activities and documentation.

.8 Description of Cx of integrated systems and documentation.

.9 Tests witnessed by PWGSC Design Quality Review Team

.10 Tests performed by Contractors Cx Agents.

.11 Training Plans.

.12 Cx Reports.


.13 Prescribed activities during warranty period.

.4 Consultant to witness and certify tests and reports of results provided to Departmental Representative.

.5 Departmental Representative and Consultant to participate.

1.12 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1 Items listed in this Cx Plan include the following:

.1 Pre-Start-Up inspections: by Consultant prior to permission to start up and rectification of deficiencies to Departmental Representative's satisfaction.

.2 Consultant to use approved check lists.

.3 Departmental Representative will monitor some of these pre-start-up inspections.

.4 Include completed documentation with Cx report.

.5 Conduct pre-start-up tests: conduct pressure, static, flushing, cleaning, and "bumping" during construction as specified in technical sections. To be witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative and does not form part of Cx specifications.

.6 Include completed documentation in Cx report.

.2 Pre-Cx activities - MECHANICAL:

.1 Plumbing systems: .1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode. .2 Complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation. .3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction

with control systems on a system-by-system basis. .2 HVAC equipment and systems:

.1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode.

.2 At this time, complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation.

.3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction with control systems on a system-by-system basis.

.4 Perform TAB on systems. TAB reports to be approved by Departmental Representative.

.3 EMCS: .1 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for

performance verification. .2 Perform point-by-point testing in parallel with start-up. .3 Carry out point-by-point verification. .4 Demonstrate performance of systems, to be witnessed by Departmental

Representative prior to start of 30 day Final Acceptance Test period. .5 Perform final Cx and operational tests during demonstration period and

30 day test period. .6 Only additional testing after foregoing have been successfully completed

to be "Off-Season Tests".


.3 Pre-Cx activities - ELECTRICAL:

.1 Main Distribution System modifications: Requires independent testing agency to perform pre- energization and post-energization tests.

.2 Low voltage equipment and distribution systems under 750 V: .1 System checks and testing.

.3 Emergency power generation systems .1 Uninterruptible power systems: test under full and partial load

conditions.

1.13 START-UP

.1 Start up components, equipment and systems.

.2 Equipment manufacturer, supplier, installing specialist sub-contractor, as appropriate, to start-up, under Contractor's direction, following equipment, systems:

.1 Pumps

.2 Humidifiers

.3 EMCS.

.3 Departmental Representative to monitor some of these start-up activities.

.1 Rectify start-up deficiencies to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.

.4 Performance Verification (PV):

.1 Approved Cx Agent to perform. .1 Repeat when necessary until results are acceptable to Departmental

Representative. .2 Use procedures to suit project requirements. .3 Departmental Representative to witness and certify reported results using

approved PI and PV forms. .4 Consultant to approve completed PV reports and provide to Departmental

Representative. .5 Departmental Representative reserves right to verify up to 30% of reported

results at random. .6 Failure of randomly selected item shall result in rejection of PV report or report

of system startup and testing.

1.14 CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1 Perform Cx by specified Cx agency using procedures developed and approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 Departmental Representative to monitor Cx activities.

.3 Upon satisfactory completion, Cx agency performing tests to prepare Cx Report using approved PV forms.

.4 Consultant to witness, certify reported results of, Cx activities and forward to Departmental Representative.


.5 Departmental Representative reserves right to verify a percentage of reported results at no cost to contract.

1.15 CX OF INTEGRATED SYSTEMS AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1 Cx to be performed by specified Cx specialist, using procedures developed by Cx specialist and approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 Tests to be witnessed by Departmental Representative and documented on approved report forms.

.3 Upon satisfactory completion, Cx specialist to prepare Cx Report, to be certified by Consultant and submitted to Departmental Representative for review.

.4 Departmental Representative reserves right to verify percentage of reported results.

.5 Integrated systems to include:

.1 HVAC and associated systems forming part of integrated HVAC systems: Steam, Hot water, Chilled water and Domestic Hot Water.

.6 Identification:

.1 In later stages of Cx, before hand-over and acceptance Property Manager and BGIS Cx Oversight to co-operate to complete inventory data sheets and provide assistance to PWGSC in full implementation of MMS identification system of components, equipment, sub-systems, systems.

1.16 INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS (ICL)

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 33 - Commissioning (Cx) Forms: Installation Check Lists and Product Information (PI) / Performance Verification (PV) Forms.

1.17 PRODUCT INFORMATION (PI) REPORT FORMS


1.18 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) REPORT


1.19 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO ADMINISTRATION OF CX

.1 General:

.1 Heating systems are best commissioned during the heating season when temperatures are below 0°C outdoors.

.2 Cooling systems are best commissioned during the cooling season when temperatures are above 15°C outdoors.

1.20 CX SCHEDULES

.1 Prepare detailed Cx Schedule and submit to Departmental Representative for review and approval same time as project Construction Schedule. Include:


.1 Milestones, testing, documentation, training and Cx activities of components, equipment, subsystems, systems and integrated systems, including: .1 Design criteria, design intents. .2 Pre-TAB review: 28 days after contract award. .3 Cx agents' credentials: 60 days before start of Cx. .4 Cx procedures: 3 months after award of contract. .5 Cx Report format: 3 months after contract award. .6 Discussion of heating/cooling loads for Cx: 3 months before start-up. .7 Submission of list of instrumentation with relevant certificates: 21 days

before start of Cx. .8 Notification of intention to start TAB: 21 days before start of TAB. .9 TAB: after successful start-up, correction of deficiencies and

verification of normal and safe operation. .10 Notification of intention to start Cx: 14 days before start of Cx. .11 Notification of intention to start Cx of integrated systems: after Cx of

related systems is completed 14 days before start of integrated system Cx.

.12 Identification of deferred Cx.

.13 Implementation of training plans.

.14 Cx reports: immediately upon successful completion of Cx. .2 Detailed training schedule to demonstrate no conflicts with testing, completion of

project and hand-over to Property Manager. .3 6 months in Cx schedule for verification of performance in all seasons and wear

conditions.

.2 After approval, incorporate Cx Schedule into Construction Schedule.

.3 Consultant, Contractor, Contractor's Cx agent, and Departmental Representative will monitor progress of Cx against this schedule.

1.21 CX REPORTS

.1 Submit reports of tests, witnessed and certified by Consultant to Departmental Representative who will verify reported results.

.2 Include completed and certified PV reports in properly formatted Cx Reports.

.3 Before reports are accepted, reported results to be subject to verification by Departmental Representative.

1.22 ACTIVITIES DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 Cx activities must be completed before issuance of Interim Certificate, it is anticipated that certain Cx activities may be necessary during Warranty Period, including:

.1 Fine tuning of HVAC systems.

.2 Adjustment of ventilation rates to promote good indoor air quality and reduce deleterious effects of VOCs generated by off-gassing from construction materials and furnishings.


1.23 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED BY PROPERTY MANAGER

.1 None are anticipated on this project.

1.24 TRAINING PLANS

.1 Refer to Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

1.25 FINAL SETTINGS

.1 Upon completion of Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative lock manual control devices in their final positions, indelibly mark settings marked and include in Cx Reports.

1.26 PAYMENTS FOR CX

.1 Commissioning budget will be considered as a separate task in the overall budget. Commissioning bid allocation should be outlined as a subtotal within the bid.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 01 91 33 252 Buildout COMMISSIONING FORMS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

.1 Commissioning forms to be completed for equipment, system and integrated system.





.4 Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and s-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.




1.2 INSTALLATION/START-UP CHECK LISTS

.1 Include the following data:

.1 Product manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended checks.

.2 Special procedures as specified in relevant technical sections.

.3 Items considered good installation and engineering industry practices deemed appropriate for proper and efficient operation.

.2 Equipment manufacturer's installation/start-up check lists are acceptable for use. As deemed necessary by Owner Representative supplemental additional data lists will be required for specific project conditions.

.3 Use check lists for equipment installation. Document check list verifying checks have been made, indicate deficiencies and corrective action taken.

.4 Installer to sign check lists upon completion, certifying stated checks and inspections have been performed. Return completed check lists to Owner Representative. Check lists will be required during Commissioning and will be included in Building Maintenance Manual (BMM) at completion of project.

.5 Use of check lists will not be considered part of commissioning process but will be stringently used for equipment pre-start and start-up procedures.

1.3 PRODUCT INFORMATION (PI) REPORT FORMS

.1 Product Information (PI) forms compiles gathered data on items of equipment produced by equipment manufacturer, includes nameplate information, parts list, operating instructions, maintenance guidelines and pertinent technical data and recommended checks that is necessary to prepare for start-up and functional testing and used during operation and maintenance of equipment. This documentation is included in the BMM at completion of work.


.2 Prior to Performance Verification (PV) of systems complete items on PI forms related to systems and obtain Owner Representative's approval.

1.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) FORMS

.1 PV forms to be used for checks, running dynamic tests and adjustments carried out on equipment and systems to ensure correct operation, efficiently and function independently and interactively with other systems as intended with project requirements.

.2 PV report forms include those developed by Contractor records measured data and readings taken during functional testing and Performance Verification procedures.

.3 Prior to PV of integrated system, complete PV forms of related systems and obtain Departmental Representative's approval.

1.5 SAMPLES OF COMMISSIONING FORMS

.1 Owner Representative will develop and provide to Contractor required project-specific Commissioning forms in electronic format complete with specification data.

.2 Revise items on Commissioning forms to suit project requirements.

.3 Samples of Commissioning forms are attached to this section.

1.6 CHANGES AND DEVELOPMENT OF NEW REPORT FORMS

.1 Recommend changes to forms to suit project.

.2 When additional forms are required or changes need to be made, the Departmental Representative will develop appropriate verification forms and provide to the Contractor.

1.7 COMMISSIONING FORMS

.1 Use Commissioning forms to verify installation and record performance when starting equipment and systems.

.2 Strategy for Use:

.1 Owner Representative provides Contractor project-specific Commissioning forms with Specification data included.

.2 Contractor will provide required shop drawings information and verify correct installation and operation of items indicated on these forms.

.3 Confirm operation as per design criteria and intent.

.4 Identify variances between design and operation and reasons for variances.

.5 Verify operation in specified normal and emergency modes and under specified load conditions.

.6 Record analytical and substantiating data.

.7 Verify reported results.

.8 Form to bear signatures of recording technician and reviewed and signed off by Owner Representative.

.9 Submit immediately after tests are performed.

.10 Reported results in true measured SI unit values.

.11 Provide Owner Representative with originals of completed forms.


.12 Maintain copy on site during start-up, testing and commissioning period.

.13 Forms to be both hard copy and electronic format with typed written results to be inserted in Building Management Manual.

1.8 LANGUAGE

.1 To suit the language profile of the awarded contract.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

PRE‐COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST

ITEM EQUIPMENT Contractor Sign‐Off

Owner Representative/

Consultant Sign‐Off

Completion

Date COMMENTS

M MECHANICAL

1.00 Piping Systems:

1.01

Visual inspection of each piping system against flow diagrams and sign off by Contractor and/or Owners

Engineer.

1.02

All hangers, supports, anchors, and isolation bases are correctly installed and complete. All hanger rods are

vertical (does not exceed 4 degrees). Galvanized finishes. Maximum spacing adhered to.

1.03

All welds are complete and otherwise inspected as required, with no open joints, plugs, drains, vents, etc.

Pressure test sign off completed.

1.04 All flanged and threaded joints complete with correct torque, no missing bolts, etc.

1.05

Ensure that all instrumentation, and flow control devices are installed in the proper orientation and locations

and can be read from ground level, including flow meter.

1.06

Confirm drain/vent valves can be operated without spraying electronic equipment, else provide drain pipe to

ground.

1.07 Unobstructed access to valves and gauge (needle) valves. Confirm if chain wheel required.

1.08 Ensure all safety relief devices and safety systems are properly installed .

1.09

Verify that start‐up strainers installed and cleaned strainer after flushing/cleaning. Obtain sign‐off by Owner’s

Representative.

1.10

Notify Owner within 5 business days for pressure testing, flushing, cleaning activities. Complete Owner’s

Flushing/Cleaning Checklist

1.11

Chilled water piping, heat exchangers, pumps etc. completely insulated to prevent condensation. All cooling

vents/drains shall be completely insulated and sealed.

1.12 Equipment/sensor nameplates, valve tagging and list installed.

2.00 Plant Equipment

2.01 Visually inspect all equipment for defects immediately upon arrival at site including Owner supplied items.

2.02 Install equipment in accordance with construction documents and manufacturer requirements.

2.03 Rotating equipment / motor speed matches speed on equipment data sheet submittal.

2.04 Correctly installed, leveled, aligned (alignment results recorded) and equipment properly grouted / anchored.

2.05

All pipe work, valves, ductwork, etc., correctly connected, including integral pipe work for gland sealing,

cooling or lubrication.

2.06

Integral instrumentation, such as pressure gauges, pressure switches, temperature detectors, correctly

installed and mechanically connected where applicable.

2.07 Correct lubricants added in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

2.08 Alignment check performed on all pumps and rotating equipment.

2.09 Confirm correct direction of equipment rotation.

2.10 Pressure vessels carry ASME stamps on nameplates as well as CRN numbers for Province of installation.

3.00 Pump/VFD

3.01 Complete inertia base/pump stand installation.

3.02 All moving parts are guarded

3.03 Clean/remove start‐up strainer

3.04 Complete Vendor Checklist.

3.05 Request for Authorized Start‐up Technician

3.00 Chiller


3.02 First Fill of Fluids


4.00 Cooling Tower



5.00 Boiler



6.00 OTHER



E ELECTRICAL

1.00 General

1.01 Visual inspection of all electrical equipment

1.02 Ensure polarity and or phase rotation is correct throughout system

1.03

Ensure correct functioning in regard to safety, level of insulation electric resistance, grounding continuity,

resistively to ground of equipment, and correct general operation.

2.00 Transformers

PRE‐COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST

ITEM EQUIPMENT Contractor Sign‐Off

Owner Representative/

Consultant Sign‐Off

Completion

Date COMMENTS

2.01 Insulation system of secondary wiring satisfactory

2.02 Satisfactory visual inspection, general cleanliness. Cable box covers bolted in position.

2.03 All ground connections determined as satisfactory.

2.04 Results of tests recorded.

3.00 Medium Voltage Switchgear & MCC's

3.01 Mechanical operation satisfactory e.g. manual closing, manual trip and shutter operation.

3.02 Insulation resistance of secondary wiring satisfactory.

3.03 All ground connections satisfactory.

3.04

Satisfactory visual inspection; correctly lined, leveled and bolted or welded down; general cleanliness

satisfactory.


4.00 Cables (Prior to Connection to Equipment)

4.01 Check all cables when received and after installation for any visible signs of damage.

4.02

After installation, check continuity and insulation resistance (phase‐to‐phase and phase‐to‐ground) of all

cables by means of a 1000 volt megger. The minimum value of insulation resistance is one megohm.

4.03

g ,

instrumentation cables are disconnected at the panels before megger testing to ensure that dangerous over‐

voltages are not applied to this equipment.

4.04 Test all shielded cables for line continuity and polarity.


5.00 Motors

5.01 After completion of cabling the Contractor shall carry out the following tests:

5.02

A.C. Motors ‐ Insulation Resistance: Check that all motors are connected properly in conformity with the

nameplate details and as shown on the drawings.

5.03 Check ground and cable connections.

5.04

Test insulation resistance of motors and cabling by means of a 1000 volt megger and ensure that insulation

resistance is at least one megohm or higher.

5.05 Correct phasing for direction of rotation. Anti‐rotation devices installed and tested.

5.06 Coupling covers, if applicable, properly secured.

5.07 Correct lubricant and brushes added, maintenance manual instructions followed.

5.08

If applicable bearing and winding temperature detectors correctly installed, but not necessarily connected for

first trial spin for rotation.

5.09

p g ,

switches, etc., and rotating the motor by hand, (if the drive conditions permit such), the Contractor shall, with

the assent of and in the presence of the Owner's

6.00 Motor Starters

6.01 Inspect for proper disconnect switch, fuse, overload, size and rating.

6.02

Inspect for damaged components, tight connections, and legible terminal identification in accordance with

elementary diagrams.

6.03 Perform megger test of power and control wiring.

6.04 Test for proper opening and closing of contactors from both local and remote operating stations

7.00 Grounding

7.01

Test ground system to insure all parts of steel structure, motor frames, switchgear, trays, conduit and

other electrical equipment will be at ground potential

8.00 Instrumentation

8.01

System equipment cubicles, racks, desks or panels correctly installed and leveled, with anti‐vibration mounts if

required.

8.02

Individual transmitters, gauges, meters, switches, signal converters, detectors, etc. field confirm required

calibration, settings, etc. Provide a record of field calibration for each instrument.

8.03

Provide certificate confirming each pressure relief valve’s set pressure. Relief valve set point adjustment

device is sealed.

8.04 Individual transmitters, gauges, signal converters, etc. correctly installed.

8.05 Primary elements correctly located and installed.

8.06 Instrument piping, tubing and wiring complete.

8.07 Air compressor and air dryers tested and proved for proper operation.

8.08

All signal loops checked and all actuators/valves operate in the correct direction within the required operating

range in both manual and automatic mode.

8.09 Verify correct fail action of actuated devices.

8.10 Confirm PLC programming factory acceptance tested and accepted prior to onsite installation.

8.11 Perform control signal to PLC simulation and verification onsite.

COMMISSIONING RECORD SHEET

CHILLER DATAOf Rev

Project Page

Tag Number: Plant System

EVAPORATOR DESIGN

Water enter temp °C/°F °C/°F

Water leave temp °C/°F °C/°F

Water flow usgpm usgpm

Water pr. drop kPa/psi/ft. kPa/psi/ft.

Water enter temp °C/°F °C/°F

Water leave temp °C/°F °C/°F

Water flow usgpm usgpm

Water pr. drop kPa/psi/ft. kPa/psi/ft.

Manufacturer Capacity tons (refr.)

Serial no. Model

Type Frame

Manufacturer Serial no.

Rated power kW Electrical supply V/ph/Hz

Overload range amps Running current amps

FLA amps Setting amps

LRA amps

Motor cooling water flow usgpm

Water supply temp °C/°F

Water outlet temp °C/°F

Tested by: Witnessed by:

Date of test: Date:

Instruments used:

SITE RECORDED VALUE

COMMENTS

MOTOR DATA

CHILLER DATA

CONDENSER


BOILER DATAOf Rev

Project Page


BOILER DESIGN

Fuel & HHV KJ/kg KJ/kg

Fluid

Output kW kW

Fluid rate L/s L/s

Fluid inlet temperature °C °C

Fluid outlet temperature °C °C

Fluid pressure drop m m

Ambient air temperature °C °C

Comb. air temperature °C °C

Gas temperature lvg. unit °C °C

Stack temperature °C °C

Fuel Rate kg/hr kg/hr

Excess air % %

Design pressure kPa kPa

Flooded content liter liter

1) Low flow cutout switch to be set at ______ L/s


Date of test: Date:

Instruments used:

SITE RECORDED VALUE

PHYSICAL

COMMENTS


COOLING TOWER/RADIATOR DATAOf Rev

Project Page


SYSTEM DATA DESIGN

Water flow rate usgpm usgpm

Number of operating cells

Fan HP per cell hp hp

# blades / fan

Elevation m/ft. m/ft.

Barometric Pressure in. Hg in. Hg

Hot water temperature °C/°F °C/°F

Range °C/°F °C/°F

Inlet wet‐bulb temperature °C/°F °C/°F

TDS ppm ppm

Oil content ppm ppm

Fan speed / cell

Blade angle

Fill spacing

Capability

Turndown


Date of test: Date:

Instruments used:

SITE RECORDED VALUE

COMMENTS


PUMP DATAOf Rev

Project Page


SYSTEM DATA DESIGN

System flow rate L/s / GPM L/s / GPM

Pump head kPa/psi Suction Pressure kPa/psi

Pump closed head kPa/psi Discharge Pressure kPa/psi

Pump speed rev/m rev/m

Motor speed rev/m rev/m

Main reg. Valve reference Main reg. Valve setting

Method used to obtain pump flow rate

Duty L/s @ m (kPa) Duty gpm ft

Manufacturer Model

Serial no. Impeller dia. mm

Type Frame

Manufacturer Serial no.

Rated power kW/HP Electrical supply V/ph/Hz

FLC. amps Running current amps

Overload range amps Setting amps

DRIVE DATA

No. of Belts Belt Size

Motor pulley groove x mm Pump pulley groove x mm

Pump Curve No.: Attach pump curve.

Spare parts provided to Owner:


Date of test: Date:

Instruments used:

SITE RECORDED VALUE

COMMENTS

MOTOR DATA

PUMP DATA

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 02 41 99 252 Buildout DEMOLITION FOR MINOR WORKS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General




1.2 REFERENCES

.1 National Building Code of Canada (NBC)

.1 Part 8 – Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites (2005)

.2 CSA International

.1 CSA S350-M1980 (R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.

.3 National Building Code of Canada (NBC), Part 8 - Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites (2010) and with local authority having jurisdiction.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures and 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management Disposal.

.2 Submit demolition drawings:

.1 Submit for review and approval by Departmental Representative temporary support drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ottawa, Canada, showing proposed method.

.3 Sustainable Design Submittals, where applicable:

.1 Construction Waste Management: .1 As per Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management.

.2 Recycled Content: .1 As per Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management.

.3 Regional Materials: .1 As per Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Review "Designated Substance Report" and take precautions to protect environment. (NOT APPLICABLE).

.2 If material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos or other designated substance listed as hazardous be encountered, stop work, take preventative measures, and notify Departmental Representative immediately.

.1 Proceed only after receipt of written instructions have been received from Departmental Representative

.3 Notify Departmental Representative before disrupting building access or services.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 02 41 99 252 Buildout DEMOLITION FOR MINOR WORKS Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.5 UNIT PRICES

.1 The abatement, demolition, and removal of asbestos containing materials or other designated substances listed as hazardous will be paid on the actual quantities measured on site and the unit prices stated in the Bid and Acceptance Form. (NOT APPLICABLE).

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Inspect building site with Departmental Representative and verify extent and location of items designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to remain.

.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition.

.3 Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.

.4 Disconnect, cap, plug or divert, as required, existing public utilities & services within the property where they interfere with the execution of the work, in conformity with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Mark the location of these and previously capped or plugged services on the site and indicate location (horizontal and vertical) on the record drawings. Support, and maintain pipes and conduits encountered.

.1 Immediately notify Departmental Representative and utility company concerned in case of damage to any utility or service, designated to remain in place.

.2 Immediately notify the Departmental Representative should uncharted utility or service be encountered, and await instruction in writing regarding remedial action.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Photograph equipment and record existing equipment identifiers prior to removal of equipment. Request official project Equipment Data Collection Form from the Departmental Representative. Submit completed Equipment Data Collection Form similar to attached sample in Appendix 1. All removed, modified and new equipment require the submission of a completed Equipment Data Collection Form.

.2 Protection of In-Place Conditions:

.1 Prevent movement, settlement, or damage to adjacent structures, utilities, and existing pipe work and equipment to remain in place. Provide bracing as required.

.2 Keep noise, dust, and inconvenience to occupants to minimum.

.3 Protect building systems, services and equipment.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 02 41 99 252 Buildout DEMOLITION FOR MINOR WORKS Project No. 218225 Page 3

.4 Provide temporary dust screens, covers, railings, supports and other protection as required.

.5 Do Work in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.

.3 Demolition/Removal:

.1 Remove items as indicated. Refer to Appendix 2 – Demolition Schedules for each building attached to this Section.

.2 Remove parts of existing piping systems and equipment to permit new construction.

.3 Remove or cap any redundant or abandoned pneumatic tubing. Coordinate with Division 23.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.

.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.3 Refer to demolition drawings and specifications for items to be salvaged for reuse.



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 07 84 00 252 Buildout FIRE STOPPING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

.2 Section 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework

.3 Section 25 05 60 EMCS: Field Installation

.4 Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results - Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES



.2 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 ULC-S115-11, Fire Tests of Fire stop Systems.

.3 Comply with all requirements of the National Building Code of Canada 2010 (NBC), National Fire Code of Canada 2010 (NFC), including all subsequent revisions, issued by the National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Fire Stop Material: device intended to close off opening or penetration during fire or materials that fill openings in wall or floor assembly where penetration is by cables, cable trays, conduits, ducts and pipes and poke-through termination devices, including electrical outlet boxes along with their means of support through wall or floor openings.

.2 Single Component Fire Stop System: fire stop material that has Listed Systems Design and is used individually without use of high temperature insulation or other materials to create fire stop system.

.3 Multiple Component Fire Stop System: exact group of fire stop materials that are identified within Listed Systems Design to create on site fire stop system.

.4 Tightly Fitted; (ref: NBC Part 3.1.9.1.1 and 9.10.9.6.1): penetrating items that are cast in place in buildings of noncombustible construction or have "0" annular space in buildings of combustible construction.

.1 Words "tightly fitted" should ensure that integrity of fire separation is such that it prevents passage of smoke and hot gases to unexposed side of fire separation.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.


.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01 - Hazardous Materials.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings to show location, proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation.

.2 Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual fire stop material proposed for project.

.5 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.1 Test reports: in accordance with CAN-ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN-ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .1 Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing

laboratories, indicating compliance of applied fire stopping with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.

.4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to manufacturer's written reports within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.


.1 Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section, with contractor's representative in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule - Bar (GANTT) Chart to:

.1 Verify project requirements.

.2 Review installation and substrate conditions.

.3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades.

.4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.

.2 Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Services described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed.

.1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work is complete, but before installation begins.

.2 Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.


.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition and in original unopened containers, marked to indicate ULC markings.

.2 Storage and Protection:

.1 Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

.3 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN-ULC-S115.

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN-ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended and conforming to specified special requirements described in PART 3.

.2 Service penetration assemblies: systems tested to CAN-ULC-S115.

.3 Service penetration fire stop components: certified by test laboratory to CAN-ULC-S115.

.4 Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC.

.5 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal.

.6 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.

.7 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

.8 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

.9 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.10 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 07 84 00 252 Buildout FIRE STOPPING Project No. 218225 Page 4 Part 3 Execution


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials.

.1 Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.

.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier.

.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with manufacturer's certified tested system listing.

.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to neat finish.

.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.


.1 Location of special requirements for fire stopping and smoke seal materials at openings and penetrations in fire resistant rated assemblies are as follows:

.1 Non dust generation: as indicated.

.2 Movement: as indicated.

.3 1 ½ or 2 hour rating to match existing rating.

3.5 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

.1 Proceed with installation only when submittals have been reviewed by Owner Representative.

.2 Install floor fire stopping before interior partition erections.

.3 Metal deck bonding: fire stopping to precede spray applied fireproofing to ensure required bonding.


.4 Mechanical pipe insulation: certified fire stop system component.

.1 Ensure pipe insulation installation precedes fire stopping.


.1 Inspections: notify Owner Representative when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services:

.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.

.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

3.7 CLEANING

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.2 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

.3 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

3.8 SCHEDULE

.1 Fire stop and smoke seal at:

.1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.2 Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and precast concrete panels.

.3 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.4 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.5 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.6 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.

.7 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

.8 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.

.9 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm2 : fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 09 91 23 252 Buildout INTERIOR PAINTING Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 10

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 23 05 52 Painting and Surface Preparation

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

.1 Material and installation of site applied paint finishes to existing interior surfaces.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Department of Justice Canada (Jus)

.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33

.2 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

.1 EPA Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 - 1995, (for Surface Coatings).

.3 Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)


.4 The Master Painters Institute (MPI)

.1 MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual, 2004.

.1 Maintenance Repainting Manual [2004], Master Painters Institute (MPI), including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved Product List.

.5 National Fire Code of Canada - 2010

.6 Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

.1 SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two, 8th Edition, Systems and Specifications Manual.

.7 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State

.1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-[04], Architectural Coatings.

.8 Transport Canada (TC)

.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.


.1 Qualifications:

.1 Contractor: minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. Provide list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager.


.2 Journeymen: qualified journeymen who have "Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency" engaged in painting work.

.3 Apprentices: working under direct supervision of qualified trades person in accordance with trade regulations.

.2 Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior repainting work including cleaning, preparation and priming.

.3 Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners and solvents) shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.

.4 Pre-Installation Meeting:

.1 Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section. .1 Verify project requirements and work hours. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Coordination with other subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty

requirements.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: when viewed using final lighting source surfaces shall indicate the following:

.1 Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface.

.2 Ceilings: no defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface.

.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and sheen across full surface area.

.6 Health and Safety:

.1 In accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.

1.5 SCHEDULING

.1 Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Owner Representative for review. Submit schedule minimum of 5 business days (1 week) in advance of proposed operations.

.2 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants and operations.


.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit product data and instructions for each paint and coating product to be used.

.2 Submit product data for the use and application of paint thinner.


.3 Submit one copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Indicate VOCs during application and curing.

.3 Test reports: submit certified test reports for paint from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.1 Lead, cadmium and chromium: presence of and amounts.

.2 Mercury: presence of and amounts.

.3 Organochlorines and PCBs: presence of and amounts.

.4 Manufacturer's Instructions:

.1 Submit manufacturer's installation [application] instructions.

.5 Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals] include following:

.1 Product name, type and use.

.2 Manufacturer's product number.

.3 Colour number[s].

1.7 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials:

.1 Deliver to extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Quantity: provide one – one litre can of each type and colour of primer and finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.


.1 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:

.1 Pack, ship, handle and unload materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Acceptance at Site:

.1 Identify products and materials with labels indicating: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

.3 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.


.1 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.


.2 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.

.3 Store materials and equipment in well ventilated area with temperature range 7 degrees C to 30 degrees C.

.5 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer.

.6 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation clean and orderly. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition.

.7 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.

.8 Fire Safety Requirements:

.1 Provide one Type ABC fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area.

.2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis.

.3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with National Fire Code of Canada requirements.


.1 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.

.2 Unused paint materials must be disposed of at official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Representative.

.3 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and solvents) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government.

.4 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

.5 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into ground follow these procedures: .1 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in

designated containers and ensure proper disposal. .2 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where

available). .6 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for

delivery to recycling or collection facility.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:

.1 Ventilate enclosed spaces. Provide heating facilities to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently.

.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:


.1 Unless pre-approved written approval by product manufacturer, perform no painting when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C. .2 Substrate temperature is above 32 degrees C unless paint is specifically

formulated for application at high temperatures.

.3 Surface and Environmental Conditions:

.1 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits.

.2 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.

.3 Apply paint in occupied facilities during silent hours only. Schedule operations to approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project.

.2 Provide paint materials for paint systems from single manufacturer.

2.2 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 Concrete vertical surfaces: block and concrete walls

.1 Colour – White, Semi-Gloss

.2 Block: .1 1 ct. Loxon Block Surfacer .2 2 cts. Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy

.3 Masonry: .1 1 ct. Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer .2 2 cts. Pro Industrial Pre-Catayzed Epoxy

.4 Steel, Aluminum, Galvanized: .1 1 ct. Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer .2 2 cts Pro Industrial Pre-Catayzed Epoxy

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy

.2 Concrete horizontal surfaces: floors and stairs

.1 Colour – Light Grey

.2 Concrete Floors, previously painted: .1 1 ct. Spot prime bare areas with ArmorSeal 8100, 2-4 mils .2 2 cts. ArmorSeal 8100, 2-4 mils


.3 Anti-slip additive shall be used on all stair surfaces including 300 mm on the top and bottom step.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Floor Coatings ArmorSeal 8100 Water Based Epoxy Floor Coating

.4 Finish color top coat.

2.3 MECHANICAL PAINTING SYSTEMS: BARE STEEL PIPE AND SUPPORTS

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 52 Painting and Surface Preparation

Part 3 Execution


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Where requested Owner Representative, a third party inspection shall be performed by the Contractor under the cash allowance.

.1 Interior repainting work: inspected by MPI Accredited Paint Inspection Agency (inspector) acceptable to specifying authority and local Painting Contractor's Association. Painting contractor to notify Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of project repainting specification and Finish Schedule (as well as plans and elevation drawings).

3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Surface Preparation:

.1 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking painting operations. Identify and store items in secure location and re-installed after painting is completed.

.2 Place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas as painting operations progress. Signs to approval of Departmental Representative.

.3 Fill holes and/or depressions in holes greater than 12 mm (1/2)” with epoxy resin and/or self leveling grout. Use hammer and cold chisel to level out bottom and undercut sides. Clean area.

.2 Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and/or MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:

.1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, and wiping with dry, clean cloths.


.2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface.

.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.

.5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents.

.6 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. Minimize use of mineral spirits or organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.

.3 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified.

.4 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Owner Representative.

3.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Prior to commencing work, examine site conditions and existing interior substrates to be repainted. Report in writing to Owner Representative damages, defects, or unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect this work.

.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using simple "cover patch test" and report findings. Maximum moisture content not to exceed specified limits.

.3 Do not commence until such adverse conditions and defects have been corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to Painting Subcontractor and Inspection Agency, where applicable.

.4 Degree of surface deterioration (DSD) to be assessed using MPI Identifiers and Assessment criteria indicated in MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. MPI DSD ratings and descriptions are as follows:

Condition Description DSD-0 Sound Surface ( includes visual (aesthetic) defects

that do not affect film's protective properties). DSD-1 Slightly Deteriorated Surface (indicating fading;

gloss reduction, slight surface contamination, minor pin holes scratches).

DSD-2 Moderately Deteriorated Surface (small areas of peeling, flaking, slight cracking, and staining).

DSD-3 Severely Deteriorated Surface (heavy peeling, flaking, cracking, checking, scratches, scuffs, abrasion, small holes and gouges).

DSD-4 Substrate Damage (repair or replacement of surface required).

3.5 PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing surfaces and adjacent fixtures and furnishings from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Owner Representative.


.2 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.

.3 Protect factory finished products and equipment.

.4 Protect general public and building occupants in and about building.

.5 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath accessories and surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking re-painting operations. Store items and re-install after painting is completed.

.6 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out repainting operations. Replace as painting operations progress.

.7 As repainting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas to approval of Owner Representative.

3.6 APPLICATION

.1 Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by brush or spray paint. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

.2 Brush and Roller Application:

.1 Apply paint in uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application.

.2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.

.3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins.

.4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant].

.5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.

.3 Spray application:

.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.

.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.

.3 Apply paint in uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern. Back roll first coat application.

.4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags.

.5 Use brushes and rollers to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray.

.4 Apply coats of paint continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.


.5 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.

.6 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.

.7 Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.

3.7 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Unless otherwise noted, repainting to include exposed to view / previously painted mechanical and electrical equipment and components (panels, conduits, piping, hangers, and ductwork.).

.2 Touch up scratches and marks and repaint such mechanical and electrical equipment and components with colour, and sheen finish to match existing unless otherwise noted or scheduled.

.3 Do not paint over name plates or instruction labels.

.4 Leave unfinished exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish.

.5 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.6 Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.


.1 Inspection:

.2 Advise Owner Representative and Paint Inspection Agency when each surface and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.

.3 Co-operate with Paint Inspection Agency and provide access to areas of work.

3.9 CLEANING

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section [01 74 11 - Cleaning], supplemented as follows:.

.1 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.2 Keep work area free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

.3 Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Clean equipment and dispose of wash water used for water borne materials, solvents used for oil based materials as well as other cleaning and protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, and masking papers), paints, thinners, paint removers/strippers in accordance with safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and as noted herein.

.5 Clean painting equipment in leak-proof containers that will permit particulate matter to settle out and be collected. Sediment remaining from cleaning


operations to be recycled or disposed of in manner acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Recycle paint and coatings in excess of repainting requirements as specified.

3.10 RESTORATION

.1 Clean and re-install hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.

.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.

.3 Remove paint splashings on affected exposed surfaces. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.

.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Owner Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.

.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Owner Representative.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 21 05 01 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY .1 The Work generally includes the installation, and/or supply and commissioning

of all piping, valves and auxiliary equipment listed within the specification documents and on the contract drawings.

.2 The specifications, together with the drawings, are intended to provide complete information for the complete installation and commissioning of the project. The installations shall be complete with all details and material for a first class installation even though every miscellaneous item may not be mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings.

.3 The Contractor shall carefully examine the plans and specifications for the works and visit the site of the work, and make himself fully familiar with all aspects of the work involved, general and local conditions, all federal, provincial and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and all other pertinent items.

.2 Approved Alternate

.1 Submission for an approved alternate is to contain literature and descriptive information with full specification data. Where the requested item is contained on a printed document with other items, it is to be clearly identified. The Consultant will not search catalogues or contact suppliers to get the necessary information for proper evaluation.

.2 Submission by Bidders for evaluation of products requested to be considered as an alternate must be submitted to the Consultant no less than 7 working days prior to closing of Bids.

.3 The acceptance of products as approved alternate is at the discretion of the Consultant.

.4 If a product is accepted as an approved alternate an addendum will be issued to known Bidders.

.5 When products are given Approved Alternate status these products may, at the discretion of Bidders, be carried in their Bid Price, provided that all costs related to changes to the contract work required to incorporate the Approved Equal product are include in the Bid price.

.3 Alternates

.1 Alternative products and related prices are not to be included in the Bid Price, but must be listed on a separate form and are to be understood as being offered only for the Owner's consideration as substitutes for the specified "Base Bid" or " Standard of Acceptance" products and the amount of increase or decrease in the Bid Price.

.2 When alternative products are listed all costs related to changes to the contract work required to incorporate the alternative product into the work are to be included in the amount. Unless alternatives are submitted in this manner and subsequently accepted, provide products as specified.

.3 Approval to submit alternatives prior to submission of bids is not required.


.4 Interpretation of Plans and Specifications

.1 The Consultant's interpretation of plans and specifications shall be final. Should a Bidder have any doubt as to interpretation, he shall refer his query to the Consultant for clarification in writing before submitting his Bid.


.1 Section 02 41 99 – Demolition for Minor Works,

.2 All Division 22 Sections.

.3 All Division 23 Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Codes and regulations referred to throughout the various sections of these specifications shall mean the latest edition of there in force at time of tendering, even if indicated otherwise.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 “Provide” shall mean supply, install and connect.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for all products listed in each section and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Ontario, Canada.

.2 The review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept and does not mean approval of the design details inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents.

.3 Drawings to show: .1 Mounting arrangements. .2 Operating and maintenance clearances. .3 Maintenance lifting beam locations bottom of lifting beam elevation and

gross lifting weight. .4 Drawings and product data accompanied by:

.1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.

.2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.

.3 Points of operation on performance curves.


.4 Manufacturer to certify current model production.

.5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. .5 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal

Procedures: Identify section and paragraph number.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for all mechanical products listed in each section for incorporation into manual.

.1 Prepare and submit for review Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Owner Representative.

.2 Submit approval copies for Owner’s comment prior to issuing final copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

.3 Revise and Issue final Operation and Maintenance Manuals after receiving Owner’s comments.

.4 Issue final copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals two weeks prior to Substantial Completion of Project.

.5 Provide one copy of the O&M manual on Flash Drive in adobe PDF format and two (2) hard copies in binder.

.6 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Owner Representative before final inspection.

.7 Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for systems including environmental controls. .2 Description of systems and their controls. .3 Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset

schedules and seasonal variances. .4 Operation instruction for systems and component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart.

.8 Maintenance data to include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for

each item of equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task

time. .9 Performance data to include:

.1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete.

.2 Equipment performance verification test results.

.3 Special performance data as specified.

.4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section [23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC].

.10 Approvals:


.1 Submit 1 copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner Representative for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by Consultant.

.2 Make changes as required and re-submit. .11 Additional data:

.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.

.12 Site records: .1 Owner Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical

drawings. Provide sets of prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring.

.2 Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed.

.3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.

.4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection. .13 As-Built drawings:

.1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings.

.2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).

.3 Submit to Owner Representative for approval and make corrections as directed.

.4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings.

.5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

.14 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals].

.2 Furnish spare parts as follows:

.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 Two filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.

.3 One spare gasket for each strainer.

.3 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.


.4 Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings associated with new equipment.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:

.1 Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect all mechanical products from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan related to Work.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

1.9 METRIC CONVERSION

.1 All units in this division are expressed in SI units. Soft metric conversions are used throughout.

.2 Submit all shop drawings and maintenance manuals in SI units.

.3 On all submittals use the same SI units as stated in the specification.

.4 Equivalent Nominal Diameters of Pipes - Metric and Imperial

.1 Where pipes are specified with metric dimensions and only Imperial sized pipes are available, provide equivalent nominal Imperial sized pipe as indicated in the table, and provide adapters to ensure compatible connections to all metric sized fittings, equipment and piping.

.2 When CSA approved SI Metric pipes are available and are provided, provide adapters to ensure compatible connections between the SI Metric pipes and all new and existing pipes, fittings, and equipment.

.3 Record accurately on "as-built" drawings the type of pipe (i.e., Metric or Imperial) installed.

EQUIVALENT NOMINAL DIAMETERS OF PIPES

mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches 3 1/8 50 2 250 10 6 1/4 63/65 2-1/2 300 12

10 3/8 75/80 3 350 14 12/13 1/2 100 4 450 18 19/20 3/4 125 5 500 20

25 1 150 6 600 24


30/32 1-1/4 200 8 750 30 38/40 1-1/2

.5 Metric Duct Sizes

.1 The metric duct sizes are expressed as 25 mm = 1 inch.

Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT GROUTING AND AREA PREPARATION

.1 Unless specified otherwise all grout shall be non-catalyzed metallic, non-shrink, premixed type with minimum compressive strength of 35 MPa at 28 days.

.2 The grout shall meet the requirements of the following specifications;

.1 Shrinkage Test; CRD-C621-80

.2 Flow Cone Test; CRD-C611-80

.3 Bleeding Test: CRDC-C9-72

.4 Compressive Strength Test: ASTM C109-77

.3 Type of grout and to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2.2 MOTORS & E-STOPS

.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment in accordance with the requirements described in the mechanical equipment specifications.

.2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, the contractor shall supply motor, approved by Consultant, for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed.

.3 Provide local E-stops for all pump motors 10 HP and above.

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS AND PLATFORMS

.1 Equipment supports supplied by equipment manufacturer: specified elsewhere in Mechanical specifications.

.2 Equipment supports not supplied by equipment manufacturer: Fabricate from structural grade steel. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer.

.3 Mount equipment on chamfered edge housekeeping pads, minimum of 100 mm high and 150 mm larger than equipment base dimensions all around, or as shown on drawings. Pads to be constructed from concrete; (30 MPa yield strength after 28 days of curing time), and reinforcing steel to resist seismic forces as indicated in housekeeping pad details. Housekeeping pads shall be sealed against water ingress. As per Section 03 30 00 Cast-in Place Concrete.

.4 Edges of housekeeping pads to be painted YELLOW.


.5 All support attachments to the building structure are to be detailed and submitted to the project Structural Engineer for review. The attachment details submittal will bear the stamp of a Professional Engineer licenced to practice in the Province having jurisdiction.

.6 Steel platforms to be provided will also require submission of assembly drawings to the Structural Engineer for review. Steel joint connection details must also be provided in addition to general assembly drawings and material lists.

.7 Platform design shall incorporate safety barrier/fall protection per OHSA.

.8 All equipment and piping supports, pads, and platforms to be included in the 3D CAD model of the system.

2.4 SLEEVES

.1 Pipe sleeves: provide at points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete or fire rated assemblies and as indicated.

.2 Schedule 40 steel pipe. Prime and paint all sleeves with rust inhibitive primer/paint.

.3 Cast sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint for new construction:

.1 Through foundation walls.

.2 Where sleeve extends above finished floor.

.4 Sizes: minimum 25 mm clearance all around or as stated on penetrations drawing for pipes subjected to thermal movement, between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.

.5 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry walls, and main level concrete floors. Terminate sleeves 50 mm above finished floor on all floors above the main level.

.6 Fill voids around pipes:

.1 For pipes subject to thermal or seismic movement provide flexible fire stop. For other pipework caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with waterproof fire retardant non hardening mastic.

.2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, provide space for fire stopping. Where pipes/ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity.

.3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.

.4 Fill future use sleeves with lime plaster or other easily removable filler.

.5 Basement/Valve chamber walls: provide Linkseal gasket and non-shrink grout for pies and conduits. Make good on exterior waterproofing.

.7 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of wire brushed ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint to CGSB 1 GP 181M+Amdt Mar 78.

2.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

.1 Design and install the Seismic Restraint System, as specified in Section 23 05 49.01 Seismic Restraint Systems and Section 23 05 48 Vibration & Seismic Controls.

.2 Provide all required building permit schedule letters of assurance for the Seismic Restraint System design and installation.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 21 05 01 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL Project No. 218225 Page 8 2.6 FIRE STOPPING

.1 All pipe and duct penetrations through floors and walls will be fire stopped.

.2 Refer to Section 07 84 00 Fire Stopping for more details.

.3 Fire stop material will be flexible type only.

.4 Fire stopping material and insulation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation.

.5 Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: no special preparation.

.6 Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe to move without damaging fire stopping material.

.7 Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapor barrier at fire separation.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

.1 On pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings in finished areas.

.2 Chrome or nickel plated brass or Type 302 stainless steel, one piece type with set screws.

.3 Dimensions such that outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve and inside diameter to fit around finished pipe.

2.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Approvals

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.2 Structural integrity of any element of Project.

.3 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

.4 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

.5 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

.6 Consultant’s approval required.

.2 Inspection

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.

.3 Scan areas by X-ray, radar or other means approved by Consultant of walls and floors to be cut or cored through. .1 Advise Structural Engineer of any structural elements discovered. Do

not cut or core prior to receiving review and approval from Structural Engineer.

.4 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.3 Execution

.1 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete the Work.

.2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.


.3 Provide openings for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work.

.4 Perform work to avoid damage to other work.

.5 Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.6 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.7 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed.

.8 Restore work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents.

.9 Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

.10 At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated material, full thickness of construction element. Seal with non-hardening resilient sealer. Package material and sealer to be UL approved for penetrations through fire rated walls and floors.

.11 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.12 Remove and Reinstall all suspended ceilings and replace any damaged tiles or tee-bars.

.13 Disconnect all electrical fixtures and re-install.

2.9 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Supply access doors to concealed mechanical equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting, servicing, and equipment removal.

.2 Flush mounted 600 x 600 mm for body entry and 300 x 300 mm for hand entry unless otherwise noted. Doors to open 180º, have rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latches and anchor straps.

.3 Material:

.1 Special areas such as tiled or marble surfaces: use stainless steel with brushed satin or polished finish as directed by Consultant.

.2 Remaining areas: use prime coated steel.

2.10 Installation: .1 Locate so that concealed items are accessible. .2 Locate so that hand or body entry (as applicable) is achieved. .3 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn, Enpoco, or equivalent.

2.11 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 General:

.1 To be compatible with and to suit pressure rating of piping system.

.2 Where pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Pipes NPS 2 and under: dielectric unions will be acceptable between copper and steel where permitted by Code.


.3 Pipes NPS 2-1/2 and over: electric insulating/isolating kits between flanges and bolts.

2.12 DRAIN and VENT VALVES

.1 Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified.

.2 Locate at piping high points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified.

.3 Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: hose end male thread complete with cap.

.4 Pipe manual drains, air vents, and strainers to nearest drain or downwards, with a hose end male thread complete with cap, 400 mm above floor level, if there is no floor drain present.

.5 For any drains, air vents or strainers installed over 1,800 mm above floor level, allow for an additional ball valve at an elevation of 1,000 mm above floor level and the screw cap is no longer required.

.6 Air vents shall be piped away from piping and equipment, with a downwards turn valve. Allow room for a bucket to catch any water.

2.13 SPARE DRAIN/VENT/CONNECTIONS ALLOWANCE

.1 Allow for up to six (6) spare 25 mm nominal NPT connections plugged on the process heating piping. Owner to identify locations in the field at time of construction.

.2 Allow for up to six (6) spare 25 mm nominal NPT connections plugged on the process chilled water piping. Owner to identify locations in the field at time of construction.

2.14 ELECTRICAL

.1 Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment, which Is not CSA certified obtain special approval from electrical Inspection Department.

.2 Manufacturers and CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is installed.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Owner Representative.

.2 Inform Owner Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Owner Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Install material and equipment generally in locations and routes shown, close to building structure with minimum interference with other services or free space. Remove and


replace improperly installed equipment as determined by the Engineer. Field verify all dimensions, clearances, maintenance clearances, equipment handling requirements, invert elevations, and other similar measurements prior to any fabrication and installation. Notify the Consultant of any discrepancies that require resolution.

.2 Install piping and ductwork only in concealed spaces, unless otherwise approved.

.3 Remove and replace improperly installed mechanical work, or work that requires modifications due to coordination issues or conflicts.

.4 Mechanical work shall include supply and installation for all fixtures defined in the contract documents.

.5 Secure and support pipe and equipment to prevent upset, injury, and or damage during all phases of the installation process.

.6 Structural review of mechanical drawing pipe supports designed by the Contractor’s Structural Engineer will be performed by the Consultant’s Structural Engineer.

.7 Prepare dimensioned drawings showing sleeving, recesses, furring and openings to coordinate mechanical work with other trades.

.8 Prepare dimensioned drawings for congested areas such as shafts, corridors and spaces that require special attention to complete the installation.

.9 The installation of all equipment will include the following:

.1 Transporting from project site storage, removing from shipping containers and preparation of equipment for installation; unpacking/uncrating, removal off site of any debris generated in handling or erection. When instructed by the Consultant, take delivery of equipment directly and either store it or erect it.

.2 The assembly of any parts shipped loose;

.3 Before commencing the work, verify required equipment orientation, and correct location of connection points. Verify the required installation locations for the equipment and piping based on the plans and specifications. Verify, and coordinate seismic restraint requirements.

.4 Lifting, placing on foundation, leveling and aligning;

.5 The anchoring, grouting and trimming of anchor bolts;

.6 Anchoring of all base mounted pumps. Grouting in of the support frame carrying the horizontal pump.

.7 The checking for correct installation;

.8 Installation of equipment seismic restraints that anchors the equipment to the housekeeping pad, floor, or structure. Refer to seismic restraint specification.

.9 The supply of packers and shims (leveling of equipment using nuts on the anchor bolts shall not be accepted);

.10 The draining of lubricants and refilling with new lubricants.

.10 Use of existing hoist equipment is not allowed. Contractor to provide own hoists for lifting equipment.

.11 Install equipment in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer's drawings and installation manuals and the requirements of this Specification. In case of


conflict, the requirements contained in the manufacturer's drawings and installation manual shall govern.

.12 Installation of all motors shall be complete and ready for operation, except for connection of the power and grounding cables (by Division 26).

.13 Supply any additional material not supplied with the equipment, which is necessary to complete the installation in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s drawing and the system design drawings.

.14 The Contractor may be required to carry out installation of equipment under the technical direction of manufacturer’s installation supervisors, whose services would be paid for by the Purchaser, if not included in the purchase contract for the equipment.

.15 The Contractor is to maintain equipment in new condition and shall protect it from dust and debris accumulation. Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.

.16 For installation purposes, the actual positioning of the equipment shall be done in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings which will be issued for construction with award of contract.

.17 Work may commence associated with a particular set of equipment only after:

.1 Obtaining from the Consultant the necessary drawings to established co-ordinates and bench marks; and

.2 Reading the requirements contained in the manufacturer's drawings and installation manuals.

.18 Follow all instructions given on the shipping containers when handling equipment.

.19 Grouting of pump base plates shall not be permitted until inlet/outlet piping has been erected strain free while supported on blocked permanent hangers. An interim alignment check shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Consultant.

.20 Each coupling which has to be aligned shall have the alignment witnessed by the Consultant prior to and after connecting up the piping to verify that there is no load superimposed upon the equipment. Readings shall be recorded on the pre-commissioning reports.

.21 After each complete unit of equipment has been installed, anchored, and grouted, it shall be serviced and tested. The servicing consists of lubricating, adjusting, and cleaning all parts of the equipment as per manufacturer's requirements. All testing and servicing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

.22 Where applicable, check the direction of motor rotation prior to making up the coupling or installing the belting connection to the driven machinery. In the event alignment of motors with their respective driven equipment is completed prior to final connection of electrical service, check the rotation only after breaking the drive connection by the Contractor, thus ensuring that the driven equipment cannot be rotated in reverse. Carry out recoupling and aligning.

.23 Where the Contractor is required to supply a component and the notation on the list, data sheet or drawing allows an approved equal, submit all details for approval by the Consultant prior to installation or erection.


.24 Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly only in approved locations.

.25 Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated.

.26 Relief valve discharge piping shall be piped to floor drains for hot water systems and to glycol fill tanks for glycol systems. All relief valve discharge piping shall be secured to the floor or other permanent structure to prevent movement during discharge.

.27 Equipment drains & strainers: pipe to floor drains.

.28 Manual air vents: Screwed cap 400 mm above floor level, the height of a bucket to collect the water during venting off the system. The valve should be reached from the floor.

.29 All rotating equipment shall be final aligned by the contractor to manufacturer’s requirements after installation of equipment and permanent piping has been connected.

.30 Provide a waterproof curb, 100 mm high, around all pipe and duct penetrations through floors.

.31 For existing hydronic systems, provide chemical treatment system upgrade to allow for new piping additions, as indicated.

.32 For new hydronic systems, provide for new chemical treatment system to serve new piping system, as indicated.

3.3 PROVISIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

.1 Install piping in racks with clearance in between pipes and the final insulation and finish equal to the pipe diameter. Where piping is stacked, provide a minimum 300 mm clearance in between stacks.

.2 Install maintainable components such as valves, motors, traps, air vents, dampers, filters, coils in a manner to facilitate proper access for maintenance.

.3 Install major equipment components such as pumps, fans, boilers, heat pumps at floor level. Install piping connections with isolating valves located to allow component removal with minimal system drainage.

.4 Locate flanges/unions to allow equipment removal without interruption to piping work.

.5 Allow adequate space for removal of equipment and components from the mechanical room space.

.6 Install gauges and metering equipment in readily accessible and visual locations.

.7 Provide extensions to lubrication fittings for bearings, etc. to outside of fan cabinets where indicated.

.8 Provide maintenance platforms, ladders, safety rails to Occupational Health and Safety Standards to accommodate equipment and components not easily accessed from the floor.

.9 Provide maintenance mono-rails and process equipment access platforms where indicated on drawings.

.10 Provide lifting lugs attached to the building structure above motors and equipment that weight in excess of 50 kg. Coordinate installation with structural engineer.


.11 Allow minimum clearance in front of electrical components, such as motor control centres, starters, VFDs, control panels in accordance with applicable codes.

.12 3D CAD model of system to be submitted prior to fabrication for review and approval by the Consultant for provisions for maintenance.

3.4 COORDINATION OF WORK

.1 Cooperate and coordinate with other trades on the project.

.2 Coordinate Mechanical and Electrical work. Coordinate all requirements for electrical services to mechanical components and equipment.

.3 Using shop drawing data, prepare a comprehensive list to define all specific electrical requirements needed by the Division 22 and 23 work to complete the installation. Coordinate with Electrical Trade.

.4 Prior to ordering any motor driven mechanical equipment, Electrical Trade is to confirm all electrical interface requirements with mechanical components.

.5 Prepare and submit drawings to the Consultant, for the structural engineer’s review, defining mechanical system support loads and support details. Include definition of pipe and/or loads on structural elements and anchor arrangements.

.6 Areas designated for the installation of future works shall be left clear.

3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUTING AND AREA PREPARATION

.1 Grout selection as per section 2.2 of this specification.

.2 Remove all defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign materials from the concrete surfaces by chipping, or other means approved by the Consultant, until a sound, clean, roughened concrete surface with protrusions between 3 mm to 6 mm is achieved. The surface shall be approved by the Engineer.

.3 The whole area to be covered with grout shall be continuously wetted for 24 hours before placement of grout. The Engineer shall be informed once wetting has commenced.

.4 All formwork shall be water tight and caulked if necessary to prevent seepage.

.5 Prior to placement of grout the Contractor shall have had the grouting procedure approved by the Engineer. This procedure shall take into account all the manufacturer’s instructions and all the particular aspects of the specific item of equipment to be grouted, e.g., air management, mixing ability, standby equipment, test samples, etc.

.6 A head box slanted at a 45° angle shall be formed on the placing side. Remaining sides should be formed up a minimum of 25 mm above the bottom of the baseplate to assure that the grout remains in contact with the plate.

.7 The temperature of the foundation and baseplate between which the grout is to be placed should be between 7°C and 24°C using iced or warm water (not exceeding 32°C) as may be necessary to acquire the proper mixed temperature.

.8 No re-tempering, once the grout is mixed it shall be permitted. Mix the grout until it is homogeneous (two to three minutes).


.9 All grout shall be mixed to a fluid consistency of 20 seconds to 30 seconds on the flow cone, CRD-C 611-80. Lesser consistencies may be used for special cases only with the approval of the owner’s engineer.

.10 The Contractor shall ensure that grout shall be placed from only one side, allowing the grout to push air ahead and out as the space is filled. Bolt holes, shear keys and other deep depressions shall be grouted first. Mechanical vibrators shall not be used.

.11 The Contractor shall ensure that the temperature of the grout does not fall below 7°C until the grout attains final set. The grout shall be protected from freezing until it has attained 28 MPa compressive strength.

.12 Exposed shoulders of the grout shall be cured with wet rags and forms shall bot be removed until final set. Final set may be approximated as a point in time when the grout shoulder can no longer be penetrated by a pointed trowel.

.13 After stripping the forms, all exposed grout surfaces shall be cured with a curing compound meeting the moisture retention requirements of ASTM C309-81.

3.6 DRIVE GUARDS

.1 Guards selection as per section 2.5 of this specification.

.2 Install guards for unprotected drivers.

.3 Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place.

.4 Install and securely fasten in place appropriate belt guards for:

.1 motors to allow movement for adjusting belt tension, and

.2 unprotected fan inlets or outlets.

3.7 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS AND PLATFORMS

.1 Supports and housekeeping pads selection as per section 2.6 of this specification.

.2 Mount equipment on chamfered edge housekeeping pads, minimum of 100 mm high and 150 mm larger than equipment base dimensions all around, or as shown on drawings. Housekeeping pads shall be sealed against water ingress. As per Section 03 30 00 Cast-in Place Concrete.

.3 All support attachments to the building structure are to be detailed and submitted to the project Structural Engineer for review. The attachment details submittal will bear the stamp of a Professional Engineer licenced to practice in the Province having jurisdiction.

.4 Steel platforms to be provided will also require submission of assembly drawings to the Structural Engineer for review. Steel joint connection details must also be provided in addition to general assembly drawings and material lists.

.5 Platform design shall incorporate safety barrier/fall protection per OHSA.

.6 All equipment and piping support, pads, and platforms to be included in the 3D CAD model of the system.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 21 05 01 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL Project No. 218225 Page 16 3.8 ROOF PENETRATION – MECHANICAL PIPING

.1 Single or multiple pipe or conduit or tubing penetration through the finished roof shall be sealed and flashed to prevent water leakage into the plant space through the roof penetration.

.2 Metal cones: the mechanical contractor is responsible for installing metal cones as flashing around single pipe, conduit or tube penetrations through the roof, and sealing the cones to the finished roof membrane system.

.3 Flashed curbs: The mechanical contractor is responsible for providing to the roofing contractor, the number, locations, and sizes of roof penetrations that are required to accommodate roof penetrations that are needed to carry multiple pipes, or tubes, or conduit. The roofing contractor will install curbs and flash and seal these curbed penetrations as needed to prevent leakage.

3.9 PROVISIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

.1 Install piping in racks with clearance in between pipes and the final insulation and finish equal to the pipe diameter. Where piping is stacked, provide a minimum 300 mm clearance in between stacks.

.2 Install maintainable components such as valves, motors, traps, air vents, dampers, filters, coils in a manner to facilitate proper access for maintenance.

.3 Install major equipment components such as pumps, fans, boilers, heat pumps at floor level. Install piping connections with isolating valves located to allow component removal with minimal system drainage.

.4 Locate flanges/unions to allow equipment removal without interruption to piping work.

.5 Allow adequate space for removal of equipment and components from the mechanical room space.

.6 Install gauges and metering equipment in readily accessible and visual locations.

.7 Provide extensions to lubrication fittings for bearings, etc. to outside of fan cabinets where indicated.

.8 Provide maintenance platforms, ladders, safety rails to Occupational Health and Safety Standards to accommodate equipment and components not easily accessed from the floor.

.9 Provide maintenance mono-rails and process equipment access platforms where indicated on drawings.

.10 Provide lifting lugs attached to the building structure above motors and equipment that weight in excess of 50 kg. Coordinate installation with structural engineer.

.11 Allow minimum clearance in front of electrical components, such as motor control centres, starters, VFDs, control panels in accordance with applicable codes.

.12 3D CAD model of system to be submitted prior to fabrication for review and approval by the Consultant for provisions for maintenance.

3.10 PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION

.1 Do painting in accordance with Section [09 91 23 - Interior Painting].

.2 Owner to approve paint colour selection and specification details.


.3 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.

.4 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.

.5 Paint all gas and bare piping including vents with one coat of primer and two coats of finish paint. Paint color to meet applicable code requirements.

.6 Apply at minimum one coat of rust inhibitive paint to ferrous supports

3.11 SYSTEM CLEANING

.1 Do system cleaning in accordance with Section 23 08 02 – Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

.2 Provide and remove start-up strainers upstream of all major equipment and flow meters.

.3 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.


.1 Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section [01 45 00 - Quality Control] and submit report as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.1 Hydrostatic pressure testing of all new piping. .1 Pressure test all piping after installation and before painting, insulating,

or concealing in any way. .2 Submit test procedure for review and approval to the Consultant a

minimum of 48 hours prior to commencement of the operation. .3 Bypass and isolate all equipment (such as heat exchangers),

instrumentation, expansion joints, flexible connectors, and piping specialty components (such as control valves and flow meters) so as not to expose them to the pressure test.

.4 Remove or isolate and bypass any valves, strainers or other components whose design pressure rating is not rated to withstand the test pressure, prior to test.

.5 Use clean, filtered fresh or city hydrotest water at 10C.

.6 Hydraulically test the piping at 1.5 times the design pressure for a minimum of 4 hrs without a drop in pressure. All equipment must be isolated, and vented.

.7 All pipe joints must remain uncovered and be visually inspected during the pressure test. Any leaking joint must be repaired at the contractors cost and the pressure test repeated.

.8 Provide witness to test.

.9 The contractor will prepare test certificate and be signatory to the test result. Documentation to be submitted as required to TSSA to register the piping following a successful test. A copy to be provided to Consultant as part of the OM manual.

.2 In accordance with Section 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems.


.1 Control Systems.


.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .1 Boilers .2 Chillers .3 Pumps. .4 Control Systems. .5 Filtration System

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstration and Training in accordance with Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

.2 Owner Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.

.3 Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems:

.1 Hydronic Pumps;

.2 Fans;

.3 Air Handlers;

.4 Unit Heaters;

.5 Air Conditioners;

.6 Heat Exchangers.

.4 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.

.5 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of instruction materials.

.6 Where specified elsewhere in Division 21, manufacturers to provide demonstration and instructions.

.7 Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.

.8 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE MAY RECORD THESE DEMONSTRATIONS ON VIDEO TAPE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

3.14 CLEANING





.3 Prior to the operation of any of the equipment, the contractor shall clean the entire plant space such that it is free of any dust and debris that may become airborne during ventilation system operation and or equipment operation. This includes the cleaning of all floor surfaces, wall surfaces and equipment surfaces.

.4 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers to remove internal debris, pipe slag, and corrosion by-products prior to the operating fill of the system.

.5 In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment to as recieved condition and leave in operating condition including replacement or cleaning of all filters in all piping systems.

.6 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.


3.15 SYSTEM FILLING

.1 Utilize softened water for hot and chilled water systems and fill plant process hot and chilled water piping.

.2 Fill condenser water piping/system with city water directly.

.3 Fill building heating system with 40% Propylene glycol solution, or as indicated.

.4 Operate and fill makeup water system

.5 Fill all fluids for emergency generator sets.

3.16 PROTECTION

.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 21 05 03 252 Buildout MECHANICAL DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Project No. 218223 Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Demonstration of equipment and systems operations.

.2 Instruction and seminars for Owner's personnel.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

.1 Refer to and comply with the following sections:

.1 Close Out Procedures Section 01 77 00 .2 Close Out Submittals Section 01 78 00 .3 Demonstration and Training Section 01 79 00 .4 Common Mechanical Section 20 05 01 .5 Process Systems Division 40 and 42 .6 Process Controls Section 40 91/95 (Series) .7 Building Controls Section 23 09 (Series) .8 Fire Suppression Division 21 .9 Plumbing Division 22 .10 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Division 23


.1 Work specified shall be performed by the Contractor and subtrades and suppliers.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT APPLICABLE

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 The Contractor to supply tools, equipment and personnel to assist in the plant start-up and commissioning process.

.2 The Contractor to supply tools, equipment and personnel as needed to provide overall training and instruction to the operating and maintenance staff on the operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the plant.

.3 Where specified elsewhere in Divisions 22, 23, 40, or 42, manufacturers to provide equipment specific demonstrations and instructions to be included in the overall training.

.4 The contractor to provide the maintenance manuals and as-built drawings to aid in the training, plant commissioning, and start-up.


.5 Instruction duration time requirements for specific equipment as specified in appropriate sections.

.6 Where deemed necessary, Consultant/Owner may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.

.7 Arrange for presentation and demonstration of mechanical equipment and systems by appropriate specialists and shall ensure that required manufacturer's representatives are in attendance.

.8 Coordinate demonstration and instruction agenda and schedule with the Owner and Engineer.

.9 Coordinate demonstration and instruction agenda and schedule for work performed outside the contract with the Owner and Engineer.

.10 Provide personnel when necessary to ensure proper detailed training is provided for all mechanical systems.

3.2 DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Demonstrate specific starting and stopping and general maintenance requirements for each major piece of equipment. Ensure all labeling and identification is completed.

.2 Demonstrate the following systems, in the form of instruction seminars and contractor- guided tour of the facility.

.1 Process Heating Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.2 Process Heat Recovery Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.3 Hydronic Heating Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.4 Air Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.5 Fire Protection Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.6 Plumbing Systems, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.7 Control Systems, minimum 40 hours training specific.

.8 Chemical Treatment Systems, minimum 2 hour training specific.

.9 Balancing, minimum 2 hours training specific.

.3 Demonstrate the following pieces of equipment and systems to the Owner and to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.1 Hot Water Boilers, minimum 8 hours training specific to the boilers by the vendor.

.2 Condensing Economizer, minimum 8 hours training specific to the system by the vendor.

.3 Distribution/Export Pumps and Controller; minimum 8 hrs training specific to the system by the vendor.

.4 Fans/Air Handling Units, minimum 4 hours training specific.

.5 Terminal Air Units

.6 Pumps – balance of plant

.7 Heat Exchangers

.8 Sprinkler Valve Assemblies


.9 Glycol Loops

.4 Sequence of demonstration and duration of training seminars to suit project. Submit agenda for review by Owner and Engineer two month prior to demonstration.

.5 Answer all questions raised by Owner at demonstrations; if unable to satisfactorily answer questions immediately, provide written response within three (3) days.

.6 Provide sign off sheets for each session. Sign off sheets to have attendees, date, subject, presentation by and comments. Attach the sign off sheets to the agenda and submit a copy to the engineer following training seminars.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 Section 22 10 10 Plumbing Pumps.

.2 Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

.3 Section 22 15 00 General Service Compressed Air Systems

.4 Section 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialities and Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC)

.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-[2004], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).

.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0-[2007], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.3 LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction-[2010], LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.

.4 LEED Canada for Existing Buildings, Operations and Maintenance-[2009], LEED Canada 2009 Leadership In Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for all Plumbing product listed in each sections and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2 Indicate on drawings: .1 Mounting arrangements. .2 Operating and maintenance clearances.

.3 Shop drawings and product data accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. .2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves.


.4 Manufacturer to certify current model production.

.5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. .4 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal

Procedures. Identify section and paragraph number.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for all mechanical products listed in each section for incorporation into manual.

.1 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Consultant before final inspection.










.5 Approvals: .1 Submit [2] copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to

[Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant] for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant].

.2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant].

.6 Additional data:


.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.

.7 Site records: .1 [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant] will

provide [1] set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of [white] prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. [Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring].

.2 Transfer information [weekly] to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed.


.4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection. .8 As-built drawings:


.2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).

.3 Submit to [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant] for approval and make corrections as directed.





.1 Submit in accordance with Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals].


.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump.

.3 One glass for each gauge glass.


.4 Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements with manufacturer's written instructions.





.2 Store and protect all mechanical products from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.1 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan related to Work of this Section.

.2 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials.

1.7 METRIC CONVERSION

.1 All units in this division are expressed in SI units. Soft metric conversions are used throughout.

.2 Submit all shop drawings and maintenance manuals in SI units.

.3 On all submittals use the same SI units as stated in the specification.

.4 Equivalent Nominal Diameters of Pipes - Metric and Imperial

.1 Where pipes are specified with metric dimensions and only Imperial sized pipes are available, provide equivalent nominal Imperial sized pipe as indicated in the table, and provide adapters to ensure compatible connections to all metric sized fittings, equipment and piping.

.2 When CSA approved SI Metric pipes are available and are provided, provide adapters to ensure compatible connections between the SI Metric pipes and all new and existing pipes, fittings, and equipment.

.3 Record accurately on "as-built" drawings the type of pipe (i.e., Metric or Imperial) installed.

EQUIVALENT NOMINAL DIAMETERS OF PIPES

mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches 3 1/8 50 2 250 10 6 1/4 63/65 2-1/2 300 12

10 3/8 75/80 3 350 14 12/13 1/2 100 4 450 18 19/20 3/4 125 5 500 20

25 1 150 6 600 24 30/32 1-1/4 200 8 750 30 38/40 1-1/2

.5 Metric Duct Sizes

.1 The metric duct sizes are expressed as 25 mm = 1 inch.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project No. 218225 Page 5 Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION


.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Consultant.

.2 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Consultant.

3.2 COORDINATION OF WORK

.1 Cooperate and coordinate with other trades on the project.

.2 Coordinate Mechanical and Electrical work. Coordinate all requirements for electrical services to mechanical components and equipment.

.3 Using shop drawing data, prepare a comprehensive list to define all specific electrical requirements needed by the Division 22 and 23 work to complete the installation. Coordinate with Electrical Trade.

.4 Prior to ordering any motor driven mechanical equipment, Electrical Trade is to confirm all electrical interface requirements with mechanical components.

.5 Prepare and submit drawings to the Consultant, for the structural engineer’s review, defining mechanical system support loads and support details. Include definition of pipe and/or loads on structural elements and anchor arrangements.

.6 Areas designated for the installation of future works shall be left clear.


.1 Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.


.3 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.

3.4 SYSTEM CLEANING


Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project No. 218225 Page 6 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and submit report as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.1 Hydrostatic pressure testing of all new piping. .1 Pressure test all piping after installation and before painting, insulating,

or concealing in any way. .2 Submit test procedure for review and approval to the Consultant a

minimum of 48 hours prior to commencement of the operation. .3 Bypass and isolate all equipment (such as heat exchangers),

instrumentation, expansion joints, flexible connectors, and piping specialty components (such as control valves and flow meters) so as not to expose them to the pressure test.

.4 Remove or isolate and bypass any valves, strainers or other components whose design pressure rating is not rated to withstand the test pressure, prior to test.

.5 Use clean, filtered fresh or city hydrotest water at 10C.

.6 Hydraulically test the piping at 1.5 times the design pressure for a minimum of 4 hrs without a drop in pressure. All equipment must be isolated, and vented.


.8 Provide witness to test.

.9 The contractor will prepare test certificate and be signatory to the test result. Documentation to be submitted as required to TSSA to register the piping following a successful test. A copy to be provided to Consultant as part of the OM manual.

.2 In accordance with Section 23 08 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems. .1 Control Systems.



.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .1 Pumps. .2 Control Systems.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project No. 218225 Page 7 3.6 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstration and Training in accordance with Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

.2 Consultant will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.


.1 Pumps;

.2 Heat Exchangers;

.3 Control Valves;




.7 Consultant will record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.

3.7 CLEANING






3.8 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 11 16 252 Buildout DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 Section 21 05 01 – Common Work Results for Mechanical.

.2 Section 22 42 01 – Plumbing Specialties

.3 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.

.4 Section 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges.

.5 Section 23 05 53.01 – Mechanical Identification.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME)

.1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-13, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250.

.2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-12, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-13, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.4 ANSI/ASME B16.24-11, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500.

.2 American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI)/(AWWA)

.1 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

.3 ASTM International Inc.

.1 ASTM A307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.2 ASTM A536-14, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

.3 ASTM B75: Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

.4 ASTM B88M-13, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric).

.5 ASTM B828: Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings


.1 CSA MSE 13

.2 CSA B242-05 (2011), Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings.

.3 CSA ANSI Z21.22-99/CSA 4.4-M99 (R2014), Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.

.4 CSA B137.6, CPVC Pipe Tubing and Fittings for Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems.

.5 CSA B125.3, Plumbing fittings



.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA).



.7 IAPMO: Uniform Plumbing Code

.8 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).

.1 MSS-SP-67-2011, Butterfly Valves.

.2 MSS-SP-70-2011, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.3 MSS-SP-71-2011, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.4 MSS-SP-80-13, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

.9 NSF International Standard (NSF) / American National Standard Institution (ANSI)

.1 NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

.10 National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction

.1 NRCC, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2010.

.11 Province of Ontario

.1 Provincial Building Code – 2012.


.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA).



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.

.3 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 11 16 252 Buildout DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project No. 218225 Page 3 Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Install copper pipe and fittings for domestic hot water system as indicated on the drawings and here-in specified.

.2 Stainless steel pipe and fittings are permitted to be used for the building side of the DHW heat exchanger with written approval by the local plumbing inspector. Contractor to select and submit all shop drawings associated with this work. Dielectric isolation kits to be used where necessary.

.3 All copper piping, fittings, valves, strainers, heat exchangers, and other equipment on the domestic water service lines to be designed and installed in accordance with local building and plumbing codes, to operate at:

.1 Design Pressure: 1,035 kPa (150 psig)

.2 Design Temperature: 82°C (180°F)

.3 Operating Temperature: 5°C to 65°C (40°F – 150°F)

.4 Domestic copper piping system may be constructed using mechanical press fit components or traditional soldered components to match building construction.

.5 All product shall be UL/ULC classified accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service and certified to the no/low lead standard of NSF 372.

2.2 PIPING

.1 Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, within building.

.1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M.

.2 Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long lengths and with no buried joints.

.2 All new domestic piping and tie-ins to match existing pipe sizes and type.

2.3 FITTINGS

.1 Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150: to ANSI/ASME B16.24.

.2 Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125: to ANSI/ASME B16.15.

.3 Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18.

.4 Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.

.5 NPS 1 and smaller: wrought copper to ANSI/ASME B16.22 cast copper to ANSI/ASME B16.18; with 301stainless steel internal components and EPDM seals. Suitable for operating pressure to 1380 kPa.

2.4 JOINTS

.1 PTFE gasket material that is suitable for potable water, NSF61 or higher (FDA compliance);

.2 Acceptable Material: Klinger Softchem or Robchem CF-504 to suit 99 °C @ 1.4 MPa and bolt grade.


.3

.4 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.

.5 Solder/brazing: 95/5 tin copper alloy, lead free silver solder.

.6 Teflon tape: for threaded joints.

.7 Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting, complete with thermoplastic liner.

2.5 DIELECTRIC UNIONS .1 Rated for 250 psi as per B 16.39 at 82°C (180°F). .2 Body and nut shall be steel with galvanized coat .3 Insulator shall be nylon and tail piece shall be brass .4 Gaskets shall be EPDM or PTFE. .5 Acceptable material: Wilkins Model DU or DUC Solder/brazing

2.6 GATE VALVES .1 NPS 2 and under, soldered:

.1 Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, 200 PSI CWP, bronze body, full port, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc.

.2 Acceptable material: .1 Crane 1334, Kitz

.2 NPS 2 and under, threaded: .1 Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, full port, screw-in

bonnet, solid wedge disc. .2 Acceptable material:

.1 Crane 428, Kitz .3 NPS 2-1/2 and over, mechanical rooms:

.1 Rising stem: to MSS SP-70, Class 125, flat flange faces, cast-iron body, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bronze trim.

.2 Acceptable material: .1 Crane 465 1/2, Kitz

.4 NPS 2-1/2 and over, outside of mechanical rooms, flanged: .1 Non-rising stem: to MSS SP-70, Class 125, flat flange faces, cast-iron

body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet. .2 Acceptable material:

.1 Crane 461, Kitz

2.7 GLOBE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered:

.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc, screwed over bonnet.


.2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:

.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable composition disc.

.2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.

2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES


To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat.


.1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat.

.3 NPS 2 1/2 and over, flanged:

.1 To MSS-SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, flat flange faces, regrind renewable seat, bronze disc, bolted cap.

2.9 BALL VALVES


.1 Class 150.

.2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle.


.1 To ANSI/ASME B16.18, Class 150.

.2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors.

2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES

.1 NPS 2-1/2 and over, lug :

.1 To MSS-SP-67, Class 200.

.2 Cast iron body, ductile iron chrome plated disc, stainless steel stem, EPT liner.

.3 Lever operated, NPS 8 and over, gear operated.

2.11 DRAIN VALVES

.1 NPS ½ ball valves, as specified herein.

2.12 VENT VALVES

.1 NPS ½ ball valves, as specified herein.

2.13 THERMOMETERS

.1 Install with 13 mm NPT brass thermowell.


.2 Refer to Section 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges.

2.14 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges.

2.15 TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

.1 Safety relief valves shall be ASME and CSA rated and CSA ANSI Z21.22 certified.

.2 Bronze body, direct spring loaded type, lever operated, and non-adjustable factory set discharge pressure (1034 kPa @ 100°C) or as otherwise specified.

.3 System relief valve capacity shall exceed make-up capacity.

.4 Relief valve discharge capacity shall exceed input capacity of domestic hot water heat exchanger.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction and Provincial Plumbing Code.

.2 Install pipe work in accordance with Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework, supplemented as specified herein.

.3 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.4 Install cold piping below and away from hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible.

.5 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

.6 Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

.7 Support piping in accordance with Section 23 05 29 – Hangers & Supports.

3.3 VALVES

.1 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with butterfly or ball valves.

.2 Install drain and vent valves at low and high points.

.3 Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe valves. Mark settings and record on as-built drawings on completion.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 11 16 252 Buildout DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project No. 218225 Page 7 3.4 RELIEF VALVES

.1 Each relief valve discharge shall be drained separately to floor drain.

.2 All relief valve discharge piping shall be secured to the floor or other permanent structure to prevent movement during discharge.

3.5 PRESSURE TESTS

.1 Test pressure: greater of 1.5 times maximum system operating pressure or 1000 kPa.

.2 Pressure test duration: 48 hrs.

3.6 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

.1 Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 hours. Let stand for 24 hours, then draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean to Provincial and Federal potable water guidelines. Let system flush for additional 2 hours, then draw off another sample for testing.

3.7 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS

.1 Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up.

.2 Verify that system can be completely drained.

.3 Ensure that pressure booster systems are operating properly.

.4 Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.

3.8 DISINFECTION

.1 Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction and approval of Departmental Representative.

.2 All new piping and equipment must be disinfected with hot water at a minimum temperature of 82°C.

.3 Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Departmental Representative approval.

3.9 START-UP

.1 Timing: start up after:

.1 Pressure tests have been completed.

.2 Disinfection procedures have been completed.

.3 Certificate of static completion has been issued.

.2 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.

.3 Start-up procedures:

.1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated.

.2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing and/or cavitations.

.3 Bring HWS storage tank up to design temperature slowly.


.4 Monitor piping HWS and HWC piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed.

.5 Check control, limit, and safety devices for normal and safe operation.

.4 Rectify start-up deficiencies.

3.10 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Scheduling:

.1 Verify system performance after pressure and leakage tests and disinfection are completed, and Certificate of Completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Procedures:

.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria.

.2 TAB HWC in accordance with Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.3 Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure is minimum.

.4 Sterilize HWS and HWC systems for Legionella control.

.5 Verify performance of temperature controls.

.6 Verify compliance with safety and health requirements.

.7 Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves.

.8 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, and ensure no residuals remain as result of flushing or cleaning.

.3 Reports:

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Reports, using report forms as specified in Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Report Forms and Schematics.

.2 Include certificate of water flow and pressure tests conducted on incoming water service, demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.

3.11 OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Co-ordinate operation and maintenance requirements including, cleaning and maintenance of specified materials and products with Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify in accordance with Section 23 05 53.01 – Mechanical Identification.

3.13 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 22 13 17 252 Buildout DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General


.1 Section 21 05 01 Common Work Mechanical

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

.2 ASTM B306-02, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

.3 ASTM C564-03a, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-2004, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum 2007).

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).

.1 CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and Accessories.

.2 CAN/CSA-B70-06, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining.

.3 CAN/CSA-B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings.

.4 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)

.1 Standard GS-36-00, Commercial Adhesives.


.1 SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Sustainable Design Submittals:

.1 LEED Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 35 31 - LEED Requirements.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.


.2 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIAL

.1 Adhesives and Sealants:.

.1 Maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168 and in accordance with Section 01 35 31 - LEED Requirements.

2.2 APPLICATION

.1 All process areas floor drainage exposed to high temperatures up to 100 °C shall be cast iron. No exceptions.

2.3 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Buried sanitary and storm minimum NPS 4, to: CAN/CSA-B70.

.1 Joints: .1 Mechanical joints:

.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets: to CAN/CSA-B70.

.2 Hub and spigot: .1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67. .2 Cold caulking compounds.

.2 Above ground sanitary and storm: to CAN/CSA-B70.

.1 Joints: .1 Hub and spigot:

.1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67. .2 Mechanical joints:

.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with Canadian Plumbing Code, National/Provincial Building Code, Provincial Plumbing Code, and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.


.2 Refer to Division 31 for excavation, sand bedding, and compaction requirements.

.3 Install buried pipe on 150 mm bed of clean washed sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with 150 mm of clean washed sand.

.4 Install piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and space, and to grade as indicated.

.5 Below grade piping will be supported with stainless steel straps or hangers that are attached to the reinforcement steel prior to pouring the floor slab.

.6 Maintain minimum code clearance to buried potable water piping.

.7 Provide thrust supports as required/indicated.

.8 Transition to PVC service piping as required outside of building.

3.3 TESTING

.1 Leak/pressure test buried systems before backfilling.

.2 Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.

.3 Test in accordance with National/Provincial Building Code (Provincial Plumbing Code) and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Cleanouts:

.1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.

.2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.

.3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.

.2 Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.

.3 Storm water drainage:

.1 Verify domes are secure.

.2 Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installed correctly.

.3 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.

.4 Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.

.5 Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less).

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 22 42 01 252 Buildout PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM International

.1 ASTM A126-04(2014), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.

.2 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.1 American Water Works Association (AWWA)

.1 ANSI/AWWA C700-[09], Standard for Cold Water Meters-Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.

.2 ANSI/AWWA C701-[12], Standard for Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type for Customer Service.

.3 ANSI/AWWA C702-[10], Standard for Cold Water Meters-Compound Type.


.1 CSA-B64 Series-11, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers.

.2 CSA B79-08 (R2013), Commercial and Residential Drains and Cleanouts.

.3 CSA-B356-10, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems.

.3 Efficiency Valuation Organization (EVO)

.1 International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP). .1 IPMVP 2007 Version.

.4 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)

.1 PDI-G101-R2010, Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance.

.2 PDI-WH201-R2010, Water Hammer Arresters Standard.


.1 Pre-installation Meetings:

.1 Convene pre-installation meeting 1 week prior to beginning work of this Section, with Departmental Representative to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordination with other building construction subtrades.


.4 Review manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty requirements.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for plumbing products and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.2 Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements and 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures. Indicate VOC's:

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Indicate on drawings to indicate materials, finishes, method of anchorage, dimensions, construction and assembly details, accessories.


.5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.6 Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reports specified.







.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for plumbing specialties and accessories for incorporation into manual.

.1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity.

.2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

.3 Recommended spare parts list.







.2 Store and protect plumbing materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Develop Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal

Part 2 Products

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Floor Drains and Trench Drains: to CSA B79.

.2 Type 1 (FD-1): General Duty: For concrete floors and membrane floor drain; general duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head, sediment basket nickel bronze strainer, integral seepage pan, and clamping collar.

.1 Use for balance of plant, i.e. washrooms, locker rooms, kitchens, offices, electrical rooms and non-process area.

.2 Use Full size 100 mm.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Zurn ZN-415BZ-ZB, Watts FD-600

.3 Type 2 (FD-2): Heavy Duty For concrete floors, heavy duty, epoxy coated cast iron body round, non-tilting or hinged lacquered cast iron gratre, epoxy coated strainer, integral seepage pan, and clamping collar. Suitable for hot water temperatures up to 100 °C.

.1 Combination Funnel Drain: complete coated cast iron oval funnel 100 x 225 mm for drains adjacent to boilers

.2 Use full size 100 mm for process areas.

.3 Use full size 150 mm for floor drains adjacent to blowdown tank or where indicated on drawings.

.4 Minimum 100 mm deep trap on drains.

.5 Standard of Acceptance Watts FD-300, Zurn Z507-F

2.2 ROOF DRAINS

.1 Roof Drains: to CSA B79 to suit roofing system. Refer to Architectural drawings or onsite investigation.


.2 Type 1 (RD-1): epoxy coated cast iron body with aluminum dome, under deck clamp and attachment to suit roof, flashing flange with integral gravel stop, bearing pan, flow control weir assembly to suit roof construction.

.1 Flow control required for all roof drains with adjustable flow control weir

.2 Maximum flow criteria at 100 mm water level for each drain location: .1 Main Roof: 4.4 L/s per drain

.3 Minimum 100 mm deep trap on drains.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Watts TD-100-CT, Zurn Z-105

.3 Type 2: parapet or scupper drain; cast iron body with aluminum strainer/grate and flashing clamp.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

.1 Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket.

.1 Standard of Acceptance: Watts CO-1200/200 Series, Zurn ZN-1400-SZ1 Series to suit

.2 Access Covers:

.1 Wall Access: face or wall type, stainless steel round cover with flush head securing screws, bevelled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs.

.2 Floor Access: round, cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel bronze top and: .1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket. .2 Cover for Unfinished Concrete Floors: nickel bronze, round, vandal-

proof screws.

2.4 REDUCED PRESSURE BACK FLOW PREVENTERS

.1 Protect city domestic water system against contamination due to backflow from:

.1 Energy Center

.2 Hose Bibs

.2 Preventers: to CSA-B64 Series, application as indicated, reduced pressure principle type double check valve assembly back flow preventer:

.1 Lead Free certified to NSF/ANSI 61

.2 Epoxy coated ductile iron valve bodies with flanged connection, double check assembly, bronze seats, epoxy coated relief with stainless steel internals. Two independent in line check valves with intermediary relief valve and air gap drain. Low pressure drop design.

.3 Provide with full port flanged gate isolation valves and drain connection.

.4 Bronze test cocks.

.5 Drain flow alarm sensor (for main service entry backflow preventers only)

.6 Suitable for working pressure up to 1206 kPa (175 psi) and temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F)


.7 Standard of Acceptance Zurn-Wilkens 375, Watts LF909 or as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

.1 Capacity: as indicated.

.1 Inlet pressure: As indicated on drawings kPa.

.2 Outlet pressure: As indicated on drawings.

.2 Up to NPS 1-1/2 bronze bodies, screwed: to ASTM B62.

.3 NPS 2 and over, semi-steel bodies, Class 125 or to suit design pressure, flanged: to ASTM A126, Class B.

.4 Semi-steel spring chambers with bronze trim.

2.6 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY

.1 Complete with backflow preventer pressure gauge on outlet, pressure reducing valve to CAN/CSA-B356, pressure relief valve on low pressure side and gate valves on inlet and outlet.

2.7 WATER METERS

.1 Displacement type to ANSI/AWWA C700

.2 Turbine type to ANSI/AWWA C701

.3 Compound type to ANSI/AWWA C702.

.4 Capacity: as indicated.

.5 Accessories: remote readout device.

2.8 STRAINERS


.2 NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

.3 NPS 2 1/2 and over, cast iron/ductile iron body, epoxy coated, flanged ends, with bolted cap.

.4 860/1035 kPa/Class 125, 1379 kPA/Class225 to suit design pressure, Y type with 20 mesh bronze or stainless steel removable screen, suitable for potable water use.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: Watts LF777S/77F Series, Zurn SXL/FSC

2.9 OIL INTERCEPTOR

.1 Epoxy coated inside and out, multi-weir bucket assembly, code approved deep seal trap, reinforced non-skid cover complete with handles, adjustable automatic draw-off assembly, double vent connections, mounting flush with floor with non-skid covers.

.2 Secondary storage tank; same size as interceptor tank.

.3 Electronic monitor; epoxy encapsulated multi-level probe assembly, failsafe knife edge valve on inlet side compact control panel with 3 position switch, multi-level LED


display, diagnostics LED’s, audible alarm and auxiliary contacts for remote /alarm/control functions at PLC. 115 V /1/ 60, 12 VA.

.4 Venting to meet requirements of National Plumbing Code.

.5 Recess mounted into floor.

.6 Standard of Acceptance: Watts OE-535/550 to suit specified flow rate and secondary storage tank.

2.10 NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS

.1 Recessed type with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 3/4 hose outlet, removable operating key. Polished bronze finish.

2.11 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS

.1 Bronze construction complete with integral vacuum breaker/back flow preventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished areas.

.1 Cold Water Only

.2 Acceptable materials: Watts HY-300/400 Series , Zurn Z1300 Series

2.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMER

.1 Provide primer connection on flush valve. Brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2 drip line connection.

.2 Discharge line from primer connection to be ½” with isolation ball valves feeding buried PVC or copper tubing to primary in floor trap to sanitary sewer line.

.3 Provide vacuum breaker on primer line.

2.13 VACUUM BREAKERS

.1 To CAN/CSA-B64 Series.

.2 Hose connection vacuum breaker:

.3 Acceptable material: Watts 8.

2.14 DRAIN TRAPS

.1 Cast iron body with stainless steel float and internal trim.

.2 Rated for 517 kPag (75 psi) at 100 °C.

.3 Install where indicated on drawings for the purpose of process vessel drain

2.15 3-WAY MIXING VALVE FOR DHW (POTABLE WATER SERVICE)

.1 Comes with necessary features to operate in sequence with other valves and adjustable throttling range as required by the sequence of operations.


.2 Equal percentage or linear;

.3 Rangeability 1000:1 with < 2 seconds positioning time.

.4 Temperature rated to a minimum of 100° C.


.5 Valves must control with a minimum 550 kPa pressure.

.6 NPS ½ to NPS 2: screwed bronze/epoxy coated body; CrNi steel seat/plug, EPDM or Teflon packing.

.7 Minimum close off pressure is 600 kPa.

.8 Actuator: 24V AC/DC magnetic with spring return with valve going to closed position when de-energized.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for plumbing specialities and accessories installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.

.2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canada and provincial codes, and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.4 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations required code, and as indicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.

3.5 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code.

.1 Drains.

.2 Backwater Valves.

.3 Water Make-up Assembly.


.4 Grease Interceptors.

.2 Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain service sink.

3.6 NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS

.1 Install 600 mm above finished grade and as indicated.

.2 Install a minimum of one non freeze hydrant for each exterior wall of building

3.7 STRAINERS

.1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket for maintenance.

3.8 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY

.1 Install on valved bypass.

.2 Pipe discharge from relief valve to nearest floor drain.

3.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures where indicated.

3.10 BACK WATER VALVES

.1 Install in main sewer lines where indicated and at weeping tile connection in pit provided at building cleanout.

.2 Install in access pit as indicated.

3.11 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS

.1 Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.

3.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated.

.2 Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed but accessible space, to approval of Owner.

.3 Install soft copper plastic tubing to floor drain.

3.13 STRAINERS

.1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket for maintenance.

3.14 OIL INTERCEPTORS

.1 Install with sufficient space, as indicated, for maintenance.

3.15 WATER METERS

.1 Install water meter approved by local water authority.

.2 Install water meter as indicated.


3.16 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify in accordance with Section 23 05 53.01 – Mechanical Identification.

3.17 START-UP

.1 General:

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein.

.2 Timing: start-up only after:

.1 Pressure tests have been completed.

.2 Disinfection procedures have been completed.

.3 Certificate of static completion has been issued.


3.18 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

.1 General:

.1 Test and adjust plumbing specialties and accessories in accordance with Section 01 91 13- General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements : General Requirements, supplemented as specified.

.2 Timing:

.1 After start-up deficiencies rectified.

.2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Application tolerances:

.1 Pressure at fixtures: +/- 70 kPa.

.2 Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%.

.4 Adjustments:

.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria.

.2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25% of maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum.

.5 Floor drains:

.1 Verify operation of trap seal primer.

.2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions.

.3 Check operations of flushing features.

.4 Check security, accessibility, removability of strainer.

.5 Clean out baskets.

.6 Backflow preventers:

.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O M of cover and of valve.

.2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of backflow preventers.

.3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.


.4 Certification of new and recertification of modified backflow preventers required by qualified personnel.

.5 Submit test results to Departmental Representative.

.7 Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:

.1 Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressure conditions.

.8 Strainers:

.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear.

.2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.

.3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.

.9 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers, backwater valves:

.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O M of cover and of valve.

.2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers.

.3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.

.10 Roof drains:

.1 Check location at low points in roof.

.2 Check security, removability of dome.

.3 Adjust weirs to suit actual roof slopes, meet requirements of design.

.4 Clean out sumps.

.5 Verify provisions for movement of roof systems.

.11 Access doors:

.1 Verify size and location relative to items to be accessed.

.12 Cleanouts:

.1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.

.13 Water hammer arrestors:

.1 Verify proper installation of correct type of water hammer arrester.

.14 Wall, ground hydrants:

.1 Verify complete drainage, freeze protection.

.2 Verify operation of vacuum breakers.

.15 Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:

.1 Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressure conditions.

.16 Strainers:

.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear.

.2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.

.3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.

.17 Grease interceptors:


.1 Activate, using manufacturer's recommended procedures and materials.

.18 Hose bibbs, sediment faucets:

.1 Verify that flow and pressure meet design criteria.

.2 Check for leaks, replace compression washer if required.

.19 Hydronic system water Make-up Assembly:

.1 Verify flow, pressure, and connection.

.20 Water meters:

.1 Verify location and accessibility.

.2 Test meter reading accuracy.

.21 Hydronic system water Make-up Assembly:

.1 Verify flow, pressure, and connection.

3.19 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.

.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by plumbing specialties and accessories installation.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 22 42 16 252 Buildout COMMERCIAL SINKS Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General



1.2 REFERENCES


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-2004, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum 2007).


.1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series, Plumbing Fixtures.

.2 CAN/CSA-B125.3, Plumbing Fittings.

.3 CAN/CSA-B651, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.


.1 LEED Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 35 31 - LEED Requirements.


.1 Provide maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include:

.1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity.

.2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance.

.3 List of recommended spare parts.



.2 Store in protected environment in accordance with manufacturers requirements.


Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.

.2 Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.

.3 Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.

.4 Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.

.5 Fixtures to be product of one manufacturer.

.6 Trim to be product of one manufacturer.

.7 Service sinks:

.1 Sink: freestanding 304 stainless steel sink, 16. Ga Type 430 Series, one compartment, all coved corners, with 300 mm high undrilled integral back. Size: 450 x 450 x 350 mm. (18” x 18” x 14”)

.2 Trim: heavy cast brass, laboratory type with gooseneck swing spout, hose end, left – hot tap, right – cold tap.

.3 Supply fitting: with vacuum breaker, indexed cross/lever handles: left – hot tap, right – cold tap, heavy cast brass, aerator, brace to wall, integral stop valves. Provide accessories to limit maximum flow rate to 8.35 L/minute at 413 kPa.

.4 Waste fitting: chrome plated, cast brass outlet strainer, enamelled cast iron trap standard with brass cleanout and adjustable floor flange.

.5 Rim guard: stainless steel, continuous on three sides.

.8 Fixture piping:

.1 Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture: .1 Chrome plated flexible supply pipes each with screwdriver stop,

reducers, escutcheon. .2 Waste:

.1 Brass P trap with clean out on each fixture not having integral trap.

.2 Chrome plated in all exposed places.

.9 Chair carriers:

.1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Mounting heights:

.1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified.

.2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated, measured from finished floor.

.3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CAN/CSA-B651.

3.3 ADJUSTING

.1 Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.

.2 Adjustments:

.1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.

.2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.

.3 Checks:

.1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness.

.2 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions.

.3 Wash fountains: operation of flow-actuating devices.

.4 Thermostatic controls:

.1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 All sections of Division 23.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum).

.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.3 LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction, LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.

.4 LEED Canada for Existing Buildings, Operations and Maintenance, LEED Canada 2009 Leadership In Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Indicate on drawings: .1 Mounting arrangements. .2 Operating and maintenance clearances.

.3 Shop drawings and product data accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. .2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves. .4 Manufacturer to certify current model production. .5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes.

.4 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Identify section and paragraph number.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual.

.1 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Owner Representative before final inspection.










.5 Approvals: .1 Submit 1 electronic copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to

Owner Representative for approval. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit.

.6 Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data

when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.

.7 Site records: .1 Owner Representative will provide [1] set of reproducible mechanical

drawings. Provide sets of prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring.


.2 Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed.


.4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection. .8 As-built drawings:


.2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).

.3 Submit to [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] [Consultant] for approval and make corrections as directed.







.1 One tube of lubricant for fan motors.

.2 One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.


.4 Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.




.2 Store and protect from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project No. 218225 Page 4 Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Supply access doors for operating, inspecting, adjusting and servicing fan and ductwork.

.2 Flush mounted 600 x 600 mm for body entry and 300 x 300 mm for hand entry unless otherwise noted. Doors to open 180º, have rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latches and anchor straps.

.3 Material:

.1 Special areas such as tiled or marble surfaces: use stainless steel with brushed satin or polished finish as directed by Owner’s representative.

.2 Remaining areas: use prime coated steel.

.4 Installation:

.1 Locate so that concealed items are accessible.

.2 Locate so that hand or body entry (as applicable) is achieved.

.3 Installation is specified in applicable sections.

.4 Paint the access hatch the colour specified by the Owner’s Representative.

.5 Acceptable material: Zurn, Enpoco

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION


.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Owner Representative

.2 Inform Owner Represenative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed.


.1 Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.

.2 Apply at minimum one coat of rust inhibitive paint to ferrous supports


.4 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up. This includes all pipe penetrations.

3.1 SYSTEM CLEANING


Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 00 252 Buildout COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project No. 218225 Page 5 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and submit report as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.1 Pre-start up check list provided by Manufacturer or Consultant

.2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB).




3.3 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Owner Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.


.1 Air Handling Units

.2 Fan Coils

.3 Fans.




.6 Owner Representative may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.

3.4 CLEANING




.1 Prior to the operation of any of the equipment, the contractor shall clean the entire installation space such that it is free of any dust and debris that may become airborne during ventilation system operation and/or equipment operation. This includes the cleaning of all floor surfaces, wall surfaces and equipment surfaces.


.2 In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment to operating condition, including replacement or cleaning of all filters and strainers in all piping systems.

3.5 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 05 252 Buildout INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.

.3 Section 23 05 17 – Pipe Welding.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).

.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.


.1 CSA B139, Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment.

.4 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)

.1 Standard GS-11, Environmental Standard for Paints and Coatings.

.5 National Fire Code of Canada (NFCC)

.6 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards

.1 SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings.

.2 SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets for piping and equipment and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.


.1 Sustainability Standards Certification:


.1 Low-Emitting Materials: provide listing of sealants and coatings used in building, comply with VOC and chemical component limits or restriction requirements.



.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:


.3 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer] of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Paint: zinc-rich to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.1 Primers, Paints, and Coatings: selected and applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditions.

.2 Primer: maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to Standard GS-11 and to SCAQMD Rule 1113.

.3 Paints: maximum VOC limit 150 g/L to Standard GS-11 and to SCAQMD Rule 1113.

.2 Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

.1 Sealants: maximum VOC limit to SCAQMD Rule 1168 and to GSES GS-36.

.3 Sealants: maximum VOC limit to SCAQMD Rule 1168 and to GSES GS-36.

.4 Adhesives: maximum VOC limit to SCAQMD Rule 1168 and to GSES GS-36.

.5 Fire Stopping: in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION


3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

.1 In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.


.2 Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and assembly.

.3 Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping subject to movement.

3.3 CLEARANCES

.1 Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer and National Fire Code of Canada.

.2 Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended by manufacturer and as indicated without interrupting operation of other system, equipment, and components.

3.4 DRAINS

.1 Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated.

.2 Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating valves.

.3 Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain.

.1 Discharge to be visible.

.4 Drain valves: NPS 20 mm (3/4”) gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end male thread, cap and chain.

3.5 AIR VENTS

.1 Install manual air vents at high points in piping systems.

.2 Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve.

.3 Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.

3.6 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 General: compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system.

.2 Locations: where dissimilar metals are joined.

.3 NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves.

.4 Over NPS 2: isolating flanges.

3.7 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION

.1 Install pipework to applicable code based on service and specification selection.

.2 Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape.

.3 Protect openings against entry of foreign material.

.4 Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other equipment or systems.


.5 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.6 Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half size of main.

.7 Hole saw (or drill) and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.

.8 Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.9 Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve space.

.10 Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and venting.

.11 Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe.

.12 Group piping wherever possible and as indicated.

.13 Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly.

.14 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting.

.15 Provide for thermal expansion as indicated.

.16 Valves:

.1 Refer to flow schematics for valve type to be installed.

.2 Install in accessible locations.

.3 Remove interior parts before soldering.

.4 Install with stems above horizontal position unless indicated.

.5 Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping.

.6 Install globe valves in bypass around control valves.

.7 Use ball or butterfly valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except where specified.

.8 Install butterfly valves on chilled water and related condenser water systems only.

.9 Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of liner.

.10 Lug style butterfly valves to be used, install with two hex head bolts. A single stud bolt is will not be accepted.

.11 Install ball valves for glycol service.

.12 Use chain operators on valves NPS 2 1/2 and larger where installed more than 2100 mm above floor in Mechanical Rooms.

.17 Check Valves:

.1 Install silent check valves on discharge of pumps and as indicated.

.2 Install swing check valves in horizontal lines on discharge of pumps and as indicated.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 05 252 Buildout INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK Project No. 218225 Page 5 3.8 SLEEVES

.1 General: install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated assemblies, and as indicated.

.2 Material: schedule 40 black steel pipe.

.3 Construction: use annular fins continuously welded at mid-point at foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors.

.4 Sizes: 25 mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.

.5 Installation:

.1 Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with finished surface.

.2 Other floors: terminate 25 mm above finished floor.

.3 Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.6 Sealing:

.1 Foundation walls and below grade floors: fire retardant, waterproof non-hardening mastic.

.2 Elsewhere: .1 Provide space for firestopping. .2 Maintain fire rating integrity.

.3 Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime plaster or other easily removable filler.

.4 Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.

3.9 ESCUTCHEONS

.1 Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas.

.2 Construction: one-piece type with set screws.

.1 Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302 stainless steel.

.3 Sizes: outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve.

.1 Inside diameter to fit around pipe or outside of insulation if so provided.

3.10 PREPARATION FOR FIRE STOPPING

.1 Install firestopping within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping.

.2 Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: no special preparation.

.3 Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe movement without damaging fires topping material or installation.

.4 Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 05 252 Buildout INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK Project No. 218225 Page 6 3.11 FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 Flush system in accordance with Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

.2 Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment and leave in operating condition, including replacement of filters in piping systems.

3.12 PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK

.1 Advise Owner Representative 48 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure tests.

.2 Pipework: test as specified in relevant sections of heating, ventilating and air conditioning work.

.3 Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for longer period of time in relevant mechanical sections.

.4 Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressure or media.

.5 Conduct tests in presence of Owner Representative and/or Consultant and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

.6 Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Consultant to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.

.7 Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Consultant

3.13 EXISTING SYSTEMS

.1 Connect into existing piping systems at times approved by Owner Representative.

.2 Request written approval by Owner Representative ten (10) days minimum, prior to commencement of work.

.3 Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 17 252 Buildout PIPE WELDING Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 21 05 00 General Requirements for Mechanical Work

.2 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

.3 23 20 13 Process Hot Water Piping

.4 23 21 13 Utility Water Piping

.5 23 21 15 Chilled Water Piping

.6 23 77 00 Compressed Air

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1 – (2007), Power Piping.

.2 ANSI/ASME B31.3 – (2006), Process Piping.

.3 ANSI/ASME B31.9 - (2008), Building Services Piping.

.4 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code – (2007): .1 Section I: Power Boilers. .2 Section IV: Heating Boilers. .3 Section VIII: Pressure Vessels .4 Section V: Nondestructive Examination. .5 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

.2 American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA)

.1 ANSI/AWWA C206-(03), Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.

.3 American Welding Society (AWS)

.1 AWS B2.1 – (2005), Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications.

.2 AWS B3.0, Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications.

.3 AWS C1.1M/C1.1 – (2000[R2006]), Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding.

.4 AWS Z49.1 – (2005), Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Process.

.5 AWS W1 – (2000), Welding Inspection Handbook.


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 – (2004), LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).


.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0 – (2007), LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.3 CGSB 48.2-92, Spot Radiography of Welded Butt Joints in Ferrous Materials.


.1 CSA W47.2 – (M1987[R2008]), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum.

.2 CSA W48-(06), Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.

.3 CSA B51-(03[R2007]), Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code.

.6 CSA W59-(03) Welded Steel Construction.

.1 CAN/CSA-W117.2 – (01[R2006]), Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes.

.2 CSA W178.1 – (2008), Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations.

.3 CSA W178.2 – (2008), Certification of Welding Inspectors.

.7 Provincial Boiler Safety Authority Regulations

.1 Technical Standards & Safety Authority (Ontario)



.2 Submit the following information for acceptance by the Engineer:

.1 Copy of contractors Provincial Boiler Safety approved quality assurance and quality control program to be implemented for the project.

.2 Welding Procedures Specification (WPS) – ASME Form QW-482

.3 Provide WPS for all weld procedures expected to be employed for this project.

.4 Procedure Qualifications Record (PQR) – ASME Form QW-483

.5 Provide PQR’s for all weld procedures to be employed on project.

.6 Welding Operator Qualifications (WPQ) – ASME Form QW-484

.7 Copy of welder qualification certificates from Safety Authority for all welders to be employed on the project.

.8 Inspection and Test Plan developed for this project.

.9 Qualifications of third party inspection company to be used for this project.

.3 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.1 Weld maps to be provided in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

.2 Results of weld quality tests; visual and NDE.

1.4 PIPING DESIGN REGISTRATION

.1 The hot water process piping will be designed and registered with the provincial boiler safety authority, as an ASME B31.1 Power Piping System.

.2 The chilled water and condenser water piping will be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.


.3 The Owner will submit the piping design registration and obtain the P# or CRN for the applicable piping system.

.4 The Contractor is responsible for completing the registration of the pressure piping by preparing and submitting the required construction completion documents to the Provincial safety authority.

.5 All remaining building services and utility services piping will be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.

1.5 THIRD PARTY NON DESTRCTIVE EXAMINATION OF WELDS

.1 Pipe welding will be examined by an independent qualified third party.

.2 The requirement and frequency of third party inspection as described in this specification will be incorporated into an inspection and test plan developed by the contractor for this project.

.3 The cost of implementing the inspection test plan including all Non Destructive Examination (NDE) work shall be carried in the Contractor’s tendered price.


.1 Qualifications:

.1 Welders: .1 Welding qualifications in accordance with CSA B51 or ASME B31.1

Section 127.5 requirements. .2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each

procedure performed from authority having jurisdiction. .3 Submit welder's qualifications to Owners Representative. .4 Each welder to possess identification symbol issued by authority having

jurisdiction. .5 Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum in

accordance with CSA W47.2. .6 Process hot water heating and thermal oil pipe work: (NOT

APPLICABLE) .1 Each welder shall be prequalified by Owner’s representative and

testing agent as described in Section 3.5 - Specialist Examinations and Tests, prior to starting welding of piping system.

.7 Buried pre-insulated district heating pipe work: (NOT APPLICABLE) .1 Each welder shall be prequalified by Owner’s representative and

testing agent as described in section – Specialist Examinations and Tests, prior to starting welding of piping system.

.2 Inspectors: .1 Inspectors qualified to CSA W178.2 and CGSB 48.9712 with minimum

Level II Certification for specific type of testing with a pressure vessel and piping endorsement.

.3 Certifications:


.1 Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSA B51.

.2 Copy of welding procedures available for inspection.

.3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes in accordance with CSA-W117.2.




Part 2 Products

2.1 ELECTRODES

.1 Electrodes: in accordance with CSA W48 Series.

.2 All filler materials shall be fully identified by the ASME Specification number and the AWS classification number.

.3 Filler metal storage and handling procedures shall be required to maintain the material in a clean and dry condition up to the time of use.

.4 Low hydrogen electrodes shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid pickup and to retain the low hydrogen characteristics of the electrode. A method of keeping electrodes warm and moisture free shall be available with each welder.

.5 The methods to be used for handling and storing electrodes shall be covered in the welding procedure or Contractor’s Quality Control Manual.

2.2 BASE MATERIALS

.1 Use base materials consisting of carbon steels listed in Table 126.1 or ANSI B31.1 or ANSI B31.3, which have ASME equivalents listed in P-1 group No. 1, Table QW422 of ASME Section IX. Either the ASTM materials listed or their ASME equivalents shall be acceptable.

.2 All base materials shall be identified by specification number and grade, class, or type when recorded on a welding procedure specification’s procedure qualification record, or the record of welder qualification test.

.3 Ring or saddle reinforcements, doublers, lugs, etc., shall be made from material having the same general chemical composition as the pipe headers, or nozzles to which they will be joined unless otherwise specified or unless prior written approval is obtained from the Owners Representative.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 17 252 Buildout PIPE WELDING Project No. 218225 Page 5 Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION


3.2 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Welding: in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 or B31.9 as applicable, ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX and ANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures conforming to AWS B3.0, AWS C1.1, and applicable requirements of provincial authority having jurisdiction.

.2 The Departmental Representative reserves the right to request a welder be removed from a project due to poor performance including weld failure rate deemed to be excessive

3.3 FUME MINIMIZATION AND EXTRACTION

.1 Utilize welding materials and procedures that minimize fumes and smoke generation.

.2 Use fume extractors when welding. Follow manufacturers’ recommendations for selecting the appropriate extractor and maintaining filter cleanliness.

3.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Identify each weld with welder's identification symbol.

.2 Maintain weld maps identifying the location of all welds performed on the piping system together with the identification of the welder performing the weld.

.3 Backing rings are not permitted.

.4 Fittings:

.1 NPS 2 and smaller: install welding type sockets.

.2 Branch connections: install welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings.

.5 Weld Procedures

.1 Follow the welding procedure for the type of piping system to be welded and the associated piping code standard that would apply (either ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as indicated in associated piping system specification)

.2 All welders shall be qualified for each procedure to be welded.

.6 Structural welding shall conform to CSA Standard W59.

3.5 JOINT FIT UP .1 Valves welded into the system shall be open as the welding is carried out. .2 The geometry of pipe weld joints (i.e. joint preparation and root opening) shall be

in accordance with the tolerance specified by the weld joint sketches contained in the welding procedures submitted to the Owner’s representative.

.3 In cases where the internal misalignment exceeds 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the component with the wall extending internally shall be trimmed internally so that


the adjoining internal surfaces are approximately flush. This trimming shall not result in a piping component wall thickness less than the minimum design thickness and the change in contour shall not exceed 30 degrees.

3.6 TRANSITION, DIFFERENT OUTSIDE DIAMETERS

.1 When pipes of different outside diameters are to be welded together, either of the following two procedures shall be followed:

.2 Fill the weld joint with weld metal flush with the outside surface of the pipe having the larger diameter. The weld metal transition between the larger and smaller pipe shall have a slope not exceeding 1:3, which may be obtained by grinding.

.3 Taper the outside diameter of the larger pipe by grinding or matching before welding to the outside diameter of the smaller pipe, the angle not exceeding 30°.


.1 Maintain a Quality Assurance Program for defect prevention and in-service reliability conforming to CSA B51-97 Part 1.

.2 Maintain on site: QA Program and Quality Control Manual, welder certifications, weld procedures.

.3 Maintain during the construction period, weld maps identifying the location of all welds performed on the piping system togetherwith the identification of the welder performing the weld.

3.8 INSPECTION AND TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Review weld quality requirements and defect limits of applicable codes and standards with Departmental Representative and Consultant before work is started.

.2 Formulate "Inspection and Test Plan" in co-operation with Departmental Representative and Consultant.

.3 Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, tested, approved by inspector and hydrostatic pressure test is complete.

.4 Provide for inspector to visually inspect welds during early stages of welding procedures in accordance with Welding Inspection Handbook. Repair or replace defects as required by codes and as specified.

.5 Departmental Representative may use any method of inspection necessary to establish quality control and assure adherence to proper welding procedures.

.6 The method of inspection to be used may be changed by the Departmental Representative at their discretion.

.7 The limitations as to weld imperfections shall be in accordance with the applicable section of the ASME B31 .1 and ASME B31.9 piping codes.

.8 Welds identified as defective will be repaired and retested by the original means of examination.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 17 252 Buildout PIPE WELDING Project No. 218225 Page 7 3.9 WELDER PREQUALIFICATION TESTS – PLANT PIPING WORK:

.1 Prequalification testing will be at the discretion of the Owner. Cost of such testing will be borne by the Owner.

.2 The prequalification test as described below is in addition to that testing required by the regulatory authority.

.3 The first three welds by each welder are to be radiographically or ultrasonically tested by testing agent approved by Owner’s Representative.

.4 The welder shall be approved only after completing three successive welds and providing the proper welders qualifications. The Owners Representative shall provide final approval of all tests and welders qualifications.

.5 The Contractor shall provide all necessary fittings and attachments to permit the welds to be pressure tested with water.

.6 All costs associated with re-testing until three successive welds have been completed shall be at the Contractor’s cost.

.7 Provide for inspector to visually inspect welds during early stages of welding procedures in accordance with Welding Inspection Handbook. Repair or replace defects as required by codes and as specified.

.8 Only welders who have passed the prequalification testing would be allowed to work on the project.

.9 The Owner reserves the right to request a welder be removed from a project due to poor performance including weld failure rate deemed to be excessive by the Owner or his representative.

3.10 SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS

.1 General:

.1 Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualified to CSA W178.1 and CSA W178.2 and approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section V, CSA B51 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Weld inspections will be performed as a minimum, by the method and in the quantity identified in the following table. Reports shall be submitted for all examinations including visual inspections.

Table 1:

Piping Design Code Frequency of Inspection

Weld Setup

Radiographic Inspection Visual

ASME B31.1 Power Piping/CSA B51 - Process Hot Water Piping

10% of all

welds

First 3 welds of each welder, plus

minimum of 10% of all welds.

All completed welds and minimum of 40% of root passes.


ASME B31.1 Power Piping/CSA B51 - Process Steam Piping

20% of all

welds All welds All completed welds.

ASME B31.9 Bldg Services Piping

20 % of all

welds 0% of all welds 100% of completed welds and

minimum of 40% of root passes.

.3 Hydrostatically test welds to ANSI/ASME B31.1. All welds will be visually inspected for leaks during the hydrostatic test period.

.1 Failure of visual examinations: .1 Upon failure of welds by hydrostatic test, perform additional testing as

directed by Departmental Representative.

.4 Visual examinations of welds as per Table 1 above: include entire circumference of weld externally and wherever possible internally.

.1 Failure of visual examinations: .1 Upon failure of welds by visual examination, perform additional testing

as directed by Departmental Representative of 10% more of welds by welder responsible by radiographic or particle tests.

.5 Full radiographic tests for piping systems as identified in Table 1 above.

.1 Spot radiography: .1 Conduct spot radiographic tests for number of welds identified in Table 1

above, selected at random by Departmental Representative from welds which would be most difficult to repair in event of failure after system is operational.

.2 Radiographic film: .1 Identify each radiographic film with date, location, name of welder, and

submit to Departmental Representative. Replace film if rejected because of poor quality.

.3 Interpretation of radiographic films: .1 By qualified radiographer.

.4 Failure of radiographic tests: .1 Extend testing to additional 10% of welds by welder responsible for the

weld which failed test. .2 The Departmental Representative reserves the right to request any welder

be replaced if the number of failures is deemed excessive. The welder will not be permitted to make further welds on the project without the approval of the Departmental Representative.

3.11 DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION

.1 As described in ANSI/ASME B31.1 or B31.9 as applicable, and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code.

.2 Rejection of welds will be based on the weld evaluation as performed by a qualified NDT technician.


.3 In addition, chilled water systems below 1035 kPa:

.1 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm adjacent to cover bead on outside of pipe.

.2 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm adjacent to root bead on inside of pipe.

.3 Undercutting greater than 0.8 mm at combination of internal surface and external surface.

.4 Incomplete penetration and incomplete fusion greater than total length of 38 mm in 1500 mm length of weld depth of such defects being greater than 0.8 mm.

.5 Repair cracks and defects in excess of 0.8 mm in depth.

.6 Repair defects whose depth cannot be determined accurately on basis of visual examination or radiographic tests.

3.12 REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS

.1 Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds at Contractor's expense.

.2 Claims for delays in completion of project will not be accepted for reasons of failures of welds to pass examinations.

3.13 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 19.01 252 Buildout THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 05 05 – Installation of Pipework.

.3 Section 23 20 13 – High Pressure Piping Systems

.4 Section 23 21 13.02 – Hydronic Systems: Steel

.5 Section 23 21 14 – Hydronic Specialties

.6 Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

.1 ASME B40.100-2013, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.

.2 ASME B40.200-2008, Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading.


.1 CAN/CGSB-14.4-M88, Thermometers, Liquid-in-Glass, Self Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type.

.2 CAN/CGSB-14.5-M88, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type.

.3 Efficiency Valuation Organization (EVO)

.1 International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP) .1 IPMVP 2007 Version.

.4 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)

.1 GS-11-13, Standard for Paints and Coatings.

.2 GS-36-13, Standard for Commercial Adhesives.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for thermometers and pressure gauges and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Nova Scotia, Canada.

.4 Certificates:


.1 Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.5 Test and Evaluation Reports:

.1 Submit certified test reports for thermometers and pressure gauges from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.





.1 Store thermometers and pressure gauges off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Store and protect thermometers and pressure gauges from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan related to Work of this Section.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Design point to be at mid-point of scale or range.

2.2 DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS

.1 Industrial, variable angle type, mercury-free, Bi-metal, liquid filled, 125 mm scale length, Celsius/Fahrenheit scale: to ASME B40.200.

.1 Resistance to shock and vibration.

.2 Accuracy: Within +/- 0.5 degrees of reading.

.3 Range: 0 - 100 °C.

.4 Maximum 2 degrees per division.

2.3 TEMPERATURE GAUGES / THERMOMETERS .1 Industrial, Bi-metal, digital, adjustable angle, durable & rustproof case, provide

with separate compatible stainless steel thermowell, front calibrator. .2 Units: dual scale (°Celsius/°Fahrenheit). .3 Accuracy: within +/- 0.5 degrees of reading.


.4 Range: 0 – 120C.

.5 Maximum required light 20 Lux

.6 Thermowell Insertion Length: 50% of pipe diameter

.7 Allowance for Insulation: Thermowell extends a minimum of 50 mm to allow for pipe insulation.

.8 Acceptable materials: Wika, Weiss, Weksler

2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS

.1 Copper pipe: copper or bronze for DHW applications.

.2 Steel pipe: stainless steel.


.4 Allowance for Insulation: Thermowell extends a minimum of 2” to allow for pipe insulation.

.5 CRN required where applicable for steam / hot water service.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 112 mm, liquid-filled dial type: to ASME B40.100, Grade 2A, phosphor bronze bourdon tube 0.5% accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified, cast aluminum case and ring or phenolic with threaded reinforced black polypropylene ring, brass or stainless steel movement, front re-calibrator and glass or acrylic window.

.1 Dual unit Scale: kPa / PSi.

.2 Accuracy: 0.5% full scale.

.3 Range: 0 – 1,600 kPag or 0 – 1400 kPag to suit.

.4 13 mm NPT process connection.

.5 NPS 4 and above: 100mm (4”) diameter window.

.6 NPS 3 and below: 65mm (2.5”) diameter window.

.2 Provide:

.1 Siphon for steam or hot water service.

.2 Stainless steel ASTM-A-304 or 316 body isolation needle valve with valved bleed/test port; 10,000 kPag rated needle valve

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION





Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 19.01 252 Buildout THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS Project No. 218225 Page 4 3.2 GENERAL

.1 Install thermometers and gauges so they can be easily read from floor or platform.

.1 If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units.

.2 Install in locations as indicated on schematics.

3.3 THERMOMETERS

.1 Install in wells on piping. Include heat conductive material inside well.

.2 Install in locations as indicated on drawings:

.3 Install wells as indicated only for balancing purposes.

.4 Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.

3.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Installation location per the drawings:

.2 Install needle valves as indicated on drawings.

.3 Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.

3.5 NAMEPLATES

.1 Install engraved lamicoid nameplates in accordance with Section 23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification, identifying medium.

3.6 CLEANING






3.7 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.

.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by thermometer and gauge installation.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 29 252 Buildout HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 Section 02 81 01 – Hazardous Materials.


.3 Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

.4 Section 23 05 49.01 – Seismic Restraint Systems (SRS)

.5 Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASME B31.1, Power Piping.

.2 ASME B31.5, Refrigeration Piping

.3 ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping


.1 ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

.2 ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

.3 ASTM A125, Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated.

.4 ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.5 ASTM A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

.6 ASTM B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.


.1 CSA B51-[03] Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code

.2 CSA B52-[05] Mechanical Refrigeration Code

.4 Factory Mutual (FM)

.5 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS)

.1 SP58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation.

.2 SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

.3 SP-77 Guidelines for Pipe Support Contractual Relationships.

.4 SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.

.5 SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application.

.6 National Research Council Canada (NRCC)


.1 National Plumbing Code of Canada 2010.

.7 Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (UL)



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for hangers and supports and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Submit shop drawings for: .1 Bases, hangers and supports. .2 Connections to equipment and structure. .3 Structural assemblies. .4 Upper attachment. .5 Middle attachment. .6 Pipe attachment. .7 Riser clamps. .8 Shields and saddles. .9 Sway braces. .10 Vibration isolators

.4 Certificates:

.1 Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.5 Manufacturers' Instructions:

.1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. .1 Departmental Representative will make available 1 copy of systems

supplier's installation instructions.









1.6 EXISTING STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

.1 The location and size of existing structural members is approximate only. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review all existing structure and notify the Consultant immediately of any discrepancy with the Contract Documents.

.2 Under no circumstance shall the Contractor purchase or fabricate any support components without prior detailed review of all existing support elements and verification of their accuracy.

.3 Any modifications, additions, removal or affixation to existing support members must be reviewed by the Consultant’s Structural Professional Engineer and all details must bear the Structural Engineer’s stamp. Structural Professional Engineer must be licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

.1 Cold Piping: all piping of nominal temperature 25 degrees C or less.

.2 Hot Piping: all piping of nominal temperature greater than 25 degrees C.

1.8 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

.1 Investigate before attaching any supports into concrete and ensure that asbestos and other hazardous material abatement is completed, as required.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Design and Installation Requirements:

.1 All hot water process piping 80 NPS and larger to be supported in accordance with the process pipe support drawings.

.2 All process hot water piping under 80 NPS and non hot water process piping to be field supported per this specification.

.3 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies.

.4 Comply with maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP58.

.5 Provide supports and support steel at locations identified in the contract drawings.

.6 The Contractor will submit to the project structural engineer for review, proposed methods of attaching pipe support elements to the building structure.


.7 The submitted methods of attachment will bear the stamp of a professional structural engineer, licensed to practice in the Province of Work.

.8 Provide supplementary steel members where overhead support steel does not exist or are not in suitable locations.

.9 All piping (process, utility, and building services piping) will require seismic restraint in accordance with the seismic restraint specification Section 23 05 49.

.10 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat to building structure.

.11 Design hangers and supports to support systems under conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment.

.12 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount of adjustment in accordance with MSS SP58.

.13 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes.

.14 Provide supplementary steel members where structural bearing does not exist, or inserts are not in suitable locations.

.15 Obtain all necessary approvals before attaching fixings to building structure.

.2 Performance Requirements:

.1 Design supports, platforms, catwalks, hangers to withstand seismic events as specified in Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with MSS SP58.

.2 All pipe support components are required to be capable of carrying at a minimum, the calculated load pipe load or indicated load plus 50% of the adjacent load. The adjacent load selected should be the larger of the two adjacent loads. The manufacturers’ component design safety factors will be in addition to the load rating established above.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS

.1 Finishes:

.1 Pipe hangers and supports: hot dipped galvanized after manufacture.

.2 Epoxy coated for steel hangers in contact with copper piping.

.3 Prime and painted: structural support steel.

.2 Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam:

.1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut carbon steel retaining clip. .1 Rod: 13 mm, FM approved.

.2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, UL listed, FM approved to MSS-SP58.

.3 Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam:


.1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed, FM approved to MSS SP58.

.2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed, FM approved.

.4 Upper attachment to concrete:

.1 Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate with anchors of sufficient strength to hold the desired load, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter.

.2 Concrete inserts: galvanized steel wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed, FM approved, to MSS SP58.

.3 All anchor bolts must meet the local building code and, where required, seismic requirements for the region, refer to Section 23 05 49.01 Seismic Restraint Systems.

.5 Shop and field-fabricated assemblies:

.1 Trapeze hanger assemblies: to ASME B31.1 and MSS SP58.

.2 Steel brackets: to ASME B31.1 and MSS SP58.

.3 Sway braces for seismic restraint systems: to Section 23 05 49.01 – Seismic Restraint Systems (SRS)

.6 Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP58:

.1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.

.2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated.

.3 Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod.

.7 Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP58:

.1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel galvanized.

.2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel

.3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework.

.4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports to accommodate thermal insulation and vapour retarder.

.8 Adjustable clevis: for cold piping; hot piping, with less than 25mm horizontal movement; hot piping, with more than 300mm hanger rod length: material to MSS SP58, UL listed, FM approved, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis.

.1 Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulation shields.

.2 Use insulation protection shields with clevis for insulated piping.

.9 Yoke style pipe roll: for hot piping, with more than 25mm horizontal movement; hot piping, with less than 300mm hanger rod length: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP58.

.1 Use insulation protection shields with pipe roll for insulated piping.


.10 U-bolts: for cold piping only, carbon steel to MSS SP58 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563.

.1 Finishes for steel pipework: galvanized.

.2 Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: epoxy coated, with formed portion plastic coated.

.11 Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP58.

.1 Use insulation protection shields with pipe roll for insulated piping.

2.4 RISER CLAMPS

.1 Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel to MSS SP58, type 42, UL listed, FM approved.

.2 Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP58, type 42.

.3 Bolts: to ASTM A307.

.4 Nuts: to ASTM A563.

.5 All risers to be isolated from structure using neoprene steel isolation pads as per the drawings.

2.5 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS

.1 Insulated cold piping:

.1 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP58, galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span.

.2 Insulated hot piping:

.1 Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP58.

2.6 PIPE VIBRATION ISOLATION SPRING HANGERS

.1 Read in conjunction with Section 23 05 48: Vibration Controls.

.2 Vibration isolation hangers, consisting of spring and or EPDM/neoprene mounts, painted or galvanized housing, acoustic washers, steel washers, and retaining cups. Hangers must be capable of tolerating a vertical misalignment of 15 degrees without loss of stability.

.3 All spring hangers shall be capable of being seismically restrained and rated for associated loading.

.4 Provide on all pipes connected to rotating equipment. The spring shall have a minimum of 25 mm of static deflection, except on the first point of support which shall have twice the deflection of the isolated equipment and be complete with load scale.

.5 Acceptable material: Vibro Acoustics, Tecoustics, Kinetics.

2.7 CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS

.1 Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5% spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with Certified Mill Test Report (CMTR).


.2 Load adjustability: 10% minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment without special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities.

.3 Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops.

.4 Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments.

.5 Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25 mm minimum.

.6 Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment, complete with calibration record.

2.8 VARIABLE SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS

.1 Vertical movement: 13 mm minimum, 50 mm maximum, use single spring pre-compressed variable spring hangers.

.2 Vertical movement greater than 50 mm: use double spring pre-compressed variable spring hanger with 2 springs in series in single casing.

.3 Variable spring hanger complete with factory calibrated travel stops and load indicator. Provide certificate of calibration for each hanger.

.4 Welded body in accordance with ASME Section IX.

.5 Steel alloy springs: to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5 % spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with CMTR.

.6 Finish: painted with semi-gloss primer.

2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

.1 Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural grade steel. Fabricated support drawings to be stamped by structural engineer and submitted to Owners Structural Engineer for approval.

2.10 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES

.1 Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.

2.11 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS

.1 Provide 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted equipment; size pads 100 mm larger than equipment; chamfer pad edges.

.2 Concrete: to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2.12 OTHER EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

.1 Fabricate equipment supports from structural grade steel meeting.

.2 Submit structural sketches with shop drawings for review by Structural Engineer.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 29 252 Buildout HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Project No. 218225 Page 8 Part 3 Execution


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Size and install in accordance with:

.1 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

.2 Vibration Control Devices:

.1 Install on piping systems at first three support points around pump suction & discharge, and as indicated.

.3 Clamps on riser piping:

.1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser.

.2 Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards.

.3 Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe.

.4 Cast iron pipes: install below joint.

.4 Clevis plates:

.1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner.

.5 Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations.

.6 Use approved constant support type hangers where:

.1 Vertical movement of pipework is 13 mm or more,

.2 Transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted.

.7 Use variable support spring hangers where:

.1 On piping risers and as indicated.

.2 Transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical.

.3 Variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25 % of total load.

3.3 HANGER SPACING

.1 Plumbing piping: to National Plumbing Code of Canada and Provincial Plumbing Code.

.2 Select hangers and supports to perform under all conditions of operations and construction, allowing free expansion and contraction, and to prevent excessive stresses being introduced into piping system and connected equipment.

.3 Fire protection to applicable NFPA fire code.

.4 Gas and fuel oil piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m.

.5 Copper piping: as per support spacing table following.


.6 High Pressure, Hydronic, Steam and Condensate Piping: in accordance with table below for steel. Table listings for straight runs without concentrated loads and where full linear movement is not required.

.7 Hanger Spacing: (Extracted from ANSI/MSS-SP69, 2003, Page 8, Table 3)

.8 Additional supports are required at all heat exchangers and equipment connections,

within 300 mm. There shall be no external loading on heat exchanger and equipment connections.

3.4 HANGER INSTALLATION

.1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions.

.2 Adjust hangers to equalize load.

.3 Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.

3.5 HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT

.1 Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 4 degrees from vertical.

.2 Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that rod hanger is vertical in the hot position.

.3 Where significant vertical movement of the pipe occurs at the hanger location, a resilient support must be used. Selection of resilient supports shall be based on permissible load variation and effects on adjacent equipment. Support selection for typical load variations are shown in Table 2 of MSS-SP-69. Load and movement calculations shall be made for the proper selection of spring hangers. Vertical movement and load transfer from riser


expansion to horizontal runs shall be given consideration when applying spring hangers. Spring Cushion Hangers may be used where vertical movement does not exceed 1/4 inch, and where formal load and movement calculations are not required. Variable spring Hangers shall be used for all other resilient support requirements. Constant Support Hangers shall be used on piping systems where the deviation in supporting force must be limited to 6 percent and which cannot be accommodated by a Variable Spring Hanger. (Extracted from ANSI/MSS-SP69, 2003, Page 7, Section 7.4 and 7.4.1 to 7.4.3, inclusive, with permission of the publisher, the Manufacturers Standardization Society.)

3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

.1 Adjust hangers and supports:

.1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions.

.2 Equalize loads.

.2 Adjustable clevis:

.1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance.

.2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment.

.3 C-clamps:

.1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam.

.4 Beam clamps:

.1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.

3.7 VIBATION ISOLATION – ROTATING EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide acoustic/vibration isolation hangers on all pipes connected to rotating equipment (pumps and chillers) at positions indicated on drawings or as specified below;

.1 Piping up to and including NPS 8 without flexible connections at pipe connections to equipment; provide isolator spring hanger supports at first three pipe hanger support locations before and after equipment piping connection.

.2 Piping NPS 10 and above without flexible connections at pipe connections to equipment; provide spring hanger supports for first six points of isolation.

.3 Piping with flexible connections at pipe connections to rotating equipment; provide isolator spring hanger supports for first hanger support points before and after equipment piping connection.

.4 Pipe attached to rotating equipment but supported by stanchions shall have vibration absorbent pads installed under the stanchion baseplate.

.2 Manufacturer of Vibration Isolation Material to review shop drawings and detailed piping drawings for each piece of rotating equipment or other equipment identified as requiring isolation. Based on these shop drawings the manufacturer will make the final isolation equipment selection.

.3 The Manufacturer of Vibration Isolation Material will be required to visit site during construction to review the installations to ensure compliance with their requirements. At project completion the supplier will inspect the complete installation and supply a letter of compliance to the Engineer.


.4 Contractor to make any adjustments requested by Supplier.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 48 252 Buildout VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS Project No. 218225 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary materials to successfully isolate vibration from all mechanical equipment which can be a source of vibration including but not limited to the following four areas of work.

.1 Vibration isolation of piping, ductwork and equipment.

.2 Equipment isolation bases.

.3 Flexible piping, ductwork and electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment.

.4 Resilient pipe anchors and guides.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 21 05 01 – Common Work Results for Mechanical. .2 Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC .3 Section 23 05 49.01 – Seismic Restraint Systems (SRS) .4 Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

1.3 REFERENCES



.2 National Building Code of Canada (NBC) – 2010.

.3 Ontario Building Code – 2012.


.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. .1 Obtain all relevant equipment information and provide shop and

placement drawings for all vibration isolation elements, steel bases, and concrete inertia base frames for review, before materials are ordered. Shop drawings are to include all of the following information: .1 Undeflected height of isolator. .2 Projected static deflection of each vibration isolator under

installed conditions. .3 Specified static deflection for each vibration isolator. .4 Load/deflection curves for all elastomeric elements. .5 Attachment details to equipment.


.6 Shop drawings not including this information will be rejected.

.7 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance and product data.

.2 Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance and product data.

.3 Provide detailed drawings of seismic control measures for equipment and piping.

.3 Quality assurance submittals: submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.



.3 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.



.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING





.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

1.7 COORDINATION

.1 All supports and anchor bolts to withstand seismic events as specified in Section 23 05 49.01 - Seismic Restraint Systems: Type P2 Buildings.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 48 252 Buildout VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS Project No. 218225 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Equipment and piping requiring vibration mitigation to minimize transmission to the structure are as follows.

1 Equipment/System Isolation Method Minimum Static Deflection, mm

2 Hot Water/Chilled Distribution Pumps; Inertia Base with spring isolators 50

3 Boiler Skid Elastometic Pad 9.5

4 Boiler FD Fans Restrained Spring isolators 20

5 Economizer ID Fan Inertia base with spring isolator 25

6 Standby Generator Spring isolator 50

7 Air Compressor Inertia Base with spring isolator 50

8 Air Handler Case SCE 41 Isolation Tape -

9 Return Air Fan Spring hanger 25

10 Pump Suction and Discharge Piping – Suspended supports Spring hanger 20

11 Pump Suction and Discharge Piping – Stanchion supports Elastomeric Pad 4.8

.2 Size and shape of bases type and performance of vibration isolation as indicated.

.3 Space isolators under equipment so that the minimum distance between adjacent corner isolators is at least equal to the height of the centre of gravity of the equipment. Otherwise, provide suitable horizontal restraint isolators.

.4 Select isolators in accordance with equipment weight distribution to allow for an average deflection meeting or exceeding the specified deflection requirements and so that no isolator has a deflection less than 75% of the static deflection specified. A minimum of 4 isolators are required for each piece of equipment, unless specified otherwise. Mark each isolator to ensure proper placement.

.5 Provide horizontal springs to protect against excessive displacement when horizontal thrust forces exceed 10% of the equipment weight. Thrust restraints shall limit the movement of flexible duct connections to 25% of the fabric width under steady state conditions and to 40% at start up.

.6 Provide all concrete inertia bases where specified, or where required by equipment manufacturers. Bases to be located between the vibrating equipment and the vibration isolation elements.


.7 Provide concrete inertia bases for centrifugal fans with static pressure in excess of 0.875 kPa (3.5" SWG) and/or motors in excess of 30 kW (40 HP) and on base mounted pumps over 15 kW (20 HP), except slab on grade installations or unless otherwise specified. Refer to structural specifications for concrete work. Concrete work by General Contractor.

.8 Other than equipment requiring concrete inertia bases, provide structural steel bases for all vibration isolated equipment, unless the equipment manufacturer certifies direct attachment capabilities.

.9 Coordinate with Division 3 to provide concrete housekeeping pads beneath all vibration isolated equipment

.10 Use ductile materials in all vibration isolation equipment.

.11 Install flexible duct connectors on all duct work connected to isolated equipment. The flexible duct connectors shall meet the requirements of the mechanical equipment specifications. Where flexible connectors cannot be provided, for example on kitchen exhaust fans, vibration isolate all of the duct work from the building structure.

.12 All electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be made with flexible conduit or other flexible means acceptable to the Acoustical Consultant so as not to restrict the maximum anticipated movement of the equipment under the design seismic excitation (in no case less than +/-25mm in any direction) and so as not to degrade the vibration isolation. Connections using flexible conduit shall incorporate at least one bend of at least 900.

.13 Coordinate with Electrical (Division 26).

.14 Provide resilient supports for all piping rigidly connected to vibration isolated equipment. Where resilient pipe hangers are required, provide the hangers for a distance of 3.0m (10 ft.) for a 25mm (1") pipe and 13.5m (44 ft.) for a 250mm (10") pipe. Isolate other pipe sizes for a proportionate distance (both interpolation and extrapolation may be required). Select the three closest hangers to the vibration source for the lesser of 25 mm (1") static deflection or the static deflection of the isolated equipment. Select the remaining isolators for the lesser of 25 mm (1") static deflection or one half the static deflection of the isolated equipment.

.15 Provide an acceptable means of corrosion protection for all equipment, attachments and accessories supplied under this section, suitable for the conditions in which this equipment, etc. will be installed.

2.2 ISOLATORS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Supply all of the vibration isolation equipment by one approved supplier with the exception of isolators which are factory installed and are standard equipment with the machinery. Isolators shall be delivered to the site fully assembled.

.2 Select isolators to operate within the supplier's recommended load range and do not load beyond the limit specified in the manufacturer's literature.

.3 Vibration isolating grommets for motor driven fans of less than 0.35 kW (0.5 HP) shall be EAR ISODAMP Series C-1000, EAR ISODAMP Ribbed Grommets, Mason HG hemi-grommets, or approved equal.


.4 Provide steel spring isolators for deflections of 12 mm (½") and over.

.5 Provide neoprene isolators for deflections 6 mm (¼") and under.

.6 Provide either neoprene or steel spring isolators for deflections between 6 mm (¼") and 12 mm (½").

.7 Provide adjustable limit stops for spring isolation mounts on equipment with operating weights substantially different from the installed weights, such as cooling towers, etc..

2.3 STEEL SPRING ISOLATOR

.1 All spring isolators shall be "open spring" unless otherwise stated. Seismically rated housed spring isolators such as Mason type SSLFH may be used in place of the "open spring" isolators provided that they meet the requirements of seismic restraint section. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. For base mounted equipment, they shall be "Iso-Stiff" (kx/ky = 1.0 to 1.5).

.2 Springs shall meet the requirements of the following standards:

.1 Cold Wound/Oil Tempered .1 Standard Spring Steel - SAE 1065 / ASTM 225 .2 Chromium Silicon Steel - ASTM A-401

.2 Hot Wound .1 Various Spring Steel Alloys - SAE 1095, SAE 5160, SAE 4161

.3 Spring mounts shall be complete with levelling devices and minimum 5 mm (¼") thick neoprene acoustical spring cups located between the spring and the mount housing on at least one end of the spring.

.4 Acoustical spring cups shall be sized for a minimum deflection of 1 mm (1/16") and shall meet the requirements for neoprene isolators.

.5 Use compression springs for all spring isolators.

.6 Springs shall be stable under operating conditions.

.7 Cadmium plate for outdoor 100% relative humidity installations.

.8 Colour code springs.

.9 Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC PADS

.1 Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 350 kPa.

.2 Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber; maximum loading 415 kPa.

.3 Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprene bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 350 kPa.


.4 Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubber bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 415 kPa.

.5 Select type of elastomeric pad based on specified equipment.

.6 Select neoprene pads or elements at the supplier's optimum recommended loading and not loaded beyond the limit specified in the neoprene manufacturer's literature.

.7 Use dynamic stiffness for sizing elastomeric elements.

.8 Where anchor bolts must penetrate through neoprene isolation pads, provide neoprene hemigrommets meeting the requirements of this section, in a manner that will not compromise the isolation.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS

.1 Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces.

2.6 SPRINGS

.1 Design stable springs: ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units complete with levelling devices.

.2 Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring between 0.8 to 1.0.

.3 Colour code springs.

2.7 SPRING MOUNTS

.1 Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.

.2 Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad.

.3 Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidly mounting to equipment.

.4 Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates.

.5 Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 950 kg maximum.

.6 Performance: 19 mm minimum static deflection required. Select spring mount type based on equipment loading and operational data. Spring mounts are required for pumps larger than 2.2 kW.

2.8 HANGERS

.1 Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Arrange to permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 degrees arc without metal to metal contact.


.2 Type H3 - rigid steel frame, stable steel spring, neoprene element (32 mmm at the top), cup with moulded isolation bushing which passes through hanger box and seismic restraint.

.1 For use at piping connections to equipment without spring isolation bases.

.3 Type H4 – rigid steel frame, stable steel spring, neoprene element (32 mmm at the top) with pre-compression washer and nut with deflection indicator and seismic restraint.

.1 For use at piping connections to equipment “with” spring isolation bases.

.4 Performance: 25 mm minimum static deflection.

2.9 ACOUSTIC BARRIERS FOR ANCHORS AND GUIDES

.1 Acoustic barriers: between pipe and support, consisting of 25 mm minimum thick heavy duty duck and neoprene isolation material.

2.10 HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINT

.1 Spring and elastomeric element housed in box frame; assembly complete with rods and angle brackets for equipment and ductwork attachment; provision for adjustment to limit maximum start and stop movement to 9 mm.

.2 Arrange restraints symmetrically on either side of unit and attach at centerline of thrust.

2.11 INERTIA BASE

.1 Type B3 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place reinforcing rods running in both directions; spring mounted, carried by gussetted height-saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housekeeping pads by 50 mm minimum.

.2 Pump bases: rectangular or "T" shaped, where applicable, to provide support for elbows.

.3 Provide inertia bases for all 29.8 kW base mounted centrifugal pumps and larger.

.4 Concrete: rated to minimum 20 MPa, refer to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Minimum mass of inertia base: 1.5 times equipment mass.

.5 Minimum base depth: 150 mm

.6 Provide concrete for inertia bases to meet the requirements of the isolation supplier's shop drawings.

.7 Provide additional steel as required by sleeves or inserts to receive equipment anchor bolts and to meet equipment supplier's requirements.

.8 Coordinate with seismic section in the provision of suitably reinforced connecting points to connect seismic snubbers (where required) to the inertia bases.

2.12 SILENCERS

.1 Refer to drawings for silencer geometry and sizing.

.2 Refer to attached silencer schedule for performance requirements.

.3 Factory manufactured of prime coated or galvanized steel, compatible with ductwork specified elsewhere and to ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.


.4 Silencer inlet and outlet connection dimensions must be equal to the duct sizes shown on the drawings. Duct transitions at silencers are not permitted unless shown on the contract drawings

.5 Outer casing and galvanized steel inner casing with clean cut circular perforations to enclose acoustic media. Inner casing to have [half-splitters] [pods] running full length of silencer where any cross sectional dimension exceeds [450] mm. Protect media from erosion with mylar between media and perforated metal.

.6 Supply all silencers as listed in the silencer schedule. The pressure drop shown shall be considered the maximum allowable which allows for the influence of the duct geometry leading into the silencer.

.7 The silencer insertion loss shall be considered the minimum allowable.

.8 All silencers shall be factory-fabricated with a 18 gauge or heavier galvanized steel outer skin.

.9 Acoustic Media:

.1 Dissipative silencers: .1 Media shall be of acoustic quality, shot-free glass fiber insulation with

long, resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fiber density and compression shall be as required to insure conformance with laboratory test data. Glass fiber shall be packed with a minimum of 15% compression during silencer assembly. Media shall be resilient such that it will not crumble or break, and conform to irregular surfaces. Media shall not cause or accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel. Mineral wool will not be permitted as a substitute for glass fiber.

.10 Media Protection:

.1 Dissipative silencers: .1 Where indicated on the silencer schedule, media shall be encapsulated in

glass fiber cloth to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation of the glass fiber.

.11 All silencers shall have a 1” slip flange at each end.

.12 All exterior seals shall be lock formed. For systems having an excess of 5” static pressure the seams shall be mastic filled.

.13 Duct transition, where required for the silencers shall be provided by the sheet metal contractor.

.14 Where the duct air flow velocity entering a silencer is greater than 4500 fpm, fibreglass cloth shall be placed between the acoustic filler and the perforated metal of the silencer.

.15 Circular silencers shall have outer casings as follows:

.1 12” - 22” dia. - minimum 22 gauge



.4 over 60” dia. - minimum 16 gauge


.16 Rectangular silencers shall have a maximum width and/or height of 48” for ease of handling. Silencers having a width and/or height greater than 48” shall consist of multiple individual silencers, strapped together on site by the sheet metal contractor, to make up the silencer size required.

.17 Elbow Silencers: All elbow silencers, shall be constructed with an 18 gauge galvanized steel outer casing and 22 gauge galvanized perforated steel. All acoustical splitters shall be internally radiused and aerodynamically designed for efficient guided air flow through the elbow. Half and full splitters are required as necessary to achieve the scheduled insertion loss. All elbow silencers with a turning cross-section dimension greater than 48” shall have at least two half splitters and one full splitter.

.18 Silencer materials, including glass fiber shall have maximum combustion ratings as noted below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.

.1 Flame Spread Index: 15

.2 Smoke Developed Index: 5

.19 Provide seismic restraint attachment points in accordance with seismic restraint specification requirements.

.20 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Vibro Acoustics.

2.13 SEISMIC CONTROL MEASURES

.1 See Section 23 05 49.01 Seismic Restraint Systems (SRS) – Type P2 Buildings

Part 3 Execution



3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and adjust mountings to level equipment.

.2 Vertical in line pumps to be mounted on vibration isolation pads with flexible pipe connections on pump suction and discharge.

.3 Base mounted centrifugal pumps to be mounted on spring mounted inertia bases with flexible pipe connections on pump suction and discharge.

.4 Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system flexibility and that piping, conduit and ducting passage through walls and floors do not transmit vibrations.

.5 Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring mounts or spring hangers with 25 mm minimum static deflection as follows:


.1 Up to NPS 4: first 3 points of support. NPS 5 to NPS 8: first 4 points of support. NPS 10 and Over: first 6 points of support.

.2 First point of support: static deflection of twice deflection of isolated equipment, but not more than 50 mm.

.6 Where isolation is bolted to floor use vibration isolation rubber washers.

.7 Block and shim level bases so that ductwork and piping connections can be made to rigid system at operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. Ensure that there is no physical contact between isolated equipment and building structure.

.8 Space isolators under equipment so that the minimum distance between adjacent corner isolators is at least equal to the height of the centre of gravity of the equipment. Otherwise, provide suitable horizontal restraint isolators.

.9 Select isolators in accordance with equipment weight distribution to allow for an average deflection meeting or exceeding the specified deflection requirements and so that no isolator has a deflection less than 75% of the static deflection specified. A minimum of 4 isolators are required for each piece of equipment, unless specified otherwise. Mark each isolator to ensure proper placement.



.1 Arrange with manufacturer's representative to review work of this Section and submit written reports to verify compliance with Contract Documents.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services: consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits to review installation, scheduled as follows: .1 After delivery and storage of Products. .2 After preparatory work is complete but before installation commences. .3 Twice during the installation, at 25% and 60% completion stages. .4 Upon completion of installation.

.3 Submit manufacturer's reports to Departmental Representative within 3 days of manufacturer representative's review.

.4 Make adjustments and corrections in accordance with written report.

.2 Inspection and Certification:

.1 Experienced and competent sound and vibration testing professional engineer to take vibration measurement for HVAC systems after start up and TAB of systems to Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.2 Take vibration measurements for equipment listed below. .1 Pumps.

.3 Provide Departmental Representative with notice 24 h in advance of commencement of tests.

.4 Establish adequacy of equipment isolation and acceptability of noise levels in occupied areas and where appropriate, remedial recommendations (including sound curves).

.5 Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 05 48 252 Buildout VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS Project No. 218225 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 11 3.4 CLEANING


.2 Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 05 52 252 Buildout PAINTING AND SURFACE PREPARATION Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 3

Part 1 GENERAL

1.1 INTENT

.1 All in plant uninsulated piping will be primed and painted as described in this specification. Refer to identification specification section 23 05 53 for the pipe color required for the specific service piping to be primed/painted.

.2 All structural steel for pipe or equipment supports and platforms shall be primed and painted as described in this specification.

.3 Exposed HVAC ductwork in occupied spaces will be painted.

.4 Stainless steel or plastic tubing will not be primed or painted.

.5 Fuel oil day tanks (exterior surfaces) shall be painted. Color to be selected by Architect.

.6 Low VOC emission product that meets LEED IEQ Credit 4.2: Low emitting materials: Paints and Primers. All paint and primers shall be low VOC emitting products.

.7 Anti Corrosive and Anti rust paints to have VOC maximum limits (less water and except compounds) : <250 g/litre

.8 Provide certification that paint product meets VOC maximum limits.



.2 Section 23 05 53 Identification

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIMER

.1 Primer shall be modified alkyd based anti-corrosion single component metal primer.

.2 Suitable for use with cast iron, ferrous and non- ferrous metals.

.3 Color: Grey

.4 Gloss: Flat

.5 Minimum film thickness per coat:

.1 0.064 mm dry


.1 Alkyd Metal Primer

2.2 FINISH COLOR TOP COAT

.1 Final color coat shall be a Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel, compatible with primer used.

.2 Refer to “Identification Specification”, for required finish colors of piping and ducting.


.3 Non Pipe carbon steel surfaces: Semi-gloss grey.

.4 Handrails: Safety Yellow

.5 Projections that Pose a Trip or Collision Hazard: Yellow Warning Stripe

.6 Minimum film thickness per coat:

.1 0.051 mm dry


.1 Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel

2.3 NUMBER OF COATS REQUIRED

.1 The following coat requirements shall be used as a guide to the minimum number of coats required:

Item Prime Coat Color Coat

Non insulated steel pipe 1 Provide 2 color

coats for exposed piping.

Insulated pipe None None All unprimed non pipe steel surfaces 1 1

All primed but damaged steel surfaces Touch Up Patch Touch Up Patch

Ducting (uninsulated) None 1

Part 3 Execution

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 All surfaces to be painted shall be properly prepared and thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grease, and loose scale dirt. Surfaces shall be clean and thoroughly dry before painting. Surfaces shall be painted the same day they are cleaned.

.2 All piping, steel vessels, and structural steel, shall be cleaned per item 1 above, prior to being primed and painted.

.3 Valves and equipment will be painted as needed to correct damage to finish and restore the original factory finish.

.4 Aluminum and galvanized surfaces will generally not be painted. However, if specified, the surfaces shall be prepared by solvent cleaning in accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer.

.5 Marred or damaged prime coats shall be cleaned and spot primed before the finish coats are applied.


.6 All welded areas and appurtenances shall be given special attention for removal of welding flux in crevices. Welding splatter, slivers, laminations, and underlying mill scale not removed during fabrication shall be removed by best mechanical means and edges smoothed or rendered flush.

3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Paint may be either brushed or sprayed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.2 The surface shall be clean, free from dust and sand, and be dry before priming or application of any coat of paint.

.3 No coating shall be applied if the following conditions are present:

.1 Fog, mist, or rain

.2 Relative humidity above 80%

.3 Ambient air temperature below 5°C, or above 35°C.

.4 Each coating shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and/or allowed to dry the specified time prior to application of a succeeding coat.

.5 Sufficient build coats and body coats shall be applied so that the entire primer and final coat system shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 0.1 mm.

.6 The completed coating system shall be free of defects such as pinholes, voids, bubbles or other ”holidays”. Defects shall be corrected with a compatible coating. These additional coats shall be applied at no additional cost to the purchaser.

.7 Prior to application of any coat of material all damage to previous coats shall be touched up with corresponding specified coating. Damage prior to application of finish coating shall be reprimed and refinished.

.8 The first coat of specified primer shall be brushed on all welds, crevices, corners, and areas inaccessible to spray.

.9 Some manufacturers recommend that the entire prime coat be brush applied. Where this is the case, these recommendations must be adhered to.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 05 53 252 Buildout MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 13

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes: Materials and requirements for the identification of piping systems, duct work, valves and controllers, including the installation and location of identification systems.



1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Gas Association (CGA)

.1 CSA/CGA B149.1-05, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.


.1 CAN/CGSB-1.60-97, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.

.2 CAN/CGSB-24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems.

.3 Canadian Petroleum Products Institute, CPPI

.1 CPPI Colour Symbol System for Product Identification

.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

.1 NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data:

.1 Submit for approval: manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedure. Include product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.

.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal

Procedure. .2 Shop drawings: submit lists of proposed wording for approval before

labelling and/or engraving. .3 Verify the equipment, wiring, and piping identification with the

Consultant .4 Furnish Consultant with four (4) identification flow diagrams of

approved size for each system. Include valve tag schedule, designating number, service, function and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.

.3 Samples


.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedure.

.2 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each product specified in this section for use in the Work: piping labels, equipment nameplates etc. including description or sample of fastening method. Mount samples on 12 mm plywood board. Affix label beneath sample indicating service.


.1 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.




Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

.1 Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened to each piece of equipment by manufacturer.

.2 Lettering and numbers raised or recessed.

.3 Information to include, as appropriate:

.1 Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serial number, capacity.

.2 Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, frame size.

.3 Provide UL, ULC, FM, CSA, National Board, and Registration Plates, as required by the authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Locate nameplates so that they can be easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates. Provide stand-offs on insulated equipment as required.

2.2 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

.1 Colours:

.1 Black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

.2 For hazardous / DANGER warnings use red lettering, white background.

.2 Construction:

.1 3 mm thick laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish with square corners, letters accurately aligned, and machine engraved into core.

.3 Sizes:

.1 Conform to following table:


Table 1: System nameplate sizes

Size # Sizes (mm) No. of Lines Height of Letters (mm)

#1 10 x 50 1 3

#2 13 x 75 1 5

#3 13 x 75 2 3

#4 20 x 100 1 8

#5 20 x 100 2 5

#6 20 x 200 1 8

#7 25 x 125 1 12

#8 25 x 125 2 8

#9 35 x 200 1 20

.2 Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line.

.4 Locations:

.1 Terminal cabinets, control panels, power transformers, disconnects, including junction boxes for leak detection and communication systems: use size # 5.

.2 Equipment: heat exchangers, pumps, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, compressors, tanks and vessels, fans, standby generators, compressed gas systems, glycol packaged systems, unit heaters, air conditioning units actuated dampers: use size # 9.

.3 Valves, piping and control devices: control valves, safety valves, sensors and/or instrumentation, transmitters, controllers, energy meters, flow meters, strainers, check valves: use size # 6.

.4 Other: valve chambers, manholes: use size # 9.

2.3 EXISTING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Apply existing identification system to new work.

.2 Where existing identification system does not cover for new work, use identification system specified in this section.

.3 Before starting work, obtain written approval of identification system from Consultant.

2.4 PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES

.1 Identification:

.1 Sprinklers: to NFPA 13.

.2 Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14.

.3 Gas Piping: to CSA/CGA B149.1 and Authority Having Jurisdiction

.2 Heat traced piping to be provided with pipe marker identifying the presence of electric tracing.


2.5 IDENTIFICATION WIRING AND CONDUIT

.1 Tag all cables in panels; pull boxes, junction boxes and switchboards at both ends with the cable number. Cable/wire number is to indicate the cable end point of both ends along with the function.

.2 Cable markers to be electrovert type-Z.

.3 Plainly and permanently mark all terminals for external connection on approved marking strips that correspond with wire number and connection diagram.

.4 Refer to Electrical Specifications.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTROLS .1 Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors. Provide all

instrumentation with tags containing device tag number. .2 Inscription to identify function and, where applicable fail-safe position.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (as necessary), legend; direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB 24.3 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Pictograms:

.1 Where required: Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regulations.

.3 Legend:

.1 Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB 24.3.

.2 Text to be applied longitudinally along cetreline of pipe.

.3 Use block capitals as per following table:

OD of Insulation (mm)

Size of Pipe Letters (mm)

(mm) (inch) 50 19 ¾”

150 32 1-¼”

250 50 2”

Over 250 88 3-½“

.4 Arrows showing direction of flow:

.1 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm high.

.2 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm high.

.3 Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible.

Figure 1 – Pipe labelling example


.5 Extent of background colour band marking:

.1 To full circumference of pipe or insulation.

.2 Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows.

.6 Materials for background colour band marking, legend, arrows:

.1 Use “Wrap Around Snap On” or “Strap On Vinyl” pipe labels for the “Pipe Legend”.

.2 Apply to dry, clean prepared surfaces. Wrap tape around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping 1 pipe diameter.

.3 Standard of acceptance: W.H. Brady. Inc., Set an Name Plate Corp.

STRAP ON VINYL PIPE LABELS WRAP AROUND SNAP ON

.7 Colours and Legends:

.1 In general, follow intent of ANSI/ASME A13.1-2015.

.2 Where not listed, obtain direction from Owner or Consultant.

.3 Uninsulated piping will be painted based on the color identified as the Band Color in the color legend table below.

.4 Colours for legends, arrows: to following table: Background Color Legend/Arrow

Yellow BLACK


Green WHITE

Red WHITE

White BLACK

Table 2: Background colour marking and legends for piping systems table:

Pipe Marker Legend

Abbreviation Acceptable Color and Wording

(Primary) District Hot (DH) Supply

D.H.S. DISTRICT HEATING SUPPLY

DISTRICT HTG. SUP.

(Primary) District Hot ((DH) Return

D.H.R. DISTRICT HEATING RETURN

DISTRICT HTG. RET.

Primary District Cooling (DC) Supply

D.C.S DISTRICT COOLING SUPPLY

DISTRICT CLG. SUP.

Primary District Cooling (DC) Return

D.C.R DISTRICT COOLING RETURN

DISTRICT CLG. RET.

Hot Water Supply H.W.S. HEATING WATER SUPPLY

HEATING WTR. SUP.

Hot Water Return H.W.R HEATING WATER RETURN

HEATING WTR. RET.

Customer Cooling Water Supply

C.W.S CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

CHILLED WTR. SUP.

Customer Cooling Water Return

C.W.R CHILLED WATER RETURN

CHILLED WTR. RET.

Domestic Hot Water Supply

D.H.W.S DOMESTIC HOT WATER SUPPLY

DOM. H.W. SUPPLY

Domestic Hot Water Return

D.H.W.R DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN

DOM. H.W. RETURN

Domestic Hot Water D.H.W DOMESTIC HOT WATER

DOM. HOT WATER


Pipe Marker Legend Band Color (Primary) Letter Color Steam High Pressure White Black Steam Low Pressure White Black Boiler Feedwater Green White Steam Condensate Green White Boiler Blowoff/Blowdown Green White Condensate Makeup Water Green White Steam Relief/Vent White Black Chilled Water Supply Green White Chilled Water Return Green White Condenser Water Supply Green White Condenser Water Return Green White Refrigerant Relief Grey White Tower Makeup Water Green White Natural Gas Yellow Black Fuel Oil Brown White Water Treatment Purple White Sprinkler Red White Instrument Air Blue White Domestic Hot Water Green White Domestic Cold Water Green White Drain Green White


2.8 VALVES - MANUAL

.1 Tags shall be 40 mm diameter brass/stainless steel with 10 mm stamped alpha-numeric coding filled with black paint.

.2 Tags shall be complete with non-ferrous chain or "S" hooks.

.3 Tags shall be as supplied by W.H. Brady or an alternate approved by the Owner.

.4 Consecutively number all valves and controllers installed by Division 23/40/42 on a system basis using tags. Coordinate between the various mechanical trades to prevent duplication.

.5 Identification coding is to start with a utility description followed by a maximum of three numerals:

.1 Steam STXXX

.2 Steam Condensate CNXXX

.3 Boiler Feedwater FWXXX

.4 Boiler Blowdown BDXXX

.5 Hot Water DHXXX

.6 Chilled Water DCXXX

.7 Condenser Water CDXXX

.8 Water Treatment WTXXX

.9 Utility Water UWXXX

.10 Fire Protection FPXXX

.11 Compressed Air CAXXX

.12 Fuel Oil FOXXX

.13 Natural Gas NGXXX

.14 Drain DRXXX

.15 Refrigerant RFXXX

.6 Valves shall be labeled with the prefix abbreviation “DE” to differentiate between building and district energy valves.

.7 The first tag number in each series will be supplied by the Owner.

.8 For installations in existing buildings the valve and controller numbers shall be numerically sequential with the existing series.

.9 Provide the Consultant with six identification flow diagrams for each system incorporating the tag schedule stating the designation number, the service function and location of tagged items and normal operating position of valves. Flow diagram shall be on maximum size 11" x 17" sheets having a 3/4" border on the left side to permit insertion into a ring binder.

.10 Mount, where directed by the Consultant, one copy of the flow diagram in a glazed frame.

.11 Provide copies of flow diagram for the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.


2.9 COLOR CODED DOTS

.1 Color Coded Dots

.1 Provide self-adhesive color coded dots 13 mm in diameter.

.2 Dots shall be Avery TR808 or an alternate approved by the Owner. Colors shall be yellow, black, red and green.

.2 Doors and ceiling panels providing access to devices mounted in concealed locations shall be identified by color coded dots.

.3 Color coding shall be to the following schedule:

.1 Mechanical equipment and cleaning access Yellow.

.2 Control equipment, dampers, valves and sensors Black.

.3 Fire, smoke and sprinkler equipment Red.

.4 Pipe mounted equipment other than above Green.

.4 Where access is through a suspend T-Bar ceiling affix dot to exposed T-Bar frame closest to the concealed equipment.

2.10 SIGNAGE

.1 In plant identification signage shall be provided at the location of the following elements:

.1 Eye Wash Stations

.2 Signs shall be clear plastic coated, minimum 610 x 300 with white lettering on red background, and suitable for wall mounting.

.3 Lettering to be minimum 50 mm high

2.11 IDENTIFICATION MONORAIL AND LIFTING BEAM

.1 For lifting beams and monorails: Stencil rated capacity for each rail/beam in 65mm high block letters. Stencilling shall be located on the beam/rail such that it is easily observable from the floor.

.2 Lettering will be black with a yellow background for contrast.

2.12 ABOVE GROUND FUEL OIL STORAGE IDENTIFICATION – NOT APPLICABLE

.1 All above ground storage tanks and day tanks to bear the following signage adjacent to the tank or stencilled onto tank wall:

“TANK: Tag No”

“CAPACITY: XXXX LITRES”

“STORED FLUID: No. 2 FUEL OIL”

“FLAMMABLE”

“NO SMOKING WITHIN 30 METERS”

.2 Sign material and or stencilling media to be weather proof and fuel oil proof.

.3 Lettering to be minimum 75 mm high.


.4 Elevation of Signage/Stencil on T-801: at 2 m elevation and facing access road.

.5 Signage for all other tanks to be located at mid tank height.

.6 Truck Fill Connection and Fill Pump Enclosure to be identified with color signage in accordance with CPPI Colour Symbol System.

2.13 IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

.1 For ductwork in mechanical rooms, hidden spaces, and process areas.

.1 25 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 175 mm long x 56 mm wide, to sign painting standards.

.2 Colours: black, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast.

.3 Duct work and Access panels: Use the system designators stated on the drawings and specifications.

.4 Access Panel .1 Panels shall be identified according to the following schedule of

functions: .1 Access Function Symbol

.1 Cleaning and Service C.A.

.2 Controls including Sensors C.

.3 Dampers – Back draft, Balance and Control D.

.4 Fire Dampers F.D.

.5 Smoke Dampers S.D.

.2 For ductwork in exposed occupied/public spaces.

.1 Painted flat finish.

.2 Color: Refer to Architectural requirements.

Part 3 Execution



3.2 TIMING

.1 Provide identification only after painting specified Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting has been completed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except as specified otherwise.

.2 Provide ULC _____ CSA registration plates as required by respective agency.


3.4 NAMEPLATES

.1 Manufacturers Equipment Nameplates: Do not cover, conceal or insulate.

.2 Locations:

.1 In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading and identification from operating floor.

.3 Standoffs:

.1 Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces.

.4 Protection:

.1 Do not paint, insulate or cover.

3.5 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

.1 On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels: at not more than 17 m intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one is visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walking aisles.

.2 Adjacent to each change in direction.

.3 At least once in each small room through which piping or ductwork passes.

.4 On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.

.5 On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions.

.6 Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, galleries, confined spaces, at entry and exit points, and at access openings.

.7 At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.

.8 At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves, and dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible, preferably on upstream side.

.9 Identification easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access points.

.1 Position of identification approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight, considering operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage or injury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.

.10 Beside each access door.


.11

.12 Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points.

.13 Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of color or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.

.14 Inaccurate, incomplete, or unprofessional labeling jobs will be re-done.

3.6 VALVES, CONTROLLERS

.1 Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures, radiation, or where in plain sight of equipment they serve: Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks.

.2 Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted in frame behind non-glare glass where directed by Owner. Provide one copy (reduced in size if required) in each operating and maintenance manual.

.3 Number valves in each system consecutively.


.1 Verification requirements include:

.1 Materials and resources.

3.8 SAMPLE NAMEPLATE LIST .


END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 07 14 252 Buildout THERMAL INSULATION FOR EQUIPMENT Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 11

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 57 00 – Heat Exchangers

.3 Section 23 82 39 – Unit Heaters

.4 Section 23 84 13 – Humidifiers

.5 Section 23 21 23 – Hydronic Pumps

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

.1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010-SI Edition, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

.2 American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA)

.1 ANSI/NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,”

.2 ANSI/NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,”


.1 ASTM C335, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.

.2 ASTM C411, Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.

.3 ASTM C449/C449M-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

.4 ASTM C533-07, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

.5 ASTM C547-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

.6 ASTM C553-02, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

.7 ASTM C612-04e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

.8 ASTM C795-03, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.

.9 ASTM C921-03a, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.

.10 ASTM C1136, Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.


.11 ASTM E-96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.


.1 CGSB 51-GP-52MA, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.

.2 CAN/CGSB-51.12, Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing.

.3 CAN/CGSB-51.40, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular Thermal Insulation, Sheet and Pipe Covering.

.4 CAN/CGSB 51.53, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.

.5 CAN/CGSB-51.65, Insulating Blankets for Domestic Hot Water Heaters.

.6 CGSB 51-GP-10M, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Block or Board, for Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

.7 CGSB 51-GP-11M, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

.8 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, Vapor Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.

.5 Green Seal (GS)

.1 GS-36 (2013) Adhesives for Commercial Use.




.1 SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

.8 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC)

.1 National Insulation Standards.

.9 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S102, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and adhesives, include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Samples:

.1 Provide for approval review: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed.


.1 Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board.

.2 Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service.


.1 Include procedures to be used and installation standards to be achieved.

.5 Qualifications:

.1 Installer to be specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project, member of TIAC.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements].


.3 Store at temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING

.1 Fire and smoke ratings to CAN/ULC-S102:

.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.

.2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

2.2 INSULATION

.1 Mineral fibre: includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. Select material in accordance with service temperature requirements indicated below.

.2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 degrees C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.

.3 TIAC Code A-1: rigid moulded mineral fibre without factory applied vapour retarder jacket.

.1 Mineral fibre: ASTM C547.

.2 Maximum "k" factor: ASTM C547.

.4 TIAC Code A-3: rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket.


.2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52MA.


.5 TIAC Code C-1: rigid mineral fibre board, unfaced.




.6 TIAC Code C-4: rigid mineral fibre board faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket.




.7 TIAC Code C-2: mineral fibre blanket unfaced or faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section).




.8 TIAC Code A.6: flexible unicellular tubular elastomer.

.1 Insulation: with vapour retarder jacket.


.3 Maximum "k" factor.

.4 Certified by manufacturer free of potential stress corrosion crack inducing elements/chemicals.

.9 TIAC Code A-2: rigid moulded calcium silicate in sections and blocks, and with special shapes to suit project requirements.

.1 Insulation: ASTM C533.


.3 Design to permit periodic removal and re-installation.

.10 E-1: Mineral Fiber Blanket Hot Surfaces 20 to 550°C.

.1 Materials .1 CGSB 51-GP-11M, Flexible mineral fiber blanket with fiberglass mat

backing without vapor barrier. .2 Acceptable material: Fiberex

.2 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.068 W/m.°C at 260°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. .3

.3 Applications and thickness:

SERVICE THICKNESS SIDE STREAM FILTER CASE 38 MM ENGINE GENERATOR SILENCER 50 MM DEAERATOR VESSEL, T-XXX 50 MM CONDENSATE RECEIVER, T-XXX 50 MM STEAM BLOWDOWN TANK, V-XXX 38 MM BUFFER TANK, V-XXX 38 MM BLOWDOWN HEAT RECOVERY EXCHANGER 50 MM HOT WATER EXPANSION TANK, V-XXX 25 MM .4 Outer Jacket: Aluminum


.11 E-2: Mineral Fiber Blanket Cold Curved Surfaces -40 to 30°C

.1 Materials: .1 .1 Flexible mineral fiber blanket with vapor barrier to CGSB 51-GP-11M

and CGSB 51-GP-53M. .2 Acceptable material: Fiberglass Canada, Manson, Schuller 812 Spin

Glass. .2 Thermal Conductivity “k” shall not exceed 0.036 W/m.°C at 24°C mean

temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. .3 Applications and thickness:

SERVICE THICKNESS .4 Outer Jacket: Aluminum

.12 E-3: Glass Fiber Board Cold Flat Surfaced -40 to 30°C

.1 Materials: .1 Flexible glass mineral fiber board with vapor barrier to CGSB 51-GP-

11M and CGSB 51-GP-53M. .2 Acceptable material: Fiberglass Canada, Manson, Schuller 815 Spinglass

with FSK. .2 Thermal Conductivity “k” shall not exceed 0.036 W/m. °C at 24°C mean

temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. .3 Applications and thickness:

SERVICE THICKNESS COMBUSTION AIR DUCT TO BOILER ROOM 25 MM SUPPLY AIR DUCT TO OCCUPIED SPACES 13 MM RETURN AIR DUCT FROM OCCUPIED SPACES 13 MM .4 Outer Jacket: Canvas

.13 E-4: Cellular Glass -40 to 343°C

.1 For equipment on the following systems: .1

.2 Materials: .1 ASTM C552 / CAN/CGSB 51.38M, Cellular glass. .2 Standard of Acceptance: Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas.


SERVICE THICKNESS .4 Outer Jacket: Aluminum

.14 E-5: Flexible Elastomeric -40 to 93°C


.1 Materials: .1 CAN/CGSB 51.40, flexible Elastomeric, unicellular, 25/50 rated closed

cell fire retardant pipe insulation. .2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong AP Armaflex, Nomaco.

.2 Thermal Conductivity “k” shall not exceed 0.034 W/m.°C at 24°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.


SERVICE THICKNESS CHILLED WATER PUMP CASES 25 MM CONDENSER WATER PUMP CASES 25 MM CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMP CASES 25 MM CHILLER EVAPORATOR WATER BOX COVERS 25 MM CHILLED WATER PLATE EXCHANGERS 25 MM CHILLED WATER EXPANSION TANK, V-XXX 25 MM

2.3 REMOVEABLE THERMAL BLANKET INSULATION

.1 Asbestos free re-moveable thermal blanket insulation to withstand service temperatures; sewn design, and provided with the minimum insulation listed below.

.2 Process Hot Water up to 125°C:

.1 25 mm thickness to be used for hot water pump housings, magnetic flow-energy meters, plate heat exchangers, flex connectors, and sidestream filter cases.

.3 Emergency Generator up to 550°C:

.1 25 mm thickness to be used for exhaust flexible connectors.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Shannon INSULTECH or KeyMay KMI Thermal.

2.4 CEMENT

.1 Thermal insulating and finish

.1 To: ASTM C449/C449M.

.2 Hydraulic setting or Air drying on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.

2.5 JACKETS

.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):

.1 One-piece moulded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB 51.53 with pre-formed shapes as required.

.2 Colours: to match adjacent finish paint selected by Departmental Representative DCC Representative Consultant.

.3 Minimum service temperatures: -20 degrees C.

.4 Maximum service temperature: 65 degrees C.

.5 Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm.


.6 Fastenings: .1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and

joints. .7 Special requirements:

.1 Outdoor: UV rated material at least 0.5 mm thick. .8 Covering adhesive: compatible with insulation.

.2 Canvas:

.1 220 gm/m² cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921.

.2 Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation.

.3 Aluminum:

.1 To ASTM B209.

.2 Thickness: 0.90 mm sheet.

.3 Finish: stucco embossed.

.4 Joining: longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps.

.5 Fittings: 0.9 mm thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner.

.6 Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5mm thick at 300 mm spacing.

2.6 INSULATION SECUREMENTS

.1 Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, plain reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum.

.2 Contact adhesive: quick setting.

.3 Canvas adhesive: washable.

.4 Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel.

.5 Bands: Stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.

.6 Facing: 25 mm galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh on one face of insulation with expanded metal lath on other face one face both faces of insulation.

.7 Fasteners: 2 mm diameter pins with 35 mm diameter clips. Length of pin to suit thickness of insulation.

2.7 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE

.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.

2.8 INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

2.9 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER MASTIC

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.


.2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m².

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION


3.2 PRE- INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Pressure testing of equipment and adjacent piping systems complete, witnessed and certified.

.2 Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards

.1 Hot equipment: To TIAC code 1503-H.

.2 Cold equipment: to TIAC code 1503-C.

.2 Insulation supports where welding or bolting is permitted:

.1 Angle anchors: weld or bolt to equipment at lowest point of insulation. Thereafter, locate every 4.5 m vertically.

.2 Welded steel clips: at 200 mm maximum on centres, but not less than 2 rows per side.

.3 Insulation:

.1 Multi-layered: staggered butt joints and expansion joints in insulation, secured with wire or bands at 400 mm on centre intervals.

.4 Expansion joints in insulation: leave 25 mm space in each layer at 7 m intervals. Pack space lightly with flexible mineral insulation.

.5 Insulation at bolts, studs, nuts, instrumentation: bevel to permit removal without damage to insulation or finish.

.6 Fastenings: secure insulation with stainless steel wire, and steel bands at 900 mm on centre before application of finishing cement.

.7 Vapor barriers: adhere and seal with vapor seal adhesive.

.8 Elastomeric Insulation: to remain dry. Overlaps to manufacturer's instructions. Joints tight and sealed properly.

.9 Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.

.10 Apply materials in accordance with insulation and equipment manufacturer's instructions and this specification.


.11 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75 mm.

.12 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.

.1 Hangers, supports outside vapour retarder jacket.

.13 Supports, Hangers:

.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided.

3.4 REMOVABLE, PRE-FABRICATED, INSULATION BLANKETS

.1 Insulation: TIAC Code C.2 Flexible Mineral Fiber Blanket for Medium and High Temperature Applications (Removable Thermal Blanket Insulation)

.1 Application: on process hot water, steam, feedwater, condensate, and chilled water system components including; .1 Flanged valves, Y-strainers, basket strainers, side stream filter cases,

flow meter housings, control valves, flanged valves, pump housings, steam turbine casings, domestic hot water heat exchangers, expansion joints, expansion compensators, and flexible connectors.

.2 Materials: .1 Asbestos-free removable thermal blanket insulation to withstand

temperatures up to 350°C (665°F) for piping and Up to 650°C (1200°F) for engine exhaust systems.

.2 Minimum 40 mm insulation layer thickness

.3 Install insulation in sewn heavy duty fabric blanket coverings.

.4 Fasteners: metal clips or tied lace style fastener

.5 Design to allow for easy removal and reinstallation of same covering.

.6 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702 ASTM C 547.

.7 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.

.8 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702 ASTM C 547

.9 Acceptable materials: .1 Firwin Corporation .2 INSULTECH® .3 KeyMay Industries

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULES

.1 Hot Equipment:

.1 TIAC code A-1 or C-1 with mechanical fastenings, wire or bands and 13 mm cement reinforced with one layer of reinforcing mesh.

.2 TIAC code C-2 unfaced with wire or bands and 13 mm cement precede by one layer of reinforcing mesh.

.3 Thicknesses:


.1 Domestic hot water storage tanks, 25 mm

.2 Heating heat exchangers, 50 mm

.3 Steam condensate receivers, 50 mm

.4 Deaerator-feedwater heaters, 50 mm

.2 Cold equipment:

.1 TIAC A-6 or C-4 with adhesive fastenings. Match unit factory supplied insulation.

.2 Thicknesses: .1 Chilled water heat exchangers, 25 mm; .2 Chilled water pump cases, 25 mm; .3 Chilled water expansion tanks, 25 mm. .4 Chiller refrigerant compressor suction/discharge piping, 50 mm .5 Chiller evaporator and condenser shell head end boxes: 40 mm

.3 Finish: Painted, 2 coats, colour: white.

.3 Vessels, Tanks, Pipe Nozzles:

.1 TIAC code C-2 unfaced with bands. Exterior jacketing to be Aluminum.

.2 Service Temperatures: .1 Boiler Flash/Blowdown tank: 207 °C

.3 Thicknesses: .1 Blowdown/Flash V-XXX: 40 mm

.4 Engine exhausts and mufflers: - NOT APPLICABLE

.1 TIAC code A-2 with 25 mm air gap, mechanical fastenings wire bands and 13 mm cement reinforced with one layer of reinforcing mesh.

.2 Use multiple layers, staggered, as needed to achieve 60 °C max insulation outer surface temperature for first 2 m above genset container roof.

.5 Removable Insulation Blankets to be provided for: Refer to item 3.4 above.

.6 Finishes:

.1 Equipment in mechanical rooms: TIAC code CEF/1 with jacket.

.2 Equipment elsewhere: TIAC code CEF/2 with 13 mm cement jacket.

.3 Engine exhaust piping and muffler: To TIAC code CEF-1.

.4 Cylindrical Tanks, Vessels, Pipe Nozzles: TIAC code CEF/1 with aluminum jacket.

.5 Equipment elsewhere: TIAC code CEF/2 with jacket.

3.6 CLEANING


.1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 07 15 252 Buildout THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 14

Part 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 21 05 01 Common Work Mechanical.

.2 Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping

.3 Section 21 05 01 – Common Work Results for HVAC.

.4 Section 23 05 29 – Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment

.5 Section 23 05 53.01 – Mechanical Identification

.6 Section 23 07 14 – Thermal Insulation For Equipment.

.7 Section 23 20 13 – High Pressure Piping Systems

.8 Section 23 20 13 – Hydronic Systems - Steel

1.2 REFERENCES - LATEST EDITION

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

.1 ASHRAE Standard 90.1, “Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings (IESNA co-sponsored; ANSI approved; Continuous Maintenance Standard).”

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A167, “Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.”

.2 ASTM B 209M, “Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.”

.3 ASTM C 335, “Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.”

.4 ASTM C 411, “Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.”

.5 ASTM C 449/C 449M, “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.”

.6 ASTM C 533, “Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.”

.7 ASTM C 534, “Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.”

.8 ASTM C 547, “Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.”

.9 ASTM C 552, “Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.”

.10 ASTM C 553, “Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.”

.11 ASTM C 795, “Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.”


.12 ASTM C 921, “Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.”

.13 ASTM C 1729, Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation

.14 ASTM E84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies,”

.3 American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA)

.1 ANSI/NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,”

.2 ANSI/NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,”


.1 CAN/CGSB 51-GP-9M, “Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Sleeving for Piping and Round Ducting.”

.2 CAN/CGSB 51-GP-11M, “Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fiber, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.”

.3 CAN/CGSB-51.40, “Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe Covering.”

.4 CAN/CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, “Vapor Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.”

.5 CAN/CGSB-51.53, “Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.”

.6 Canadian Standards Association

.7 CSA HA Series, “CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys.”

.5 Canadian Standards Association

.1 CSA HA Series, CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys.


.1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995, c. 37.

.2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.


.7 Green Seal (GS)

.1 GS-36 (2013) Adhesives for Commercial Use.



.9 Manufacturer's Trade Associations

.1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards

.10 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.


.2 CAN/ULC-S701, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.3 CAN/ULC-S702, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings

.4 CAN/ULC-S702.2, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings, Part 2: Application Guidelines.

.11 Provincial Building Code


.13 Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)

1.3 INSULATION FIRE RATINGS

.1 All insulation materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA90A and that they have a fire hazard rating of not more than 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed as per CAN/ULC S102.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.

.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations. Stating any non-compliance with standards listed in section 1.1

1.5 SAMPLES SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals if requested by consultant.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit for approval: manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01330 -Submittals. Include product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.

.2 State or indicate any non-compliance with standards listed in Section 1.1

.3 Submit one copy of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals

.4 Samples

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals if requested.

.2 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. Affix label beneath sample indicating service.

.5 Quality Assurance Submittals

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.




1.6 DEFINITIONS

.1 For purposes of this section:

.1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred spaces.

.2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.

.3 “REMOVABLE” - means the ability to remove insulation coverings from mechanical fittings using reusable thermal blankets.

.2 TIAC:

.1 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.

.2 CPF: Code Piping Finish.


.1 Qualifications:

.1 Installer: specialist in performing work of this Section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards of TIAC. Member of ICA


.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Provincial and Industry Health and Safety Requirements.



.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




.1 Protect from weather, construction traffic.

.2 Protect against damage.

.3 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer.


Part 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide insulation and jacketing certified as being manufactured from a minimum 25% recycled material.

.2 Provide materials and products manufactured without the use of CFC’s, HFC’s or HCFC’s. Use products that are formaldehyde free, low VOC’s, fiber free, dust free and resist mold and mildew.

2.2 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING

.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.

.2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

2.3 INSULATION

.1 Mineral fibre specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.

.2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 degrees C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.

.3 Where piping and equipment are accessible by Operators and public, and as per the Provincial Building Code, provide as required for personnel protection to achieve surface temperature <50 °C (122 °F).

2.4 TIAC CODE A.1 MINERAL FIBER - RIGID MOULDED PIPE INSULATION FOR INTERMEDIATE TEMPERATURE RANGE (15°C TO 315°C)

.1 Application: for interior, above ground piping, valves, and fittings in the following services:

.1 Plant Process Hot water system piping, temperature 100 °C (212 °F)

.2 On skid hot water boiler piping / nozzles, temperature 100 °C (212 °F)

.3 Plant Hydronic in plant hot water and/or glycol heating system piping; temperature 60 °C (140 °F).

.4 Domestic Hot Water, temperature 65 °C (149 °F)

.2 Materials:

.1 TIAC Code A.1: rigid moulded mineral fiber without factory applied vapour retarder jacket

.2 Mineral fiber: to ASTM C 547

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Johns Manville Micro-Lok® HP, Manson Alley-KTM, Owens Corning FIBERGLAS®

.3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.043 W/m °C at 121°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.

.4 Thickness to the more stringent of Table 1 or ASHRAE 90.1.


.5 With field applied all service jacket or aluminum jacket to suit installation.

2.5 INSULATION: TIAC CODE A.6 FLEXIBLE FOAM ELASTOMERIC FOR LOW TEMPERATURE RANGE (-75°C TO 35°C)

.1 Application: For piping, valves, fittings and flexible connectors on the following systems:

.1 Chilled Water Piping system; temperature 14 °C (57 °F)

.2 Domestic Cold Water, temperature 5 °C. (39 °F)

.3 Make-up Cold Water, temperature 5°C. (39 °F)

.4 Roof drain interior piping, temperature 5°C. (39 °F)

.5 Rainwater piping for 5.0 m from drain, 5°C. (39 °F)

.6 Plumbing vents (within 2m of roof/wall penetration, 5°C. (39 °F)

.7 Traps subject to freezing, 5°C. (39 °F).

.8 Refrigerant lines

.9 Underside of roof drain housings

.2 Materials:

.1 TIAC Code A.6 Flexible unicellular tubular elastomer with vapour retarder jacket

.2 Elastomeric: to ASTM C534.

.3 Vapour retarder jacket: to CAN/CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. Vapor permeance rating shall be maximum 0.02 Perms as per ASTM E 96 Procedure A.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Armacell AP/Armaflex®, K-Flex USA

.3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.034 W/m°C at 24°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. Thickness as per Table 3.

.4 Thickness to the more stringent of Table 1 or ASHRAE 90.1.


2.6 INSULATION: TIAC CODE A.2 CALCIUM SILICATE PIPE INSULATION FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE RANGE (315°C TO 650°C)

.1 Application: for piping, mufflers, and fittings on:

.1 NOT APPLICABLE TO PROJECT

.2 Material:

.1 Calcium silicate insulation: 25mm thickness to CAN/CGSB-51.2, rigid, moulded pipe sections and blocks complete with special shapes to suit project design and dimensions designed to permit periodic removal and/or replacement.

.2 Density: 240 kg/m³ (15 lbs/ft³).

.3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.066 W/m°C at 246°C (32°F) mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 335 and 533.

.4 Acceptable Materials: .1 Industrial Insulation Group (IIG) Thermo-12® Gold


.3 Thickness: 2 x 50mm or as required to achieve 2 hr fire rating on breeching pipe.

.4 Personnel Protection: In addition, for the first 8 ft above floor level and 8 ft above roof level, add an additional layer of A.2 Rigid Calcium Silicate. Thickness as required to achieve 60 °C surface temperature at 510 °C exhaust temperature.

.1 Acceptable materials: IIG Thermo-12 Gold

.5 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.079 W/m °C at 260 °C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 & C335.

.6 Apply outer jacket to insulated pipe in accordance with item 2.10 below.

2.7 INSULATION: TIAC CODE A.5 CELLULAR GLASS PIPE INSULATION FOR LOW TEMPERATURE RANGE (-75°C TO 35°C)

.1 Application: for piping and fittings on:

.1 NOT APPLICABLE TO PROJECT

.2 Material:

.1 ASTM C-552 and C-1639, molded rigid closed glass cell insulation for piping.

.2 Vapor permeance rating 0.0 perms maximum as per ASTM E-96-Procedure B, and compressive strength to ASTM C 165.

.3 Acceptable materials: Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas

.3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.042 W/m°C at 24°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. Thickness as per Table 2.

.4 Table 2: TIAC Code A.5 Insulation for Low Temperature Applications

FLUID

TEMP (°C)

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ( NPS )

UNDER 25 25 - 40 50 - 100 125 & over

5 - 95 15 mm 20 mm 20 mm 25 mm

-14 to 4 25 mm 25 mm 40 mm 40 mm


2.8 INSULATION: TIAC CODE C.2 FLEXIBLE MINERAL FIBER BLANKET FOR MEDIUM AND HIGH TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS (REMOVABLE THERMAL BLANKET INSULATION)

.1 Application: on process hot water and hot glycol piping components including;

.1 Flanged valves, Y-strainers, basket strainers, side stream filter cases, magnetic flow meters, control valves, pump housings, domestic hot water heat exchangers, expansion joints, expansion compensators, and flexible connectors.

.2 Boiler and Engine Exhaust System flex connectors

.2 Materials: TIAC C.2


.1 Asbestos-free removable thermal blanket insulation to withstand temperatures up to 150°C (302°F) for piping and Up to 650°C (1200°F) for engine exhaust systems.

.2 Minimum 40 mm thickness

.3 Install insulation in sewn heavy duty fabric blanket coverings.

.4 Design to allow for easy removal and reinstallation of same covering.

.5 Fasteners: metal clips or tied lace style fastener

.6 Mineral fibre: to ASTM C 547.

.7 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.

.8 Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C 547

.9 Standard of Acceptance: Firwin Corporation, INSULTECH®, KeyMay Industries

2.9 E-1 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET HOT SURFACES 20°C TO 550 °C

.1 Application: for piping and fittings on:

.1 Not used for this project.

.2 Materials:

.1 CGSB 51-GP-11M, Flexible mineral fiber blanket with fiberglass mat backing without vapor barrier.

.2 Acceptable material: Fiberex.

.3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.068 W/m°C at 260°C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C177.


Service Thickness Field fabricated boiler breeching ducts and transitions. 50 mm

.5 Outer Jacket: Aluminum alloy

2.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

.1 For installations outdoors, exterior Piping: use insulation thickness corresponding to supply temperature of 178 - 200°C.

.2 Table : Piping Insulation Schedule

Application Fluid Temp

degrees C Code Pipe sizes (NPS) and insulation thickness (mm)

Pipe sizes (inches) to 1 1 1/4 to 2

2 1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8

Pipe sizes (mm) <25 30 - 50 65 - 100 125-150 >200 Steam, Saturated and Superheated over 178 A-1 115 125 125 125 125

Steam, Saturated 122 - 177 A-1 80 100 115 115 115


and Superheated Pumped Condensate return up to 93 A-1 40 40 50 50 50

Hot Water Heating 178 - 200 A-1 115 125 125 125 125 Hot Water Heating 94 - 121 A-1 65 65 80 80 80 Hot Water Heating 61 - 93 A-1 40 40 50 50 50 Hot Water Heating 30 - 60 A-1 25 25 40 40 40 Glycol Heating 61 - 93 A-1 40 40 50 50 50 Glycol Heating 30 - 60 A-1 25 25 40 40 40 Domestic HWS 30 - 60 A-1 25 25 40 40 40 Chilled Water 4 - 15 A-6 25 40 40 40 40 Chilled Water or Glycol below 4 A-6 25 40 40 40 40

Chilled Water Pump Casing 4 - 15 A-6 25 40 40 40 40

Domestic CWS 4 - 15 A-6 25 40 40 40 40 Diesel generator exhaust system A-2 38 65 65 75 90

2.11 JACKETS / FINISHES .1 Exposed indoors: Aluminum jacket. .2 Exposed in mechanical rooms: PVC jacket. .3 Concealed, indoors: [Not Applicable] .4 Outdoors: water-proof, aluminum jacket. .5 Finish attachments: SS bands, at 150 mm on centre. Seals: closed. .6 Installation: to appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5.

.2 Aluminum Alloy

.1 Application: supply and install in accordance with ASTM C1729 on all piping insulated with the following: .1 All insulated piping installed outdoors. .2 All steam, condensate, feedwater, steam drips, and blowdown piping

related to steam boiler plant. .3 All exhaust piping and associated components installed in mechanical

rooms. .2 Crimped or embossed jacketing (minimum 0.9 mm thick) with longitudinal slip

joints and 50 mm end laps with factory attached protective liner on interior surface. Aluminum alloy butt straps with mechanical fasteners.

.3 On fittings: matched pre-fabricated 0.9 mm thick, die shaped components with factory attached protective liner on interior surface.


.3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jacketing

.1 Application: on all indoor piping for the following services: .1 Hot water process piping insulated with TAC code A.1 insulation. .2 Condenser (tower) water process piping insulated with TIAC code A.1

insulation. .3 Chilled water, domestic cold water piping with TIAC code A.6 insulation .4 Non process area exposed piping insulated with TIAC code A.1 & A.6

insulation. .2 PVC Jacketing: to CAN/CGSB 51-GP-53M, complete with preformed shapes to

suit project design and dimensions. .3 One piece moulded type fitting covers and sheet material. .4 Colors: PVC jacketing to be white. .5 Submit color sample for approval. .6 Jacketing to meet 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed rating limits. Jacket

thicknesses are: .1 0.25mm thick minimum for all interior piping and 0.50mm thick

minimum for all valve chambers. .2 Fitting covers, one piece, pre-molded to match c/w insulation insert.

.7 Fastenings standard to manufacturer.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: Childers or equivalent.

.4 All Service Jacketing

.1 Apply on all indoor piping for the following services: .1 Not Applicable

.5 Canvas;

.1 Apply on non process area concealed piping insulated with TIAC code A.1 insulation.

.2 Material; ULC listed, plain, weave, cotton fabric, at 220 g/m2.

.3 Provide washable adhesive fastenings for cementing canvas lagging cloth to insulation.

.4 Canvas applied to external (outdoor) ducting shall be coated with mastic to make weatherproof.

.5 Acceptable Material; S. Fattal Thermo Canvas

2.12 FASTENINGS

.1 For A.1 insulation systems (preformed mineral fiber pipe insulation):

.1 Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced 100mm wide minimum. Maximum flame spread/smoke developed: to CAN/ULC-S102, less than 25 flame spread, less than 50 smoke developed.

.2 Acceptable material: .1 Fattal Insultape.


.2 Avery Dennison Fasson®

.3 To insulation and jacketing manufacturer’s requirements .3 Lap seal adhesive: quick-setting for joints and lap sealing of vapor barriers.

Flame spread 10, smoke 0. .1 Acceptable material: Childers CP80, or equivalent.

.4 Lagging adhesive: fire retardant coating. .1 Acceptable material: Childers CP 50A-hv2, or equivalent.

.2 Steel wire shall be 1.3 mm diameter galvanized annealed.

.3 Stainless steel wire shall be 1.3 mm diameter, type 304.

.4 Steel bands shall be 19 x 0.4 mm stainless steel.

.5 For A.6 insulation system (flexible foam elastomeric):

.1 Contact adhesive: Low VOC, quick setting for seams and joints.

.2 Tape: Low VOC self-adhesive PVC.

.3 Acceptable material: Childers or equivalent.

.6 For A.5 insulation system (cellular glass):

.1 Aluminum bands, 19 mm wide, 0.5mm thick.

.2 All joints to be sealed full depth with manufacturers approved sealant.

2.13 THERMAL INSULATING AND FINISHING CEMENT TO 450°C

.1 Asbestos free hydraulic setting insulation and finishing cement to CAN/CGSB51.12.


.1 On cold surfaces using metal jacketing apply in 13 mm layers on heads before application of jacket.

.3 Acceptable material: Low VOC emission product (<80g/L less water less exempt compounds) that meets LEED IEQ Credit 4.1: Low emitting materials: Adhesives and Sealants.

2.14 WEATHERPROOF CAULKING FOR JACKETS INSTALLED OUTDOORS

.1 Caulking to: Section [07 92 00 - Joint Sealants].

Part 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Apply insulation after required system tests have been completed and approved by Consultant.

.2 Work to be performed by Insulation Journeymen.

.3 Surfaces shall be clean and dry during application of insulation and finishes.

.4 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein.

.5 On cold piping with insulation and vapor barrier, install high density insulation under hanger shield to prevent crushing. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

.6 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.

.7 Insulation on roof drain body shall be held in place with 100% coverage of adhesive and wire ties.

.8 On piping with insulation and vapor barrier, install a half round high density insulation under hanger shield. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports. Insulation is to stop on either side of a fire separation penetration and the piping is to be properly fire stopped.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with applicable TIAC code, ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

.2 Pre-formed: sectional up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS 12.

.3 Multi-layered: staggered butt joint construction. Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75 mm.

.4 Vertical pipe over NPS 3: insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 4.5 m centers.

.5 Expansion joints in insulation: terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Leave void of 25 mm between terminations. Pack void lightly with flexible mineral insulation.

.6 Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement and jacket material.

.7 Expansion joints in piping: provide for adequate movement of expansion joint without damage to insulation or finishes.

.8 Pre-formed PVC fittings shall use a vapour retarder mastic compatible with the PVC shall be applied around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation and on the fitting cover throat overlap seam. The fitting cover is then applied, secured with pressure sensitive tape along the circumferential edges with a minimum of 50 mm overlap.

.9 Orifice plate mounting flanges, flanges and unions at equipment, expansion joints, valves, other components requiring regular maintenance: omit insulation and bevel away from studs and nuts to permit use of tools without damage to insulation, install insulation


and finish to permit easy disassembly and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation and finishes.

.10 Insulation is not required for:

.1 Chrome plated piping, valves and fittings.

.2 Valves 50 mm and under, unions, and flanges on low temperature systems less than 45°C (113°F)

.3 Vent, relief, and drain piping under 25 mm.

.11 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.

.1 Install hangers, supports outside vapour retarder jacket.

.12 Supports, Hangers:

.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided.

3.4 REMOVABLE, PRE-FABRICATED, INSULATION AND ENCLOSURES

.1 Application: on process hot water, hot glycol piping, steam, condensate and chilled water components including: expansion joints, flanged valves, strainers, magnetic flow meters, control valves, pump housings, domestic hot water heat exchangers, expansion compensators, expansion joints, flexible connectors, flanges and unions at equipment and primary flow measuring elements

.2 Design: to permit movement of expansion joint, periodic removal and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation.

.3 Insulation:

.1 Insulation, fastenings and finishes: same as system.

.2 Jacket: high temperature fabric.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

.1 Insulation to remain dry. Overlaps to manufacturers instructions. Ensure tight joints.

.2 Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES

.1 Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified.

.2 TIAC Code: A-1.

.1 Securements: Tape, SS wire, or bands at 300 mm on centre.

.2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.

.3 Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H.

.3 TIAC Code: A-6.

.1 Insulation securements: Tape, self adhesive PVC.



.4 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C.TIAC Code: C-2 with or without vapour retarder jacket depending on service.

.1 Insulation securements: SS wire.


.3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-H or 1501-C, as applicable.

.5 Thickness of insulation as listed Table 1.

.1 Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding 4000 mm long.

.2 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves, fittings.

3.7 FASTENINGS

.1 Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and center of each section, but not greater than 900 mm on centers.


.1 Diesel generator exhaust piping and muffler shall be insulated and finished as for breeching. Install anti-friction material between muffler and insulation to prevent breakdown of insulation due to vibration.

3.9 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 08 01 252 Buildout PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION MECHANICAL Project No. 218225 PIPING SYSTEMS Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

.3 Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM E202-12, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.

1.3 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 In accordance with Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

1.4 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV)

.1 Perform hydronic systems performance verification after cleaning is completed and system is in full operation.

.2 When systems are operational, perform following tests:

.1 Conduct full scale tests at maximum design flow rates, temperatures and pressures for continuous consecutive period of 48 hours to demonstrate compliance with design criteria.

.2 Verify performance of hydronic system circulating pumps as specified, recording system pressures, temperatures, fluctuations by simulating maximum design conditions and varying. .1 Pump operation. .2 Control valve operation. .3 Bypass open/closed. .4 Control pressure failure. .5 Maximum heating demand. .6 Maximum cooling demand. .7 Primary side failure for heating and cooling. .8 Air Handling unit fan failure. .9 Outdoor reset. Re-check heat exchanger output supply temperature at

100% and 50% reset, maximum water temperature.

1.5 HYDRONIC SYSTEM CAPACITY TEST

.1 Perform hydronic system capacity tests after:


.1 TAB has been completed

.2 Verification of operating, limit, safety controls.

.3 Verification of primary and secondary pump flow rates.

.4 Verification of accuracy of temperature and pressure sensors and gauges.

.2 Calculate system capacity at test conditions.

.3 Using manufacturer's published data and calculated capacity at test conditions, extrapolate system capacity at design conditions.

.4 When capacity test is completed, return controls and equipment status to normal operating conditions.

.5 Submit sample of system water to approved testing agency to determine if chemical treatment is correct. Include cost.

.6 Heating system capacity test:

.1 Perform capacity test when ambient temperature is within 10% of design conditions. Simulate design conditions by: .1 Increasing OA (Outside Air) flow rates through heating coils (in this

case, monitor heating coil discharge temperatures to ensure that coils are not subjected to freezing conditions) or

.2 Reducing space temperature by turning of heating system for sufficient period of time before starting testing.

.2 Test procedures: .1 Open fully heat exchanger, heating coil and radiation control valves. .2 With hot water heating supply temperature stabilized, record flow rates

and supply and return temperatures simultaneously.

.7 Chilled water system capacity test:

.1 Perform capacity test when ambient temperature is within 10% of design conditions. Simulate design conditions by: .1 Adding heat from building heating system or; .2 Raising space temperature by turning off cooling and air systems for

sufficient period of time before starting testing and pre-heating building to summer design space temperature (occupied) or above. Set OAD (Outside Air Dampers) and RAD (Return Air Dampers) for minimum outside air if OAT (Outside Air Temperature) is near outside design temperature or to maximum recirculation if RAT (Return Air Temperature) is greater that OAT. RAT to be at least 23 degrees C minimum.

.2 Test procedures: .1 Open fully cooling coil control valves. .2 Set thermostats on associated AHU's for maximum cooling. .3 Set AHU's for design maximum air flow rates. .4 Set load or demand limiters on chillers to 100%.


.5 After system has stabilized, record chilled water, and condenser water flow rates and supply and return temperatures simultaneously.

1.6 CONDENSER WATER AND HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEMS

.1 In addition to procedures specified above, perform following:

.1 Add chemicals once per week as required.

.2 Perform TAB as specified Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.3 Set up and adjust drip feeders, timer controls, pump strokes as required to maintain required chemical feed rates.

1.7 GLYCOL SYSTEMS

.1 Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 40 degrees C Test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.

1.8 STEAM SYSTEMS

.1 Performance verification:

.1 When systems are operational, perform relevant tests of steam and condensate return piping systems as specified under hydronic systems.

.2 Verify operation of components of steam system including: .1 Steam traps by:

.1 Measuring temperature of condensate return and/or

.2 Using audio-sensing devices.

.3 Use of other approved methods. .2 Flash tanks. .3 Thermostatic vents.

.3 Verify performance of condensation units, including: .1 Pump capacity at design temperature. .2 Controls.

.4 Verify performance of condensate return system to ensure return of maximum quantity of condensate return water at with minimum temperature drop.

.5 Adjust piping system as required to eliminate water hammer.

.2 Monitor system continuously until acceptance for proper operation of components including steam traps, thermostatic vents, flash tanks and condensate pumping units.

1.9 POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS

.1 When cleaning is completed and system filled:

.1 Verify performance of equipment and systems as specified elsewhere in Division 23.


.2 Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or recharge air chambers. Repeat for each outlet and flush valve.

.3 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, verifying that no residuals remain resulting from flushing and/or cleaning.

1.10 REPORTS

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Reports, supplemented as specified herein.

1.11 TRAINING

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Training of O M Personnel, supplemented as specified herein.

.1 Include following: .1 Controls and Metering Equipment Training.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 08 02 252 Buildout CLEANING & START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 21 05 01 – Common Work Results for HwVAC. .2 Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. .3 Section 23 08 01 – Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASTM E202-12, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.




.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. .1 Departmental Representative will make available 1 copy of systems

supplier's installation instructions.





.1 The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and properly disposing of all test and cleaning media, water, and chemical. Arrange and pay for services; Contractor shall use the Owner’s water treatment company unless otherwise approved.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.



.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CLEANING SOLUTIONS

.1 Tri-sodium phosphate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system.

.2 Sodium carbonate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system.

.3 Low-foaming detergent: 0.01 kg per 100 L water in system.

Part 3 Execution



3.2 CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS

.1 Timing: systems operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices functional, before cleaning is carried out.

.2 Cleaning Agency:

.1 Retain qualified water treatment specialist to perform system cleaning.

.3 Install instrumentation such as flow meters, control valves, and heat exchangers only after cleaning is certified as complete by water treatment specialist.

.4 Cleaning procedures:

.1 Provide detailed report outlining proposed cleaning procedures at least 4 weeks prior to proposed starting date. Report to include: .1 Cleaning procedures, flow rates, elapsed time. .2 Chemicals and concentrations used. .3 Inhibitors and concentrations. .4 Specific requirements for completion of work. .5 Special precautions for protecting piping system materials and

components. .6 Complete analysis of water used to ensure water will not damage

systems or equipment.

.5 Conditions at time of cleaning of systems:

.1 Systems: free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material.

.2 Control valves: operational, fully open to ensure that terminal units can be cleaned properly.


.3 Strainers: clean prior to initial fill.

.4 Install temporary filters on pumps not equipped with permanent filters.

.5 Install pressure gauges on strainers to detect plugging.

.6 Report on Completion of Cleaning:

.1 When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier.

.7 Hydronic Systems:

.1 Fill system with water, ensure air is vented from system.

.2 Submit Flushing procedure to Departmental Representative a minimum of 4 weeks before any flushing is scheduled to commence.

.3 All new piping must be chemically cleaned and clean water flushed.

.4 Existing system piping must be clean water flushed only.

.5 Fill expansion tanks 1/3 to 1/2 full, charge system with compressed air to at least 35 kPa (does not apply to diaphragm type expansion tanks).

.6 Use water metre to record volume of water in system to +/- 0.5%.

.7 Add chemicals under direct supervision of chemical treatment supplier.

.8 Closed loop systems: circulate system cleaner for at least 36 h. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with water and inhibitors. Test concentrations and adjust to recommended levels.

.9 Flush velocity in system mains and branches to ensure removal of debris. System pumps may be used for circulating cleaning solution provided that velocities are adequate.

.10 Add chemical solution to system.

.11 Establish circulation. Circulate for minimum 12 h or as directed by Owner’s water treatment company, ensuring flow in all circuits. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 h at design temperature. Drain and repeat procedures specified above. Flush through low point drains in system. Refill with clean water adding to sodium sulphite (test for residual sulphite).

.12 Provide equipment, labour, and materials as needed to perform the flushing and cleaning of the process piping.

.13 All equipment shall be bypassed during flushing/cleaning process and strainer screens temporarily removed.

.14 All instrumentation installed in the piping shall be removed and not be exposed to the flushing and cleaning process.

.15 Flushing velocity to be a minimum of 1.5 meters per second (4.92 ft/s).

.16 Provide flushing screen of 20 mesh on flush discharge to monitor material carried by flushing water.

.17 The contractor to install and remove all temporary piping and supports to introduce and dispose of flushing water at a safe discharge.

.18 The contractor shall notify the Departmental Representative 48 hours in advance of the flushing procedure.


.19 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the pipe, insulation, or structures from the cleaning operation.

.20 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no oil or other lubricant comes into contact with either the inside or outside walls of the pipe following cleaning.

.21 On completion of Flushing/cleaning and acceptance by the Departmental Representative, re-connect equipment, clean and re-install temporary and permanent strainer screens.

.22 Temporary strainer screens shall remain in place up to 6 months after startup.

.8 Drain the system after the pressure test and cleaning. Remove strainers and clean. Re-install after obtaining consultant's approval. Refill system with softened water and bleed all air from the system.

.9 Report on Completion of cleaning:

.1 When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier.


.11 Glycol Systems:

.1 In addition to procedures specified above perform specified procedures.

.2 Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 40 degrees C. Test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.

.12 Steam Systems: in addition to general requirements as specified above, perform following:

.1 Remove internal components of steam traps until flushing and warm-up have been completed.

.2 Open drip points to atmosphere. If needed for protection of personnel or environment, install flexible hose and direct discharge to safe location.

.3 Starting at drip point closest to source, verify removal of condensate, then re-install steam trap internal parts. Repeat sequence down the line.

.4 Water hammer: determine source and eliminate cause.

3.3 START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

.1 After cleaning is completed and system is filled:

.1 Establish circulation and expansion tank level, set pressure controls.

.2 Ensure air is removed.

.3 Check pumps to be free from air, debris, possibility of cavitation when system is at design temperature.

.4 Dismantle system pumps used for cleaning, inspect, replace worn parts, install new gaskets and new set of seals.

.5 Clean out strainers repeatedly until system is clean.

.6 Commission water treatment systems as specified by water treatment supplier.


.7 Check water level in expansion tank with cold water with circulating pumps OFF and again with pumps ON.

.8 Repeat with water at design temperature.

.9 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing, cavitation. Eliminate water hammer and other noises.

.10 Bring system up to design temperature and pressure slowly.

.11 Perform TAB as specified in Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.12 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary.

.13 Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion joints, loops, guides, anchors.

.14 If sliding type expansion joints bind or if bellows type expansion joints flex incorrectly, shut down system, re-align, repeat start-up procedures.

.15 Re-tighten bolts using torque wrench, to compensate for heat-caused relaxation. Repeat several times during commissioning.

.16 Check operation of drain valves.

.17 Adjust valve stem packings as systems settle down.

.18 Fully open balancing valves (except those that are factory-set).

.19 Check operation of over-temperature protection devices on circulating pumps.

.20 Adjust alignment of piping at pumps to ensure flexibility, adequacy of pipe movement, absence of noise or vibration transmission.

3.4 START-UP OF STEAM SYSTEMS

.1 Start-up system with internal parts of steam traps removed and with drip points open to atmosphere.

.2 If necessary for personnel protection or for environmental reasons, install flexible hoses to direct discharge to safe location.

.3 Slowly charge entire system with low pressure steam monitoring expansion joints, loops, anchors, guides, other provisions for pipe movement.

.4 During warm-up, check operation of expansion loops, joints, anchors and guides.

.1 If sliding type bind, or if bellows type flex incorrectly, shut down system, re-align, repeat start-up sequence.

.2 Verify removal of condensate from balanced pressure type expansion joints.

.5 Check adequacy of accessibility to expansion joints for monitoring, servicing.

.6 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary.

.7 Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion joints, loops, anchors, guides.

.8 When systems are operational, check:

.1 Operation of flash tanks.

.2 Operation of thermostatic vents.

.9 Adjust piping system to eliminate water hammer.


.10 Starting at drip point closest to source, verify removal of condensate, then re-install steam trap internal parts. Repeat sequence down the line.

.11 Test operation of operating, limit and safety controls.

.12 Clean out strainer baskets and dirt pockets repeatedly until system is thoroughly clean.

.13 Re-tighten bolts as systems settle down.

.14 Adjust valve packings as systems settle down.


.16 Verify:

.1 Proper operation of steam traps.

.2 Adequacy of cooling legs adjacent to steam traps requiring same for proper operation.

.17 Record pressure drops across control valves at design flow rate.

.18 Fasten any loose items of equipment to ensure quiet operation of system.

.19 Test condensate pumping units for operation, capacity, and operation of controls.

3.5 CLEANING



END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 11 23 252 Buildout FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Project No.: 218225 Page 1 of 9

Part 1 GENERAL



1.2 REFERENCES


.1 ASME B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

.2 ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

.3 ASME B16.34, Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

.4 ANSI B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws.


.1 ASTM A47M, Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings metric.

.2 ASTM A53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.


.1 CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures

.2 CSA Z662, Gas Pipeline Systems

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)/Canadian Gas Association (CGA)

.1 CAN/CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.2 CAN/CSA B149.3, Field Approval of Fuel Related Components on Appliances and Equipment.

.3 CAN/CSA Z245.1, Steel Line Pipe

.5 Provincial Gas Utilization Regulations.

.6 Authority Having Jurisdiction



1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Contractor shall submit their Provincial natural gas installation contractor certification, corporate quality assurance program and pressure test procedure for review.

.2 Contractor shall be responsible for tracking and identifying pipe heat numbers on pipe and confirming correct pipe specification by cross referencing with mill test certificates.

.3 Owner shall verify weld quality at their discretion by non-destructive examination methods.



.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for piping, fittings, valves and equipment.

.2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature following: valves.

.3 Identify on P&ID

.4 Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section [01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction] and Section [02 81 01 - Hazardous Materials]. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during application and curing.

.2 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.



.5 Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals].

1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide project specific maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All piping, fittings, valves, strainers, and other equipment on the natural gas system to be designed, and installed in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1.

.1 Design Pressure: .1 414 kPa (60 psig)

.2 Design Temperature: .1 38°C (100°F)

2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPE

.1 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Schedule 80 Grade B, seamless as follows:

.1 NPS ½ to ¾: .1 Threaded

.2 NPS 1 to 1- ½: .1 Welded or threaded

.2 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Schedule 40 Grade B, seamless as follows:


.1 NPS 2 and larger .1 Schedule standard .2 Welded construction.

.3 Tubing: to ASTM A179 / A179M, seamless steel, as follows:

.1 NPS ½ to 1

.2 Minimum pressure rating for tubing = 1,725 kPag.

2.3 BELOW GROUND PIPE

.1 Steel Pipe; all sizes:

.1 To CSA Z-662, Grade 290; Category 1 Sweet Service ERW pipe.

.2 Minimum Wall thickness .1 4.7 mm.

.3 Comes with yellow jacket, (YJ-1), coating with shrink sleeves to cover welded joints.

.2 Alternative steel pipe material that may be used is

.1 ASTM A53, ERW pipe with minimum wall thickness and coating as per 2.3.1 above

.2 Or, API 5L ERW pipe with minimum wall thickness and coating as per 2.3.1 above.

2.4 JOINTING MATERIAL

.1 Screwed fittings (aboveground only):

.1 Pulverized lead paste.

.2 Welded fittings (above or below ground):

.1 To CSA W47.1.

.3 Flange gaskets:

.1 1/16” asbestos free

.2 Garlock.

2.5 FITTINGS

.1 Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:

.1 For above ground use only.

.2 Malleable iron: .1 Fittings to ASME B16.3, screwed, banded, Class 150

.3 Steel fittings .1 To ASME B16.11 .2 Materials to ASTM A105

.4 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings:


.1 To ANSI/ASME B16.5

.2 Use flat face when bolting to cast iron .5 Steel butt-welding fittings. .6 Unions:

.1 Malleable iron, brass to iron

.2 Ground seat, to ASTM A47M-90 .7 Bolts and nuts:

.1 To ASME B18.2.1

.2 Material: ASTM A307 Grade B .8 Nipples:

.1 Schedule 80

.2 To ASTM A53

.2 Steel tube fittings:


.2 Minimum pressure rating for tube fittings .1 1,725 kPag

2.6 TWO WAY ON-OFF VALVES


.2 CSA approved, class 150 plug or ball, type, PTFE seals and seats

.3 Maximum pressure of 1,033 kPa

.4 NPS 2 and Below

.1 Screwed ends

.5 NPS 2-½ and above

.1 Flanged ends


.1 Grinnel Fluoroseal

.2 Rockwell

.3 Broen

2.7 SEISMIC ISOLATION VALVES


.2 Natural gas service

.3 Steel construction complete with visual status window, manual reset switch, level indicator.

.4 Maximum pressure of 413 kPag

.5 NPS 2 and Below


.1 Screwed ends

.6 NPS 2-½ and above

.1 Flanged ends


.1 QuakeKoso model 317

2.8 PRIMARY SERVICE PRESSURE REGULATORS; NOT REQUIRED

.1 Service: In Plant Primary Natural Gas Supply,

.1 Configuration: Wide Open Monitoring

.2 Lead Regulator is XXXXX

.3 Following Regulator is XXXX

.4 Pilot operated pressure regulator

.5 Fluid: Utility grade Natural Gas

.6 125 FF Cast iron body

.7 Main Diaphragm: Nitrile reinforced with PVC coated fabric

.8 Maximum Flow Capacity: XX std ft3/hr

.9 Minimum Flowrate: XX std ft3/hr

.10 Gas temperature: 50 °F

.11 Maximum Upstream Pressure: 60 psig

.12 Minimum Upstream Pressure: 20 psig

.13 PRV-XXX Downstream Pressure Setpoint: psig

.14 PRV-XXX Downstream Pressure Setpoint: psig

.15 Droop: 5% max

.16 Inlet/Outlet Pipe Size: X” NPS/ X” NPS (Sch 40)

.17 Shutoff: Bubble tight shutoff at zero flow (Lockup at no flow)

.18 Atmospheric Bleed: None allowed during normal operation.

.19 Noise: < 85 dBa at 3.28 ft

.20 Sensing lines & fittings: stainless steel tubing & fittings, with stainless steel isolating needle valves.

.21 Accessories: Pilot supply filters.

.22 Tag: Metal tag; refer to flowsheets for PRV tag number.


2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

.1 The flexible connector shall be CSA certified for use in natural gas service as required.

.2 The flexible connector shall be acceptable to the equipment manufacturer, whose boiler or engine the flexible connector is attached to.

.3 Type 304 stainless steel external braid


.4 Type 321 stainless steel closed pitch corrugated

.5 Length: 400 mm

.6 End connections: NPT or flanged as required for equipment interface.

2.10 THERMOMETERS;

.1 Industrial, Bi-metal Dial, 125 mm size, adjustable angle, aluminum case, 13 mm NPT stainless steel separate thermowell, Celsius/Fahrenheit scale.

.2 Accuracy:

.1 Within +/- 0.5 degrees of reading.

.3 Range:

.1 0 - 40°C.

.4 Maximum 2 deg. per division.

.5 Thermowell Insertion Length:

.1 50% of pipe diameter

.6 Allowance for Insulation:

.1 Thermowell extends a minimum of 2” to allow for pipe insulation.

.7 Acceptable materials: Taylor, Weiss, Trerice

2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Dial type, 110 mm diameter, cast aluminum case and ring or phenolic with threaded reinforced black polypropylene ring, phosphor bronze tube, brass or stainless steel movement, front re-calibrator and glass or acrylic window. 13 mm NPT process connection.

.2 Dual unit Scale:

.1 kPa / PSI.

.3 Accuracy:

.1 Within 1.0% of full scale.

.4 Range:

.1 0 - 345 kPag.

.5 Accessories:

.1 Liquid filled dial

.2 Isolating stainless steel 10,000 kPag rated needle valve

.6 Acceptable materials: Taylor, Weiss, Ashcroft (Durogauge).


Part 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Contractor must be approved by the regulating authority to perform natural gas installations in the Province of British Columbia.

3.2 PIPING

.1 Obtain all construction permits from Provincial Safety Authority or local natural gas utility as required.

.2 Install in accordance with Provincial Safety Authority and local utility (AHJ).

.3 Install in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1, and CSA Z-184.

.4 For buried lines:

.1 Locate all underground lines and services prior to excavation and crossing. Acquire all crossing permits as required.

.2 Hand exposes all buried line crossings.

.3 All buried natural gas piping shall be all welded construction only. Buried piping shall be installed in accordance with CSA B149.1 requirements. All buried and or external pipe welded joints shall be coated using a thermal shrink sleeve compatible with the Yellow Jacket pipe coating.

.4 Minimum cover of 600 mm.

.5 Warning tape installed at 300 mm above pipe.

.6 Electrically tie into cathodic protection system if applicable.

.7 Bedding: Clean granular bedding, graded gravel, 10 mm (minus), MMCD type: .1 Bottom Bed thickness: 100 mm minimum .2 Top bedding thickness: 300 mm thick minimum .3 Side bedding thickness: 225 mm thick minimum to 300 mm thick max

.5 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to standards listed in 1.1.

.6 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.

.7 Slope piping down in direction of flow to low points.

.8 Install drip pockets as per natural gas piping code:

.1 At all low points in piping system.

.2 At each connection to equipment.

.3 At base of vertical risers.

.9 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage.

.10 Provide clearance for access and for maintenance.

.11 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and out.

.12 Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal.


.13 All pressure relief valves and vents to be piped to a safe outdoor location. Each individual vent on a boiler gas train to be piped to a common high pressure or low pressure vent line as required.

.14 Vent piping to be terminated outdoors in accordance with local and CSA B149.1 code regulations, with the required installation clearances specified by codes and authority having jurisdiction.

.15 Paint all above ground natural gas piping, (yellow), according to code requirements.

.16 Tie in to Utility gas metering station flange shall be electrically isolated with an insulating kit.

.17 Provide flexible connector (maximum 300 mm in length) for final connection to natural gas engine fuel connection if applicable.

3.3 PRESSURE REGULATING STATION

.1 Install in accordance with CSA Natural Gas Installation Code CSA B-149.1, and CSA 149.3, requirements for a “Wide Open Monitoring System” configuration as a means of downstream overpressure protection.

.2 All sensing lines to be A304 stainless steel tube construction with minimum 0.9 mm wall thickness.

.3 All isolating valves for sensing lines to be stainless steel needle valves.

.4 All vent lines to be run up to and terminated outside above the roof. Terminations outside through a wall are not permitted.

.5 Provide sufficient pipe spool length to allow for the future replacement of the current PRV’s with 6” NPS regulators of the same configuration.

3.4 VALVES

.1 Install seismic isolation valves in accordance with manufacturers instruction at locations indicated on flowsheet or layout drawings.

.2 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Engineer.

.3 Install valves at all branch take-offs to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated.

.4 No valves, screwed connections, or flanged connections are permitted to be buried.

3.5 TESTING

.1 Test pressure of all natural gas piping shall be 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall be held for a minimum duration of 180 minutes, or as required by authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Natural gas piping design pressure is identified on drawings.

.3 Test above ground piping system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 requirements. Check for leaks with a water soap solution while the above ground piping is under pressure.


.4 Do not expose equipment, regulators, flexible connectors, or relief valves to test pressures.

.5 Test below ground piping system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 requirements. Monitor pressure over the duration of test.

.6 Provide documentation of test as required by Provincial Safety Authority or local utility.

.7 Attach approved test certificate to piping after acceptance by Provincial SafetyAuthority or local utility and send one (1) copy to Owner.

3.6 PURGING

.1 Purge test media after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1. Dry pipe internals if required. Perform final purge with nitrogen and isolate natural gas piping system under nitrogen blanket.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 20 13 252 Buildout Process Hot Water Piping Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 05 17 Pipe Welding

.3 Section 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework

.4 Section 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

.5 Section 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges – Piping Systems

.6 Section 23 05 23.03 Valves – Steel

.7 Section 23 05 23.05 Butterfly Valves

.8 Section 23 05 29 Hangers & Supports for Piping and Equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

.1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-2013, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).

.2 ASME B31.1-2014, Power Piping.

.3 ASME B31.9-2014, Building Services Piping.


.1 ASTM A47, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

.2 ASTM A53/A53M-12, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

.3 ASTM A105/A105M-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications.

.4 ASTM A106/A106M-14, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service.

.5 ASTM A108, Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

.6 ASTME A126, Standard Specification for Gray iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.

.7 ASTM A181/A181M-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping.

.8 ASTM A193/A193M-14a, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.

.9 ASTM A194/A194M-14a, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

.10 ASTM A213, Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes

.11 ASTM A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.


.12 ASTM A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

.13 ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

.14 ASTM A278M, Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures Up To 350 °C.

.15 ASTM A307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.16 ASTM A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

.17 ASTM B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

.18 B16, Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines.

.19 B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

.20 B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

.21 B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.22 B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

.23 D2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound ‘Fiberglass’ (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. NPS 1” to 16”

.24 D3567 Standard Specification for Determining Dimensions of ‘Fiberglass’ Pipe and Fittings.

.25 D3839 Standard Specification for Underground Installation of ‘Fiberglass’ Pipe.

.26 D4024 Standard Specification for Machine Made ‘Fiberglass’ Flanges. Applicable from ½” through 24” ANSI B16.5 150 lb. bolt circle flanges.

.27 D5677 Standard Specification for Molded and Filament-Wound Fittings and Flanges.

.3 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / ASME

.1 B.16.1 (1998) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings (Class 125, 250).

.2 B16.4 (1994) Grey Iron Threaded Fittings (Classes 125 and 250).

.3 B16.3-98 (1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

.4 B16.5 (1996) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

.5 B16.9 (1993) Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings.

.6 B16.11 (1996) Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.

.7 B16.8 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.8 B16.22 (1995) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.9 B16.34 (2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

.10 B16.39-86 (1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions Classes 150, 250 and 300.

.11 B1.20.1- 83 (1992), Pipe Threads, General Purpose, inch.

.12 B31.5 (1992) Refrigerant Piping. (15-94 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration).

.13 B34-92 Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants.

.14 B31.1- 2010, Power Piping.



.1 CAN/CGSB-14.5, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type.

.2 CSA B51, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.


.1 CSA B51-14, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code.






.8 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries Inc. (MSS)

.1 SP-58-1993, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

.2 SP-69-1996 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

.3 SP-67-1995 Butterfly Valves.

.4 SP-70-1998 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.5 SP-71-1997 Grey Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded ends.

.6 SP-72-1999 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service.

.7 SP-80-1997 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

.8 SP-85-1994 Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.


.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA).


.1 Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for equipment and systems and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .1 Provide two copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section

01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements and 01 35 43 - Environmental Procedures.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .1 Include in shop drawings: plans, elevations, sections, piping isometrics,

construction details, where not specifically indicated, of following. .1 Prefabricated sections with field connection points. .2 Branch connections. .3 Equipment connections.


.4 Pipe supports.

.5 Expansion joints, anchors and guides. Include relevant engineering data.

.6 Include relevant engineering data.

.7 Expansion loops, anchors and guides.

.8 Flash tanks.

.9 Vents, drains.

.10 Pipeline identification data. .2 Shop drawings for alternative systems for expansion loops as approved

by Departmental Representative before fabrication, to include. .1 Calculations based on temperature between -18 degrees C and

system operating temperature plus 25%.

.4 Submit for approval and registration (P number assigned plans and specifications of high pressure (HP) steam to authorities having jurisdiction before beginning Work, where required, TSSA fee for drawing and specification review to be covered by Owner’s Representative.


.1 Provide Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, record drawings including:

.1 Information relating to elevations, inverts and location of piping, branches, anchors, expansion joints, loops.

.2 Certified drawings of Valves, and Valve dimensional and technical data, including weights.

.3 Certified drawings of all piping specialty items installed, (i.e. strainers, traps, separators, etc.) giving dimensional and technical data, including weights

.4 Updated P&ID locating all valves, and piping specialties.

.5 Details of permanent instrumentation.

.6 Details of permanent provisions for temporary instrumentation.

.7 Access points.

.8 Details of pipe grades, vents, drip points.

.9 Drainage provisions at low points.



.2 Extra Materials/Spare Parts:

.1 Furnish following spare parts: .1 Valve seats: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum: one. .2 Balls: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum: one. .3 O-Rings: one for every twenty of each type and size supplied. Minimum:

two.


.4 Valve handles: two of each size.

.5 Flange gaskets: one for every ten flanged joints. Minimum two.

.6 Strainer meshes: one for every five strainers of each size. Minimum: one

.7 Strainer gasket: one for every strainer of each size. Minimum: one

.3 Tools:

.1 Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment.

.2 Include following: .1 Lubricant gun for expansion joints.


.1 Regulatory Requirements: ensure Work is performed in compliance with applicable Ontario Provincial regulations.

.2 Inspections:

.1 Inspect new piping prior to hydrostatic test by authority having jurisdiction. Where Province has approved drawings, TSSA certified boiler inspector to inspect installation.

.2 Departmental Representative to contact TSSA for requirements for inspection and testing of system modifications, design changes or repairs done in house.

.3 Costs for inspection to be covered by Contractor.




.1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.


1.8 WELDING

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 17 – Pipe Welding.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 CRN registration / approvals required for all devices and components installed in process hot water piping system.

.2 Process Hot Water; All associated piping, fittings, valves, strainers, and other equipment in the Process hot water systems of the central heating plant to be designed and installed in accordance with the following:


.1 Design code: ASME B-31.1 Power Piping

.2 Service: Pressurized Hot Water

.3 Design Pressure: 1600 kPag (232 psig)

.4 Design Temperature: 100 °C (212 °F)

.3 For glycol systems, refer to Section 23 21 13.02 – Hydronic Systems: Steel.

.4 For domestic hot water systems, refer to Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.

.5 For Chilled Water; refer to Section 23 21 15 – Chilled Water Piping

.6 Boiler relief piping shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Design pressure for relief piping: 1100 kPag at 100 °C.

.7 Valves to be repackable under full line pressure while fully open.

.8 The Contractor is responsible for providing Mill Test Certificates as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Manufacturers name or trademark shall appear on all fittings and on each length of pressure pipe.

.9 The Contractor’s quality control manual shall provide procedure to identify material pieces which have been cut from properly identified pipe. The procedure shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

.10 Welding materials and labour must conform to ASME Code and the appropriate provincial governing body. Welders shall be fully qualified and licensed by Provincial Authorities. Pressure welders shall be used for contained pressure in excess of 100 kPa (14.5 PSI).

.11 Refer to the following specifications for natural gas piping: Section 23 11 23 - Natural gas

.12 Refer to the following specifications for building heating (hydronic) piping: Section 23 21 13 - Building Secondary Piping

.13 Refer to the building services drawings and flowsheets for the design conditions and specifications for the balance of building services piping.

2.2 PROCESS PIPING

.1 Hot Water Piping – Carbon Steel:

.1 To ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

.2 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2: Schedule 80, seamless, or plain ends.

.3 NPS 2 to 10: Schedule 40, ERW or Seamless, beveled ends.

.4 NPS 12 and over: Standard Schedule, ERW or Seamless, beveled ends.

.5 Refer to branch connection table in Part 3, Item 3.3.9.

.2 Hot Water Piping – Stainless Steel:

.1 For process makeup water line only.

.2 Material: ASTM A213 TP 304.

.3 Up to and including NPS 2: .1 Sch. 40, seamless, beveled ends.

.4 Refer to branch connection table in Part 3, Item 3.3.9.


.3 Fittings:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1: Class 3000, 20 MPa, forged steel screwed ends, to ASTM A105/A105M.

.2 NPS 1-½ to and including NPS 2: Class 3000, forged socket weld ends, dimensions to ASME B16.11, to ASTM A105 for carbon steel piping; TP304 for stainless piping.

.3 NPS 2-1/2 to 12: Schedule 40, bevel ends, to ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB.

.4 NPS 14 and over: 9.6 mm wall thickness, bevel ends, to ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB.

.5 Elbows shall be long radius only, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

.4 Couplings, caps, plugs:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 2: Class 3000, 20 MPa, screwed ends, to ASTM A105. Dimensions per ANSI B16.11.

.5 Nipples for drains, vents, pressure gauges, similar items:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2: Schedule 80, screwed, to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

.6 Unions:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2: Class 3000, socket welded ends, forged steel, steel-to-steel ground joint, to ASTM A105/A105M, dimensions to MSS-SP-83.

.7 Flanges:

.1 Provide ASTM A105 carbon steel flanges and or ANSI 300# rated flanges as required to match class and type of flanges supplied with equipment / valves.

.2 Flat faced flanges shall not be used to mate to raised face flanges.

.3 Class 150: .1 NPS 1/2 to 2: raised face, socket welded ends, to ASTM A105/A105M

for carbon steel piping; TP304 for stainless piping. .2 NPS 2-1/2 and over: raised face, weld neck, bored to suit pipe, to ASTM

A105/A105M, dimensions to ANSI B16.5. .4 Class 300:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 2: raised face, socket welded ends, bored to match pipe, to ASTM A105/A105M for carbon steel piping, TP304 for stainless piping.

.2 NPS 2-1/2 and over: raised face, weld neck, bored to suit pipe, to ASTM A105/A105M.

.8 Studs, bolts and nuts:

.1 Flange to Flange: All sizes; .1 Alloy steel studs, semi-finished with two heavy hex nuts, .2 Material: ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts.

.2 Lug Body Valves: All Sizes; .1 Alloy steel stud with hex head cap, semi-finished (two heavy hex bolts as

per Manufacturer’s written instructions). .2 Material to ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts.


.9 Gaskets:

.1 Raised Face Flanges (RF)/Flat Faced Flanges (FF): .1 Nitrile-binded with aramid & glass fibre, non-asbestos standard with

NST non-stick coating for ease of removal. .2 1.6 mm (1/16”) thick, ringed, rated for service, temperature and pressure of fluid. .3 Max Allowable Creep Relaxation: 21%. .4 Hot Compression Test-Maximum Allowable Thickness Loss: 27% .5 Dimensions: to ANSI B16.21 .6 Installation: to Manufacturer’s recommendation for bolt strength and seat stress. .7 Acceptable materials:

.1 Flexitallic SF 3300 to suit RF/FF flange type.

.2 Klingersil C-4401 to suit RF/FF flange type.

.3 Garlock 5500/3760 to suit RF/FF flange type.

.10 Ball Valves:

.1 NPS 2 to NPS 20: .1 Design Pressure Class PN 25, butt welded ends (match pipe wall

thickness), single piece steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seat, reduced bore, with CRN Registration

.2 Acceptable materials: .1 Bohmer - Armour Valve .2 Broen Ballomax - Arinah Services .3 NO OTHER ALTERNATIVES.

.3 These valves are intended for use in the main process hot water piping only.

.4 Valve stems to be extended length option to allow clearance for insulation.

.5 Manual lever actuator with memory stop for sizes NPS 6 and below,

.6 Weather proof worm gear operator to be provided for valve sizes NPS 8 and above;

.7 Any valves located in excess of 2.44 m (8 ft.) above floor to be provided with chain wheel and chain.

.2 NPS 1 to NPS 1-1/2 .1 Socket Welded, 1,500 psig WOG, ball valve, stainless steel body,

stainless steel ball, RPTFE seats and seals, blow-out proof steam design, lever handle,

.2 Acceptable Material: M.A. Stewart, Apollo Valve

.11 Check Valves:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2: .1 Class 200 Y pattern, threaded ends bronze body to ASTM B61,

regrindable seat, 200 psig Steam Rated, to MSS SP-80, with CRN Registration


.2 Acceptable Material: Crane, Toyo, Kitz, .2 NPS 2-½ to NPS 24:

.1 ANSI Class 150 RF flanges, Silent globe style check, guided, spring assisted, WCB carbon steel body, stainless steel trim, alloy steel disc.

.2 Design pressure: 1965 kPag at 38 C.

.3 Acceptable Material: Mueller, DFT

.12 Globe Valves:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2: .1 Globe Valves Class 800 forged steel body, socket weld ends, or butt

weld ends, with CRN Registration. .2 Acceptable Material: Beric, Bonney Forge, Jenkins, Tour & Andersson

STAD .2 NPS 2-½ and over:

.1 Globe valves, ANSI Class 150; cast steel body, raised face flanged ends.

.2 Design pressure: 1965 kPag at 38 C.

.3 Acceptable Material: Kitz, Beric, Bonney Forge, Velan

.13 Butterfly Valves - NPS 10 to NPS 18:

.1 Butterfly valves to be high performance carbon steel lug body, ANSI Class 150#/300# to suit, Stainless steel stem and disc, TFE/Metal seat and seal. Designed for bi-directional bubble tight shut-off. With CRN Registration

.2 Provide with gear operator.

.3 Any valves located in excess of 2.44 m (8 ft.) above floor to be provided with chain wheel and chain.

.4 Valves shall meet the following standards; .1 ANSI B16.34, Valves flanged and Butt welded .2 API 609, Butterfly Valves, Lug type and wafer type .3 MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves .4 MSS SP-61, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves

.5 Acceptable Material: .1 Fisher .2 Bray Series 41 .3 WKM

.14 Hot Water Motorized Modulating Butterfly Control Valves - NPS 10 to NPS 18:

.1 Butterfly valves to be high performance carbon steel lug body, ANSI Class 150# pressure rating, Stainless steel stem and disc, TFE/Metal seat and seal. Designed for bi-directional bubble tight shut-off.

.2 Motorized Actuator: 120 V electric operated, equipped with 4-20 ma positioner, valve closed indication limit switch, valve position visual indication, manual override hand wheel operator, and Nema 4 enclosure. Actuator to be provided by Valve supplier.


.3 Actuator/Valve travel time: 20 seconds from full open to full closed, or full closed to full open.

.4 Valves shall meet the following standards; .1 ANSI B16.34, Valves flanged and Butt welded .2 API 609, Butterfly Valves, Lug type and wafer type .3 MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves .4 MSS SP-61, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves .5 Acceptable Material:

.1 Bray Series 41, WKM, Fisher

.15 Drain and Air Vent valves:

.1 NPS ½ to 1: .1 Threaded, 2000 psig WOG, ball valve, cold non-shock, 150 psig

saturated steam carbon steel body, RTFE seats and seals, blow-out proof steam design, lever handle. CRN Required.

.2 Acceptable material: Apollo, MA Stewart .2 Automatic float style vent valves shall be used as indicated on drawings. An

upstream manual valve shall be provided for isolation.

.16 Pressure Safety Relief Valves:

.1 Thermal Relief Hot Water Service: ASME Section VIII approved, 13 mm FNPT x 25 mm FNPT; open lever with gag, Carbon steel body, stainless steel spring, 1,600 kPag pressure rating. Orifice area is ASME “C” - 43 square millimeters minimum.

.2 CRN Required.

.3 Acceptable Material: Farris, Curtiss Wright, Apollo

.17 Manual Balancing Valves:

.1 Up to and including NPS 12: .1 Hydronic Balancing Valve Class 150, 250 psi rated, ductile iron body,

flanged ends, c/w 16 turn calibrated settings and hidden memory tamperproof hand wheel, self sealing test ports for insertion probes.

.2 CRN Required.

.3 Acceptable Material for Valve: .1 ITT .2 Armstrong Circuit Setter.

.18 Vacuum Breaker:

.1 NPS ½: .1 Threaded; all stainless steel construction for body, ball check, cap, seat,

gasket. CRN Required. .2 Rating: 1600 kPag at 100 °C. .3 Acceptable material: Spirax Sarco

.19 Y-Strainers:


.1 NPS 2 and smaller: .1 Cast steel, Y-pattern, socket weld ends, stainless steel perforated screen

with 20 mesh (0.7 mm) liner, ANSI Class 150 for 1,600 kPa at 100 °C. With CRN Registration.

.2 NPS 2-½ and larger: .1 Cast steel body, welded ends to match pipe, Y-pattern, complete with

valved drain connection, stainless steel perforated screen with 20 mesh (0.7 mm) line. Class 150 for 1,600 kPa and 100 °C. With CRN Registration.

.3 Provide 1 spare gasket for each strainer for maintenance, and spare mesh liner, 1 for every 5 strainers.

.4 Acceptable Material: Islip Flow Controls, Spirax Sarco, Mueller,

.20 Startup Strainers

.1 Temporary, removable cone/basket style.

.2 Material: Stainless Steel. 3.96 mm perforation size standard. Use 0.7 mm mesh with perforation in front of plate exchangers.

.21 Stationary Equipment Flexible Connections:

.1 Flexible Metal Connector - Stainless Steel Hose & Braid, CRN required.

.2 Overall length: 450 mm minimum. Refer to drawings, revise from standard length as required.

.3 Tie Rods: Not Applicable

.4 Maximum operating pressure: 1,600 kPa (232 psig)

.5 Maximum operating temperature: 121 °C (250 °F)

.6 Factory tested to 1.5 times maximum working pressure. Furnish test certificates.

.7 Bellows and Braid: A316 stainless steel;

.8 End Connections: Carbon steel; Match equipment flange or provide flanged transition spools as needed to mate to equipment connections.

.9 Standard of Acceptance; .1 Hyspan .2 Flexonics/Pathway BSFS .3 Or approved equivalent

.22 Rotating Equipment Flexible Connections:

.1 Bellows style; minimum 3 ply laminated. CRN required.

.2 Overall length: Varies; Minimum 150 mm.

.3 Convolutions: 6 minimum

.4 Tie Rods with sleeve and locknuts: Required to restrain pressure thrust; minimum quantity = 3 rods.



.7 Non Concurrent Movements: .1 Compression: 13 mm


.2 Extension: 6 mm

.3 Lateral Offset: 3.3 mm .8 Factory tested to 1.5 times maximum working pressure. Furnish test certificates. .9 Bellows: 304 stainless steel; .10 End Connections: 300# ANSI or 150# ANSI Carbon steel flanged to match

equipment flanges or provide flanged transition spools as needed to mate to equipment connections.

.11 Standard of Acceptance; .1 Hyspan 5501R .2 Or approved equivalent

.23 Braided Hose:

.1 Application: Boiler relief valve discharge. CRN required.

.2 Overall length: 300mm.

.3 Diameter: Match relief valve outlet size as a minimum.

.4 Connections: as required to match relief valve outlet and piping.

.5 Material: Stainless steel



.8 Factory tested to 1.1/2 time’s maximum design pressure.

.9 Standard of Acceptance; .1 Flexonics Series 100 Hose .2 Or approved equivalent

.24 Spectacle Blinds:

.1 Application: Boiler water side isolation

.2 Type: Swing in place blinding plate.

.3 Construction: Carbons steel with bolting pattern to match ANSI Flange

.4 Design Rating: ANSI Class 150 (1965 kPag at 38C)

.25 Automatic Drain Trap for Liquids:

.1 Application: Boiler flue gas condensate drain. CRN Required.

.2 Construction: 316 stainless steel body, stainless steel internals.

.3 Connection Size: 20 mm NPT

.4 Standard of Acceptance: .1 Spirax Sarco .2 Armstrong

.26 Control valves:

.1 As specified in Section 25 30 02 – EMCS: Field Control Devices

.27 Energy Meters

.1 As specified in Section 25 30 02 – EMCS: Field Control Devices


.28 Drain valves: NPS ½ to 1:

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 Valves – Cast Steel.

.29 Air Vent valves:

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 Automatic float style vent valves shall be used as indicated on drawings. An upstream manual valve shall be provided for isolation.

.30 Thermometer wells:

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 19.01 – Thermometers and Pressure Gauges – Piping Systems.

.2 Type 304 stainless steel; Lagging type.

.31 Needle Valves:


.32 Pressure Independent Flow Control Valves:

.1 Automatic flow control valve cartridges shall automatically control flow rates with ±5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential range of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. Four operating pressure ranges shall be available with the minimum range requiring less than 21 kPa (3 PSI) differential to actuate the mechanism.

.2 Valve internal control mechanism shall consist of a stainless steel one-piece cartridge with segmented port design and full travel linear coil spring.

.3 Manufacturer shall be able to provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying accuracy of performance.

.4 All flow control valve cartridges shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years from date of sale.

.5 Class 150 Flange End Valves shall consist of steel pipe with flange ends, and stainless steel flow control cartridge assembly; 1586 kPag/149°C (230PSIG/300ºF) shall be supplied with dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance for all sizes; shall have flange ends compatible with ANSI B16.5, latest edition. 150 lb. Steel flanges; shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow, shall have body tag to indicate model number and flow rate. .1 Select cartridge for flow rate and pressure range as indicated on the

drawings.

2.3 HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (104 TO 1100 KPA) AND PUMPED CONDENSATE RETURN UP TO 860 KPA

.1 Piping:

.1 To ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B or ASTM A106/A106M.

.2 Steam: .1 NPS 1/2 to 2-1/2: Schedule 80, seamless, plain or beveled ends. .2 NPS 3 and over: Schedule 40, seamless, beveled ends.


.3 Pumped condensate return: .1 Up to and including NPS 2: Schedule 80, threaded. .2 NPS 3 and over: Schedule 80, seamless, beveled ends.

.4 Blowdown, Trap Discharge, and Drains Piping: .1 Up to and including NPS 1: Schedule 160, S/B NPT (threaded). .2 NPS 1-1/2 to 3: Schedule 80, ERW or seamless, plain or beveled ends. .3 NPS 4 and over: Schedule 40, ERW or Seamless, beveled ends.

.5 Steam Vent Piping: .1 .1 Applies to main vent lines leading to roof from Deaerator, Blowdown .2 tank and Condensate tank only. .3 .2 Material: ASTM A304 stainless steel. .4 .3 All Pipe Diameters: Sched 10 wall thickness, plain or beveled ends.

.2 Fittings:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 3: Class 3000, 20 MPa, forged steel, socket weld ends, to ASTM A105/A105M, dimensions to B16.11.

.2 NPS 4 and over: Schedule 40, forged steel, bevel ends, to ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB.

.3 Fittings for pumped condensate return:

.1 Schedule 80, ERW, plain ends, to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

.4 Couplings, caps, plugs:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 2: Class 3000, screwed, to ASTM A105/A105M.

.5 Nipples for drains, vents, pressure gauges, similar items:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1: Schedule 80, seamless, screwed, to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade A.

.6 Unions:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1: Class 3000, screwed ends, steel-to-steel ground joints to ASTM A105/A105M.

.7 Flanges:

.1 For steam: ANSI Class 300.

.2 For condensate: ANSI Class 150

.3 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2: raised faced welded, to ASTM A105/A105M.

.4 NPS 2 and over: raised faced weld neck, bored to suit pipe, to ASTM A105/A105M.

.5 Flange Face Compatibility: Flat faced weld neck flanges shall be used to mate to equipment or valves equipped with flat faced flanged connections. Raised face flanges mated to flat faced flanges are not acceptable.

.8 Studs, bolts and nuts:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2: carbon steel studs, semi-finished with heavy hex nuts, Material: ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts.


.9 NPS 2-1/2 and over: carbon steel studs, carbon steel, semi-finished with heavy hex nuts, to ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts. Gaskets:

.1 Raised Face Flanges (RF)/Flat Faced Flanges (FF): Nitrile-binded with aramid & fibreglass fibre, non-asbestos standard with NST non-stick coating for ease of removal. For steam service at 1100 kPag saturated.

.2 1.6 mm (1/16”) thick, ringed, rated for service, temperature and pressure of fluid.

.3 Max Allowable Creep Relaxation: 20%, Hot Compression Test- Maximum Allowable Thickness Loss: 19% at 300 C.

.4 Dimensions: to ANSI B16.21

.5 Installation: to Manufacturer’s recommendation for bolt strength and seat stress.

.10 Gate Valves for Steam, NPS 2-1/2 and Over

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 See drawings for locations, quantity, and size.

.11 Gate Valves for Steam, NPS 2 and smaller


.2 See drawings for locations, quantity, and size.

.12 Gate valves for pumped condensate return:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 NPS 2 and over: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.13 Condensate Isolation Ball Valves NPS 1/2 to 2:


.14 Condensate Isolation Ball Valves NPS 3 to 12:


.2 Valves located in excess of 2.44 m (8 ft.) above floor to be provided with chain wheel.

.15 Globe valves for steam systems:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 NPS 2 and over: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.16 Valves in external bypass around gate valves, NPS 4 and over:

.1 NPS 3/4 gate as specified above.

.17 Check valves:

.1 Sizes up to NPS 2: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 Sizes NPS 3: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.18 Drain and Vent valves:

.1 NPS 1/2 to 2: As specified in Section 23 05 23.03 – Valves – Cast Steel.

.2 Automatic vents (thermostatic for steam) may be used for system start-up, although a manual valve and vent shall be located upstream for isolation once system is purged.


.19 Needle valves:


.20 Strainers for steam systems:

.1 NPS 2-1/2 to 6: ANSI Class 300 saturated steam service rated, Carbon steel body, Flanged Ends, Y-pattern, complete with valved drain connection, stainless steel perforated screen with 1.1 mm perf. Screen area shall be minimum three times area of inlet pipe.

.2 NPS 2 and smaller : Cast carbon steel, Y-pattern, threaded or socket weld ends, stainless steel perforated screen with 1.1 mm perf. 1015 psig sat. steam service.

.3 Startup: Removable cone style. Use 0.5 mm

.21 Strainer for pumped condensate systems:

.1 For steam systems but Class 150 pressure rating.

.22 Steam traps for steam main drip points:

.1 Steam trap shall be of the mechanical float type having cast steel bodies, NPT connections, and stainless steel valve heads and seats. Incorporated into the trap body shall be a stainless steel balance pressure thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 300°C operating temperature and resisting water-hammer without sustaining damage. Internals of the trap shall be completely serviceable without disturbing the piping. Trap tested in accordance to ANSI / FCI 85-1. Capacity and pressure data obtained in accordance to PTC 39.1.

2.4 ANCHORS, GUIDES, SLIDES

.1 Anchors:

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.

.2 Alignment guides:

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping .

.3 Pipe slides:


2.5 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS


.2 Provide as indicated, using distribution piping and fittings.

2.6 BASES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Conform to Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment supplemented as specified herein.

.2 Provide to details as indicated. Components and assemblies to be to MSS SP-58.


.3 Use standard components and assemblies by one manufacturer wherever possible.

.4 Submit shop drawings for approval before fabrication.

.5 Percussion type inserts not permitted.

.6 Power driven fasteners not permitted.

2.7 THERMOMETERS

.1 Thermometers;

.1 As specified in Section 23 05 19.01 – Thermometers and Pressure Gauges – Piping Systems

2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES .1 As specified in Section 23 05 19.01 – Thermometers and Pressure Gauges –

Piping Systems.

2.9 FABRICATION

.1 Do work in accordance with ASME B31.1 and CSA B51, or ASME B31.9, as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Joints:

.1 Welded throughout, except at flanged components.

.3 Carbon Steel Screwed joints:

.1 To ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

.2 Provide clean machine-cut threads.

.3 Use PTFE tape or lead-free pipe dope or paste on male threads.

.4 Branch connections:

.1 Use butt or socket-weld fittings.

.2 Mains NPS 2-1/2 and smaller: use weldolets, threadolets, or 2 MPa half couplings as reinforcements.

.3 Mains NPS 3 and larger: welded branch connections can be used.

.5 Welding:

.1 Conform to all requirements of Section 25 05 17 - Pipe Welding.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Lay out work in accordance with lines and grades as indicated.

.2 Verify lines, levels, dimensions as indicated against established benchmarks. Report discrepancies to Departmental Representative and obtain written instruction.

.3 When required by Departmental Representative, provide drawings showing relative locations of various services.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 20 13 252 Buildout Process Hot Water Piping Project No. 218225 Page 18 3.2 WELDING

.1 Perform welding in accordance with Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding supplemented as specified herein.

.2 Notwithstanding the requirements of referenced section, the following shall apply:

.1 Welding to be in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Welding to be executed by certified pipe welders.

.3 Pipe fitting to be executed by certified pipe fitters.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation to be performed by certified steam fitters.

.2 Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework, as specified herein.

.3 Maintain clearances between pipes as indicated.

.4 Maintain clearance between pipes and structures for O&M as indicated, as directed.

.5 Provide manual air vents, drains, drip legs, dirt pockets as specified and as indicated.

.6 Seal piping passing through walls as indicated.

.7 Provide for pipe movement as required and in accordance with installation instructions.

.8 Use eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to prevent accumulation of pockets of air and or to prevent the draindown of water.

.9 Weld couplings for drains into carbon steel piping to ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as indicated on the drawings.

.10 Carbon steel branch take-offs:

.11 Refer to following table for approved methods of branch connections:

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 20 13 252 Buildout Process Hot Water Piping Project No. 218225 Page 19 Branch Connection Table

Bra

nch

Size

Header Size NPS ½ ¾ 1 1-½ 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

½ T TR TR TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

¾ T TR TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

1 T TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

1-½ T TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

2 T TR TR TR/SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W

3 T TR TR TR/W TR/W W W W W W W

4 T TR TR TR/W W W W W W W

6 T TR TR TR W W W W W

8 T TR TR TR TR W W W

10 T TR TR TR TR TR W

12 T TR TR TR TR TR

14 T TR TR TR TR

16 T TR TR TR

18 T TR TR

20 T TR

24 T T - Tee TO - Threadolet W - Weldolet TR - Reducing Tee SO - Sockolet


.12 Cap open ends of piping during installation. Remove all foreign material from inside piping.

.13 Remove all burrs from piping. Clean scale and dirt, inside and out before and after assembly.

.14 Grade nominally horizontal piping at 0.5% slope generally in direction of flow.

.15 Carbon steel Flanges: Tighten bolts evenly with torque wrench. Re tighten bolts with torque wrench after system is in operation.

.16 Revisions to routing/location of piping require approval of Consultant.

.17 Reducers at pump suction connections to be eccentric with flat on top.

.18 Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal. This would include removable flanged spool sections as required.

.19 Manual Air Vents.

.1 Install at high points in piping systems and elsewhere as indicated.

.2 To consist of full size tee, pipe extension and accumulator, cap and shut off valve, discharge pipe to floor drains with visible termination.

.20 Butterfly valves: install between weld-neck flanges.

.21 Drain valves.

.1 Install at low points in piping systems, at bottom of risers, at equipment, at section isolating valves and elsewhere as required.

.2 Pipe drain valves discharge separately to above floor drain. Discharge to be visible.

.3 Weld couplings for drains into piping to ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as indicated on the drawings.

.4 Check operation after system is in use and under full pressure.

.22 Seal piping passing through walls with approved firestopping compatible with surface temperature of pipe or insulation by others in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping.

.23 Provide for pipe movement as indicated and in accordance with expansion joint manufacturer's installation instructions.

.24 Cap open ends of piping during installation. Remove foreign material from inside piping.

.25 Grade nominally horizontal piping as indicated.

.26 Flanges: tighten bolts evenly with torque wrench.

.27 Flexible Connectors / Expansion Joints

.1 Install as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Remove expansion joints from piping before pressure testing. Do not expose expansion joints to test pressures.

.3 Bellows units must not be subjected to torsional forces.

.4 Reinstall bellows after hydrotesting. Remove shipping tie rods after completion of satisfactory pressure testing of piping system.


.28 Anchors and Guides:

.1 Locate anchors as required and shown.

.2 Align piping at guides so as to avoid damage by movement of piping against fixed structures.

.3 Guide expansion joints as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 COLD SPRINGING

.1 Except where cold springing is indicated or specified, do not force pipes into position.

3.5 PIPE SUPPORTS

.1 In accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment, supplemented as specified herein.

.2 Install to manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Adjust supports, hangers, and springs, with system at operating temperature.

.4 Install expansion loops and supports as indicated and required to maintain venting and/or drainage.

3.6 VALVES

.1 Install isolating valves at all branch take-offs, at each piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Install check valves as indicated for flow.

.4 Install in accessible locations with stem horizontal or above. Gate valve stems shall not be oriented horizontally in horizontal lines.

.5 Screwed and flanged valves to be accessible for removal or maintenance without removing adjacent piping.

.6 Welding to valves must be done in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations in order to prevent body distortion and to maintain tight shutoff characteristics of the valve.

3.7 STRAINERS

.1 Install in locations to allow easy access for removal of screen.

.2 Provide Drain Ball Valve and piping to a point 400 mm from a floor drain. The pipe end shall be provided with a threaded forged steel cap.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF THERMOWELLS

.1 In general, to be installed in elbows.

.1 Minimize turbulence and resistance to flow.

.2 Install in direction of flow.

.3 Full length of thermowell to be in the fluid being measured.


.4 Increase size of piping to ensure velocity of fluid at thermowell is equal to flow rate in adjacent piping.

.2 Refer to drawings for details.


.1 Energy Metering:

.1 Primary measuring elements on steam piping shall not be used. Refer to Section 25 30 02 – EMCS: Field Control Devices for energy meter installation on the secondary heating piping and primary cooling piping.

.2 Inspections:

.1 Leave joints in piping systems uncovered until tests are completed and system inspected as directed by Consultant.

.2 All testing shall be witnessed by the Departmental Representative.

.3 Radiographic inspections: .1 Refer to Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding for radiographic inspection

requirements. .2 If joints on 10% radiographic test fail, radiograph joints performed by

welder whose joint failed. .3 Radiograph repaired joints to ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as

indicated on the drawings. .4 Perform Wet magnetic particle tests on welded slip-on flanges. .5 Submit results of radiographs, together with copy of welder's licence and

description of procedures used, to inspector of insurance company under contract to PWGSC.

.4 Departmental Representative to inspect new piping prior to hydrostatic pressure tests for compliance with approved drawings and specifications.

.5 Where Province has approved the drawings, TSSA certified boiler inspector to inspect installation.

.6 Obtain from Departmental Representative requirements for inspection and testing of system modifications, design changes and repairs performed in-house.

.7 Pay costs for inspections.

.3 Hydrostatic Pressure Tests:

.1 Pressure test all piping after installation and before painting, insulating, or concealing in any way, in accordance with Section 23 05 01 – Common Work Results for HVAC.

3.10 PAINTING

.1 Paint hangers, supports, exposed steelwork with two coats of rust inhibitive primer after construction and prior to beginning of insulation in accordance with Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 20 13 252 Buildout Process Hot Water Piping Project No. 218225 Page 23 3.11 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

.1 Flush and clean in accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

3.12 SYSTEM START-UP - GENERAL

.1 Start-up systems in accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

.2 Start-up systems after written approval of installation from Departmental Representative.

.3 Provide 3days written notice to Departmental Representative and Consultant of intention to start-up, and commission systems.

.4 Timing: after:

.1 Cleaning is completed.

.2 Pressure tests are completed.

.3 Joints radiographed as specified.

.4 Water treatment system has been commissioned.

.5 Painting of supports, steelwork to be completed before heat is applied to system.


3.13 SYSTEM START-UP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

.1 Start-up hydronic system in accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

3.14 SYSTEM START-UP STEAM SYSTEMS

.1 Start-up steam system in accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

3.15 STARTUP SCREENS

.1 Remove and clean following flushing and commissioning.

.2 Reinstall for normal operation (to be removed in the future by operator).

3.16 COMMISSIONING

.1 Contractor to provide input into commissioning plan.

.2 Provide 3 days written notice to Consultant of intention to start up, test and adjust.

.3 Review commissioning plan and requirements with Consultant.

.4 Start up systems only after written approval of installation from Consultant.

.5 Instrumentation: verify accuracy of thermometers and pressure gauges by comparison with calibrated test instruments.

.6 Full scale tests: upon completion, conduct full scale tests at maximum design flow rates, operating temperatures and pressures for continuous consecutive period of 48 hours to demonstrate compliance with design requirements.


.7 If steam system is designed to go off-line frequently, (producing excessive quantities of condensate) verify adequacy of condensate removal systems.

.8 Reports: in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Reports, supplemented as specified herein.

.9 Training:

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: Training of O&M Personnel, supplemented as specified herein.

3.17 IDENTIFICATION

.1 In accordance with Section 23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification, supplemented as specified herein.

.2 In addition, identify piping at building entry.

3.18 DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Operate at design temperatures, pressures, flow rates for consecutive period of 48 hours to demonstrate compliance with design criteria and design intents.

.2 Demonstrations also to show completeness of O&M personnel training.

3.19 CERTIFICATES

.1 Obtain data form for new pressure vessels, including heat exchangers, tanks from manufacture and submit data form and fee at own expense to authority having jurisdiction for certificate for pressure vessels.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. 23 20 15 252 Buildout CHILLED WATER PIPING Project No. 218225 Page 1 of 19

1.1 GENERAL



.2 Section 23 05 17 Pipe Welding

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM, America Society for Testing and Materials

.1 A47-90 (1995) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

.2 A53- 98, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.

.3 A105/A105M-98, Carbon Steel Forgings for piping applications.

.4 A106-95, Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service.

.5 A108- 95, Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

.6 A126-95e1: Standard Specification for Gray iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.

.7 A181/A181M- 95b, Carbon Steel Forgings for General-Purpose Piping.

.8 A183-98: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.

.9 A193/A193M- 98a, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.

.10 A194/A194M- 98b, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High Temperature Service.

.11 A213-13, Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes

.12 A216/A216M-93 1998, Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.

.13 A234/A234M- 97, Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature services.

.14 A276-98 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

.15 A278M- 93e1, Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures Up To 350 °C.

.16 A307- 97, Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

.17 A536-84 (1993) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

.18 B16-92 Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines.

.19 B32-96 Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

.20 B61-93 Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

.21 B62-93 Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.22 B88-96 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.


.23 D2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound ‘Fiberglass’ (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. NPS 1” to 16”

.24 D3567 Standard Specification for Determining Dimensions of ‘Fiberglass’ Pipe and Fittings.

.25 D3839 Standard Specification for Underground Installation of ‘Fiberglass’ Pipe.

.26 D4024 Standard Specification for Machine Made ‘Fiberglass’ Flanges. Applicable from ½” through 24” ANSI B16.5 150 lb. bolt circle flanges.

.27 D5677 Standard Specification for Molded and Filament-Wound Fittings and Flanges.

.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / ASME

.1 B.16.1 (1998) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings (Class 125, 250).

.2 B16.4 (1994) Grey Iron Threaded Fittings (Classes 125 and 250).

.3 B16.3-98 (1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

.4 B16.5 (1996) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

.5 B16.9 (1993) Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings.

.6 B16.11 (1996) Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.

.7 B16.8 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.8 B16.22 (1995) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

.9 B16.34 (2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

.10 B16.39-86 (1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions Classes 150, 250 and 300.

.11 B1.20.1- 83 (1992), Pipe Threads, General Purpose, inch.

.12 B31.5 (1992) Refrigerant Piping. (15-94 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration).

.13 B34-92 Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants.

.14 B31.9- 2014, Building Services Piping.

.3 American Water Works Association(AWWA)

.1 C200, Steel Water Pipe – 6 inches and Larger.

.2 C209, Cold Applied Tape Coatings (Steel Water Pipe).

.3 C214, Tape Coating Systems (Steel Water Pipe).

.4 C217, Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings.

.5 C218, Coating the Exterior of Aboveground Steel Pipes.

.6 C504, Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves.

.7 C605, Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water.

.8 C901, Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe – ½” to 3”.

.9 C906, Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe – 4” to 63”.

.4 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries Inc. (MSS)

.1 SP-58-1993, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.


.2 SP-69-1996 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

.3 SP-67-1995 Butterfly Valves.

.4 SP-70-1998 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.5 SP-71-1997 Grey Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded ends.

.6 SP-72-1999 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service.

.7 SP-80-1997 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

.8 SP-85-1994 Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

1.4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 14.5, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self Indicating,

Commercial/Industrial Type.

1.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B52, Mechanical Refrigeration Code. .2 CSA B51, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. .3 CSA Z245.20 / Z245.21, External Fusion Bond Epoxy Coating for Steel Pipe /

External Polyethylene Coating for Pipe. .4 CSA Z245.30 Field Applied External Coating for Steel Pipeline Systems


.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.

.2 Cross-reference to contract documents.

.3 Include plans, elevations, sections and construction details (where not specifically indicated), including:

.1 Prefabricated sections with field connection points.

.2 Pipe supports.

.3 Expansion loops & joints, anchors and guides.

.4 Vents, drains

.4 Scale of plans, elevations, and sections:

.1 To be minimum 1:50.

.5 Shop drawings for alternative locations for expansion loops & joints: include calculations based on temperature between 20 °C and system operating temperature plus 25%. Obtain Consultant's approval before fabrication.


.1 Provide project specific non generic maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Provide as specified in Section 21 05 01 Common Works Mechanical.


.2 Include following:

.1 Information relating to elevations, inverts and location of piping, branches, anchors, expansion loops.

.2 Certified drawings of Valves, and Valve dimensional and technical data, including weights.

.3 Certified drawings of all piping specialty items installed, (i.e. strainers, traps, separators, etc.) giving dimensional and technical data, including weights

.4 Updated P&ID locating all valves, and piping specialties.

.5 Details of permanent instrumentation.

.6 Drainage provisions at low points and venting provision at high points.

1.9 WELDING

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding.

1.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Be responsible for shipping, delivery, unloading, verification, and storage of all materials.

.2 Handle and store in manner to ensure that all materials and coatings are not damaged.

.3 Be responsible to unloading and storage of owner supplied materials and delivery of such materials from owners storage facilities to the project site.

.4 Be responsible for preserving equipment condition while in storage, including hand turning of rotating elements at regular intervals, and all openings to be sealed against the ingress of foreign material entry.

1.11 MAINTENANCE TOOLS

.1 Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Process Chilled Water, Condenser Water, and Refrigerant Relief Systems; All piping, fittings, valves, strainers, heat exchangers, and other equipment to be designed, and installed in accordance with ASME Code for Building Services Piping, B31.9, to meet the following design conditions:

.1 Chilled Water Piping Design Press: 1379 kPa (200 psig) at 38 oC (100 oF)

.2 Condenser Piping Design Press: 1551 kPa (225 psig) at 50 oC (122 oF)

.3 Refrigerant Relief Piping Design Press: 1206 kPa (175 psig) at 38 oC (100F)

.2 The base design that this specification addresses is for a welded carbon steel piping system.

.3 The contractor is responsible for providing Mill Test Certificates as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Manufacturers name or trademark shall appear on all fittings and on each length of pressure pipe.


.4 The contractor’s quality control manual shall provide procedure to identify material pieces which have been cut from properly identified pipe. The procedure shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

.5 Welding materials and labour must confirm to ASME Code and the appropriate provincial governing body. Pressure welders shall be fully qualified and licensed by Provincial Authorities. Pressure welders shall be used for contained pressure in excess of 100 kPa (14.5 PSI).

2.2 PIPING: CHILLED WATER, CONDENSER WATER, & REFRIGERANT RELIEF

.1 Carbon Steel Piping:

.1 To ASTM A53, Grade B or API 5L Grade B.

.2 Up to and including NPS 1”: Sch. 80, seamless, plain ends.

.3 NPS 1-1/2 to 24: Standard Weight, ERW or Seamless beveled.

.4 NPS 26 and 42: Standard Weight, API 5L Grade B Double Submerged Arc Weld, beveled ends.

.2 Carbon Steel Fittings:

.1 Up to and including NPS 1-1/2”: 3000# CS socket weld or 2000# CS threaded ends, to ANSI B16.11, ASTM-A105.

.2 NPS 2 and over: Standard Weight, bevel ends, to ANSI-B16.9, ASTM A234, Grade WPB.

.3 Elbows are long radius.

.4 Caps & plugs: .1 NPS ½ to 2: Class 2000, screwed ends, Material: ASTM A105.

Dimensions per ANSI B16.11. .5 Nipples for drains, vents, pressure gauges:

.1 NPS ½ to 1: Sch. 80, screwed, to Material: ASTM A106, Grade B. .6 Unions:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2”: Class 3000, socket welded ends, forged steel, steel-to-steel ground joint, Material: ASTM A105; Dimensions: MSS-SP-83.

.3 Carbon Steel Flanges:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2”: ANSI Class 150, socket weld raised face. (Use flat face when attaching to cast iron or bronze), to ASTM A105, ANSI B16.5.

.2 NPS 2 1/2 and above: ANSI Class 150, carbon steel weld neck (bored to suit pipe) or slip on raised face. (Use flat face when attaching to cast iron or bronze), to ASTM A105.

.3 Provide A105 carbon steel ANSI Class 300#, carbon steel weld neck (bored to suit pipe) or slip on flange as necessary to match equipment or valve flange.


.4 Bolts and nuts:

.1 Flange to Flange: All sizes; carbon steel studs, semi-finished with two heavy hex nuts, Material: ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts.

.2 Lug Body Valves: All Sizes; carbon steel stud with hex head cap, semi-finished with one heavy hex nut, Material to ASTM A193 B7M studs, c/w A194 2HM nuts.

.3 Coupling Bolts and Nuts up to NPS 24”: Heat Treated, zinc-plated carbon steel, trackhead, conforming to ASTM A183 and A449.

.5 Gaskets:

.1 Raised Face Flanges (RF)/Flat Faced Flanges (FF): Nitrile-binded with aramid & glass fibre, non-asbestos standard with NST non-stick coating for ease of removal.

.2 1.6 mm (1/16”) thick, ringed, rated for service, temperature and pressure of fluid.

.3 Max Allowable Creep Relaxation: 20%, Hot Compression Test-Maximum Allowable Thickness Loss: 27%

.4 Dimensions: to ANSI B16.21

.5 Installation: to Manufacturer’s recommendation for bolt strength and seat stress.

.6 Acceptable materials: .1 Klingersil C-4401 to suit RF/FF flange type. .2 Garlock 5500/3760 to suit RF/FF flange type.

.6 Carbon steel outlets for branch connections:

.1 Refer to Table in Part 3, Item 3.3.9.

.7 Cooling Tower PVC Piping System – NOT APPLICABLE TO PROJECT

.1 To be installed only where indicated on Drawings.

.2 All PVC must be UV Stabilized.

.3 Design pressure to be 435 kPag (50psi) at 60oC (140F).

.4 Piping: .1 For NPS 10” to 16”, Schedule 80, CSA B137.3, ASTM D1784 Type 1,

Grade 1 PVC, Schedule 80 with plain ends. .2 Standard of Acceptance: IPEX Schedule 80 PVC Pipe

.5 Fittings: .1 Molded fittings equivalent material as pipe, socketed. .2 Standard of Acceptance: IPEX Schedule 80 PVC Socketed Fittings.

.6 Flanges: .1 Material equivalent to PVC piping, socketed flat faced PVC flanges. .2 Standard of Acceptance: IPEX Vanstone Flanges

.7 Gaskets: (For PVC pipe connections only) .1 Elastomeric, 3.2 mm (1/8”) thick, Hardness 50-70 Durometer A, rated

for temperature and pressure of system.


.8 Solvent Cement: .1 For NPS 10” use heavy-bodied medium-setting grey cement. Standard

of Acceptance: IPEX 711 Cement. .2 For NPS 16” use extra-heavy-bodied slow-setting grey cement. Standard

of Acceptance: IPEX 719 Cement. .9 Nuts and Bolts

.1 Refer to Item 2.2.4.2.

.8 Isolating Ball Valves

.1 Under NPS 2.5”: Threaded, 1500 psig WOG, ball valve, stainless steel body, stainless steel ball, RPTFE seats and seals, blow-out proof stem design, lever handle, .1 Acceptable Material: MAS G3

.2 Under NPS 2.5” for Insertion Flowmeter isolation/hot tap service: Threaded, 1500 psig WOG, full port ball valve, stainless steel body, stainless steel ball, RPTFE seats and seals, blow-out proof stem design, lever handle; .1 Coordinate requirements with meter supplier.

.3 NPS 2.5” to 12”: Two piece, carbon steel body, 304 stainless steel ball and stem, ANSI Class 150 RF flanged ends, TFE seats and seals, "O" ring, lever handle, 285 psig at 100 F rating. .1 Acceptable material: MAS F-150.

.9 Isolating Butterfly Valves NPS 2-1/2” to 24”:

.1 The pressure ratings indicate the maximum allowable value. All valves will meet or exceed the performance specifications and requirements of AWWA C500 and AWWA C504.

.2 Butterfly valves to be heavy duty, ductile iron body, tapped, full lug body, ANSI Class to suite pressure rating, flange locating holes that meet ANSI Class 150. Stainless steel shaft, aluminum bronze disc, TFE seat.

.3 Designed for bi-directional bubble tight shut-off at design pressure.

.4 Provide manual lever actuator with memory stop for sizes NPS 6 and below,

.5 Provide weather proof worm gear operator with handwheel for valves NPS 8 and above,

.6 Provide chain wheel operator for valves located in excess of 2.44 m (8 ft.) above floor, or if under cooling tower.

.7 Valves shall meet the following standards; .1 ANSI B16.34, Valves flanged and Butt welded .2 API 609, Butterfly Valves, Lug type and wafer type .3 MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves .4 Acceptable Material: Bray Series 31 lug body.

.10 Check Valves:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2:


.1 Class 200 Y pattern, threaded ends bronze body to ASTM B61, re-grindable seat, 200 psig Steam Rated, to MSS SP-80.

.2 Acceptable Material: .1 Kitz 19 .2 Toyo 36 .3 Crane No 36 .4 Or equivalent

.2 NPS 2-½ to NPS 24: .1 ANSI Class 125 RF flanges, Silent globe style check, guided, spring

assisted, A126 Gr B cast iron body, stainless steel trim, alloy steel disc. .2 Acceptable Material:

.1 Mueller 105MAP

.11 Manual Balancing Valves:

.1 Up to and including NPS 2”: Hydronic Balancing Valve, 1206 kPa (175 psi) rated, Ametal® brass copper alloy body, soldered or threaded ends, 4-turn digital readout handwheel for balancing and concealed memory feature with locking, tamper-proof setting, connections for portable differential pressure meter. .1 Acceptable Material for Valve: Victaulic/Tour & Andersson Series 786

and 787. .2 Up to and including NPS 12”: Hydronic Balancing Valve; 175 psi rated, ductile

iron body, flanged, c/w 16 turn calibrated settings and hidden memory tamperproof hand wheel, self sealing test ports for insertion probes. .1 Acceptable Material for Valve: Victaulic (TA Hydronics) Series 788 or

789.

.12 Motorized On / Off Control Valves - NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 24:

.1 Two way or three way as indicated on drawings.

.2 Valves Tagged: FCV-xx, FCV-xx, FCV-xx, FCV-xx

.3 Butterfly valves to be cast iron body, tapped, full lug body, ANSI Class 125 pressure rating, flange locating holes that meet ANSI Class 150. Stainless steel shaft, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat. Designed for bi-directional bubble tight shut-off at 175 psig.

.4 Motorized Actuator: modulating service, 120 V electric operated, equipped with valve closed indication dry contact limit switch, valve position visual indication, manual override handwheel operator, and enclosure heater for winter operation. Enclosure must be suitable for outdoor installation and operation. Actuator to be provided by Valve supplier.

.5 Enclosure Heaters: provide for all enclosures or panels located outside; electric powered off of main power feed to the actuator and complete with on/off heater controls.

.6 Control Panel: provide mounted on valve as needed to house transformers, relays, terminal blocks, etc., as required.


.7 Actuator/Valve travel time: 7 seconds from full open to full closed, or full closed to full open.

.8 Valves shall meet the following standards; .1 ANSI B16.34, Valves flanged and Butt welded .2 API 609, Butterfly Valves, Lug type and wafer type .3 MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves .4 MSS SP-61, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves .5 Acceptable Material: Bray Series 31.

.13 Drain and Air Vent valves:

.1 NPS ½ to 1: .1 Threaded, 2000 psig WOG, ball valve, cold non-shock, 150 psig

saturated steam carbon steel body, RTFE seats and seals, blow-out proof steam design, lever handle,.

.2 Acceptable material: .1 Apollo 72-100 .2 MAS CSCR-2

.2 Automatic float style vent valves shall be used as indicated on drawings. An upstream manual valve shall be provided for isolation.

.14 Vacuum Breaker:

.1 NPS ½: .1 Threaded; all stainless steel construction for body, ball check, cap, seat,

gasket. .2 Rating: 1600 kPag at 121 C. .3 Acceptable material:

.1 Spirax VB-21

.15 Needle Valves:

.1 NPS 3/8 to ¾: .1 Threaded, union bonnet, stainless steel ASTM-A-304 or 316 body,

needle type seating, 6,000 psig non-shock water, at 400 °F. .2 Multiple port with bleed valve .3 Acceptable Material:

.1 Century; Anderson Greenwood

.16 Basket Strainers – Condenser Water

.1 NPS 14 and larger:

.2 Flow Capacity: 261 litres per second (4,136 US gpm) per basket

.3 Unit Nominal Size: 350 mm NPS flanged connections; Same as branch pipe connection size; refer to flow schematics.


.4 Top entry style. A216 Gr.WCB cast steel body and top cover, bolted top cover, welded ends. Unit design pressure rating 1,965 kPag at 38 °C (285 psig at 100 °F), ANSI Class 150.

.5 Provide with ASME code stamp and or Canadian Registration Number (CRN) as required by provincial pressure vessel authority.

.6 Accessories: .1 Valved bottom drain connection, .2 Stainless steel (A304/A316) perforated basket with 3.96 mm

perforations. .3 Lifting davit attached to strainer body for removal of top cover if cover

exceeds 25 kg in weight. .4 Support legs

.7 Configuration as per piping layout drawings.

.8 Acceptable Materials: .1 Sureflow .2 Islip

.17 Y Strainers:

.1 NPS 2-½ and larger: .1 Cast Iron body, Flanged ends, Y-pattern, complete with valved drain

connection, stainless steel perforated screen with 20 mesh (0.7 mm). Screen area shall be minimum three times area of inlet pipe. Class 125 for 1,379/1,551 kPa (200/225 psig) and 38°C (100 °F).

.2 NPS 2 and smaller: .1 Cast steel, Y-pattern, socket weld ends, stainless steel perforated screen

with 20 mesh (0.7 mm). .3 Removable cone style with handle. .4 Material: Stainless Steel. 3.96mm perforation size standard. Use 0.7mm

perforation size in front of plate exchangers.

.18 Flexible Connectors:

.1 Elastomeric 2 Arch type expansion joint.

.2 Application: Condenser Water up to 50 C at 1035 kPag

.3 Control Rods: Minimum 3 rods required per expansion joint with rod guides.

.4 Outer Jacket; EPDM

.5 Inner Tube: EPDM

.6 Retaining rings: vendor standard.

.7 Flanged Connections: Type and bolt pattern to match equipment and or piping system connections.

.8 Operating Conditions: .1 Condenser Water: 39 °C continuous at maximum pressure of 1034 kPag.

.9 Allowable minimum movements:


.1 Lateral deflection: 50mm (2”)

.2 Axial compression: 90mm (3 ½”)

.3 Axial extension: 44mm (1 ¾”)

.4 Degrees angular: 17°

.5 Degrees torsional: 5° .10 Standard of Acceptance; Mercer Flexmore Series 450, Style 452

.19 Chiller Refrigerant Relief Valve Flexible Connector:

.1 Braided Hose

.2 Application: Chiller relief valve discharge

.3 Overall length: 300mm.

.4 Diameter: Match relief valve outlet size as a minimum.

.5 Connections: as required to match relief valve outlet and piping.

.6 Material: Stainless steel

.7 Maximum operating pressure: 1100 kPa (160 psig)

.8 Maximum operating temperature: 38 oC (100 oF)

.9 Factory tested to 1.1/2 time’s maximum design pressure.

.10 Standard Of Acceptance; Flexonics Series 100 Hose or approved equal.

2.3 ANCHORS, GUIDES SLIDES

.1 Anchors:

.1 Provide as indicated on drawings.

.2 Vapor barriers, jackets to remain uninterrupted.

.3 Standard of Acceptable: Pipe Shields Inc. for cold piping, Grinnell #437A for hot piping.

.2 Alignment guides:

.1 Provide as per manufacturers recommendations and indicated on drawings.

.2 To accommodate specified thickness of insulation,


.4 Standard of Acceptable: Pipe Shields Inc. for cold piping, Grinnell #280 c/w #438 Type 3 slide base for hot piping.

.3 Pipe slides:

.1 For longitudinal and lateral movement as indicated with carbon steel base with filled Teflon pad and 1 mm thick Type 304 stainless steel slide plate covering full face of saddle and tack-welded along sides of saddle.


.3 Standard of Acceptable: Pipe Shields Inc. for cold piping, Grinnell #280 c/w #438 Type 1 slide base for hot piping.

.4 Fiberglass specialty shears collars:


.1 Bonded to pipe with compatible resin.

.2 Use with anchors, guides and pipe riser restraints.

2.4 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, INSERTS

.1 Conform to Section 23 05 29 - Pipe hangers and Supports.

.2 Provide to details as indicated. Components and assemblies to be to MSS SP-58.

.3 Use standard components and assemblies by one manufacturer wherever possible.

.4 Submit shop drawings for approval before fabrication.

2.5 GAUGES

.1 Thermometers;

.1 Industrial, Bi-metal Dial, 125 mm size, adjustable angle, aluminum case, comes with separate 13 mm FNPTx 13mm MNPT stainless steel thermowell, Celsius/Fahrenheit scale.

.2 Accuracy: Within +/- 0.5 degrees of reading.

.3 Chilled Water Range: 0 - 20 °C.

.4 Condenser Water Range: 0 - 50 °C.

.5 Maximum 2 deg. per division.


.7 Allowance for Insulation: Thermowell extends a minimum of 3” to allow for pipe insulation.

.8 Acceptable materials: .1 Wika .2 Trerice

.2 Pressure Gauges

.1 Dial type, 110 mm diameter, cast aluminum case and ring or phenolic with threaded reinforced black polypropylene ring, phosphor bronze tube, brass or stainless steel movement, front re-calibrator and glass or acrylic window. 13 mm NPT process connection. Dual unit Scale: kPa / PSi.

.2 Accuracy: within 1.0% of full scale.

.3 Range: 0 - 1,035 kPag.

.4 Accessories: Liquid filled dial; Multi valve stainless steel isolation needle valve with valved bleed/test port; 1,206 kPag rated needle valve

.5 Acceptable materials for Gauges: .1 Wika .2 Ashcroft (Durogauge)

.6 Acceptable materials for Needle Valves: .1 Century .2 Agco


Part 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Lay out work in accordance with lines and grades as indicated.

3.2 FABRICATION OF PIPING

.1 Codes:

.1 Do all work in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.9.

.2 Joints:

.1 Above 65 mm; welded throughout, except at flanged components.

.3 Carbon steel screwed joints:

.1 To ANSI/ASME B1.20.1., taper threads only

.2 Provide clean machine-cut threads.

.3 Use Teflon tape or paste on male threads.

.4 For use up to 65mm (2-1/2").

.4 Welding:

.1 Conform to all requirements of Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

.1 Connections to equipment to be strain free. “Set Up” prior to connecting is an inspection point.

.2 Maintain clearances between pipes as indicated.

.3 Maintain clearance between pipes and structures for O&M as indicated, as directed.

.4 Provide manual air vents, drains, drip legs, dirt pockets as specified and as indicated.

.5 Seal piping passing through walls as indicated.

.6 Provide for pipe movement as required and in accordance with installation instructions.

.7 Use eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to prevent accumulation of pockets of air and or to prevent the draindown of water.

.8 Weld couplings for drains into carbon steel piping to ANSI/ASME B31.9.

.9 Carbon steel branch take-offs:

.1 Refer to following table for approved methods of branch connections:


Branch Connection Table

Bra

nch

Siz

e

Header Size

NPS ½ ¾ 1 1-½ 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

½ T TR TR TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

¾ T TR TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

1 T TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

1-½ T TR SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO SO/TO

2 T TR TR TR/SO

/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W SO/W

3 T TR TR TR/W TR/W W W W W W W

4 T TR TR TR/W W W W W W W

6 T TR TR TR W W W W W

8 T TR TR TR TR W W W

10 T TR TR TR TR TR W

12 T TR TR TR TR TR

14 T TR TR TR TR

16 T TR TR TR

18 T TR TR

20 T TR

24 T

T - Tee TO - Threadolet W - Weldolet TR - Reducing Tee SO - Sockolet


.10 Cap open ends of piping during installation. Remove all foreign material from inside piping.

.11 Remove all burrs from piping. Clean scale and dirt, inside and out before and after assembly.

.12 Grade nominally horizontal piping at 0.5% slope generally in direction of flow.

.13 Carbon steel Flanges: Tighten bolts evenly with torque wrench. Re tighten bolts with torque wrench after system is in operation.

.14 Revisions to routing/location of piping require approval of Consultant.

.15 Reducers at pump suction connections to be eccentric with flat on top.

.16 Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal. This would include removable flanged spool sections as required.

3.4 ANCHORS AND GUIDES

.1 Locate anchors as required and shown.

.2 Align piping at guides so as to avoid damage by movement of piping against fixed structures.

.3 Guide expansion joints as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 PIPE SUPPORTS:

.1 Interior Piping:

.1 Conform to all requirements of Section 23 05 29 - Pipe Hangers and Supports.

.2 Install to manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Spring hangers to remain blocked until completion of system hydrotest, after which initial free adjustments are to be made.

.4 Adjust supports, hangers, and springs, with system at operating temperature.

.2 Install expansion loops and supports as indicated and required to maintain venting and/or drainage.

.3 Painting:

.1 Paint all hangers, supports, and all exposed steelworks with two coats of rust inhibitive primer prior to commencement of insulation.

3.6 VALVES

.1 Install isolating valves at all branch take-offs, at each piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Install check valves as indicated for flow.

.4 Install in accessible locations with stem horizontal or above. Gate valve stems shall not be oriented horizontally in horizontal lines.


.5 Screwed and flanged valves to be accessible for removal or maintenance without removing adjacent piping.

.6 Welding to valves must be done in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations in order to prevent body distortion and to maintain tight shutoff characteristics of the valve.

3.7 STRAINERS

.1 Install in locations to allow easy access for removal of screen.

.2 Provide Drain Ball Valve and piping to a point 400 mm from a floor drain. The pipe end shall be provided with a threaded forged steel cap.

3.8 VALVED DRAINS

.1 Provide at the following locations:

.1 At bottom of risers.

.2 At low points in mains and branches.

.3 Elsewhere as indicated.

.2 Discharge:

.1 Provide hose adapter on drain valves where discharge piping cannot conveniently be carried to floor drains.

.3 Check operation after system is in use and under full pressure.

3.9 AIR VENTS

.1 Provide at high points and elsewhere as indicated.

.2 To consist of tee, pipe extension, shut off valve, and or auto vent discharge pipe to 400 mm above floor. The pipe end shall be provided with a threaded forged steel cap.

3.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS / EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 Install as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Remove expansion joints from piping before pressure testing. Do not expose expansion joints to test pressures.

.3 Bellows units must not be subjected to torsional forces.

.4 Reinstall bellows after hydrotesting. Remove shipping tie rods after completion of satisfactory pressure testing of piping system.

3.11 PRESSURE TESTS

.1 Pressure test all piping after installation and before painting, insulating, or concealing in any way, in accordance with Section 21 05 01 - Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 The Contractor shall submit his test procedure for review and approval to the Owners Representative a minimum of 48 hours prior to commencement of the operation.


.3 All equipment, instrumentation, expansion joints, flexible connectors, and piping specialty components must be bypassed and isolated so as not to be exposed to the pressure test.

.4 Any valves, strainers or other components whose design pressure rating is not rated to withstand the test pressure, must be removed or isolated and bypassed from the piping system prior to test.

.5 Hydrotest water shall be clean, filtered fresh or city water at 10C.

.6 The condenser piping shall be hydraulically tested at a minimum test pressure of 1,552 kPa (225 psig) for 1.5 hours without a drop in pressure. All equipment must be isolated, and vented.

.7 All other piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the design pressure for a minimum of 1.5 hrs.


.9 The contractor will prepare test certificate and be signatory to the test result. A copy to be provided to owner as part of the operations and maintenance manual.

3.12 CLEANING

.1 Flushing:

.1 The contractor shall provide equipment, labour, and materials as needed to perform the flushing and cleaning of the process piping.

.2 Contractor shall provide a flushing/cleaning procedure to the consultant one month prior to the completion of the piping installation.

.3 Primary piping shall be flushed with potable water then chemically cleaned to remove all foreign material from the inside of all piping to the consultant's approval.

.4 All equipment shall be bypassed during flushing/cleaning process and strainer screens temporarily removed.

.5 All instrumentation installed in the piping shall be removed and not be exposed to the flushing and cleaning process.

.6 Flushing velocity to be a minimum of 1.5 meters per second (4.92 ft/s).

.7 Provide flushing screen 20 mesh on flush discharge to monitor material carried by flush water.

.8 The contractor shall install and remove all temporary piping and supports to introduce and dispose of flushing water at a safe discharge.

.9 The contractor shall notify the consultant 24 hours in advance of the flushing procedure.

.10 Following the fresh water flush a chemical cleaning of the piping will be conducted based on the recommendations of the water treatment specialist engaged by the installing contractor.

.11 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the pipe, insulation, or structures from the cleaning operation.


.12 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no oil or other lubricant comes into contact with either the inside or outside walls of the pipe following cleaning.

.13 On completion of Flushing/cleaning and acceptance by Site Engineer, re-connect equipment, clean and re-install temporary and permanent strainer screens.

.14 Temporary strainer screens shall remain in place up to 6 months after startup.

.15 The contractor shall make arrangements for and bear all costs associated with water required for flushing.

.2 Drain the system after the pressure test and cleaning. Remove strainers and clean. Re-install after obtaining consultant's approval. Refill system with softened water and bleed all air from the system.

.3 The contractor is responsible for obtaining and properly disposing of all test and cleaning media.

3.13 INSPECTIONS

.1 Leave all joints in piping systems uncovered, and free from paint or insulation, until all tests are completed and system inspected and approved by Consultant.

.2 All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner or designated representative.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 53 - Identification.

.2 In addition, identify all piping at each building entry, and at Energy Transfer Stations.

3.15 COMMISSIONING

.1 Contractor to provide input into commissioning plan.

.2 Provide 3 days written notice to Consultant of intention to start up, test and adjust.

.3 Review commissioning plan and requirements with Consultant.

.4 Start up systems only after written approval of installation from Consultant.

3.16 START-UP


.2 Upon start-up, bring all mains up to temperature and pressure slowly.

.3 After system is in operation and under maximum temperatures and pressures:

.1 Tighten all bolts on flanges, using torque wrench. Repeat several times during commissioning.


.4 Anchors, guides, supports, & expansion compensators:

.1 Monitor at all times during start-up and commissioning to ensure operation as designed.

.2 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, and springs.


.3 Full scale tests

.4 Upon completion, conduct full scale tests at maximum design flow rates, operating temperatures and pressures for continuous consecutive period of 48 hour to demonstrate full compliance with design requirements.

.5 Startup Screens

.1 Remove and clean following flushing and commissioning.

.2 Reinstall for normal operation (to be removed in the future by operator).

*** End of Section ***

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 21 14 252 Buildout HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

.3 Section 23 05 19.01 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges – Piping Systems

.4 Section 23 05 23.03 Valves – Cast Steel

.5 Section 23 05 23.05 Butterfly Valves

.6 Section 23 05 29 Hangers & Supports For HVAC Piping and Equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASME

.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): .1 Section VII-2013. .2 Section VIII-2013 for Unfired Pressure Vessels.

.2 ASME B31.1-07, Power Piping.

.3 ANSI/ASME B31.9-14, Building Services Piping.


.1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

.2 ASTM A278/A278M-01(2011), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 350°C.

.3 ASTM A516/A516M-10, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate - and Lower - Temperature Service.

.4 ASTM A536-84(2009), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

.5 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.3 CSA Group

.1 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for expansion tanks, air vents, separators, valves, and strainers and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.







.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for hydronic specialties for incorporation into manual.

.3 Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manual.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements, and with manufacturer's written instructions.



.1 Store materials indoors in a dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect hydronic specialties from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Develop Construction Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return to manufacturer pallets, crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All floor mounted tanks shall be on housekeeping pads or otherwise be raised off the floor.


2.2 DIAPHRAGM TYPE EXPANSION TANKS

.1 Horizontal or Vertical, to suit installation requirements, steel pressurized diaphragm type expansion tank. ASME code rated and TSSA registered. Tank to be externally finished with factory standard finish.

.2 Capacity and size: as indicated on the drawing schedules.

.3 For water based systems: diaphragm sealed in elastomer suitable for 100 degrees C operating temperature.

.4 For glycol mixture systems: diaphragm sealed in EDPM suitable for 100 degrees C operating temperature.

.5 Working pressure: minimum 1034 kPag with ASME stamp and certification.

.6 Air precharged as indicated on the drawing schedules.

.7 Saddles for horizontal installation and base mount for vertical installation.

.8 Supports: provide supports with hold down bolts and installation templates incorporating seismic restraint systems.

.9 Removable diaphragm.

2.3 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

.1 Service: Continuous venting of air from process hot water, and building secondary piping systems.

.2 Free floating lever automatic air vent - complete with valve and seat, lever, float, welded body, 6 mm orifice, and manual isolation ball valve NPS 1 NPT.

.3 All stainless steel components, (valve and seat, lever system, float, body and cap).

.4 Design Pressure:

.1 For hot water piping: 1100 kPag at 100°C

.2 For glycol piping: 862 kPag at 100°C.

.3 For cooling water piping: 1100 kPag at 15°C.

.4 As required to meet pipe service design pressure.

2.4 PIPE LINE STRAINER

.1 NPS 2-1/2 and over:

.1 Cast iron body, Class 125, flanged, Y-pattern, stainless steel perforated screen with 30 mesh (0.5 mm) for heating and 3/64” screen for cooling.

.2 NPS 2 and smaller:

.1 Cast iron body, Y-pattern, threaded ends, stainless steel perforated screen with 30 mesh (0.5 mm) for heating and standard for cooling, 1724 kPag (250 psig) at 208°C (406 °F).

.3 Blowdown connection: up to NPS 1.


2.5 SUCTION DIFFUSER

.1 Body: cast iron with flanged connections.

.2 Strainer: with built-in, disposable 1.19 mm mesh, low pressure drop screen and NPS 1 blowdown connection.

.3 Permanent magnet particle trap.

.4 Full length straightening vanes.

.5 Pressure gauge tappings.

.6 Adjustable support leg.

2.6 GLYCOL MAKEUP ASSEMBLIES

.1 Reuse existing, if suitable.

.2 Packaged ethylene or propylene glycol, as per system type, 50% solution makeup assembly including non-pressurized fill and overflow tank with spill containment base, secondary containment to be either built in or external, booster pump, motor and starter; NEMA 4 control panel, automatic operation.

.3 Spill back brass relief valve; adjustable.

.4 Controls for package to include hand-off-auto switch for pump; start-stop pressure switch for pump; low level alarm.

.5 Pump to be provided with magnetic starter and fused disconnect.

.6 Pump Power: 120 V, 1 phase.

.7 Makeup Capacity: As per Equipment Schedule. Pressure range: 70 to 345 kPag

.8 Cut In Pressure Setpoint: to equal cut-out pressure minus 20 kPa.

.9 Cut Out Pressure Setpoint: to match associated expansion tank set operating pressure

.10 Relief Valve setpoint: 413 kPag

.11 Solution Container Volume: As Per Equipment Schedule

.12 Container Construction: Vertical cylinder, PVC.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for hydronic specialties installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.


.2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.


3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.3 GENERAL

.1 Run drain lines and blow off connections to terminate above nearest drain.

.2 Maintain adequate clearance to permit service and maintenance.

.3 Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultant's directive.

.4 Check shop drawings for conformance of tapings for ancillaries and for equipment operating weights.

3.4 STRAINERS

.1 Install in horizontal or down flow lines.

.2 Ensure clearance for removal of basket.

.3 Install ahead of each pump.

.4 Install ahead of each heat exchanger, flow meter, and as indicated.

3.5 AIR VENTS

.1 Install at high points of systems, drip vent valves for access.

.2 Install isolation ball valves on manual and automatic air vent inlets. Run discharge to nearest drain or service sink.

3.6 EXPANSION TANKS

.1 Adjust expansion tank pressure as indicated.

3.7 PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

.1 Provide proper discharge pipe restraints.

.2 For glycol service relief valves, pipe discharge to glycol makeup package tank.

.3 For relief valves in chilled water service, pipe discharge to floor as close to floor drain as possible.

3.8 SUCTION DIFFUSERS

.1 Not used.

3.9 CLEANING





.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse, and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.


END OF SECTION


252 Buildout HYDRONIC PUMPS

Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

.1 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2013, Energy Standard for Buildings Except

Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

.2 CSA Group

.1 CAN/CSA-B214-12, Installation Code for Hydronic Heating Systems.

.2 CSA C22.1-2009 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1

.3 Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC)

.4 National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA)

.1 NEMA MG 1-2014, Motors and Generators.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for

pump, circulator, and equipment and include product characteristics,

performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations indicate point of

operation, and final location in field assembly.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered and

licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2 Submit manufacturer's detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems

showing factory installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or

required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories and controllers.

.3 Certified Engineering data to include;

.1 Single pump performance and system curves, at 100% pump speed for

constant speed units and multiple speed conditions for variable speed

units.

.2 Noise generation (dB vs Hz) of the pumps and motors, which will be

limited to 80 dBa or lower.

.3 Clearances for operation and maintenance

.4 Foundation loadings (weights and unbalanced forces), and anchor bolt

arrangements

.5 VFD specifications and drawings

.6 VFD wiring connection drawings (power and control)




.7 VFD control variables communication data addresses

.8 Motor specifications

.9 Motor and pump inertia

.10 Mechanical seal drawings and data

.11 Seal flush details, if applicable

.12 Materials of construction for the pump and skid

.13 Allowable forces and moments on the pump nozzles.

.14 Recommended spare parts


.1 Construction Waste Management:

.1 As per Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management.

.2 Recycled Content:


.3 Regional Materials:




.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for hydronic

pumps for incorporation into manual.

.3 Submit two (2) copies of operation and maintenance manual.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common

Product Requirements, and with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory

packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.


.1 Store materials indoors, in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect hydronic pumps from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Develop Construction Waste Management Plan related to Work of this Section and in

accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and

Disposal.

.5 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return to manufacturer of pallets,

crates, padding, packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management

Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management

and Disposal.




1.6 POST DELIVERY SERVICES

.1 Manufacturer to provide one pre-commissioning site visit prior to start-up to certify that

the installation is acceptable to the manufacturer, one day of onsite commissioning

support, one post startup site visit during guarantee period for the system. Coordinate the

post startup visit with the Departmental Representative. The manufacturer shall carry out

the following procedures as a minimum during the post start visit;

.1 Inspect the pumps.

.2 Review operator’s comments and or concerns, and provide any recommendations

that would improve maintenance procedures.

Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Size and select components to: CAN/CSA-B214.

2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

.1 Wet rotor inline single stage maintenance free.

.2 Volute: cast bronze radially split, with screwed or flanged design suction and discharge

connections.

.3 Impeller: cast bronze.

.4 Shaft: stainless steel with bronze sleeve bearing, integral thrust collar.

.5 Seal assembly: mechanical for service to 135 degrees C.

.6 Coupling: rigid self-aligning.

.7 Motor: 120 V motor, 60 Hz, 1 phase

.8 Capacities: as indicated on the drawings schedules.

.9 Design pressure: 1034 kPa.

.10 Construction: Suitable for potable / domestic hot water service where applicable.

2.3 VERTICAL INLINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

.1 General: all iron construction, side suction side discharge pump complete with motor.

Suction and discharge flanged components.

.2 For Hot Water service: ANSI Standard Class 250 rated components with minimum

design pressure rating of 1100 kPag at 121°C.

.3 For Chilled Water service: ANSI Standard Class 250 rated components with minimum

design pressure rating of 1100 kPag at 4°C to 25°C.

.4 Pump and motor shall be mechanically split coupled and factory aligned and shall be

realigned by the Contractor after complete pipe connections finished.

.5 Volute: cast iron, with drain plug and vent cock, suction and discharge pressure gauge

tapings.




.6 Impeller: bronze type, keyed drive with locking nut or screw. Impeller shall be selected at

no more than 95% of maximum size for selected pump case.

.7 Shaft: stainless steel with two point support.

.8 Seal Assembly;

.1 For Hot Water Service: Flushed single mechanical seal, pH limitation 7-11,

EPT/Carbon/Tungsten Carbide., temperature range –6.7 C to 121 C, 1100 kPag

design.

.2 For Chilled Water and Condenser Water Service; Process fluid flushed standard

mechanical seal, Buna N, pH limitation 7-9, ceramic seal seat, carbon seal ring,

1100 kPag design.

.3 Seals to be capable of being serviced without disconnecting the pump from the

piping.

.9 Seal Flush: Process fluid flushwater. External stainless steel flush line complete with

filter and stainless steel needle valves for isolation.

.10 Coupling: split per vendor standard with coupling guard.

.11 Shaft Bearings – L10 life of 80,000 hours minimum.

.12 Capacities: as indicated on the drawings schedules.

.13 Motors selected for non-overloading application.

2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY (SPEED) DRIVE

.1 Each pump motor shall be operated through a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). Each

pump will be supplied with a separate, dedicated VFD rated for 115% of the full load

amperage rating of the motor.

.2 The VFD shall be suitable for use with Premium efficiency Design B, 575V motors.

.3 The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM).

.4 The VFD supplier shall coordinate with the driven equipment supplier to ensure the VFD

is correctly selected for the startup and operating characteristics of the electric motor

application.

.5 Approvals:

.1 ULC or CSA approved.

.2 CUL Listed

.6 Enclosure:

.1 NEMA 12 or IP55

.2 Suitable for individual wall or floor mounting.

.7 Interface:

.1 Provide input fused disconnect switch with fast acting fuses

.2 Control panel c/w backlit alphanumeric display

.3 Input keypad for manual operation.

.4 Digital Inputs: programmable, minimum of 4




.5 Analog Inputs: minimum of 2

.6 Analog Outputs: programmable, minimum of 1

.7 Digital Outputs: programmable, minimum of 2

.1 Dry-contact for VFD fault and VFD run status.

.8 Hand/Off/Auto buttons/switches

.9 Serial Communication:

.1 Includes interface for all popular HVAC protocols (LonWorks, BACnet,

Modbus, Siemens Apogee, Johnson Metasys).

.2 RS 485 Communication port c/w software to allow full remote

monitoring and control of the drive via communication.

.10 USB Connectivity: The drive is capable of being remotely commissioned and

monitored through USB connection.

.8 Harmonic Filter

.1 Integral D link reactors providing a reduction in input harmonics equal to 5% A

line reactor without voltage drop and efficiency losses.

.2 Drives > 74 kW: External advanced harmonic filter designed to meet the current

distortion limit guidelines identified in IEEE Standard 519-1992.

.9 Performance:

.1 97% or greater efficiency at full load

.2 Power factor greater than 0.95 at all loads

.3 +/-10% voltage tolerance with no change in output

.4 Input power filter to limit harmonic distortion to less than 5% at the point of

VFD connection to plant 600 V power supply.

.5 No single harmonic to be greater than 3%.

.10 Protection:

.1 Electronic Motor overload protection

.2 Transient voltage surge suppression.

.3 Phase to phase short circuit

.4 Phase to ground short circuit

.5 Over temperature sensor

.6 Rotating motor start

.7 Overload current versus time function

.11 Service Conditions:

.1 Ambient temperature: -10 to 40 C

.2 Relative Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing

.12 Display: Over Voltage, Under voltage, Overcurrent, Overload, Overload Temperature,

Ground Fault, Output Speed, Motor Amps, Output Motor Volts, GPM, Inverter fault,

kWh, Elapsed Time.

.13 The VFD and all components will be located in the mechanical room.




2.5 MOTORS

.1 575V motors shall be suitable for across-the-line starting and operation on the following

system:

.1 Nominal System Voltage: 575V 10%

.2 Phases: 3

.3 Frequency: 60 Hz 1 Hz

.4 System Neutral: Solidly grounded

.5 Ambient Temperature Operating Range: Max. 40C; Min. -45C

.2 Motor Ratings: Motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EEMAC Class F insulation with

Class B rise, 1.15 service factors, TEFC and shall be selected as follows:

.1 Motor 1 HP up to and including 200 HP shall be rated 575V, 3-Phase, 60 Hz.

.2 Motor less than 1.0 HP shall be rated 120 V, 1-Phase, 60 Hz.

.3 Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be certified as Inverter Duty

and meet the requirements for inverter duty motors, in accordance with NEMA

MG-1 Part 31.

.4 Motors on equipment serviced by Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) shall utilize

Inverter Grade Insulation which consists of a minimum Class F or better

insulation materials with additional phase insulating material, extra end turn

bracing, and Class H spike resistant wire, capable to withstand 2000 volt

transients without premature motor failure and no cable limitations in motor

application. Provide stainless steel brushes to ground the shaft.

.3 Enclosures: Motors shall be NEMA T-frame unless otherwise noted. Motor frames shall

be of cast iron and end shields shall be cast iron or pressed steel. External hardware,

external and internal surfaces shall have corrosion resistance treatment. Frames shall

have a tapped and plugged drain hole to allow drainage of moisture from low spots of

motors.

.4 Starting Requirements, Torque Classification and Running Conditions

.1 Motors shall be suitable for across-the-line starting and shall be capable of

making the number of starts stated in NEMA MG 1-20.50.

.2 Motors shall be capable of accelerating the load in accordance with NEMA MG

1-12.39 design ‘B’ (80C).

.3 The locked rotor torque of EEMAC design ‘B’ motors shall be in accordance

with NEMA MG 1-12.37.

.4 Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with a

variation in the voltage or the frequency in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.45.

.5 Motor starting current shall not exceed 6.5 times rated full load current. Motors

shall be capable of withstanding the number of starts imposed by the driven

equipment without appreciable loss of service life.

.6 Motors shall be capable of producing satisfactory operation of the driven

equipment during short duration (up to one minute) dips to 75% of rated voltage.

.5 Windings:




.1 The end windings and terminal leads shall be suitably braced to prevent

movement under heavy starting conditions.

.2 All windings shall be insulated with a non-hygroscopic Class F (155C) varnish

and suitably vacuum impregnated and dipped to provide full protection against

humid conditions.

.6 Bearings and Balancing:

.1 Bearings shall be provided with seals so that direct moisture or lubricant leakage

around the seals will not enter the motor.

.2 3/4 Hp & Less: Double shielded permanently lubricated ball bearings.

.3 1 Hp & More: Bearings shall be provided with lubricant fittings and removable

drain plugs which are made completely accessible to allow Owner’s Plant

maintenance crew to lubricate them while in service.

.4 Bearings on motors provided with variable frequency drives shall be insulated for

inverter duty. Shaft grounding ring shall be installed on motor shaft for all VFD

driven motors.

.5 Bearings shall meet the requirements of the referenced standards and shall be

chosen to have a minimum rated life of 100,000 hours.

.6 1800 and 3600 RPM motors of 100 HP and over shall not exceed the dynamic

balance limit of 1 mil (amplitude).

.7 Terminal Boxes and Terminals:

.1 Terminal boxes shall be located on the right hand side of the motor when viewed

from the driving end (F-2 mounting), located approximately on the horizontal

centre line of the motor, unless otherwise stated.

.2 Terminal boxes shall be oversized and equipped with a gland plate, which shall

be of adequate thickness to accommodate mechanical type compression glands.

.3 Terminal box covers shall be designed to permit the terminal box assembly to be

rotated in any one of four directions at 90 deg. displacements to facilitate easy

cable/ conduit access.

.4 Each terminal box shall have the facility to accommodate an incoming 4

conductor copper cable (3 power and 1 ground), and shall be complete with

connections and through a neoprene or butyl rubber seal plug of watertight

design.

.5 The leads shall be identified by means of sleeves marked as follows: T1, T2, and

T3.

.8 Other Motors:

.1 Single-phase motors shall be totally enclosed capacitor type 120 V, 1-Phase, 60

Hz, with integral thermal overload protection.

.2 Direct current motors shall be rated 120V DC and shall be capable of operation

from 105V DC to 140V DC.

.9 Grounding Termination: The grounding lug shall be located on the main terminal box

side of the motor and preferably in the web of the support frame. Each conduit box shall

be provided with a ground connection point.

.10 Nameplates:




.1 Nameplates shall be of stainless steel construction and stamped in accordance

with NEMA MG 1-10.38.

.2 The Plant equipment tag number and purchase order number shall be stamped on

the nameplate or on a separate plate firmly fixed to the motor frame.

.11 Painting: Metal surfaces that are to be painted shall be cleaned to the equal of a

commercial finish as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council Manual (SSPC-

SP6) and shop painted with the manufacturer’s standard finish.

.12 Noise Level: The motor no-load overall sound level when measured at a distance of 1.0

meter shall not exceed:

.1 Up to and including 30 HP: 75 dBa

.2 Larger than 30 HP up to and including 150 HP: 80 dBa

.3 Larger than 150 HP: 85 dBa

.13 Factory Tests:

.1 Each motor shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with NEMA Standard

MG 1-12.51 and IEEE Standard 112A.

.2 For motors greater than 100 HP, the Seller shall provide the test reports to the

Owner prior to shipment.

.3 The Seller shall guarantee the motor losses quoted in the motor data sheet.

Motors that fail to meet the guaranteed losses shall be replaced with motors that

meet or exceed the efficiency, at no cost to the Owner.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under

other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for hydronic pump installation in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions.


.2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately

upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied

and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental

Representative.

3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,

including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and

data sheets.

3.3 INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR

.1 Install hydronic pumps to: CAN/CSA-B214.

.2 In line circulators: install as indicated by flow arrows.




.1 Support at inlet and outlet flanges or unions.

.2 Install with bearing lubrication points accessible.

.3 Vertical In line type: install as indicated by flow arrows. Support at inlet and outlet

flanges with seismic qualified support type ILPSB, where required. Install with bearing

lubrication points accessible.

.4 Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or

hangers for this purpose. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.

.1 All Pump/Motor support points must be properly shimmed prior to bolting unit

down. Mounting bolts will be loosened to check for "soft foot".

.2 Pump connections flanges must not support pipe loads. Flange bolts will be

loosened to check for pipe movement (ie. springing away from pump), and even

gap around flange faces.

.3 Pump alignment will be rechecked after flange bolts loosened.

.5 Equipment will be set on isolation pad and seismically restrained (anchored) to the house

keeping pad.

.6 Anchorage bolt sizing in terms of seismic qualification shall be reviewed by professional

engineer registered in the province, where required.

.7 Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.

.8 Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.

.9 Check rotation prior to start-up.

.10 Install pressure gauge test cocks.

3.4 VFD INSTALLATION AND SUPPORT

.1 Provide support to the control system integrator to establish control and monitoring of the

VFD by the building control system.

.2 The Vendor will provide factory startup services for each VFD. Contractor to arrange and

coordinate services.

.3 The Manufacturer shall hold a training seminar for the plant operating personnel,

immediately after commissioning and startup. Training shall cover operational,

maintenance, and problem diagnostic aspects of the equipment.

.4 The VFD’s will be located in the mechanical room with the pump(s). The distance

between pump motor and VFD is estimated at 5 Meters.

.5 Installation of control and power wiring from the building electrical/control system to the

VFD shall be by the installation contractor. Final terminations shall be in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions.

.6 All electrical installations and terminations to the VFD’s and pump motor shall be

inspected by the manufacturer.

.7 The Manufacturer shall test the VFD before trial operation. Coordinate expected results

with other parties involved equipment, prior to the beginning any test. Specifically,

ensure that no instruments can be damaged due, for example, to abnormal input

conditions, and that no motors can cause damage due to reverse rotation, etc. The




Contractor shall be in charge of the facilities during all tests. He shall assume

responsibility for damage in the event of injury to the personnel, building, and equipment,

and shall bear all costs for liability, repairs, and restoration in this connection.

.8 Conduct acceptance tests and demonstrate that the equipment and devices, power and

control systems actually meet the design intentions and specified requirements. Verify

and test operation of remote control system.

3.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSTALLATION

.1 All electrical equipment provided under this Section shall be provided with all necessary

CSA approvals and stamped with NEMA listed nominal efficiencies.

.2 The installation shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1-Latest Edition and applicable

Electrical Regulations of the Province having jurisdiction.

.3 VFD cable shall be used between VFD and motor.

3.6 START-UP

.1 General:

.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)

Requirements: General Requirements; supplemented as specified herein.

.2 In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Procedures:

.1 Before starting pump, check that cooling water system over-temperature and

other protective devices are installed and operative.

.2 After starting pump, check for proper, safe operation.

.3 Check installation, operation of mechanical seals, packing gland type seals.

Adjust as necessary.

.4 Check base for free-floating, no obstructions under base.

.5 Run-in pumps for 12 continuous hours minimum.

.6 Verify operation of over-temperature and other protective devices under low- and

no-flow condition.

.7 Eliminate air from scroll casing.

.8 Adjust water flow rate through water-cooled bearings.

.9 Adjust flow rate from pump shaft stuffing boxes to manufacturer's

recommendation.

.10 Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure true flexibility.

.11 Eliminate cavitation, flashing and air entrainment.

.12 Adjust pump shaft seals, stuffing boxes, glands.

.13 Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as finally

set.

.14 Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for temporary

heat.

.15 Verify lubricating oil levels.




3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) – BY INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR

.1 General:

.1 Verify performance in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General

Commissioning (Cx) Requirements: General Requirements, supplemented as

specified herein.

.2 Verify that manufacturer's performance curves are accurate.

.3 Ensure valves on pump suction and discharge provide tight shut-off.

.4 Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH):

.1 Application: measure NPSH for pumps which operate on open systems and with

water at elevated temperatures.

.2 Measure using procedures prescribed in Section 01 91 13 - General

Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.3 Where procedures do not exist, discontinue PV, report to Departmental

Representative and await instructions.

.5 Multiple Pump Installations - Series and Parallel:

.1 Repeat PV procedures specified above for pump performance and pump BHP for

combinations of pump operations.

.6 Mark points of design and actual performance at design conditions as finally set upon

completion of TAB.

.7 Commissioning Reports: in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning

(Cx) Requirements reports supplemented as specified herein. Reports to include:

.1 Record of points of actual performance at maximum and minimum conditions

and for single and parallel operation as finally set at completion of

commissioning on pump curves.

.2 Use Report Forms specified in Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx)

Requirements: Report Forms and Schematics.

.3 Pump performance curves (family of curves).

3.8 CLEANING



.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment

in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with

Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at

appropriate facility.

END OF SECTION

Dalhousie University – Agricultural CampusRegent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 51 00 Hot Water System – Energy Transfer Stations252 Buildout BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS Project No. 216251218225 Page 1

Part 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES .1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) .2 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC). .3 Nova Scotia Building Code (OBC) – Latest. .4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), specifically sections NFPA 91 &

NFPA 211. .5 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE), specifically 1992 Chapter 31 Chimney,Gas Vent, and Fireplace Systems.

.6 CAN/CGA - B149.1 05, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.7 CAN/CSA-B139-M91, Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment.

.8 American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

.9 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Section IX – Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Section II for Material Specification and Properties, and Welding Consumables.

.10 CSA Standard W59 Structural Welding.

.11 The National Fire Safety Code and the Fire Safety Regulations of the Province of Nova Scotia.

.12 The Environmental Protection Act enforced by the Nova Scotia Ministry of Environment.

.13 OSHA - Occupational Health & Safety Administration.


.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals.

.2 Shop drawings to clearly indicate following:

.1 General arrangement drawings; P. Eng stamped where requested.

.2 Connection details.

.3 Foundation loads for self supporting chimney.

.4 Clean out and inspection doors.

.5 Gasket material and sealant details.

.6 Spring hangers and restraints.

.7 Flexible connections, expansion joints, expansion & compensators.

.8 Insulation and removable prefabricated insulation enclosures.

.9 Explosion relief valves.

.10 Engine exhaust Wall thimbles.


.1 Provide project specific maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

Dalhousie University – Agricultural CampusRegent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 51 00 Hot Water System – Energy Transfer Stations252 Buildout BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS Project No. 216251218225 Page 2 1.4 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS

.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by independent testing agency or manufacturer signifying adherence to codes and standards.

1.5 PRODUCT WARRANTY

.1 Provide a 10 year extended warranty against defects and failures to the chimney system(s) supplied. The Warranty to include for replacement or repair of defective component(s) and the labour to install replacement components or repair defective components.

Part 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BREECHINGS FOR BOILERS

.1 Manufactured positive pressure modular double wall insulated breeching and chimney system. All joints to be sealed for gas tight operation.

.2 For use with forced draft water tube boilers with exhaust gas temperatures not exceeding 350 C (660 F) for continuous operation. The system shall be gas tight and thus prevent leakage of combustion products into the building.

.3 Appliance Fuel Service: Breaching serves boilers fired on propane as a primary.

.4 Breeching system must be capable of continuous operation at flue gas temperatures ranging from 60 C to 300 350 C.

.5 For breeching and components the materials of construction will be 20 ga. internal A316 stainless steel or equivalent liner with 24 ga. aluminized steel outer shell.

.6 The boiler breeching to be insulated with sufficient thickness of insulation (minimum 50 mm) such that the maximum external shell temperature of 60 C (140 F) is reached at a flue gas temperature of 204 350 C (66400 F).

.7 Provide ULC approved metal support and anchor for vertical wall penetration.

.8 Provide flashing ring for wall penetration.

.9 Provide transition piece to connect breeching to chimney flue.

.10 Standard of Acceptance: Schebler; Van Packer, Cleaverbrooks to match existing system.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Hangers and supports:

.1 Compatible with modular breeching system and at locations as indicated on the drawings and or as recommended by manufacturer.

.2 Flexible Connections - Breeching;


.1 Provide non-metallic fabric type flexible connections at outlet of each boiler exhaust flange and at the connection to the stack as indicated on the drawings.

.2 High temperature reinforced fabric suitable for continuous operating temperatures of 214C (417F) complete with inlet and outlet flanges. Joints sized for maximum axial compression of 75 mm, maximum axial extension of 18.75 mm, and a maximum lateral offset of 44 mm. The design pressure of ± 75 mm of water column.

.3 Standard of Acceptance; Senior Flexonics Flow - Flex 2000 Series

.3 Boiler Exhaust Outlet Interface;

.1 Provide interface between the carbon steel boiler flue gas outlet transition piece and the breeching system.

.4 Boiler Economizer Unit Interface;

.1 Provide interface between the economizer unit transition and breeching as required.

.2 Provide flexible connection as indicated on drawings.

2.3 FITTINGS

.1 90o Elbows:

.1 All 90o elbows to be 5 Gore Long Radius.

.2 Elbows to have a bend radius to breeching diameter (R/D)ratio of 1.5.

.2 45o Elbows:

.1 All 45o elbows to be 3 Gore Long Radius.

.2 Elbows to have a bend radius to breeching diameter (R/D) ratio of 1.5.

Part 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL

.1 Follow manufacturer's and SMACNA installation recommendations for shop fabricated components.

.2 Install in accordance with Alberta Building code, CSA B149.1 Natural gas and Propane installation code, and local regulations.

.3 Support breeching as indicated on drawings and at each joint.

.4 Provide spacer ring for all building wall / roof penetrations, to maintain clearances as required by building and propane gas codes.

.5 Provide personnel burn protection as required by OHSA, on engine exhaust piping from 2.5 m elevation down to floor level as applicable. Burn protection may be insulation or mechanical guard.

3.2 WELDING

.1 Welding shall be done in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


.2 All welders to be qualified for each procedure to be welded.

.3 Owner may use any method of inspection necessary to establish quality control and adherence to proper welding procedures. Owner shall have the right to reject any weld not meeting the requirements of this inspection.

.4 If inspection and/or tests of such welds show unsatisfactory welding, Contractor shall disqualify the welder.

.5 All welds shall be visually inspected.

.6 Structural welding shall confirm with CSA Standard W59.

.7 Structural fabricators and erectors responsible for structural welding shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of CSA Standard W47.1 (Division 1 or Division 2).

3.3 MATERIALS

.1 All materials shall be from an approved source and in accordance with this specification.

.2 Material in contact with the process shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II.

.3 Structural steel shall be in accordance with CSA Standard W59.

.4 The material specifications for the major high temperature components are as follows;

.1 Stainless steel internal liner.

.2 Steel external jacket.

.3 Mineral wool insulation or equal

.4 Design temperature is 350 C (660 F).

End of Section Formatted: Left, Tab stops: 3.25", Centered + 4.97",Left

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 52 00 252 Buildout HEATING BOILERS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General



.2 Section 23 20 13 – High Pressure Piping Systems.

.3 Section 23 05 05 – Installation of Pipework.

.4 Section 23 05 17 – Pipe Welding.

.5 Section 23 05 16 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

.6 Section 23 05 29 – Hangers & Supports For HVAC Piping and Equipment

.7 Section 23 22 23 – Steam Condensate Pumps

.8 Section 25 30 02 - EMCS Field Control Devices

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Boiler Manufacturers Association (ABMA)

.2 ASME

.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section VII-[2013].


.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-[2004], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).

.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0-[2007], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.3 LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction-[2010], LEED Canada 2009 for Design and Construction Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.

.4 LEED Canada for Existing Buildings, Operations and Maintenance-[2009], LEED Canada 2009 Leadership In Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System Reference Guide.

.4 CSA Group

.1 CAN1-3.1-[77(R2011)], Industrial and Commercial Gas-Fired Package Boilers.

.2 CSA B51-[09], Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.

.3 CSA B139-[09], Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment.

.4 CSA B140.7-[05(R2010)], Oil Burning Equipment: Steam and Hot-Water Boilers.

.5 CSA B149.1-[10], Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

.6 ANSI Z21.13-[10]/CSA 4.9-[10], Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers.


.5 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC)



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for heating boilers and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Nova Scotia, Canada.

.2 Indicate on drawings: .1 General arrangement showing terminal points, instrumentation test

connections. .2 Clearances for operation, maintenance, servicing, tube cleaning, tube

replacement. .3 Foundations with loadings, anchor bolt arrangements. .4 Piping hook-ups. .5 Equipment electrical drawings. .6 Burners and controls. .7 All miscellaneous equipment. .8 Flame safety control system. .9 Breeching and stack configuration. .10 [Stack emission continuous monitoring system to measure CO, O, NOx,

SO, stack temperature and smoke density of flue gases]. .3 Engineering data to include:

.1 Boiler efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, of design capacity.

.2 Radiant heat loss at 100% design capacity.



.1 LEED Canada submittals: in accordance with [Section 01 35 21 - LEED Requirements].

.2 Recycled Content: .1 Submit listing of recycled content products used, including details of

required percentages or recycled content materials and products, showing their costs and percentages of[post-consumer content, and total cost of materials for project.




.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for [heating boilers] for incorporation into manual.


.1 Regulatory Requirements: work to be performed in compliance with CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, applicable Provincial /Territorial regulations.


.1 Extra materials:

.1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. .1 Special tools for burners, access opening, handholes and Operation and

Maintenance. .2 Spare parts for [1] year of operation. .3 Spare gaskets. .4 Spare gauge glass inserts. .5 Probes and sealants for electronic indication. .6 Spare burner tips. .7 Spare burner gun. .8 Safety valve test gauge.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements with manufacturer's written instructions.



.1 Store materials indoors in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect boiler and equipment from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Refer to Shop Drawings and IOM

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 23 52 00 252 Buildout HEATING BOILERS Project No. 218225 Page 4 Part 3 Execution

3.1 INTEGRATION TO BMS

.1 Refer to 01 11 00 1.13 for integration requirements of third party microprocessor based controllers with the building management system.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for heating boiler installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.






3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, regulations of Province having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise, and manufacturers recommendations.

.2 Make required piping connections to inlets and outlets recommended by boiler manufacturer.

.3 Maintain clearances as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for operation, servicing and maintenance without disruption of operation of any other equipment/system.

.4 Mount unit level using specified vibration isolation in Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

.5 Pipe hot water relief valves full size to nearest drain.

.6 Pipe steam relief valve through roof with drip pan elbow piped to nearest drain.

.7 Pipe blowdown/drain to blowdown tank/floor drain.

.8 LP gas installations - in accordance with CSA B149.1.

3.5 MOUNTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

.1 Safety valves and relief valves:

.1 Run separate discharge from each valve.

.2 Terminate discharge pipe as indicated.

.3 Run drain pipe from each valve outlet and drip pan elbow to above nearest drain.

.2 Blowdown valves:


.1 Run discharge to terminate as indicated.


.1 Commissioning:

.1 Manufacturer to: .1 Certify installation. .2 Start up and commission installation. .3 Carry out on-site performance verification tests. .4 Demonstrate operation and maintenance.

.2 Provide Consultant at least 24 hours notice prior to inspections, tests, and demonstrations. Submit written report of inspections and test results.

3.7 CLEANING





END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 01 11 252 Buildout EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION AND Project No. 218225 COMMISSIONING Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Section 23 08 01 – Performance Verification Mechanical Piping Systems. .2 Section 23 08 02 – Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

.2 AEL: ratio between total test period less any system downtime accumulated within that period and test period.

.3 Downtime: results whenever EMCS is unable to fulfill required functions due to malfunction of equipment defined under responsibility of EMCS contractor. Downtime is measured by duration, in time, between time that Contractor is notified of failure and time system is restored to proper operating condition. Downtime not to include following:

.1 Outage of main power supply in excess of back-up power sources, provided that: .1 Automatic initiation of back-up was accomplished. .2 Automatic shut-down and re-start of components was as specified.

.2 Failure of communications link, provided that: .1 Controller automatically and correctly operated in stand-alone mode. .2 Failure was not due to failure of any specified EMCS equipment.

.3 Functional failure resulting from individual sensor inputs or output devices, provided that: .1 System recorded said fault. .2 Equipment defaulted to fail-safe mode. .3 AEL of total of all input sensors and output devices is at least 99 %

during test period.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Confirm with Departmental Representative that Design Criteria and Design Intents are still applicable.

.2 Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified to interpret Design Criteria and Design Intents.


.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Final Report: submit report to Departmental Representative.

.1 Include measurements, final settings and certified test results.

.2 Bear signature of commissioning technician and supervisor


.3 Report format to be approved by Departmental Representative before commissioning is started.

.4 Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reports to reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS as set during commissioning and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.5 Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemed advisable in order to improve performance, environmental conditions or energy consumption.


.1 Provide documentation, O M Manuals, and training of O M personnel for review of Departmental Representative before interim acceptance in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.6 COMMISSIONING

.1 Do commissioning in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning (Cx) Requirements.

.2 Carry out commissioning under direction of Departmental Representative and in presence of Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager.

.3 Inform, and obtain approval from, Departmental Representative in writing at least 14 days prior to commissioning or each test. Indicate:

.1 Location and part of system to be tested or commissioned.

.2 Testing/commissioning procedures, anticipated results.

.3 Names of testing/commissioning personnel.

.4 Correct deficiencies, re-test in presence of Departmental Representative until satisfactory performance is obtained.

.5 Acceptance of tests will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for ensuring that complete systems meet every requirement of Contract.

.6 Load system with project software.

.7 Perform tests as required.

1.7 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Commissioning to be considered as satisfactorily completed when objectives of commissioning have been achieved and reviewed by Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager.

1.8 ISSUANCE OF FINAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

.1 Final Certificate of Completion will not be issued until receipt of written approval indicating successful completion of specified commissioning activities including receipt of commissioning documentation.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 01 11 252 Buildout EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION AND Project No. 218225 COMMISSIONING Page 3 Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commission the installed system. Provide two-way radios.

.2 Instrumentation accuracy tolerances: higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.

.3 Independent testing laboratory to certify test equipment as accurate to within approved tolerances no more than 2 months prior to tests.

.4 Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable.

.5 Application: to conform to normal industry standards.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PROCEDURES

.1 Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems.

.2 Commission each system using procedures prescribed by the Commissioning Manager and Departmental Representative.

.3 Commission integrated systems using procedures prescribed by Commissioning Manager and Departmental Representative.

.4 Debug system software.

.5 Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuning PID values and modifying CDLs as required.

.6 Test full scale emergency evacuation and life safety procedures including operation and integrity of smoke management systems under normal and emergency power conditions as applicable.


.1 Pre-Installation Testing.

.1 General: consists of field tests of equipment just prior to installation.

.2 Testing may be on site or at Contractor's premises as approved by Departmental Representative.

.3 Configure major components to be tested in same architecture as designed system. Include BECC equipment and 2 sets of Building Controller's including MCU's, LCU's, and TCU's.

.4 Equip each Building Controller with sensor and controlled device of each type (AI, AO, DI, DO).

.5 Additional instruments to include: .1 DP transmitters. .2 VAV supply duct SP transmitters.


.3 DP switches used for dirty filter indication and fan status. .6 In addition to test equipment, provide inclined manometer, digital micro-

manometer, milli-amp meter, source of air pressure infinitely adjustable between 0 and 500 Pa, to hold steady at any setting and with direct output to milli-amp meter at source and to BECC.

.7 After setting, test zero and span in 10% increments through entire range while both increasing and decreasing pressure.

.8 Departmental Representative to mark instruments tracking within 0.5% in both directions as "approved for installation".

.9 Transmitters above 0.5% error will be rejected.

.10 DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint.

.2 Completion Testing.

.1 General: test after installation of each part of system and after completion of mechanical and electrical hook-ups, to verify correct installation and functioning. .1 Manufacturer representative to verify all field wiring and completed

terminations. .2 Include following activities:

.1 Test and calibrate field hardware including stand-alone capability of each controller.

.2 Verify each A-to-D convertor.

.3 Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digital instruments.

.4 Test each DI to ensure proper settings and switching contacts.

.5 Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lag time.

.6 Test each AO to ensure proper operation of controlled devices. Verify tight closure and signals.

.7 Test operating software.

.8 Test application software and provide samples of logs and commands.

.9 Verify each CDL including energy optimization programs.

.10 Debug software.

.11 Blow out flow measuring and static pressure stations with high pressure air at 700 kPa.

.12 Provide point verification list in table format including point identifier, point identifier expansion, point type and address, low and high limits and engineering units. Include space on commissioning technician and Departmental Representative. This document will be used in final startup testing.

.3 Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, perform point-by-point test of entire system under direction of Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager and provide: .1 2 technical personnel capable of re-calibrating field hardware and

modifying software.


.2 Detailed daily schedule showing items to be tested and personnel available.

.3 Departmental Representative's acceptance signature to be on executive and applications programs.

.4 Commissioning to commence during final startup testing.

.5 O M personnel to assist in commissioning procedures as part of training.

.6 Commissioning to be supervised by qualified supervisory personnel and Departmental Representative.

.7 Commission systems considered as life safety systems before affected parts of the facility are occupied.

.8 Operate systems as long as necessary to commission entire project.

.9 Monitor progress and keep detailed records of activities and results. .4 Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCS functions in accordance

with contract requirements. .1 Prior to beginning of 30 day test demonstrate that operating parameters

(setpoints, alarm limits, operating control software, sequences of operation, trends, graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensure proper operation and operator notification in event of off-normal operation. .1 Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved to minimize reporting

of nuisance conditions. .2 Test to last at least 30 consecutive 24 hour days. .3 Tests to include:

.1 Demonstration of correct operation of monitored and controlled points.

.2 Operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, special control algorithms, diagnostics, software.

.4 System will be accepted when: .1 EMCS equipment operates to meet overall performance

requirements. Downtime as defined in this Section must not exceed allowable time calculated for this site.

.2 Requirements of Contract have been met. .5 In event of failure to attain specified AEL during test period, extend test

period on day-to-day basis until specified AEL is attained for test period. .6 Correct defects when they occur and before resuming tests.

.5 Commissioning Manager and Departmental Representative to verify reported results.

3.3 ADJUSTING

.1 Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning as reviewed by Departmental Representative, set and lock devices in final position and permanently mark settings.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 01 11 252 Buildout EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION AND Project No. 218225 COMMISSIONING Page 6 3.4 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstrate to Commissioning Manager and Departmental Representative operation of systems including sequence of operations in regular and emergency modes, under normal and emergency conditions, start-up, shut-down interlocks and lock-outs in accordance with Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 05 01 252 Buildout EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 All Division 25 Sections. .2 Section 23 05 23.05 – Butterfly Valves. .3 Section 23 09 33 – Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).

.1 ASHRAE 135-2012, BACnet Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks.


.1 CAN/CSA-Z234.1-00(R2011), Metric Practice Guide.

.3 Consumer Electronics Association (CEA).

.1 CEA-709.1-D-2014, Control Network Protocol Specification.

.4 Department of Justice Canada (Jus).



.5 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association (EEMAC).

.1 EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.

.6 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).


.7 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

.1 IEEE 260.1-2004, Standard Letter Symbols Units of Measurement (SI, Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain Other Units).

.8 The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA).

.1 ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.

.9 Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC)/Real Property Branch/Architectural and Engineering Services.

.1 MD13800-September 2000, Energy Management and Control Systems (EMCS) Design Manual. English: ftp://ftp.pwgsc.gc.ca/rps/docentre/mechanical/me214-e.pdf

.10 Transport Canada (TC).


Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 05 01 252 Buildout EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 2 1.3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

.1 Acronyms used in EMCS:

.1 AEL - Average Effectiveness Level.

.2 AI - Analog Input.

.3 AIT - Agreement on International Trade.

.4 AO - Analog Output.

.5 BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network.

.6 BC(s) - Building Controller(s).

.7 BECC - Building Environmental Control Center.

.8 CAD - Computer Aided Design.

.9 CDL - Control Description Logic.

.10 CDS - Control Design Schematic.

.11 COSV - Change of State or Value.

.12 CPU - Central Processing Unit.

.13 DI - Digital Input.

.14 DO - Digital Output.

.15 DP - Differential Pressure.

.16 ECU - Equipment Control Unit.

.17 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System.

.18 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning.

.19 IDE - Interface Device Equipment.

.20 I/O - Input/Output.

.21 ISA - Industry Standard Architecture.

.22 LAN - Local Area Network.

.23 LCU - Local Control Unit.

.24 MCU - Master Control Unit.

.25 NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement.

.26 NC - Normally Closed.

.27 NO - Normally Open.

.28 OS - Operating System.

.29 O M - Operation and Maintenance.

.30 OWS - Operator Work Station.

.31 PC - Personal Computer.

.32 PCI - Peripheral Control Interface.

.33 PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter.

.34 PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative.

.35 RAM - Random Access Memory.

.36 SP - Static Pressure.

.37 ROM - Read Only Memory.

.38 TCU - Terminal Control Unit.


.39 USB - Universal Serial Bus.

.40 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply.

.41 VAV - Variable Air Volume.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Point: may be logical or physical.

.1 Logical points: values calculated by system such as setpoints, totals, counts, derived corrections and may include, but not limited to result of and statements in CDL's.

.2 Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which are measuring physical properties, or providing status conditions of contacts or relays which provide interaction with related equipment (stop, start) and valve or damper actuators.

.2 Point Name: composed of two parts, point identifier and point expansion.

.1 Point identifier: comprised of three descriptors, "area" descriptor, "system" descriptor and "point" descriptor, for which database to provide 25 character field for each point identifier. "System" is system that point is located on. .1 Area descriptor: building or part of building where point is located. .2 System descriptor: system that point is located on. .3 Point descriptor: physical or logical point description. For point identifier

"area", "system" and "point" will be shortforms or acronyms. Database must provide 25 character field for each point identifier.

.2 Point expansion: comprised of three fields, one for each descriptor. Expanded form of shortform or acronym used in "area", "system" and "point" descriptors is placed into appropriate point expansion field. Database must provide 32 character field for each point expansion.

.3 Bilingual systems to include additional point identifier expansion fields of equal capacity for each point name for second language. .1 System to support use of numbers and readable characters including

blanks, periods or underscores to enhance user readability for each of the above strings.

.3 Point Object Type: points fall into following object types:

.1 AI (analog input).

.2 AO (analog output).

.3 DI (digital input).

.4 DO (digital output).

.5 Pulse inputs.

.4 Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5.

.1 Printouts: to ANSI/IEEE 260.1.

.2 Refer also to Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 05 01 252 Buildout EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 4 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Refer to control schematics and Section 25 90 01 Site Requirements & Systems Sequences of Operation for system architecture.

.2 Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including, but not limited to, following:

.1 Building Controllers.

.2 Control devices as listed in I/O point summary tables.

.3 OWS(s).

.4 Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCS data transmission system.

.5 Equipment, software, and programming required to integrate the new building control systems into the existing building EMCS.

.6 Field control devices.

.7 Control panels to house new EMCS components other than field instruments and or field devices.

.8 Software/Hardware complete with full documentation.

.9 Complete operating and maintenance manuals.

.10 Training of personnel.

.11 Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation.

.12 Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by Division 25 and control devices included with HVAC equipment supplied as part of Division 23.

.13 Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.

.3 Design Requirements:

.1 Design and provide conduit and wiring linking elements of system.

.2 Supply sufficient programmable controllers of types to meet project requirements. Quantity and points contents as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to installation.

.3 Location of controllers as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to installation.

.4 Provide utility power to EMCS and emergency power to EMCS as indicated.

.5 Metric references: in accordance with CAN/CSA Z234.1.

.4 Language Operating Requirements:

.1 Refer to EMCS Design Manual MD 13800.

.2 Provide English operator selectable access codes.

.3 Use non-linguistic symbols for displays on graphic terminals wherever possible. Other information to be in English.

.4 Operating system executive: provide primary hardware-to-software interface specified as part of hardware purchase with associated documentation to be in English.

.5 System manager software: include in English system definition point database, additions, deletions or modifications, control loop statements, use of high level


programming languages, report generator utility and other OS utilities used for maintaining optimal operating efficiency.

.6 Include, in English: .1 Input and output commands and messages from operator-initiated

functions, field related changes, alarms as defined in CDL's or assigned limits (i.e. commands relating to day-to-day operating functions and not related to system modifications, additions, or logic re-definements).

.2 Graphic "display" functions, point commands to turn systems on or off, manually override automatic control of specified hardware points. To be in English at specified OWS. Point name expansions in both languages.

.3 Reporting function such as trend log, trend graphics, alarm report logs, energy report logs, maintenance generated logs.


.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures and 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.

.2 Submit for review:

.1 Equipment list, with systems manufacturers, at time of tender.

.2 List existing field control devices to be re-used included in tender, along with unit price.

.3 Quality Control:

.1 Provide equipment and material from manufacturer's regular production, CSA certified, manufactured to standard quoted plus additional specified requirements.

.2 Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to inspection authorities for special inspection and approval before delivery to site.

.3 Submit proof of compliance to specified standards with shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process. Label or listing of specified organization is acceptable evidence.

.4 In lieu of such evidence, submit certificate from testing organization, approved by Departmental Representative, certifying that item was tested in accordance with their test methods and that item conforms to their standard/code.

.5 For materials whose compliance with organizational standards, codes, or specifications is not regulated by organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish certificate stating that material complies with applicable referenced standard or specification.

.6 Permits and fees: in accordance with general conditions of contract.

.7 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction to Departmental Representative.

.8 Existing devices intended for re-use: submit test report.


.1 Have local office within 50 km of project staffed by trained personnel capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency service on systems,


.2 Provide record of successful previous installations submitting tender showing experience with similar installations utilizing computer-based systems.

.3 Have access to local supplies of essential parts and provide 7 year guarantee of availability of spare parts after obsolescence.

.4 Ensure qualified supervisory personnel continuously direct and monitor Work and attend site meetings.




.1 Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, and packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.4 Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.5 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.

.6 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.

.7 Label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and security devices.

.8 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.

.9 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.

.10 Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

1.9 EXISTING CONTROL COMPONENTS

.1 Utilize existing control wiring and piping as indicated.

.2 Re-use field control devices and controllers that are usable in their original configuration provided that they conform to applicable codes, standards and these specifications.

.1 Do not modify original design of existing devices without written permission from Departmental Representative.

.2 Provide for new, properly designed device where re-usability of components is uncertain.


.3 As identified in the drawings, some existing system equipment and controls will be removed. Their associated control points will no longer be required. These inactive control points need to be identified and documented.

.3 Inspect and test existing devices intended for re-use within 30 days of award of contract, and prior to installation of new devices.

.1 Furnish test report within 40 days of award of contract listing each component to be re-used and indicating whether it is in good order or requires repair by Departmental Representative.

.2 Failure to produce test report will constitute acceptance of existing devices by contractor.

.4 Non-functioning items:

.1 Provide with report specification sheets or written functional requirements to support findings.

.2 Departmental Representative will repair or replace existing items judged defective yet deemed necessary for EMCS.

.5 Submit written request for permission to disconnect controls and to obtain equipment downtime before proceeding with Work.

.6 Assume responsibility for controls to be incorporated into EMCS after written receipt of approval from Departmental Representative.

.1 Be responsible for items repaired or replaced by Departmental Representative.

.2 Be responsible for repair costs due to negligence or abuse of equipment.

.3 Responsibility for existing devices terminates upon final acceptance of EMCS, and applicable portions of EMCS as approved by Departmental Representative.

.7 Remove existing controls not re-used or not required. Place in approved storage for disposition as directed.

.8 Coordinate removal or capping of any redundant or abandoned pneumatic tubing with Division 23.

1.10 DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR

.1 Hire the services of Tridium Niagara Specialist or authorized representative, to complete the work of all EMCS sections.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS

.1 On/off actuators for specified butterfly valves, as indicated are to be provided by Division 25. Refer to Section 23 05 23.05 – Butterfly Valves.

.2 Standalone Thermostats are provided by Division 23 and wired by Division 25. Refer to Section 23 09 33 – Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC.

.3 Pre-packaged steam to hot water heat exchanger stations are provided by Division 23, external power and control wiring by Division 25. Refer to Section 23 22 14 – Steam Specialties.

.4 Coordinate electrical installation with Division 26.

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 25 05 01 252 Buildout EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Project No. 218225 Page 8 Part 2 Products

2.1 EXISTING SYSTEM

.1 There is an existing EMCS system presently installed in each building. All materials must be selected to ensure compatibility with the existing EMCS system.

.2 Expansion of the existing EMCS will require additional control points. Contractor to assess requirements and inform the Departmental Representative of these requirements.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

.1 Data Communication Protocol: to ASHRAE STD 135.

.2 Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on project and forming part of tender documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval.

2.3 ADAPTORS

.1 Provide adaptors between metric and imperial components.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

.1 Installation: to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 PAINTING

.1 Painting: in accordance with Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting, supplemented as follows:

.1 Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished equipment to match original finish.

.2 Restore to new condition, finished surfaces too extensively damaged to be primed and touched up to make good.

.3 Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, and other support components.

.4 Paint unfinished equipment installed indoors to EEMAC 2Y-1.


.1 Verification requirements in accordance with Section 25 90 01 EMCS: Site Requirements & Systems Sequences of Operation.

END OF SECTION


252 Sackville Buildout EMCS: IDENTIFICATION


Part 1 General


.1 Section 25 10 01 EMCS: Local Area Network.

.2 Section 25 30 01 EMCS: Building Controllers.

.3 Section 25 30 02 EMCS: Field Control Devices.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CSA C22.1-15, The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (23rd Edition), Safety

Standard for Electrical Installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 For acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.


.1 Language Operating Requirements: provide identification for control items in English

and French.


.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures supplemented and

modified by requirements of this Section.

.2 Submit to Owner’s Representative for approval samples of nameplates, identification tags

and list of proposed wording.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS

.1 Identify by Plastic laminate, 3 mm thick Melamine, matte white finish, black core, square

corners, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core.

.2 Sizes: 25 x 67 mm minimum.

.3 Lettering: minimum 7 mm high, black.

.4 Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.

2.2 NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES

.1 Identify by plastic encased cards attached by chain.

.2 Sizes: 50 x 100 mm minimum.

.3 Lettering: minimum 5 mm high produced from laser printer in black.

.4 Data to include: point name and point address.


252 Sackville Buildout EMCS: IDENTIFICATION


.5 Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plastic enclosed cards with point

name and point address.

2.3 NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS

.1 Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier.

.2 Location: as directed by Owner’s Representative.

.3 Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.

2.4 WARNING SIGNS

.1 Equipment including motors, starters under remote automatic control: supply and install

orange coloured signs warning of automatic starting under control of EMCS.

.2 Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automatic remote control of EMCS" as

reviewed by Owner’s Representative.

2.5 WIRING

.1 Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring at panels, junction boxes, splitters,

cabinets and outlet boxes.

.2 Colour coding: to CSA C22.1. Use colour coded wiring in communications cables,

matched throughout system.

.3 Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breaker number inside each EMCS

panel.

2.6 CONDUIT

.1 Colour code EMCS conduit.

.2 Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.

.3 Coding: use fluorescent orange paint and confirm colour with Owner’s Representative

during "Preliminary Design Review".

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

.1 Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are

visible and legible at all times.

.2 Provide new tags for the CMMS numbering system for new equipment.

3.2 EXISTING PANELS

.1 Correct existing nameplates and legends to reflect changes made during Work.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout EMCS: FIELD INSTALLATION


Part 1 General


.1 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

.2 Section 25 10 01 EMCS: Local Area Network.

.3 Section 25 30 01 EMCS: Building Controllers.

.4 Section 25 30 02 EMCS: Field Control Devices.

.5 Section 26 05 21 Wires and Cables

.6 Section 26 05 34 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

.1 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2013, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressures Fittings.

.2 CSA Group

.1 CSA C22.1-15, The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (23rd Edition), Safety

Standard for Electrical Installations.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 45.1-07(R2012) – Update 2014, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 56-13, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal

Conduit.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.


.1 IEEE C2-2012, National Electrical Safety Code.


.1 NFPA 70-2014, National Electrical Code.


.1 Electrical:

.1 Control wiring to be supplied, installed and tagged by Division 25.

.2 Control Contractor (Division 25) responsible for completing wiring terminations.

.3 Provide power wiring from existing power panels to EMCS field panels. Circuits

to be for exclusive use of EMCS equipment. Panel breakers to be identified on

panel legends tagged and locks applied to breaker switches.

.4 Provide hard wiring between field control devices and EMCS field panels. Note

EMCS field panels consist of both new and existing panels.

.5 Provide communication wiring between EMCS field panels and Main Plant

Control Panel.




.6 Modify existing starters to provide for EMCS as indicated in I/O Summaries and

as indicated.

.7 Refer to wiring diagrams included as part of flow diagrams in drawing package.

Trace existing control wiring installation and provide updated wiring schematics

including additions and/or deletions to control circuits for approval by Owner’s

Representative before commencing work.

.2 Mechanical:

.1 Pipe taps required for EMCS equipment will be supplied and installed by

Division 23.

.2 Wells and Control Valves Shall Be Supplied by EMCS Contractor and Installed

by Division 23.

.3 Installation of devices requiring sheet metal trades to be mounted by Division 23.

Costs to be carried by designated trade.

.3 Structural:

.1 Not applicable.

1.4 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Qualified supervisory personnel to:

.1 Continuously direct and monitor all work.

.2 Attend site meetings.


.1 Cutting and Patching: refer to Section 01 00 10 – General Instructions and supplemented

as specified herein.

.2 Repair all surfaces damaged during execution of work.

.3 Turn over to Departmental Representative existing materials removed from work not

identified for re-use.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SPECIAL SUPPORTS

.1 Structural grade steel, primed and painted after construction and before installation.

2.2 WIRING

.1 As per requirements of Division 26.

.2 All wiring for EMCS systems shall be installed in EMT conduit.

.3 All wiring must be continuous without joints.

.4 For 70V and above copper conductor with chemically cross-linked thermosetting

polyethylene insulation rated RW90 and 600V. Colour code to CSA 22.1.

.5 For wiring under 70 volts use FT6 rated wiring where wiring is not run in conduit. All

other cases use FT4 wiring.




.6 Sizes:

.1 120V Power supply: to match or exceed breaker, size #12 AWG minimum:

.1 Flow Meters

.2 Control transformers: 120 / 24V

.3 EMCS panels

.4 Packaged steam controller.

.2 24V Power supply: size #12 AWG minimum:

.1 Local Control Unit (LCU)

.2 Control Valves

.3 Wiring for safeties/interlocks for starters, motor control centres, to be stranded,

#14 minimum.

.4 Field control wiring to digital devices: #18 AWG stranded twisted pair.

.5 Analog input and output:

.1 Generally: shielded #18 minimum stranded twisted pair.

.2 Energy meter sensors: shielded four-wire #22 AWG solid copper.

.6 Serial Communication: coordinate with end device supplier. Generally multiple

shielded pairs of #20 AWG solid copper with overall shield and outer PVC

jacket.

.1 New EMCS to existing control panels

.2 EMCS to Energy Calculators

.3 EMCS to Variable Frequency Drives

.4 EMCS to packaged steam controller.

.7 Terminations:

.1 Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and

number of terminations.

2.3 CONDUIT

.1 As per requirements of Division 26.

.2 Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 No. 83.

.3 Flexible and liquid tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 56, maximum length

914 mm. for connection at devices.

.4 All field instrumentation wiring, control cables, and serial communication wiring ( <

70V) shall be installed in:

.1 Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 No. 83. Minimum size 13 mm diameter.

.2 Connections to devices (ie transmitters and control valves) shall be limited to 914

mm of Flexible and liquid tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 56.

.5 All control power wiring ( > 70V) shall be installed in:

.1 Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 No. 83. Minimum size 20 mm diameter.

.6 Junction and pull boxes: welded steel.

.1 Surface mounting cast FS: screw-on flat covers.




.2 Flush mounting: covers with 25 mm minimum extension all round.

.7 Cabinets: sheet steel, for surface mounting, with hinged door, latch lock, 2 keys,

complete with perforated metal mounting backboard. Panels to be keyed alike for similar

functions and or entire contract as approved.

.8 Outlet boxes: 100 mm minimum, square.

.9 Conduit boxes, fittings:

.1 Bushings and connectors: with nylon insulated throats.

.2 With push pennies to prevent entry of foreign materials.

.10 Fittings for rigid conduit:

.1 Couplings and fittings: threaded type steel.

.2 Double locknuts and insulated bushings: use on sheet metal boxes.

.3 Use factory "ells" where 90 degree bends required for 25 mm and larger

conduits.

.11 Fittings for thin wall conduit:

.1 Connectors and couplings: steel, set screw type.

2.4 SUPPORTS FOR CONDUIT, FASTENINGS, EQUIPMENT

.1 Solid masonry, tile and plastic surfaces: lead anchors or nylon shields.

.1 Hollow masonry walls, suspended drywall ceilings: toggle bolts.

.2 Exposed conduits or cables:

.1 50 mm diameter and smaller: one-hole steel straps.

.2 Larger than 50 mm diameter: two-hole steel straps.

.3 Suspended support systems:

.1 Individual cable or conduit runs: support with 6 mm diameter threaded rods and

support clips.

.2 Two or more suspended cables or conduits: support channels supported by 6 mm

diameter threaded rod hangers.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and

legible after commissioning is complete.

3.2 SUPPORTS

.1 Install special supports as required and as indicated.

3.3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL

.1 Do complete installation in accordance with requirements of:




.1 Division 26, this specification.

.2 CSA 22.1 Canadian Electrical Code.

.3 ANSI/NFPA 70.

.4 IEEE C2.

.2 Fully enclose or properly guard electrical wiring, terminal blocks, high voltage (above 70

V) contacts and mark to prevent accidental injury.

.3 Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and installation.

.4 Check factory connections and joints. Tighten where necessary to ensure continuity.

.5 Install electrical equipment between 1000 and 2000 mm above finished floor wherever

possible and adjacent to related equipment.

.6 Protect exposed live equipment such as panel, mains, outlet wiring during construction

for personnel safety.

.7 Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS" or other appropriate voltage.

.8 Make necessary arrangements for cutting of chases, drilling holes and other structural

work required to install electrical conduit, cable, pull boxes, outlet boxes. X-ray concrete

for existing utilities or structural obstructions before cutting or core drilling into existing

structure.

.9 Install cables, conduits and fittings which are to be embedded or plastered over, neatly

and closely to building structure to minimize furring.

3.4 CONDUIT SYSTEM

.1 All control and communication wiring shall be installed in conduit. Provide complete

conduit system to link Building Controllers to BECC. Conduit sizes to suit wiring

requirements and to allow for future expansion capabilities specified for systems.

Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%. Design drawings do not show conduit layout.

.2 Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines, to conserve headroom and to

minimize interference.

.3 Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise indicated or

unless impossible to do otherwise. Obtain approval from Departmental Representative

before starting such work. Provide complete conduit system to link field panels and

devices with main control centre. Conduit size to match conductors plus future expansion

capabilities as specified.

.4 Locate conduits at least 150 mm from parallel steam or hot water pipes and at least 50

mm at crossovers.

.5 Bend conduit so that diameter is reduced by less than 1/10th original diameter.

.6 Field thread on rigid conduit to be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.

.7 Limit conduit length between pull boxes to less than 30 m.

.8 Use conduit outlet boxes for conduit up to 32 mm diameter and pull boxes for larger

sizes.

.9 Fastenings and supports for conduits, cables, and equipment:




.1 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support

structures as indicated and as required to support cable and conduit runs.

.2 Provide adequate support for raceways and cables, sloped vertically to

equipment.

.3 Use supports or equipment installed by other trades for conduit, cable and

raceway supports only after written approval from Departmental Representative.

.10 Install polypropylene fish cord in empty conduits for future use.

.11 Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked sections.

.12 Pass conduits through structural members only after receipt of Departmental

Representative's written approval.

.13 Conduits may be run in flanged portion of structural steel.

.14 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.

.15 Pull boxes:

.1 Install in inconspicuous but accessible locations.

.2 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.3 Fill boxes with paper or foam to prevent entry of construction material.

.4 Provide correct size of openings. Reducing washers not permitted.

.5 Mark location of pull boxes on record drawings.

.6 Identify AC power junction boxes, by panel and circuit breaker.

.16 Install terminal blocks or strips indicated in cabinets.

.17 Install bonding conductor for 120 volt and above in conduit.

3.5 WIRING

.1 Install multiple wiring in ducts simultaneously.

.2 Do not pull spliced wiring inside conduits or ducts.

.3 Use CSA certified lubricants of type compatible with insulation to reduce pulling tension.

.4 Tests: use only qualified personnel. Demonstrate that:

.1 Circuits are continuous, free from shorts, unspecified grounds.

.2 Resistance to ground of all circuits is greater than 50 Megohms.

.5 Provide Departmental Representative with test results showing locations, circuits, results

of tests.

.6 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and install to manufacturer's

recommendations. Accommodate all strands in lugs. Where insulation is stripped in

excess, neatly tape so that only lug remains exposed.

.7 Wiring in main junction boxes and pull boxes to terminate on terminal blocks only,

clearly and permanently identified. Junctions or splices not permitted for sensing or

control signal covering wiring.

.8 Do not allow wiring to come into direct physical contact with compression screw.




.9 Install ALL strands of conductor in lugs of components. Strip insulation only to extent

necessary for installation.

3.6 GROUNDING

.1 Install complete, permanent, continuous grounding system for equipment, including

conductors, connectors and accessories.

.2 Install separate grounding conductors in conduit within building.

.3 Install ground wire in all PVC ducts and in tunnel conduit systems.

.4 Tests: perform ground continuity and resistance tests, using approved method appropriate

to site conditions.

3.7 TESTS

.1 General:

.1 Perform following tests.

.2 Give 14 days written notice of intention to test.

.3 Conduct in presence of Departmental Representative and authority having

jurisdiction.

.4 Conceal work only after tests satisfactorily completed.

.5 Report results of tests to Departmental Representative in writing.

.6 Preliminary tests:

.1 Conduct as directed to verify compliance with specified requirements.

.2 Make needed changes, adjustments, replacements.

.3 Insulation resistance tests:

.1 Megger all circuits, feeders, equipment for 120 - 600V with

1000V instrument. Resistance to ground to be more than

required by Code before energizing.

.2 Test insulation between conductors and ground, efficiency of

grounding system to satisfaction of Departmental Representative

and authority having jurisdiction.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Refer to Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)


Part 1 General


.1 Section 25 05 01 – General Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CSA T527-94 (R1999), Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications in

Commercial Buildings.

.2 CAN/CSA T528-93(R1997), Design Guidelines for Administration of

Telecommunications Infrastructure in Commercial Buildings (Adopted

ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 with modifications).

.3 CSA T530-99, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A with modifications).

.2 CSA T568.1-05(R2010, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –

Part 1: General Requirements. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE)/Standard for Information technology - Telecommunications and information

exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific

requirements.

.1 IEEE Std 802.3 with latest amendments, Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access

with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer

specifications.

.3 Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

.1 TIA/EIA-568-2009, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standards Set, Part 1 General Requirements Part 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair

Cabling Components Part 3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.

.2 TIA/EIA-569-2001, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces.

.4 Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS).

.1 TBITS 6.9-2000, Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in

Government Owned and Leased Buildings - Technical Specifications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS - General Requirements.


.1 Data communication network to link Operator Workstations and Master Control Units

(MCU) in accordance with CSA T568.1, CSA T530, TIA/EIA-569, and TBITS 6.9.

.1 Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequate performance between

different sections (segments) of network.




.2 Allow for future expansion of network, with selection of networking technology

and communication protocols.

.2 Data communication network to include, but not limited to:

.1 EMCS-LAN.

.2 Modems.

.3 Network interface cards.

.4 Network management hardware and software.

.5 Network components necessary for complete network.


.1 EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN).

.1 High speed, high performance, local area network over which MCUs and OWSs

communicate with each other directly on peer to peer basis in accordance with

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Standard.

.2 EMCS-LAN to: BACnet.

.3 Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50 devices.

.4 Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directly connected to EMCS-LAN.

.5 High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from

multiple controllers, upload/download information between network devices. Bit

rate to be 10 Megabits per second minimum.

.6 Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either OWSs,

MCUs or network media. Operational equipment to continue to perform

designated functions effectively in event of single or multiple failures.

.7 Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols to

allow system to co-exist with other networking applications including office

automation.

.2 Dynamic Data Access.

.1 LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, either network resident or connected

remotely, to access point status and application report data or execute control

functions for other devices via LAN.

.2 Access to data to be based upon logical identification of building equipment.

.3 Network Medium.

.1 Network medium: twisted cable, shielded twisted cable, or fibre optic cable, as

required and compatible with network protocol to be used within buildings.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.




Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS


Part 1 General


.1 Section 25 30 02 – EMCS: Field Control Devices.

.2 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements, Applications and Systems

Sequences of Operation.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE).

.1 ASHRAE 2011, Applications Handbook, SI Edition.


.1 C22.2 No.205-12, Signal Equipment.


.1 IEEE C37.90.1-2012, Surge Withstand Capabilities (SWC) Tests for Relays and

Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

1.4 DESCRIPTION

.1 General: Network of controllers comprising of MCU('s), LCU('s), ECU('s) or TCU('s) to

be provided as indicated in System Architecture Diagram to support building systems and

associated sequence(s) of operations as detailed in these specifications.

.1 Provide sufficient controllers to meet intents and requirements of this section.

.2 Controller quantity, and point contents to be approved by Owner’s

Representative at time of preliminary design review.

.2 Controllers: stand-alone intelligent Control Units.

.1 Incorporate programmable microprocessor, non-volatile program memory, RAM,

power supplies, as required to perform specified functions.

.2 Incorporate communication interface ports for communication to LANs to

exchange information with other Controllers.

.3 Capable of interfacing with operator interface device.

.4 Execute its logic and control using primary inputs and outputs connected directly

to its onboard input/output field terminations or slave devices, and without need

to interact with other controller. Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor

air temperature may be located in other Controller(s).

.1 Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor air temperature may be

located in other Controller(s).





.1 To include:

.1 Scanning of AI and DI connected inputs for detection of change of value and

processing detection of alarm conditions.

.2 Perform On-Off digital control of connected points, including resulting required

states generated through programmable logic output.

.3 Perform Analog control using programmable logic, (including PID) with

adjustable dead bands and deviation alarms.

.4 Control of systems as described in sequence of operations.

.5 Execution of optimization routines as listed in this section.

.2 Total spare capacity for MCUs and LCUs: at least 25 % of each point type distributed

throughout the MCUs and LCUs.

.3 Field Termination and Interface Devices:

.1 To: CSA C22.2 No.205.

.2 Electronically interface sensors and control devices to processor unit.

.3 Include, but not be limited to, following:

.1 Programmed firmware or logic circuits to meet functional and technical

requirements.

.2 Power supplies for operation of logics devices and associated field

equipment.

.3 Lockable wall cabinet.

.4 Required communications equipment and wiring (if remote units).

.5 Leave controlled system in "fail-safe" mode in event of loss of

communication with, or failure of, processor unit.

.6 Input Output interface to accept as minimum AI, AO, DI, DO functions

as specified.

.7 Wiring terminations: use conveniently located screw type or spade lug

terminals.

.4 AI interface equipment to:

.1 Convert analog signals to digital format with 10 bit analog-to-digital

resolution.

.2 Provide for following input signal types and ranges:

.1 4 - 20 mA;

.2 0 - 10 V DC;

.3 1801 ohm RTD input;

.3 Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.

.4 Have common mode signal rejection greater than 60 dB to 60 Hz.

.5 Where required, dropping resistors to be certified precision devices

which complement accuracy of sensor and transmitter range specified.

.5 AO interface equipment:

.1 Convert digital data from controller processor to acceptable analog

output signals using 8 bit digital-to-analog resolution.




.2 Provide for following output signal types and ranges:

.1 4 - 20 mA.

.2 0 - 10 V DC.


.6 DI interface equipment:

.1 Able to reliably detect contact change of sensed field contact and

transmit condition to controller.


.3 Accept pulsed inputs up to 2 kHz.

.7 DO interface equipment:

.1 Respond to controller processor output, switch respective outputs. Each

DO hardware to be capable of switching up to 0.5 amps at 24 V AC.

.2 Switch up to 5 amps at 220 V AC using optional interface relay.

.4 Controllers and associated hardware and software: operate in conditions of 0 degrees C to

44 degrees C and 20 % to 90 % non-condensing RH.

.5 Controllers (MCU, LCU): mount in existing panel whenever possible or new panel next

to existing panel as per Section 25 30 02 – Field Devices.

.1 Provide for conduit entrance from top, bottom or sides of panel.

.2 ECUs and TCUs to be mounted in equipment enclosures or separate enclosures.

.3 Mounting details as approved by Owner’s Representative for ceiling mounting.

.6 Cabinets to provide protection from water dripping from above, while allowing sufficient

airflow to prevent internal overheating.

.7 Provide surge and low voltage protection for interconnecting wiring connections.


.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures Section

25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.

.1 Submit product data sheets for each product item proposed for this project.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide manufacturers recommended maintenance procedures for insertion in OM

Manuals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All control units must be compatible with the existing Tridium Niagara supervisory

system.

.2 Standard of Acceptance: Controllers shall be KMC BAC-5900 or similar devices,

approved by Owner.




2.2 MASTER CONTROL UNIT (MCU)

.1 General: primary function of MCU is to provide co-ordination and supervision of

subordinate devices in execution of optimization routines such as demand limiting or

enthalpy control.

.2 Include high speed communication LAN Port for Peer to Peer communications with

OWS(s) and other MCU level devices.

.1 MCU must support BACnet.

.3 MCU local I/O capacity as follows:

.1 MCU I/O points as allocated in I/O Summary Table referenced in MD13800.

.2 LCUs may be added to support system functions.

.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU).

.1 Processor to consist of minimum 16 bit microprocessor capable of supporting

software to meet specified requirements.

.2 CPU idle time to be more than 30 % when system configured to maximum input

and output with worst case program use.

.3 Minimum addressable memory to be at manufacturer's discretion but to support

at least performance and technical specifications to include but not limited to:

.1 Non-volatile EEPROM to contain operating system, executive,

application, sub-routine, other configurations definition software. Tape

media not acceptable.

.2 Battery backed (72 hour minimum capacity) RAM (to reduce the need to

reload operating data in event of power failure) to contain CDLs,

application parameters, operating data or software that is required to be

modifiable from operational standpoint such as schedules, setpoints,

alarm limits, PID constants and CDL and hence modifiable on-line

through operator panel or remote operator's interface. RAM to be

downline loadable from OWS.

.4 Include uninterruptible clock accurate to plus or minus 5 secs/month, capable of

deriving year/month/day/hour/minute/second, with rechargeable batteries for

minimum 72 hour operation in event of power failure.

.5 Local Operator Terminal (OT): Provide OT for each MCU unless otherwise specified in

Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements, Applications and System Sequences of

Operation.

.1 Mount access/display panel in MCU or in suitable enclosure beside MCU as

approved by Owner’s Representative.

.2 Support operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical

data display, programs, additions and modifications.

.3 Display simultaneously minimum of 16 point identifiers to allow operator to

view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems. Point

identifiers to be in English.

.4 Functions to include, but not be limited to, following:

.1 Start and stop points.

.2 Modify setpoints.




.3 Modify PID loop parameters.

.4 Override PID control.

.5 Change time/date.

.6 Add/modify/start/stop weekly scheduling.

.7 Add/modify setpoint weekly scheduling.

.8 Enter temporary override schedules.

.9 Define holiday schedules.

.10 View analog limits.

.11 Enter/modify analog warning limits.

.12 Enter/modify analog alarm limits.

.13 Enter/modify analog differentials.

.5 Provide access to real and calculated points in controller to which it is connected

or to other controller in network. This capability not to be restricted to subset of

predefined "global points" but to provide totally open exchange of data between

OT and other controller in network.

.6 Operator access to OTs: same as OWS user password and password changes to

automatically be downloaded to controllers on network.

.7 Provide prompting to eliminate need for user to remember command format or

point names. Prompting to be consistent with user's password clearance and types

of points displayed to eliminate possibility of operator error.

.8 Identity of real or calculated points to be consistent with network devices. Use

same point identifier as at OWS's for access of points at OT to eliminate cross-

reference or look-up tables.

2.3 LOCAL CONTROL UNIT (LCU)

.1 Provide multiple control functions for typical built-up plant control systems, hydronic

systems and electrical systems.

.2 Minimum of 16 I/O points of which minimum be 4 AOs, 4 AIs, 4 DIs, 4 DOs.

.3 Points integral to one Building System to be resident on only one controller.

.4 Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet specified

requirements as listed in previous MCU article with following additions:

.1 Include minimum 2 interface ports for connection of local computer terminal.

.2 Design so that shorts, opens or grounds on input or output will not interfere with

other input or output signals.

.3 Physically separate line voltage (70V and over) circuits from DC logic circuits to

permit maintenance on either circuit with minimum hazards to technician and

equipment.

.4 Include power supplies for operation of LCU and associated field equipment.

.5 In event of loss of communications with, or failure of, MCU, LCU to continue to

perform control. Controllers that use defaults or fail to open or close positions not

acceptable.

.6 Provide conveniently located screw type or spade lug terminals for field wiring.




2.4 TERMINAL/EQUIPMENT CONTROL UNIT (TCU/ECU)

.1 Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet

TCU/ECU functional specifications.

.1 TCU/ECU definition to be consistent with those defined in ASHRAE HVAC

Applications Handbook section 45.

.2 Controller to communicate directly with EMCS through EMCS LAN and provide access

from EMCS OWS for setting occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints, flow

setpoints, and associated alarm values, permit reading of sensor values, field control

values (% open) and transmit alarm conditions to EMCS OWS.

2.5 SOFTWARE

.1 General.

.1 Include as minimum: operating system executive, communications, application

programs, operator interface, and systems sequence of operation - CDL's.

.2 Include "firmware" or instructions which are programmed into ROM, EPROM,

EEPROM or other non-volatile memory.

.3 Include initial programming of Controllers, for entire system.

.2 Program and data storage.

.1 Store executive programs and site configuration data in ROM, EEPROM or other

non-volatile memory.

.2 Maintain CDL and operating data including setpoints, operating constants, alarm

limits in battery-backed RAM or EEPROM for display and modification by

operator.

.3 Programming languages.

.1 Program Control Description Logic software (CDL) using English like or

graphical, high level, general control language.

.2 Structure software in modular fashion to permit simple restructuring of program

modules if future software additions or modifications are required. GO TO

constructs not allowed unless approved by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Operator Terminal interface.

.1 Operating and control functions include:

.1 Multi-level password access protection to allow user/manager to limit

workstation control.

.2 Alarm management: processing and messages.

.3 Operator commands.

.4 Reports.

.5 Displays.

.6 Point identification.

.5 Pseudo or calculated points.

.1 Software to provide access to value or status in controller or other networked

controller in order to define and calculate pseudo point. When current pseudo




point value is derived, normal alarm checks must be performed or value used to

totalize.

.2 Inputs and outputs for process: include data from controllers to permit

development of network-wide control strategies. Processes also to permit

operator to use results of one process as input to number of other processes (e.g.

cascading).

.6 Control Description Logic (CDL):

.1 Capable of generating on-line project-specific CDLs which are software based,

programmed into RAM or EEPROM and backed up to OWS. Owner must have

access to these algorithms for modification or to be able to create new ones and

to integrate these into CDLs on BC(s) from OWS.

.2 Write CDL in high level language that allows algorithms and interlocking

programs to be written simply and clearly. Use parameters entered into system

(e.g. setpoints) to determine operation of algorithm. Operator to be able to alter

operating parameters on-line from OWS and BC(s) to tune control loops.

.3 Perform changes to CDL on-line.

.4 Control logic to have access to values or status of points available to controller

including global or common values, allowing cascading or inter-locking control.

.5 Energy optimization routines including enthalpy control, supply temperature

reset, to be LCU or MCU resident functions and form part of CDL.

.6 MCU to be able to perform following pre-tested control algorithms:

.1 Two position control.

.2 Proportional Integral and Derivative (PID) control.

.7 Control software to provide ability to define time between successive starts for

each piece of equipment to reduce cycling of motors.

.8 Provide protection against excessive electrical-demand situations during start-up

periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start

commands to heavy electrical loads.

.9 Power Fail Restart: upon detection of power failure system to verify availability

of Emergency Power as determined by emergency power transfer switches and

analyze controlled equipment to determine its appropriate status under

Emergency power conditions and start or stop equipment as defined by I/O

Summary. Upon resumption of normal power as determined by emergency

power transfer switches, MCU to analyze status of controlled equipment,

compare with normal occupancy scheduling, turn equipment on or off as

necessary to resume normal operation.

.7 Event and Alarm management: use management by exception concept for Alarm

Reporting. This is system wide requirement. This approach will insure that only

principal alarms are reported to OWS. Events which occur as direct result of primary

event to be suppressed by system and only events which fail to occur to be reported.

Such event sequence to be identified in I/O Summary and sequence of operation.

Examples of above are, operational temperature alarms limits which are exceeded when

main air handler is stopped, or General Fire condition shuts air handlers down, only Fire

alarm status shall be reported. Exception is, when air handler which is supposed to stop

or start fails to do so under event condition.




.8 Energy management programs: include specific summarizing reports, with date stamp

indicating sensor details which activated and or terminated feature.

.1 MCU in coordination with subordinate LCU, TCU, ECU to provide for the

following energy management routines:

.1 Time of day scheduling.

.2 Calendar based scheduling.

.3 Holiday scheduling.

.4 Temporary schedule overrides.

.5 Optimal start stop.

.6 Night setback control.

.7 Enthalpy (economizer) switchover.

.8 Peak demand limiting.

.9 Temperature compensated load rolling.

.10 Fan speed/flow rate control.

.11 Cold deck reset.

.12 Hot deck reset.

.13 Hot water reset.

.14 Chilled water reset.

.15 Condenser water reset.

.16 Chiller sequencing.

.17 Night purge.

.2 Programs to be executed automatically without need for operator intervention

and be flexible enough to allow customization.

.3 Apply programs to equipment and systems as specified or requested by the

Owner’s Representative.

.9 Function/Event Totalization: features to provide predefined reports which show daily,

weekly, and monthly accumulating totals and which include high rate (time stamped) and

low rate (time stamped) and accumulation to date for month.

.1 MCUs to accumulate and store automatically run-time for binary input and

output points.

.2 MCU to automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on daily,

weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog or binary pulse input-type

points.

.3 MCU to automatically count events (number of times pump is cycled off and on)

daily, weekly or monthly basis.

.4 Totalization routine to have sampling resolution of 1 min or less for analog

inputs.

.5 Totalization to provide calculations and storage of accumulations up to 99,999.9

units (eg. kWH, litres, tonnes, etc.).

.6 Store event totalization records with minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.

.7 User to be able to define warning limit and generate user-specified messages

when limit reached.




2.6 LEVELS OF ADDRESS

.1 Upon operator's request, EMCS to present status of any single 'point', 'system' or point

group, entire 'area', or entire network on printer or OWS as selected by operator.

.1 Display analog values digitally to 1 place of decimals with negative sign as

required.

.2 Update displayed analog values and status when new values received.

.3 Flag points in alarm by blinking, reverse video, different colour, bracketed or

other means to differentiate from points not in alarm.

.4 Updates to be change-of-value (COV)-driven or if polled not exceeding 2 second

intervals.

2.7 POINT NAME SUPPORT

.1 Controllers (MCU, LCU) to support Owner’s point naming convention as defined in

Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 LOCATION

.1 Location of Controllers to be approved by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install Controllers in secure locking enclosures as indicated and as directed by Owner’s

Representative.

.2 Provide necessary power from local 120V branch circuit panel for equipment.

.3 Install tamper locks on breakers of circuit breaker panel.

.4 Use uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and emergency power when equipment must

operate in emergency and co-ordinating mode.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES


Part 1 General


.1 Section 07 84 00 – Fire Stopping.


.3 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-Up, Verification and Commissioning].

.4 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.

.5 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.

.6 Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.

.7 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems

Sequences of Operation.

.8 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

.1 ANSI/NEMA C12.7-2014, Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM B148-14, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings.

.3 National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).

.1 NEMA 250-2014, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).


.1 CSA-C22.1-15, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (23rd Edition), Safety Standard

for Electrical Installations.


.1 IEEE C57.13-2008, Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Acronyms and Definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.


.1 Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with

Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Submittals and Review Process.

.2 Pre-Installation Tests.

.1 Submit samples at random from equipment shipped, as requested by

Departmental Representative, for testing before installation. Replace devices not

meeting specified performance and accuracy.





.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for specified equipment and

devices.


.1 Cutting and Patching: in accordance with Section 21 05 01 – Common Work Results for

Mechanical and supplemented as specified herein.

.2 Repair surfaces damaged during execution of Work.

.3 Turn over to Departmental Representative existing materials removed from Work not

identified for re-use.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All devices must be compatible with the existing Plant Control System

.2 Control devices of each category to be of same type and manufacturer.

.3 External trim materials to be corrosion resistant.

.4 Operating ambient conditions: 0 - 40 degrees C with 10 - 90% RH (non-condensing)

unless otherwise specified.

.5 Terminations: use standard conduit box with slot screwdriver compression connector

block unless otherwise specified.

.6 Transmitters and sensors to be unaffected by external transmitters including walkie

talkies.

.7 Account for hysteresis, relaxation time, maximum and minimum limits in applications of

sensors and controls.

.8 Devices installed in user occupied space not exceed Noise Criteria (NC) of 35. Noise

generated by any device must not be detectable above space ambient conditions.

.9 Range: including temperature, and pressure, as indicated in I/O summary in Section

25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements, Applications and System Sequences of Operation.

2.2 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 General: except for room sensors to be high resistance thermistors or thermocouple type

to following requirements:

.1 Thermocouples: limit to temperature range of 200 degrees C and over.

.2 RTD's (except for energy metering RTD’s): 1801 ohm NTC (Negative

Temperature Coefficient), (plus or minus 0.2 ohms) platinum element with strain

minimizing construction, 3 integral anchored leadwires. Coefficient of resistivity:

0.00385 ohms/ohm degrees C.

.3 Sensing element: hermetically sealed.

.4 Stem and tip construction: type 304 stainless steel.

.5 Accuracy of +/- 0.5 degrees C over the temperature range of operation.




.6 Time constant response: heating and cooling system immersion temperature

sensors 40 second time constant (slow acting). Domestic hot water immersion

temperature sensors 1.5 seconds time constant (fast acting).

.7 Immersion wells: NPS 3/4, stainless steel spring loaded construction, with heat

transfer compound compatible with sensor. Insertion length as indicated.

.2 Room temperature sensors and display wall modules.

.1 Temperature sensing and display wall module.

.1 LCD display to show space temperature and temperature setpoint.

.2 Buttons for occupant selection of temperature setpoint and

occupied/unoccupied mode.

.3 Integral thermistor sensing element 10,000 ohm at 24 degrees.

.4 Accuracy 0.2 degrees C over range of 0 to 70 degrees C.

.5 Stability 0.02 degrees C drift per year.

.6 Separate mounting base for ease of installation.

.2 Room temperature sensors.

.1 Wall mounting, in slotted type covers having brushed aluminum finish,

with guard.

.2 Element 10-50mm long RTD with ceramic tube or equivalent protection

or thermistor, 10,000 ohm, accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 degrees C.

2.3 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:

.1 Input circuit: to accept 3-lead, 1801 ohm NTC (Negative Temperature

Coefficient), platinum resistance detector type sensors.

.2 Power supply: 24 V DC into load of 575 ohms. Power supply effect less than

0.01 degrees C per volt change.

.3 Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.

.4 Input and output short circuit and open circuit protection.

.5 Output variation: less than 0.2 % of full scale for supply voltage variation of plus

or minus 10 %.

.6 Combined non-linearity, repeatability, hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus or

minus 0.5 % of full scale output.

.7 Maximum current to 1000 ohm RTD sensor: not to exceed 25 mA.

.8 Integral zero and span adjustments.

.9 Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.0 % of full scale/ 50 degrees

C.

.10 Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25 % of full scale/ 6 months.

.11 Transmitter ranges: select narrowest range to suit application from following:

.1 For Heating and Domestic hot water piping system: 0 to 100 degrees C,

plus or minus 0.5 degrees C.

.2 For Chilled water piping system: 0 to 25 degrees C, plus or minus 0.1

degrees C.




2.4 TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS

.1 Provide single device combining temperature sensor and temperature transmitter, as

specified above.

2.5 PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

.1 Requirements:

.1 Combined sensor and transmitter measuring pressure.

.2 Material:

.1 Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with water or steam, as

applicable.

.2 Case: Stainless steel

.3 Sensor: 17-4 PH Stainless steel

.3 Performance Data

.1 Accuracy: +/- 0.25%

.2 Response Time: 5 msec

.4 Design Fabrication

.1 2-Wire


.3 Operating Temperature: -40C to 85C (-40F to 185F)

.4 Provide isolation gauge siphon for all pressure transducers: 316 SS inner

parts, carbon steel body.

.5 Pressure Range: 0 – 1600 kPa (0 – 250 psig)

.5 Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus

or minus 0.5 % of full scale output over entire range.

.6 Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5 % full scale/ 50 degrees C.

.7 Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.

.8 Output short circuit and open circuit protection.

2.6 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Requirements:

.1 Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with industrial standard

instrument air, compressed air, water, steam, as applicable.


.3 Output variations: less than 0.2 % full scale for supply voltage variations of plus

or minus 10 %.

.4 Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus

or minus 0.5 % of full scale output over entire range.

.5 Integral zero and span adjustment.

.6 Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5 % full scale/ 50 degrees C.

.7 Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.

.8 Output short circuit and open circuit protection.




.9 Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of

unit.

2.7 CHILLED/HOT WATER METERING

.1 Type of metering:

.1 Energy Meter communication to be BACnet compatible.

.2 Wide range thermal power (i.e. demand) and thermal energy consumption, from

supply and return temperatures, compensated for specific gravity.

.3 Each energy meter is made up of a flow meter, two temperature sensors, and an

energy calculator.

.4 A read-out unit makes it possible for the operator to observe the operating

parameters. The energy meter shall be furnished with a data link to the controller

for remote readout of the energy, flow, supply temperature, & return

temperatures for metering purposes.

.2 Design data:

.1 Flow rates:

.1 100% Design: as indicated on the flow schematics.

.2 Normal design flow rate: 70% of 100% design flow rate.

.3 Minimum flow rate: 10% of maximum.

.2 Design Pressure: 1100 kPa.

.3 Supply temperature at design: 100 degrees C for hot water and 4 degrees C for

chilled water.

.4 Return temperature at design: 55 degrees C for hot water and 15 degrees C for

chilled water.

.3 Flow transmitters form an integral part of primary flow measuring element.

.4 State in proposal minimum lengths of straight pipe required upstream and downstream of

primary element to meet specified accuracy requirements.

.5 Diameter of main for installation of primary element: as indicated on the flow

schematics.

.6 Meter is to be smaller than main size, as indicated on the flow schematics.

.7 Magnetic Flow Meter

.1 Materials:

.1 Flow Tube: AISI Type 304 SS.

.2 Flanges: Carbon Steel.

.3 Housing: Carbon Steel.

.4 Paint: Polyurethane.

.5 Lining: PTFE Teflon.

.6 Electrodes: 316L SS.

.7 Grounding Rings: 316L SS.

.2 Performance

.1 Accuracy: +/- 1.0% of rate within flow range of 0.3 to 9.1 m/s.




.2 Rangeability: ≥30:1.

.3 Design and Fabrication

.1 Process Connections: ANSI Class 150 flanged

.2 Ambient Temperature Range: 0 °C to 60 °C.

.3 Fluid: Water

.4 Fluid Temperature Range: 4.4 to 120 °C (40 to 248 °F)

.5 Fluid Pressure Range: Full Vacuum to 1600 kPag (232 psig)

.6 Factory calibrated.

.7 Certification: to EN1434 standards

.8 Ultrasonic Flow Meter

.1 Material:

.1 Housing (threaded meters): Dezincification resistant brass

.2 Housing (flanged meters): Red brass, RG5204

.3 Transducers: AISI 316 Stainless steel

.4 Gaskets: EPDM

.5 Measuring Pipe: Thermoplastic, PES 30%GF

.6 Reflectors: PES 30% GF and/or AISI 304 Stainless Steel

.2 Performance

.1 Accuracy: 2+0.02x (qp/q), to max. 5%

.2 Dynamic Range: 1:100


.4 Calibration: 3-point factory calibration. Calibration Certificate with

individual test results for each calibration point.


.1 Process Connections: male NPT or flanged, ASME Class 150

.2 DIN Flanges must be supplied with ASME mating companion flange.

.3 ISO threaded connections must be supplied with NPT adaptors.

.4 Ambient Temperature Range: 0°C to 55°C (0°F to 131°F)

.5 Fluid: Hot Water and/or Chilled Water

.6 Fluid Temperature Range: 4.4 to 120°C (40 to 248°F)

.7 Fluid Pressure Range: Full Vacuum to 1600 kPag (232 psig)

.8 Factory calibrated.

.9 Energy Metering Temperature Sensors & Transmitters (Resistance Temperature

Detectors (RTD)):

.1 Materials:

.1 Sensor Insert: 304SS.

.1 Insertion length based on manufacturer’s recommendation for

pipe size.

.2 Connection Head: Aluminum, MS58Pb

.3 Thermowell: 316 SS, MS63 W-n0. 1.4301




.2 Performance:

.1 Accuracy (pair): ± (0.4+4/∆t) %.




.3 Design and Fabrication:

.1 Matched pair 4-wire Pt-500 Pocket Sensors with wells with connecting

head and replaceable insert.

.2 Sensors for temperature difference measurements to be matched pairs.

.3 Fluid Temperature Range: 0°C to 150°C

.4 Ambient Temperature Range: -10°C to 70°C.

.5 Storage and Transportation Temperature: -25°C to 70°C.

.4 Remote readout

.1 Supply with BACnet communications card which requires 24VAC

power supply.

.10 Energy Calculator

.1 Material

.1 Top cover: PC

.2 Base unit: PP with TPE gaskets (thermoplastic elastomer)

.3 Print box: ABS

.4 Wall bracket: PC + 30% glass

.5 Complies with test: OIML R75 and EN1434

.2 Performance

.1 Accuracy: +/- (0.15+2/∆t)%

.2 Range: 2 ºC – 180 ºC

.3 Function: Programmable for heating and cooling.

.4 Flow Calculation: 10 second intervals

.5 Energy Calculation: Volume based energy calculation with automatic

correction for heat energy content of water.

.6 BACnet compatible



.8 Must be certified to meet CSA C900 and EN1434 standards


.1 Power supply: 24VAC±50%, 50/60 Hz

.2 Expected battery life: 6 years @ tbat < 35 ºC

.3 Data Logger Memory: EEPROM

.4 Clock/calendar: real time clock with battery back-up, calendar, leap-year

and day-light savings compensation

.5 Display: LCD with back light

.6 Ambient Temperature Range: 0 ºC to 55 ºC




.7 Resolution: 9999.9999 – 99999.99 – 999999.9 - 9999999

.8 Plug-in modules: remote output, tariff function

.4 Display Features

.1 Accumulated thermal energy: MWh

.2 Accumulated water flow: m3

.3 Actual thermal power: kW

.4 Actual water flow: l/h

.5 Supply temperature: °C

.6 Return temperature: °C

.7 Peak thermal power: kWP

.8 Peak water flow: L/h P

.9 Hour Counter: HRS

.5 Factory calibrated and sealed

.6 Transmitter remote version with wall or pipe mount housing.

.7 Remote readout

.1 BACnet communications card, requires 24VAC power supply.

.11 Read-out instrument display:

.1 Thermal power: kW.

.2 Thermal energy consumption: MWh.

.3 Water flow rate: L/s.

.4 Temperatures: degrees C.

.12 Signal transmission between primary measuring element and energy calculator:

.1 Power: 24 VDC.

.2 Signal: 4-20 mA.

.3 Cable: colour coded, twisted and shielded pair with grounding wire.

.13 Locations:

.1 Energy Metering Temperature Transmitters: supply and return lines.

.2 Energy Calculators: integrated into control panel.

2.8 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES

.1 Requirements:

.1 Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with water, glycol or steam, as

applicable.

.2 Adjustable setpoint and differential.

.3 Switch: snap action type, rated at 120V, 15 amps AC.

.4 Switch assembly: to operate automatically and reset automatically when

conditions return to normal. Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated

input pressure.

.5 Accuracy: within 2% repetitive switching.




.6 Provide switches with isolation valve and snubber, where code allows, between

sensor and pressure source.

.7 Switches on steam and high temperature hot water service: provide pigtail

syphon.

2.9 TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

.1 Requirements:

.1 Operate automatically. Reset automatically, except as follows:

.1 Low temperature detection: manual reset.

.2 High temperature detection: manual reset.

.2 Adjustable setpoint and differential.

.3 Accuracy: plus or minus 1 degrees C.

.4 Snap action rating: 120V, 15 amps as required. Switch to be DPST for hardwire

and EMCS connections.

.5 Type as follows:

.1 Room: for wall mounting on standard electrical box with protective

guard as indicated.

.2 Thermowell: stainless steel, with compression fitting for NPS 3/4

thermowell. Immersion length: min. to 50% of pipe diameter or as

indicated in I/O summaries.

2.10 FLOW SWITCH

.1 Material

.1 Wetted Material: 316 SS

.2 Performance Data

.1 Accuracy: +/- 10%

.2 Response Time: 5 msec

.3 Design Fabrication

.1 Flow switch to be Thermal Dispersion type

.2 Power supply: 85 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC±10%

.3 Connection size: 1/2” NPT

.4 Fluid Temperature Range: 0ºC to 100ºC

.5 Ambient Temperature Range: -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)

.6 Pressure Range: 0 – 1100 kPa (0 – 160 psig)

.7 Probe length: select based on pipe size.

.4 Protection Class: NEMA 4.

2.11 CURRENT SWITCH

.1 Requirements:

.1 Suitable to detect pump status – on or off (go/no-go status).




.2 1-200 Amps.

.3 Solid core with barrier strip.

.4 Self-powered.

.5 Switch voltage: 30Vac/40Vdc.

2.12 CONTROL VALVES

.1 Two-way modulating for heating and chilled water systems

.1 Body: globe style.

.2 Flow characteristic as indicated on control valve schedule: equal percentage.

.3 Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule: CV in imperial units.

.4 Normally open, Normally closed or Fail Last Position, as indicated.

.5 Two port, as indicated.

.6 Leakage rate ANSI class IV, 0.01% of full open valve capacity.

.7 Packing easily replaceable.

.8 Stem, stainless steel 316.

.9 Plug and seat, stainless steel 316. Single seated metal to metal design.

.10 Disc, replaceable, material to suit application.

.11 Rangeability 100:1 minimum.

.12 Provide with necessary features to operate in sequence with other valves and

adjustable throttling range as required by the sequence of operations.

.13 Valves must control with a minimum 355 kPa (50 psi) pressure.

.14 Minimum close off pressure is 690 kPa (100 psi).

.15 Valves must have Teflon packing.

.16 NPS 2 and under:

.1 Screwed National Pipe Thread (NPT) tapered female connections.

.2 Valves to ANSI Class 150, valves to bear ANSI mark.

.17 NPS 2 and larger:

.1 Flanged connections.

.2 Valves to ANSI Class 150 as indicated, valves to bear ANSI mark.

.2 Two-way ON/OFF for heating and chilled water systems

.1 Butterfly Valves NPS 3 and larger:

.2 Refer to Section 23 05 23.05 – Butterfly Valves.

.3 Combine with On/Off Actuator.

.3 3-Way Mixing Valve for DHW Secondary Side

.1 Provide with necessary features to operate in sequence with other valves and

adjustable throttling range as required by the sequence of operations.

.2 Rangeability 1000:1 with < 2 seconds positioning time.

.3 Equal percentage or linear.

.4 Temperature rated to a minimum of 100° C (212 ºF).

.5 Valves must control with a minimum 550 kPa (80 psi) pressure.




.6 CrNi steel seat/plug.

.7 Bronze body.

.8 EPDM or Teflon packing.

.9 NPS ½ to NPS 2: screwed body.

.10 Minimum close off pressure is 600 kPa (80 psi).

.11 Actuator: 24V AC/DC magnetic with spring return with valve going to closed

position when de-energized.

2.13 MODULATING STEAM TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVES

.1 Provide modulating steam temperature control valves, factory assembled and tested.

Ranging in size from NPS ½ to NPS 8.

.2 Supply is integral to the steam heating package.

.3 Valve body: cast steel

.4 Trim: stainless steel.

.5 ANSI 300 raised face flange.

.6 Equal percentage characteristics.

.7 Dropin seat required for ease or removal of valve trim.

.8 Valves with screwed seats will not be accepted.

.9 Provide series spring extended electric actuators with valves.

.10 Site convertible from fail open to fail close operation.

.11 Actuator to be selected to handle a minimum of 1.5 times the differential pressure with a

control spring range and travel to suit the valve size.

.12 Provide positioners. Electro-pneumatic positioner shall employ either a 4-20mA input

signal range.

.13 Valve position shall not be affected by varying valve differential pressure, and stem

friction.

.14 Valve hysteresis must be less than1%.

.15 Positioner to be constructed of cast aluminum with an anti-corrosive paint.

.16 Modulating temperature control valves, split-ranged and sized for minimum turn down of

10:1 based on the heat exchanger design output.

.17 Valve noise abatement. Valve noise levels not to exceed 90dB at one meter distance from

the valve. When required, a low noise trim must be employed. Valve utilizing noise trim

must meet duty requirements as specified.

.18 All valve components must be service-able by the valve supplier.

.19 Valve control to be engineered and programmed by the valve supplier.

2.14 UNIT HEATER - CONTROL VALVE C/W ACTUATOR

.1 Two ports, threaded connections, nickel plated brass, replaceable packing

gland, EPDM valve disc.




.2 Actuator: 24 V AC, NEMA I enclosure

2.15 ELECTRONIC / ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS

.1 Modulating Type Requirements:

.1 Construction: steel, cast iron, aluminum.

.2 Control signal: 0-10V DC or 4-20 mA DC input proportional with spring return

as needed by control sequence.

.3 Reversible control action required.

.4 Control end position adjustment shall be automatic by temporarily setting a Dip

switch.

.5 Control stroke characteristic shall be adjustable between Linear and Logarithmic.

.6 Positioning time (stroke time): to suit application. 30 sec maximum.

.7 Fail to normal position as indicated in equipment schedules.

.8 Scale or dial indication of actual control valve position.

.9 Size actuator to meet requirements and performance of control valve

specifications.

.10 Include a manual clutch that enables manual positioning of valves during power

failures and servicing.

.11 Upon restoration of power, actuator will automatically reposition itself without

intervention.

.12 Synchronous motor driven with minimum 750 Newtons of thrust and force

sensor safe.

.13 Available with auxiliary switches and feedback indication.

.14 Self-lubricated bearings to minimize maintenance requirements.

.15 For interior and perimeter terminal heating and cooling applications floating

control actuators are acceptable.

.16 Minimum shut-off pressure: 690 kPa (100 psi).

.2 On-Off Type Requirements:

.1 Construction: steel, cast iron, aluminum.

.2 Control signal: On/off digital output.

.3 Power requirement: 24 VAC.

.4 Fail to normal position as indicated in equipment schedules.

.5 Size actuator to meet requirements and performance of control valve

specifications.

.6 Include a manual clutch that enables manual positioning of valves during power

failures and servicing.

.7 Upon restoration of power, actuator will automatically reposition itself without

intervention.

.8 Synchronous motor driven with minimum 750 Newtons of thrust and force

sensor safe.

.9 Available with auxiliary switches and feedback indication.

.10 Self-lubricated bearings to minimize maintenance requirements.




.11 For interior and perimeter terminal heating and cooling applications floating

control actuators are acceptable.

.12 Minimum shut-off pressure: 690 kPa (100 psi).

2.16 PANELS

.1 Wall mounted enamelled steel cabinets with hinged and key-locked front door.

.2 NEMA 4 enclosure.

.3 Acrylic cover for operator terminals.

.4 Multiple panels as required to handle requirements with additional space to accommodate

25% additional capacity as required by Departmental Representative without adding

additional cabinets.

.5 Panels to be lockable with same key.

.6 Install the following equipment within the panel: controller, operator’s terminal, energy

calculators, transformers, disconnect switches, terminal blocks, wire runways and all

other power requirements.

.7 Install all wiring within the panel neatly with wire runways and terminal blocks.

.8 Typical dimensions 600mm x 600mm x 210mm with 500mm x 500mm.

2.17 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

.1 Provide an uninterruptible power supply to the panel (including all loads sub-fed from

this panel), to be installed by the Division 25 Contractor.

.2 The UPS will be supplied loose for mounting adjacent to the metering and control panel,

as indicated.

.3 The UPS is to be a double conversion online type. The system will consist of a battery

charger, static rectifier/inverter, a storage battery, static bypass switch and all required

accessories. UPS System will be rated for 120 volt, AC, single phase. Unit is to be sized

to carry the load of the metering and control panel for a period of 4 hours.

.4 UPS will include a harmonic filter to maintain the THD at 3% or less.

.5 UPS system is to provide alternative power in the case of a UPS failure. In the event of

an inverter malfunction or over current condition, the load is automatically transferred to

the AC line supply by a static transfer switch.

.6 Select the rectifier system such that the size of the inverter is minimized. The rectifier

system is required to recharge the batteries after a power failure. The static inverter

should employ the alternative power to the load until the batteries are charged to 75%.

.7 Under normal operating conditions the rectifier will supply DC power to the inverter and

also charge the battery that is floated on the DC Bus and kept fully charged. The inverter

converts battery power from DC to AC for use by the critical load.

.8 In the event of a momentary or prolonged loss of AC line power, the battery will supply

sufficient power to the inverter to maintain its output for 4 hours. Upon return of AC line

power, the rectifier will again resume feeding power to the inverter and will

simultaneously charge the battery.




.9 Rate unit for continuous output at 100% rated output current at 40°C temperature.

2.18 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS

.1 Isolation control transformer

.2 Power: Primary 120V, Secondary 24V, 100 VA

.3 CSA certified & ULC listed for ambient temperature of 38ºC.

.4 Install in panel.

2.19 POWER SWITCH W/ INDICATOR: 125V AC

.1 Toggle switch, 15A, 125VAC, Single pole, Industrial specification grade c/w stainless

steel plate & indicator

2.20 POWER RECEPTACLE: 125 V

.1 15A, 125V, 1 Phase, Duplex convenience receptacle, industrial specification grade,

surface mounted

2.21 TERMINAL & PANDUIT

.1 Terminate all points to a clearly labelled terminal strip across the bottom of the panel.

.2 Neatly arrange panduit to house all in coming wiring before the termination strip along

with all wiring between the terminal strip and the PLC or meters.

.3 Allow a 250mm x 250mm clear area inside each PLC and meter panel for remote

operating equipment to be installed by Division 25.

2.22 WIRING

.1 In accordance with Section 25 05 60 EMCS: Field Installation and Division 26.

2.23 INSTRUMENT RACKS

.1 Whenever possible, field instrumentation shall be grouped together on instrument racks

or stands. Maximum impulse tubing runs shall be 50 feet. Instrument racks shall be

constructed of angle iron or 2” pipe. Frames shall be supported as required. Unistrut and

tubing clamps shall be used as required to provide a secure installation.

2.24 TUBING SYSTEMS

.1 Instrument, control and sampling tubing runs shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1

and ISA RP 7.1.

.2 Primary impulse tubing for steam and water shall be ASTM A213 TP 304 or 316 SS, 1/2

inch X 0.065 inch wall thickness. All fittings shall be Swagelok.

.3 Pressure type instruments shall have associated isolation and test valves or two valve

isolation/test manifolds. Differential pressure type instruments shall have associated pairs

of isolation and test valves plus an equalizing valve or a three valve isolation / test/

equalizing manifold.




Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and

legible after commissioning is complete.

.2 Install field control devices in accordance with manufacturers recommended methods,

procedures and instructions.

.3 Temperature transmitters, controllers, relays: install in NEMA I enclosure or as required

for specific applications. Provide for electrolytic isolation in cases when dissimilar metals

make contact.

.4 Support field-mounted panels, transmitters and sensors on pipe stands or channel

brackets.

.5 Fire stopping: provide space for fire stopping in accordance with Section 07 84 00 -

Firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity.

.6 Electrical:

.1 Complete installation in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work

Results for Electrical.

.2 Modify existing starters to provide for EMCS as indicated in I/O Summaries and

as indicated.

.3 Refer to electrical control schematics included as part of control design

schematics on drawings and in Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements

Applications and Systems Sequences of Operation. Trace existing control wiring

installation and provide updated wiring schematics including additions, deletions

to control circuits for review by Departmental Representative before beginning

Work.

.4 Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and

number of terminations.

.5 Install communication wiring in dedicated conduit.

.1 Provide complete conduit system to link Building Controllers, field

panels and OWS(s).

.2 Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow for future

expansion capabilities specified for systems.

.3 Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%.

.4 Design drawings do not show conduit layout.

.6 Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise

indicated or unless impossible to do otherwise. Departmental Representative to

review before starting Work. Wiring in mechanical rooms, wiring in service

rooms and exposed wiring must be in conduit.

.7 Mechanical: Division 23 to:

.1 Supply and install pipe taps for control devices and wells.

.2 Install Wells and Control Valves.




3.2 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 Stabilize to ensure minimum field adjustments or calibrations.

.2 Readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application to allow for quick easy

replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.

.3 Thermowells: install for piping installations.

.1 Locate well in elbow where pipe diameter is less than well insertion length, refer

to drawing details

.2 Thermowell to restrict flow by less than 30%.

.3 Use thermal conducting paste inside wells.

3.3 PANELS

.1 Install in locations as per drawings and approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 Provide and terminate 120VAC from a dedicated circuit to designated panel power

supply terminals and out from the panel to the flow meter power supply.

.3 Arrange for conduit and tubing entry from top, bottom or either side.

.4 Wiring and tubing within panels: locate in trays or individually clipped to back of panel.

.5 Identify wiring and conduit clearly.

3.4 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SENSORS

.1 Install isolation valve and snubber on sensors between sensor and pressure source where

code allows.

.1 Protect sensing elements on steam and high temperature hot water service with

pigtail syphon between valve and sensor.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify field devices in accordance with Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.

3.6 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

.1 Manufacturer representative is responsible for verifying all field wiring and completing

terminations.

.2 Calibrate and test field devices for accuracy and performance in accordance with Section

25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout EMCS: SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS

Project No. 218225 AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

Page 1

Part 1 General


.1 The Plant Control System (PCS) is for the monitoring and management of a

Combined Heat and Power (CHP) plant and a boiler plant. The control system

will interface with packaged equipment controllers and field-installed control

devices and instrumentation.

.2 The system is to be consistent with PCSs throughout the Owner's facilities,

running the Tridium Niagara Framework.

.3 The plant control system, its associated hardware, building controllers, and

programming software is to be compatible with the Owner’s Niagara AX

Framework system. The Owner reserves right to approve or disallow the

manufacturer and model of controllers to be used.

.4 System architecture shall fully support a multi-vendor environment to integrate

third-party systems via existing protocols including, as a minimum, LonTalk,

BACnet, and Modbus.

.5 System architecture shall provide secure Web access using latest versions of

Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome browsers from

any computer on the owner's LAN, through the Niagara system.

.6 Tools that require a specific Niagara license brand to operate for post-installation

maintenance is not acceptable.

.7 The Owner’s PCS will utilize the Niagara AX Framework.

.8 The Niagara AX server will host all graphic files for the control system. All

graphics and navigation schemes for this project shall match those that are on the

existing system server.

.9 Provide all Administrator level login and passwords for engineering toolset to

Owner at first training session. The Owner shall have full licensing and full

access rights for all network management, operating system server, engineering

and programming software required for the ongoing maintenance and operation

of the PCS.

.10 Input and output for control system will include binary and analog signals, and

digital communication.

.11 Redundant programmable controllers are not required.

.12 50% Spare hardware capacity is required.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Provide control cabinets with power supplies, controllers, data switches, and

uninterruptable power supplies.

.2 Cabinets are required at two locations: P2 Boiler Room, P3 Chiller Room.

.3 Provide cabinets for user-supplied energy meters, including their power supplies.

.4 Provide data switches for all controls communication to owner-supplied equipment,

devices, and VFDs.

.5 Provide all wiring and components internal to control cabinets.




Page 2

.6 Terminate all cables, wires, and power at the PCS control cabinets provided.

.7 Program the system to provide control as described in sequences of operation.

.8 Provide graphical user interface, alarming, and trend-logging for systems incorporated by

this Work, to be incorporated into the Niagara Framework.

.9 Provide a Niagara AX station database for all equipment and devices incorporated by this

work.

.10 Provide all programming and configuration tools that are required for the new

components provided by this work.

.11 Controllers shall be KMC BAC-5900 or similar devices, approved by Owner.

.12 Owner will provide all field-devices including sensors, transmitters, actuators, and binary

switches.

.13 Owner will provide all Niagara hardware, software, and licences.

.14 Owner will provide field-cabling and communication cabling, and will terminate field-

wiring at the device-end. Field-cabling will be provided loose at control panel location,

with extra 2 m length for termination inside the panel.

1.3 GENERAL

.1 Furnish all labour, material, and equipment necessary to install, configure and

commission an expansion of the Niagara AX Framework for a complete and operating

Plant Control System (PCS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls, as shown and as described

herein. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a peer-to-peer bus

using open, industry-standard protocol (Examples: LonTalk, BACnet, Modbus).

.2 Drawings are diagrammatic only.

.3 Controllers for the devices and equipment identified in the documents, including all

components, software and applications required to meet the sequence of operation and

the design/performance intent of the systems.

.4 Provide panels, enclosures, and hardware as specified or shown, and as required by Code.

.5 Graphical user interface development must match existing graphics, tool sets, and

features.

.6 It is the contractor’s responsibility to review all of the design documents and

specifications and report any discrepancies to the owner

.7 The PCS components will be installed in control panel(s) provided under this contract.

.8 Program and set up databases, control logic, alarms, and trend-logs. Develop control

graphic displays specific to this project.

.9 Establish communication interfaces to equipment controllers.

.10 Provide control system documentation as specified.

.11 Coordinate with third -party equipment vendors as needed to establish communication to

the equipment controllers.

.12 Coordinate with wiring/cabling/electrical contractor.




Page 3

.13 Perform field check-out of the control system including loop-checks of the connected

devices.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 The Plant Control System (PCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-

alone, digital controllers, a network area controller, graphics and programming, and other

control devices for a complete system as specified herein.

.2 The installed system shall provide secure strong password access to all features, functions

and data contained in the overall PCS.

.3 The PCS will be a DDC-based control system comprised of programmable logic

controller(s), I/O modules, nodes and peripherals connected by means of physical wire or

digital serial communications.

.4 All values, setpoints, control logic, etc. will only be accessible from the HMI software.

Third party software must not be able to access the PCS database and affect any changes

to the PCS. This is to prevent malicious attacks on the PCS.

.5 The control logic developed shall allow the plant to be controlled and operated as

described in the control logic / process description document.

.6 The PCS will control and monitor various systems and devices installed in the plant,

including the engine-generators.

.7 Where a monitored process variable is used by a control loop for control of a device, the

process variable and the controller output are to be input and output by the same

controller.

.8 The control system shall be tuned to provide stable and smooth control.

.9 Power for all field devices connected is to be supplied from the control panel. Four

circuits will be provided: 1: controllers 2: data switches; 2: transmitters; 3: relays and

actuators.

.10 The PCS shall be capable of normal operation at temperature controlled such that the

ambient room temperature does not exceed 40 °C.

.11 Wire the PCS electrical components to fully meet the requirements of all applicable

electrical codes and to approval by local electrical authorities having jurisdiction.

.12 Metric references in accordance with CAN/CSA Z234.1.

.13 Provide the hardware and software needed to configure the controller.

1.5 Plant Controller

.1 Configuration must be possible:

.1 On-line, at an operator's workstation equipped with a keyboard while normal

plant control continues, and

.2 Off-line, on another computer workstation independent of the PCS, and

downloaded to the PCS later over a network interface.

.2 The controller must be capable of accepting programming or configuration updates while

remaining in operation.




Page 4

1.6 SEQUENCING

.1 Investigate existing plant control system and present existing sequence of operation.

.2 Systems are to be integrated into the existing Plant Control System.

.3 Pumps with Variable Frequency Drives

.1 The EMCS shall receive input from field-located differential pressure

transmitters.

.2 If more than one differential pressure transmitters exists, the EMCS shall control

from the smallest differential pressure set point signal.

.3 The differential pressure setpoint to be operator adjustable at the EMCS. Output

signal to be provided to the pump VFD.

.4 EMCS to monitor pump conditions as per the attached Input/output list.

.5 EMCS to provide enable/disable signal to the VFD.

.6 Duty/standby control to be provided by the EMCS. Duty selection to switch

weekly by the EMCS.

.7 In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump or VFD fault,

the EMCS shall automatically start the standby variable speed pump and

continue variable speed operation.

.8 In the event of the failure of a differential pressure sensor/transmitter signal, the

EMCS will maintain current operating pump number and speed. The EMCS shall

provide alarm for lost signal.

1.7 Alarm Notification System

.1 Utilize the alarm notification software built into the controllers and interface it with the

plant control system.

.2 Notification software functionality to include the following:

.1 Ability to create user specified notification workflow based on alarm severity,

whether or not an alarm is acknowledged, what date or time the alarm is

occurring, and other user-configurable attributes of the alarm context.

.2 Allows the user to define when to notify a person on call

.3 Able to provide notifications via email, smartphone app, SMS, or voice.

.4 Provides customizable alarm reports

.5 Operate strobe lights in Plant area.

.3 Refer to attached alarm list.

1.8 Control System Software

.1 Provide one copy of applicable controller programming software.

.2 Provide database and programming loading software.

.3 Provide a digital copy and a printed copy of the programmed logic as part of the final

documentation requirements.




Page 5

1.9 History Requirements

.1 Data shall be available for logging at frequency of at least 0.5 Hz and on change-of-

value, as selected by user.

.2 Historic data will be stored in a manner that protects the data from loss due to hardware,

software and power failures.

.3 The system will be capable of providing trend graphs of operator-selectable parameters in

real time. Such graphs will appear immediately as the data occurs, and be updated every

two seconds.

1.10 Alarms and Logging

.1 Alarms will be either detected (as binary input) or generated within the controllers.

Additionally, alarms may be generated by the Framework system.

.2 Each alarm will be notified to the operator at the operator’s workstation, where displays

are to be configured to show the alarm value.

.3 Set up alarming to be consistent with existing system.

1.11 Input/Output (I/O) Point Summary List

.1 See attached.

1.12 System Diagrams

.1 Refer to control architecture drawings included in drawing package.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION




Page 6

Part 4 ALARMS

4.1 General Process

.1 Hot water supply temperature below setpoint by 10 C

.2 Chilled water supply temperature above setpoint by 5 C

4.2 NEW Boilers B-201/205/206 (typical of each)

.1 Boiler combustion air fan fail alarm

.2 Boiler burner fail alarm

.3 Boiler controller fault

.4 Boiler hi water temp alarm

.5 Boiler low water level alarm

.6 DTI fault alarm

.7 MD-9xx draft control fail

4.3 Existing Boilers B-202/203/204 (typical of each)

.1 Boiler combustion air fan fail alarm

.2 Boiler burner fail alarm

.3 Boiler controller fault

.4 Boiler hi water temp alarm

.5 Boiler low water level alarm

.6 DTI fault alarm

.7 MD-9xx draft control fail

4.4 New CH-303

.1 Chiller fault/fail alarm

4.5 Existing CH-301,302

.1 Chiller fault/fail alarm

4.6 Hot Water Distribution Pump Controller; P-101, P-102, P-103, P-104

.1 Distribution pump system fail alarm

.2 P-101 fail alarm

.3 P-102 fail alarm

.4 P-103 fail alarm

.5 P-104 fail alarm future




Page 7

.6 Pump controller fault alarm

.7 VFD-101 fail alarm



.10 VFD-104 fail alarm future

.11 Loss of DPT-01 signal alarm

.12 Loss of DPT-02 signal alarm

4.7 NEW Boiler Circulation Pumps P-201/P-205/P-206

.1 Pump fail alarm

.2 VFD fail alarm

4.8 Existing Boiler Circulation Pumps P-202/P-203/P-204

.1 Pump fail alarm

.2 VFD fail alarm

4.9 NEW Chiller Circulation Pumps P-303/P-403

.1 Pump fail alarm

.2 VFD fail alarm

4.10 Boiler Flow Meter FE/FIT-212/252/262

.1 No flow alarm




Page 8

Part 5 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) POINTS LIST

HEATING PLANT

Point Tag Status PCS IO Type IO Standard Signal Type Hook Up Type Service From To Description

FIT-212 New Input 2 wire Process Hot Water Device PCS I/O Rack B-201 Hot Water Flow Rate



PDT-211 New Input analog 4-20 mA DC 2 wire Process Hot Water Device PCS I/O Rack P-201N PDT; signal to TBD



PT-911 New Local Input analog 4-20 mA DC 2 wire Other - Exhaust Gas Device Draft Controller for B-201 B-201 flue draft controller



TT-211 New Input analog 4-20 mA DC 3 wire Process Hot Water Device PCS I/O Rack B-201 Hot Water supply temperature

TT-911 New Input analog 4-20 mA DC 3 wire Other - Exhaust Gas Device PCS I/O Rack B-201 Exhaust Gas temperature



TT-902 New Input analog 4-20 mA DC 3 wire Other - Exhaust Gas Device PCS I/O Rack B-202 Exhaust Gas temperature

B-201-1 New Input discrete Process Hot Water Blr Cntrl Panel PCS I/O Rack Boiler circulation pump start/stop request

B-201-2 New Input discrete Process Hot Water Blr Cntrl Panel PCS I/O Rack Boiler On/Off status

B-201-3 New Output discrete Process Hot Water PCS Blr Cntrl Panel Boiler Enable/Disable

B-201-4 New Input discrete Process Hot Water Blr Cntrl Panel PCS I/O Rack Boiler alarm signal

B-201-5 New Output Digital Communication Process Hot Water PCS Boiler Master Controller Boiler outlet water setpoint tempurature

B-201-6 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler percent firing rate

B-201-7 New Output Digital Communication Process Hot Water PCS Boiler Master Controller Boiler Lead/Lag position

B-201-8 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler outlet water temperature

B-201-9 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler Hi/Lo firie hold status

B-201-10 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler exhaust NOx level

B-201-11 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler exhaust O2 level

B-201-12 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler exhaust CO level

B-201-13 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler percent efficiency

B-201-14 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler low water level alarm

B-201-15 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler combustion air fail alarm

B-201-16 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler high water temperature alarm

B-201-17 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler controller fault alarm

B-201-18 New Input Digital Communication Process Hot Water Boiler Master Controller PCS I/O Rack Boiler flame fail alarm










Page 9 B-205-7 New Output Digital Communication Process Hot Water PCS Boiler Master Controller Boiler Lead/Lag position


















B-206-7 New Output Digital Communication Process Hot Water PCS Boiler Master Controller Boiler Lead/Lag position












P-201N-1 New Input discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water P-201N MCC PCS I/O Rack B-201 Circ Pump On/Off status

P-201N-2 New Output discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water PCS I/O Rack P-201N MCC B-201 Circ Pump Start/Stop

P-201N-3 New Output discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water PCS I/O Rack P-201N MCC B-201 Circ Pump manual Start/Stop

P-201N-4 New Input discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water P-202 MCC PCS I/O Rack B-201 Circ Pump fault




P-205N-4 New Input discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water P-205N MCC PCS I/O Rack B-205 Circ Pump fault




P-206N-4 New Input discrete 2 wire Process Hot Water P-206N MCC PCS I/O Rack B-206 Circ Pump fault

MD-911-1 New Input discrete 2 wire Other - Exhaust Gas draft controller PCS I/O Rack B-201 Draft Controller Alarm



Notes:

1. PCS stands for plant control system and the NEW PCS is located in P2 Boiler Room, provided by Controls Contractor.

2. Provide communication cabling as required to link all boiler local controllers with the boiler master controller

3. Provide communication cabling between pump controller and PCS.

4. Provide communicaiton cabling between energy meters and PCS

5. Provide dedicated hardwire connection between each boiler local control panel general alarm contact and autodialer as required by TSSA for guarded plant status. This is in addition to boiler IO listed above

Regent Park Energy Inc. Section 26 05 00 252 Buildout Common Work Results - Electrical Project No. 218225 Page 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 This Section outlines generally the electrical work to be done under the Contract.

.2 Supervise, organize, co-ordinate and direct all construction operations of sub-trades and suppliers.

.3 Any work involving shut down of existing equipment or interference with plant operations shall be coordinated with and approved by the Energy Center operations prior to proceeding.

.4 Provide, install and put in continuous successful operation all equipment and appurtenances. Provide operating assistance to the Owner as described herein.

.5 In addition to constructing the works described in the Specifications and as shown on the Drawings, design, construct, maintain and, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, remove when construction is completed all temporary works and facilities required for the construction of the works.

1.2 GENERAL

.1 The work consists of but is not limited to: .1 Prepare site for construction activities. .2 Unloading, storage and installation of all equipment .3 All work required for the removal, relocation and installation of new and

existing equipment. .4 All labor, materials and equipment to install the new chiller and boilers as

described in the Specifications and Drawings. .5 Supply and install new emergency stops for existing Pumps P-101, P-102, and

P-103 and all new pumps P-104, P-201, P-205, P-206, P-303, P-403. .6 Installation of new chiller CH-303 including 1000kva step down transformer,

MV cabling and all accessories. .7 Modification to existing 13.8Kv breaker 52-F5 in 138.kv SWBD#2 including

replacement of 200:5A current transformers with 100:5A current transformers. New current transformers to be compatible with existing Eaton breakers. Apply relay settings to chiller breaker.

.8 Provide load shedding for new CH-303 from existing Mastersync control panel (Gas Drive Equipment)

.9 Installation of all new pumps, VFD’s and all accessories

.10 Installation of new SSF-400 including all accessories

.11 Installation of new boilers B-201, B-205 and B-206 including all accessories

.12 Supply and installation of new fusible disconnects and starters in the existing MCC’s including re-configuration of existing starters if required to make space for larger units.

.13 Supply and installation of additional lighting.

.14 Repair of all openings in existing structure as a result of removal of existing equipment.

.15 Disposal of all removed materials off-site.


.16 Provide assistance to start-up and commissioning agents for new generator, switchgear including all accessories.

.17 Systematic checkout to verify all electrical devices operate correctly with power applied.

1.3 WORK TO BE DONE

.1 The work to be done shall include: .1 Cleaning up on completion. .2 Furnishing of materials, equipment, tools, implements and labor. .3 Constructing the complete works as specified herein. .4 Placing the equipment supplied under this Contract into successful continuous

operation. .5 Performance testing of all equipment supplied under this Contract. .6 Demolishing and disposal of surplus materials.

1.4 WORK TO CONFORM

.1 All work shall be built in a thoroughly substantial and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Specifications, subject to such modifications and additions as may be deemed necessary during its execution. In no case shall any work in excess of the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings be paid for unless approved in writing.

1.5 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International): .1 CSA C22.1-16 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (24th Edition), Safety

Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN3-C235-83, Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V.

.2 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC): .1 EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.

.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code Product Line (NESC): .1 IEEE SP1122-2000, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards

Terms, 7th Edition.

.4 Ontario Electrical Safety Code (latest edition).

1.6 DEFINITIONS

.1 Electrical and electronic terms: unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in these specifications, and on drawings, are those defined by IEEE SP1122.


.1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235.

.2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard:


.1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.

.3 Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates and labels for control items in English.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submittals: Submit all shop drawings for review by the Engineer/Owner.

.2 Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS for all Hazardous Materials.

.3 Single line electrical diagrams shall be in glazed frames and locate in: .1 Electrical distribution system in main electrical rooms and .2 Electrical power generation and distribution systems in power plant rooms.

.4 Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings and where required stamped and signed by professional

engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario Canada. .2 Submit wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure co-ordinated installation.

.3 Identify on wiring diagrams circuit terminals and indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and interconnection between each item of equipment.

.4 Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

.5 Submit one copy of drawings and product data to Engineer.

.6 If changes are required, notify Engineer of these changes before they are made.

.5 Quality Control: .1 Provide CSA certified equipment and material. Where CSA certified

equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to inspection authorities for special approval before delivery to site.

.2 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.

.3 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract.

.4 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 - LOAD BALANCE.

.5 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Engineer.

.6 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Engineer manufacturer's written report, within 5 days of review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical system and instrumentation testing , as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.



.1 Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification: .1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under

direct supervision of qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks.

.2 Site Meetings: .1 Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Field Services described in Part 3 -

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work

is complete but before installation begins. .2 Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.

.3 Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 30 - Health & Safety Requirements.


.1 Material Delivery Schedule: provide Engineer with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract.

.2 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.

1.11 SYSTEM STARTUP

.1 Instruct Owner’s Representative and operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components.

.2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant will aspects of its care and operation.

1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.

.2 Operating instructions to include following:


.1 Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.

.2 Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

.3 Safety precautions.

.4 Procedures to be followed in event of equipment failure.

.5 Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.

.3 Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.

.4 Post instructions where directed.

.5 For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures.

.6 Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide material and equipment in accordance with Product Requirements.

.2 Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and equipment are not available, obtain special approval from inspection authorities before delivery to site and submit such approval.

.3 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

.1 Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and controls, as indicated.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS

.1 Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction or inspection authorities or Owner’s Representative and Engineer.

.2 Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.

2.4 WIRING TERMINATIONS

.1 Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:


.1 Nameplates: lamicoid 3 mm matt white finish face, black core, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core mechanically attached with self tapping screws.

.2 Sizes as follows:

NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm 1 line 3 mm high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm 1 line 5 mm high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm 2 lines 3 mm high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm 1 line 8 mm high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm 2 lines 5 mm high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm 1 line 12 mm high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm 2 lines 6 mm high letters

.2 Labels: embossed plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise.

.3 Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Owner’s Representative and Engineer prior to manufacture.

.4 Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and label.

.5 Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.

.6 Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.

.7 Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.

.8 Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages.

2.6 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, numbered coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

.3 Colour coding: to CSA C22.1.

.4 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

2.7 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.

.2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 5 m intervals.

.3 Colours: 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour:


2.8 FINISHES

.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel: .1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1. .2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC

2Y-1 or ASA-61.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.1 and No. 7 except where specified otherwise.

3.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

.1 Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed.

3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION

.1 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete: .1 Sleeves through concrete: plastic, sized for free passage of conduit, and

protruding 50 mm.

.2 If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation.

.3 Install cables, conduits and fittings embedded or plastered over, close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum.

3.4 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

.1 Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

Prime Auxiliary up to 250 V Yellow up to 600 V Yellow Green up to 5 kV Yellow Blue up to 15 kV Yellow Red Telephone Green Other Communication Systems Green Blue Fire Alarm Red Emergency Voice Red Blue Other Security Systems Red Yellow


.2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes.

.3 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation.

.4 Locate light switches on latch side of doors.

3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

.2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise: .1 Local switches: 1400 mm. .2 Wall receptacles:

.1 General: 450 mm.

.2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm.

.3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm.

.4 In mechanical rooms: 1400 mm. .3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated. .4 Telephone and data/computer outlets: 450 mm or as indicated. .5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1500 mm. .6 Fire alarm stations: 1500 mm. .7 Fire alarm bells: 2100 mm.

3.6 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

.1 The scope of the work under this item shall include all devices and equipment supplied and installed under this contract including contractor purchased equipment and equipment pre-purchased by the Owner or supplied by others as part of the work.

.2 The Contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing firm to set all protective devices and test all breakers per the protective device co-ordination studies as required. Signed testing reports shall be provided for all devices.

.3 The testing firm shall evaluate the adequacy of all equipment including but not limited to power circuit breakers, load interrupter switches, molded case breakers, automatic transfer switches and fuses. Any areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be reported to the Engineer.

.4 Protective device settings will be provided by the Engineer. The protective device co-ordination study shall select the final fuse sizing, protective relay characteristics and settings. The object of the study is to obtain optimum protective and co-ordination performance for these devices. The phase and ground overcurrent protection, protective relay settings, and utility interface protections shall be included.



.1 The scope of the work under this item shall include all devices and equipment supplied and installed under this contract including contractor purchased equipment and equipment pre-purchased by the Owner or supplied by others.

.2 The Contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing firm for the purposes of protective device testing and inspections. The testing firm shall be experienced with this type of project and selection is subject to the approval of the Owner.

Included are visual and mechanical testing of all equipment to insure that the equipment has been installed per the manufacturer’s specifications, the meggering and high-potential testing of cables and equipment, any adjustments to the equipment in the field application of the final relay settings and testing of all relays during commissioning.

.3 Load Balance: .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting)

operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes.

.2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.

.3 Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS: phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

.4 Testing shall include all contractor purchased equipment, Owner Pre-purchased equipment or equipment supplied by others as part of this work:


.1 Power generation and distribution systems including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.

.2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.

.3 Lighting and its control.

.4 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable.

.5 Systems: fire alarm system and communications.

.6 Insulation resistance testing: .1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V

instrument. .2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V

instrument. .3 Check resistance to ground before energizing. .4 Check potential difference between ground and neutral. Potential

difference between ground and neutral shall not exceed 2V.

.5 The testing firm shall maintain written records of all tests, calibrations and settings and upon completion of the project, assemble and certify final test reports. Submit six (6) copies of all test reports to the engineer.

.6 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.

.7 Carry out tests in presence of Owner’s Representative or Engineer.

.8 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

.9 Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in

handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.


.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

3.8 CLEANING

.1 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.

.2 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.


END OF SECTION


252 Buildout POWER CABLE AND OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS (1001 V)


□

Part 1 General


.1 Section 26 05 00 Common Works Electrical

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131- M89(R1994) , Type TECK90 Cable.

.2 CAN/CSA-C49.1- M87(R1993) , Round Wire, Concentric Lay, Overhead

Electrical Conductors.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers= Association (NEMA)/Insulated Cable Engineers

Association (ICEA)

.1 NEMA WC3- 1992 /ICEA S-19-81, Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

.2 NEMA WC7- 1992 /ICEA S-66-524, Cross-Linked Polyethylene Wire and Cable

for Transmission and Distribution.


.1 Separate and recylce waste materials in accordance with Construction/Demolition Waste

Management And Disposal, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.

.2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

.3 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

Part 2 Products

2.1 RUBBER INSULATED CABLES 1001 - 5000 V

.1 Conductors: copper size as indicated.

.2 Insulation: cross-linked polyethylene compound rated R90 RW90 RL90 RWU90 .

.3 Insulation shielding: semi-conducting non-metallic tape over insulation, and served wire

shield over tape.

.4 Cable jacket: thermosetting with separator tape between shield and jacket.

2.2 TECK POWER CABLE 1001 - 15000 V

.1 Cable: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131 .

.2 Bare copper grounding conductor, size as indicated.


252 Buildout POWER CABLE AND OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS (1001 V)


□

.3 Copper circuit conductors, size and number as indicated.

.4 Strand shielding

.5 Insulation: chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene rated RW90 5 to NEMA

WC7-1992/ICEAS-66-524.

.6 Insulation shielding: semi-conducting non-metallic tape over insulation and served wire

shield over tape to NEMA WC3-1992/ICEAS-19-81.

.7 Separator tape over conductor assembly.

.8 Inner jacket of PVC.

.9 Interlocked aluminum steel armour.

.10 Overall PVC jacket rated minus 40C.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install primary cables in conduit or trays .

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Wire and Box Connectors 0 – 1000 V


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International):

.1 CAN/CSA-C22.2No.18-98, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and

Associated Hardware.

.2 CSA C22.2 No.65-03, Wire Connectors.

.2 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC):

.1 EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters

(1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

.3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).


.1 Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling

facilities.

.2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, and corrugated

cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance

with Waste Management Plan.

.3 Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved

by Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Pressure type wire connectors to: CSA C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts of

copper alloy sized to fit copper conductors as required.

.2 Fixture type splicing connectors to: CSA C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts

of copper or copper alloy sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.

.3 Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:

.1 Connector body and stud clamp for stranded round copper conductors or

bar.

.2 Clamp for stranded round copper conductors or bar.

.3 Stud clamp bolts.

.4 Bolts for copper conductors or bar.

.5 Sized for conductors or bars as indicated.

.4 Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, and flexible conduit, as required to:

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.


252 Buildout Wire and Box Connectors 0 – 1000 V


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:

.1 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with

appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation

shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

.2 Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.

.3 Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Wires and Cables (0 – 1000 V)


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000 V.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA C22.2 No .0.3-01 R2005, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

.2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-M89 (R2007), Type TECK 90 Cable.

1.3 PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials.

.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in

accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.3 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRES

.1 Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG.

.2 Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V or 1000V insulation of chemically

cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material rated RW 90 or RWU 90.

.3 Use RW90 for building installations in above ground applications.

.4 Use RWU90 for grade slab in embedded conduits systems or for underground

installations.

.5 Neutral supported cable: 3 phase insulated conductors of aluminium and one neutral

conductor of aluminium steel reinforced, size as indicated. Insulation: Type NSF-2

flame retardant rated 600 V.

2.2 TECK CABLE

.1 Cable: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131.

.2 Conductors:

.1 Grounding conductor: copper.

.2 Circuit conductors: copper, size and number as indicated.




.3 Insulation:

.1 Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene rated type RW90, 600 V.

.4 Inner jacket: polyvinyl chloride material.

.5 Armour: interlocking galvanized steel.

.6 Overall covering: polyvinyl chloride material.

.7 Fastenings:

.1 One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 50 mm and smaller. Two hole

steel straps for cables larger than 50 mm.

.2 Channel type supports for two or more cables at 300 mm centers.

.3 Threaded rods: 6 mm dia. to support suspended channels.

.8 Connectors:

.1 Watertight, approved for TECK cable.

.2 Explosion proof for hazardous locations, approved for TECK cable.

2.3 ARMOURED CABLES

.1 Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated.

.2 Type: AC90.

.3 Armour: interlocking type fabricated from galvanized steel strip.

2.4 CONTROL CABLES

.1 Low energy 300 V control cable: stranded annealed copper conductors sized as

indicated, with PVC insulation type polyethylene insulation with shielding of

metallized tapes over each pair and over all conductors and overall covering of PVC

jackets interlocked armour of flat galvanized steel.

.2 600 V type: stranded annealed copper conductors, sizes as indicated with

cross-linked polyethylene type RW90 (x-link).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES

.1 Install wiring as follows:

.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 34.

.2 In underground ducts in accordance with Section 26 05 44.




3.2 INSTALLATION OF TECK CABLE 0 -1000 V

.1 Install cables:

.1 Group cables wherever possible on channels.

.2 In cabletrays in accordance with Section 26 05 36.

.2 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors -

0 - 1000 V.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES

.1 Group cables wherever possible.

.2 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors -

0 - 1000 V.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL CABLES

.1 Install control cables in conduit.

.2 Ground control cable shield at one end only.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Grounding - Secondary


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers (IEEE):

.1 ANSI/IEEE 837-2002, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in

Substation Grounding.

.2 Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International).

.3 CAN/CSA Z32-2009, Electrical Safety and Essential Electrical Systems in Health

Care Facilities.



.2 Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling

facilities.

.3 Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard

packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with

Waste Management Plan.

.4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved

by Engineer.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required to electrically conductive

underground water pipe.

.2 Copper conductor: minimum 6 m long for each concrete encased electrode, bare,

stranded, soft annealed, size as indicated.

.3 Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 19 mm dia. by 3 m long.

.4 Plate electrodes: copper, surface area 0.2 m2, 1.6 mm thick.

.5 Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated.

.6 Insulated grounding conductors: green.




.7 Ground bus: copper, size as indicated, complete with insulated supports, fastenings,

connectors.

.8 Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as

indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:

.1 Grounding and bonding bushings.

.2 Protective type clamps.

.3 Bolted type conductor connectors.

.4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors.

.5 Bonding jumpers, straps.

.6 Pressure wire connectors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL

.1 Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes,

conductors, connectors, accessories. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in

conduit.

.2 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

.4 Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water main, electrodes,

using copper welding by thermit process or permanent mechanical connectors or

inspectable wrought copper compression connectors to ANSI/IEEE 837.

.5 Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with

lugs.

.6 Soldered joints not permitted.

.7 Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both one ends to grounding

bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire

to exterior of flexible conduit.

.8 Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints, where such bonding is

not inherently provided with equipment.

.9 Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards.

.10 Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to

steel.

.11 Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections

terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections.

.12 Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at supply end, and

provide non-metallic entry plate at load end.

.13 Ground secondary service pedestals.




3.2 SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING

.1 Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral of secondary 600 V

system.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

.1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily

limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems,

frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work,

generators, elevators and escalators, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.

.2 All grounding and bonding shall meet the requirements of Section 10 of the Ontario

Electrical Safety Code.

3.4 GROUNDING BUS

.1 Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports on wall of electrical

room.

.2 Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical room to ground bus with

individual bare stranded copper connections size 2/0AWG unless noted otherwise.

3.5 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

.1 Install grounding connections for telephone, sound, fire alarm, intercommunication

systems as follows:

.1 Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance with

telephone company's requirements.

.2 Sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as indicated.


.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for

Electrical.

.2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site

conditions and to approval of Engineer and local authority having jurisdiction over

installation.

.3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system.

.4 Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests as required.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Hangers and Supports


□

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Construction Demolition Waste

Management and Disposal.

.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with

Waste Management Plan.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS

.1 U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted on walls and ceilings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Secure equipment to solid masonry with lead anchors or nylon shields.

.2 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

.3 Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

.4 Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure

that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before

installation.

.5 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed

as accessories to basic channel members.

.6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps:

.1 One-hole malleable iron steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and

smaller.

.2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.

.3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

.7 Suspended support systems:

.1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia. threaded rods and spring

clips.

.2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia. threaded

rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.

.8 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 2.5 m on centre spacing.

.9 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where

indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.


252 Buildout Hangers and Supports


□

.10 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there

is no wall support.

.11 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.

.12 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except

with permission of other trade and approval of Engineer Consultant.

.13 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits,

and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Electrical Code (latest edition).



.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in

accordance with Waste Management Plan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL

.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

.2 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

.4 Provide weatherproof covers in process areas and outdoors. Covers to be extra deep

to facilitate closure of cover with cord plugged in.

.5 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

.6 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are

grouped.

.7 Stainless steel or PVC boxes and fittings in process areas or outdoors.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES

.1 Stainless steel or PVC single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush

installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm square outlet

boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings

as required.

.2 Stainless steel or PVC utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT

conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm.

.3 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.

.4 102 mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting

devices in finished plaster tile walls.




2.3 MASONRY BOXES

.1 Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush

mounted in exposed block walls.

2.4 CONCRETE BOXES

.1 Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with

matching extension and plaster rings as required.

2.5 FLOOR BOXES

.1 Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing

rings to suit floor finish with brass brushed aluminum faceplate. Device mounting

plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex single receptacles. Minimum depth:

28 mm for receptacles; 73 mm for communication equipment.

.2 Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and

tapped for 12 mm and 19 mm conduit. Minimum size: 73 mm deep.

2.6 CONDUIT BOXES

.1 Cast FS boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of

switches and receptacle. Use non-metallic boxes in corrosive areas.

.2 Explosion proof boxes in hazardous areas as required by the Canadian Electrical

Code.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES FOR NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE

.1 Electro-galvanized, sectional, screw ganging steel boxes, minimum size 76 x 50 x

63 mm with two double clamps to take non-metallic sheathed cables.

2.8 FITTINGS - GENERAL

.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

.5 Stainless steel or PVC in process areas or outdoors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.




.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry

of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

.3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to

permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.




.4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and

armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Cable Trays for Electrical Systems


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results – For Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.126.1-02, Metal Cable Tray Systems.

.2 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.126.2-02, Non Metallic Cable Tray Systems.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

.1 NEMA FG 1-1993, Fibreglass and Cable Tray Systems.

.2 NEMA VE 1-2002, Metal Cable Tray Systems.

.3 NEMA VE 2-2001, Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data: submit manufacturer's product data sheets for cable tray indicating

dimensions, materials, and finishes, including classifications and certifications.

.3 Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings showing materials, finish, dimensions,

accessories, layout, and installation details.

.4 Identify types of cabletrays used.

.5 Show actual cabletray installation details and suspension system.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74

21 – Construction Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLETROUGH

.1 Cabletrays and fittings: to NEMA and CAN/CSA C22.1 No. 126.1 126.2.

.2 Ladder or Ventilated type, Class C1 D1 E to CAN/CSA C22.2 No.126.1 and 126.2.

.3 Trays: aluminum, 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 mm wide with depth of 100 or 150 mm.

.4 Fittings: aluminum horizontal elbows, end plates, drop outs, vertical risers and

drops, tees, wyes, expansion joints and reducers where required, manufactured

accessories for cabletrough supplied:


252 Buildout Cable Trays for Electrical Systems


.1 Radii on fittings: 900 mm minimum.

.5 Solid covers for complete cabletray system including fittings.

.6 Barriers where different voltage systems are in same cabletrough.

.7 Ground cable trays with #2 AWG bare copper conductor attached to each tray

section in accordance with CEC requirements.

.8 Provide fire stop material at firewall penetrations.

2.2 SUPPORTS

.1 Provide splices, supports for a continuously grounded system as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install complete cable tray system with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Support cable tray on both sides.

.3 Remove sharp burrs or projections to prevent damage to cables or injury to

personnel.

3.2 CABLES IN CABLETROUGH

.1 Install cables individually.

.2 Lay cables into cable tray. Use rollers when necessary to pull cables.

.3 Secure cables in cable tray at 2 m centres, with nylon ties.

.4 Identify cables every 30 m with size 2 nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05

00.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Moulded Case Circuit Breakers


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Supply and Install materials for moulded-case circuit breakers, circuit breakers, and

ground-fault circuit-interrupters into existing 600V Motor Control Center at facility.


.1 Section 26 05 00 – Common Works Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CSA-C22.2 No. 5-02, Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches

and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (Tri-national standard with UL 489, tenth edition,

and the second edition of NMX-J-266-ANCE).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Submittal Procedures.

.2 Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers.


.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.

.2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, and corrugated cardboard

packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BREAKERS GENERAL

.1 Moulded-case circuit breakers, Circuit breakers, and Ground-fault circuit-interrupters: to

CSA C22.2 No. 5.

.2 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and

automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient.

.3 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.

.4 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of

current reaches setting:

.1 Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current

rating.

.5 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.

.6 Circuit breakers to have minimum 18KA for lighting panel boards and 25 KA

switchboards and motor control centers symmetrical rms interrupting capacity rating.


252 Buildout Moulded Case Circuit Breakers


2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS DESIGN A

.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic

tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for

short circuit protection.

2.3 CURRENT LIMITING AND SERIES RATED THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS

[DESIGN C]

.1 Thermal magnetic breakers with current limiters:

.1 Time current limiting characteristics of fuses limiters coordinated with time

current tripping characteristics of circuit breaker.

.2 Co-ordination to result in interruption by breaker of fault-level currents up to

interrupting capacity of breaker.

.2 Series rated breakers to be manufacturer tested and listed. Breakers to be applied

following manufacturer's guidelines and accepted best practice:

.1 Breakers applied following manufacturer's guidelines and accepted best practice.

2.4 SOLID STATE TRIP BREAKERS [DESIGN D]

.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate by means of solid-state trip unit with associated

current monitors and self-powered shunt trip to provide inverse time current trip under

overload condition, and long time, short time, instantaneous tripping for phase and ground

fault short circuit protection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install circuit breakers.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Centre Section 26 28 23 Boiler Chiller Addition Disconnect Switches – Fused and Non-Fused Project No. 218225 Page 1

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for fused and non-fused disconnect switches.



1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.4-04), Enclosed Switches.

.2 CSA C22.2 No.39-M89 (R2003), Fuseholder Assemblies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data for all disconnect switches for review.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Construction Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

.2 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

.1 Fusible and Non-fusible, horsepower rated disconnect switch in CSA enclosures, size as indicated

.2 Enclosure 12 indoor, NEMA 4X outdoor, to CAN/CSA C22.2, size as indicated.

.3 Provision for padlocking in off switch position by three locks.

.4 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.

.5 Quick-make, quick-break action.

.6 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.

.7 Provide auxiliary contacts were required. Refer to schematics.

Regent Park Energy Centre Section 26 28 23 Boiler Chiller Addition Disconnect Switches – Fused and Non-Fused Project No. 218225 Page 2

2.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

.2 Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.

END OF SECTION


252 Buildout Control Devices


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Materials and installation for industrial control devices including pushbutton stations,

control and relay panels.



1.3 REFERENCES


.1 CSA C22.2 No.14-05, Industrial Control Equipment.

.2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

.1 NEMA ICS 1-2000 (R2005), Industrial Control and Systems: General

Requirements.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings include schematic, wiring, interconnection diagrams.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AC CONTROL RELAYS

.1 Control Relays: to CSA C22.2 No.14.

.2 Convertible contact type: contacts field convertible from NO to NC, electrically held.

Coil rating: 120 V. Contact rating: 120 V, 10 A or as indicated.

.3 Fixed contact plug-in type: heavy duty with 4 poles. Coil rating: 120 V. Contact rating:

120 V, 10 A or as indicated.

.4 Approved Manufacturers:

- Allen Bradley

- Square-D

or approved equal

2.2 RELAY ACCESSORIES

.1 Standard contact cartridges: normally-open - convertible to normally-closed in field.

2.3 OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS

.1 Enclosure: CSA NEMA 12 indoor or NEMA 4X outdoor, surface mounting.

2.4 PUSHBUTTONS

.1 Heavy duty, oil tight. Operator, as indicated. Green, with 1-NO and 1-NC contacts

rated at 10 A, AC, labels as indicated. Stop pushbuttons coloured red, labelled

"emergency stop".





- Allen Bradley

- Square-D

or approved equal

2.5 SELECTOR SWITCHES

.1 Maintained or Spring return as indicated heavy duty oil tight, operators standard,

contact arrangement as indicated, rated 120 V, 10 A, AC.


- Allen Bradley

- Square-D

or approved equal

2.6 INDICATING LIGHTS

.1 Heavy duty Oil tight, LED type, push-to-test, lens colour: as indicated, supply voltage:

120 V, labels as indicated.


- Allen Bradley

- Square-D

or approved equal

2.7 EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTONS

.1 AB 800T-1TZY c/w 800T-D6JA jumbo mushroom pushbutton and extended guard

ring.

.2 Approved Equal.

2.8 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

.1 CSA Type 12 sheet steel or Type 4X SS enclosure with hinged padlockable access

door, accommodating relays timers, labels, as indicated, factory installed and wired to

identified terminals.


- Allen Bradley

- Square-D

or approved equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install pushbutton stations, control and relay panels, control devices and interconnect.

.2 Contractor to modify the existing SCADA control panel. Programming will be done by

others.


.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for

Electrical.




.2 Depending upon magnitude and complexity, divide control system into convenient

sections, energize one section at time and check out operation of section.

.3 Upon completion of sectional test, undertake group testing.

.4 Check out complete system for operational sequencing.

END OF SECTION

Regent Park Energy Inc Section 40 02 40

252 Buildout VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 INTENT OF SECTION

.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, supervision of installation and commissioning of

variable frequency drives and accessories.

.2 The Contractor is responsible for overall coordination of the variable frequency drives.



1.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS

.1 The following site operating conditions must be assumed for all design calculations:

.1 40 deg.C maximum.

.2 Elevation above sea level – 75m.

.3 Voltage 600/347V.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings for review. The shop drawing submission shall include, but shall not

be limited to, the following:

.1 Complete outline dimensions and equipment weights, including location of

connections.

.2 Floor anchoring dimensions.

.3 Schematic and Wiring drawings.

.4 Initial Parameter Settings

.5 Installation and commissioning instructions.

.6 List of recommended spare parts.

.7 Co-ordination curve for main over-current protection devices.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Sine-coded pulse width modulated adjustable frequency drive for speed control of motors

and pumps specified for variable speed operation.

.2 Motor information

.1 Refer to drawings for horsepower and speed.

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FUNCTION

.1 Include the following as factory-engineered features. Using third party “add-ons” is not

acceptable:

.1 NEMA 1A enclosure.

.2 Main 600V disconnect, interlocked with enclosure door, with fuses.

.3 Line side reactor – 3%.

.4 4-20mA galvanically isolated input for remote speed command.

.5 115V AC/24Vdc discrete input for remote run command.

.6 Programmable voltage free status contact outputs rated 120V at 2A (minimum)

configured for:

.1 Drive running.

.2 Drive in remote.

.3 Drive in local.

.4 Drive tripped/faulted.

.7 Isolated 4-20mA output, proportional to motor load.

.8 Automatic reset following input power interruption.

.9 Critical frequency avoidance with three programmable jump frequencies.

.2 Provide the following protective features:

.1 Drive Enable Input

.2 Drive over-temperature fault.

.3 Electronic motor protection.

.4 “Safe-Torque-Off” option

.5 Remote emergency stop.

.3 The following programmable parameters shall be provided:

.1 Acceleration time.

.2 Deceleration time.

.3 Minimum and maximum frequency limits.

.4 IR compensation.

.5 Voltage boost.

.6 Stall protection.




.4 The following door mounted operator controls shall be provided:

.1 Local start push button.

.2 Local stop push button.

.3 Running Pilot Light (Green)

.4 Drive Faulted Pilot Light (Amber)

.5 Local/remote switch.

.6 Reset pushbutton.

.7 Emergency stop (field mounted)

.8 Refer to control drawings for additional control requirements.

.5 A digital display capable of displaying the following parameters shall be provided:

.1 Motor load.

.2 Output frequency.

.3 Frequency reference.

.4 Output voltage

.5 Fault and alarm status.

.6 Programming of adjustable drive parameters shall be by means of the local door mounted

control panel (HIM) and laptop computer through USB port. Provide one copy of drive

configuration software and any required USB cables and drivers.

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

.1 Minimum efficiency of 94% over entire speed range.

.2 Input power factor of 95% or greater over entire speed range.

.3 The drive shall have the follow protection:

.1 Withstand 5000V peak, 120 joules line transient.

.2 Withstand 2000V showering arc without damage of false operation.

.3 Withstand bolted phase or ground fault on output terminals without damage.

.4 Total harmonic distortion not more than 3% through the 25th harmonic as per IEEE-519-

1992.

2.4 WARRANTY

.1 The variable frequency drives shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and

materials for 1 year from the date of installation.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Equipment shall be supplied from the following acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 Schneider

.2 Danfoss

.3 Nidec

.4 Approve equal




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND INSPECTION

.1 The variable frequency drive equipment shall be installed as indicated on the Contract

Drawings, in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the

Engineer.

.2 Provide the services of a factory trained representative to inspect, operate, test, adjust, and

troubleshoot the installation.

.3 The factory trained representative, mentioned above, will certify that the equipment is ready

for operation before use. In addition, the factory trained representative shall instruct the

Region’s operation personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment

supplied.

.5 Arrange with the Engineer a mutually agreeable date when the representative should be on

site.

.6 Submit a report, signed by the Manufacturer’s representative, describing in detail the

inspections, tests, and adjustments made, quantitative results and suggestions for precautions

to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report must verify that the equipment

conforms to all specifications.

.8 Completeness of installation as specified and as recommended by the Manufacturer.

.9 Correctness of setting, alignment and relative arrangement of various parts of the systems.




3.2 MECHANICAL TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

.1 After start up and prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall conduct Engineer witnessed

performance tests on the equipment.

.2 The field service representative will cause the variable frequency drive equipment to

perform all mechanical functions that it has been designed to perform. Tests will be

scheduled with the Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to the planned test date.

.3 The field service representative shall submit to the Engineer a written report stating that the

equipment has been checked and is suitable for operation.

3.3 COMMISSIONING

.1 Test and commission the equipment.

.2 In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Engineer. Do not proceed with

installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

.3 The Contractor shall make all the necessary connections for the variable frequency drives

and all necessary supports, bolts and equipment auxiliaries shall be included and provided

for a complete installation in accordance with best practices in the field.

.4 At the completion of satisfactory installation, the variable frequency drive shall be started by

the General Contractor under the supervision of the Supplier. All controls and alarms shall

be checked and tested to ensure proper control and equipment protection.

.5 Equipment shall only be accepted after receipt of a satisfactory report submitted by the

Manufacturer’s representatives.

.6 Modify or replace equipment or materials failing required tests.

.7 Perform additional testing required due to changes of materials and/or failure of materials or

construction to meet specifications at no extra cost to the Owner.

3.4 STORAGE

.1 Prior to their installation, the variable frequency drives and all accessories should be

protected and stored indoors in a dry area, in accordance with the Manufacturers

recommendations.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide maintenance on Supplier’s material as required by the Supplier from the date of

delivery to the initial start up.

END OF SECTION